Mitsubishi-Outlander 2017 EN US 886ecff30d PDF

OWNER’S MANUAL
Outlander
/ 2017
Outlander / 2017 OWNER’S MANUAL
BK0239700US.book 1 ページ２０１６年６月１６日　木曜日　午前１０時５８分
Table of contents
Overview 1
Quick index 2
General information 3
Seat and restraint systems 4
Features and controls 5
Driving safety 6
Comfort controls 7
For emergencies 8
Vehicle care and maintenance 9
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10
Specifications 11
Alphabetical index 12
Instruments and controls
1 Instruments and controls

N00100202762
Combination headlights and dimmer switch P.5-220

Automatic high beam system switch Sportronic steering wheel paddle
Active stability control Multi information display (if so equipped) P.5-224 shifter (if so equipped)
(ASC) OFF switch P.5-101 switch (if so equipped) Turn signal lever P.5-230 P.5-72, 5-80
P.5-167 Front fog light switch (if so equipped) Supplemental restraint system
Headlight leveling switch P.5-231 (SRS) - airbag (for driver’s
(if so equipped) P.5-229
seat) P.4-34, 4-41
Driver’s vents P.7-2
Horn switch P.5-239
Sonar switch
(if so equipped) P.5-147
Instrument cluster
P.5-163
Driver’s vents
Forward collision mitigation P.7-2
system (FCM) and Ultra-
sonic misacceleration Miti-
gation System ON/OFF
switch (if so equipped)
P.5-122, 5-131 Engine switch (if so
equipped) P.5-18
Lane departure warning (LDW)
Fuse box P.9-25
switch (if so equipped) Windshield wiper and washer
P.5-139 Driver’s side power liftgate switch
(if so equipped) P.5-41 switch P.5-232
Rear window wiper and
Steering wheel audio remote control switches P.7-26 washer switch P.5-236
[For DISPLAY AUDIO, Smartphone Link Display Audio and
MMCS, refer to the separate owner’s manuals.]
Cruise control switch P.5-102, 5-106 Ignition switch (if so equipped)
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface P.5-240
P.5-63
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - front knee airbag
Steering wheel height and reach adjustment lever P.5-57 (for driver’s seat) P.4-41
1-1 Overview
Audio (if so equipped) P.7-14 Hazard warning flasher switch 1

Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System (MMCS) (if so equipped) P.5-231
Multi around monitor (if so equipped) P.5-154 Passenger’s airbag off indicator P.4-39
[For DISPLAY AUDIO, Smartphone Link Display Audio and MMCS,
refer to the separate owner’s manuals.]
Front passenger seat belt warning light

P.4-23
Camera switch (if so equipped)

P.5-157
Air conditioner P.7-5 Passenger’s vents
P.7-2
Electric rear window defogger switch P.5-237
Wiper deicer switch (if so equipped) P.5-237
12 V power outlet P.5-267

Hood release lever Power liftgate main switch (if so equipped)
P.9-3 P.5-40
Key slot (if so equipped)
P.5-27
Fuel tank filler door release lever Cup holder P.5-279

P.3-3
Floor console box P.5-277 Heated steering wheel Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
Arm rest switch (if so equipped) switch (if so equipped)
12 V power outlet P.5-267 P.5-239 P.5-131
USB input terminal P.5-263
Overview 1-2
1 Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag

(for front passenger’s seat)
P. 4-34, 4-41
Glove compartment P.5-276

Card holder P.5-276
Parking brake lever type Electric parking brake type

Parking brake lever P.5-53
Electric parking brake switch P.5-54
Heated seat switch
(if so equipped)
P.4-8
Brake auto hold
switch P.5-93
Selector lever Selector lever

P.5-68, 5-75 P.5-68, 5-75
Drive mode-selector
Drive mode-selector (if so equipped) P.5-83 Heated seat switch
(if so equipped) S-AWC drive mode-selector (if so equipped)
P.5-83 (if so equipped) P.5-86 P.4-8
1-3 Overview
Interior
Interior 1
N00100302457
Electric remote-controlled outside rearview mirrors switch P.5-61

Sun visors P.5-266
Vanity mirror P.5-266 Lock switch P.5-50
Card holder P.5-266
Power door lock
switch P.5-36
Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor P.4-24 Power window switch

Seat belts P.4-18 P.5-49
Dome light (rear) P.5-274
Inside rearview mirror P.5-57

Cargo room light HomeLink® Wireless Control System
P.5-275, 9-33 (if so equipped) P.5-268
Multi around monitor (if so equipped)
P.5-154
Sunglasses holder (if so equipped)

Third row seat (7 persons) P.5-279
P.4-10
Front seat P.4-4
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - side airbag

(for front seats) P.4-45
Second row seat P.4-8
Overview 1-4
Interior
1 Dome light (front)/Reading Downlight

lights P.5-273, 5-274 P.5-220
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - curtain

Bottle holder P.5-280
airbags P.4-46 Sunroof switch
Hands-free microphone (if so equipped) P.5-51
P.5-241
Assist grips P.5-283

Coat hook P.5-283
Cargo area cover (if so equipped)

P.5-281
Head restraints P.4-11
Arm rest P.4-10

Cup holder P.5-280
1-5 Overview
Luggage area
Luggage area 1
N00100501579
Jack P. 8-5
Tools P.8-5
Tether anchorages for child restraint system P.4-30
Luggage hooks
P.5-283
12 V power outlet
P.5-267
Luggage floor box P.5-277
Overview 1-6
Outside (Front)
1 Outside (Front)
N00100602694
Sensor (if so equipped) [for Forward Collision Mitigation System

Sunroof (if so equipped) P.5-51
(FCM), Lane Departure Warning System (LDW) and Automatic
Power window P.5-49
high beam system] P. 5-117, 5-139, 5-224
Rain sensor (if so equipped) P.5-232
Fuel tank filler P.3-3
Outside rearview mirrors P.5-60

Windshield wipers P.5-232 Side turn-signal lights (if so equipped)
P.5-230, 9-32, 9-36
Side-view camera (if so equipped)
Engine hood P.9-3 P.5-154
Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System (if so equipped)
P.5-127
Front-view camera (if so equipped) P.5-154
Parking sensors (if so equipped) P.5-147
Front fog lights (if so equipped) P.5-231, 9-32, 9-36
Halogen headlights type LED headlights type
Headlights, high beam Headlights, low beam Headlights, high beam Headlights, low beam
P.5-220, 9-32, 9-35 P.5-220, 9-32, 9-34 P.5-220, 9-32, 9-35 P.5-220, 9-32, 9-34
Front side-marker lights Front side-marker lights

P.5-220, 9-32, 9-35 P.5-220, 9-32, 9-35
Parking lights P.5-220, 9-32, 9-36 Parking lights P.5-220, 9-32, 9-36
Front turn signal lights Front turn-signal lights
Daytime running lights P.5-220, 9-32, Daytime running lights P.5-220, 9-32,
P.5-230, 9-32, 9-36 P.5-230, 9-32, 9-36
9-36 9-36
1-7 Overview
Outside (Rear)
Outside (Rear) 1
N00100602708
Keyless entry system (if so equipped) P.5-7, 5-30

F.A.S.T.-key (Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter) (if so equipped)
Antenna P.5-13
Locking and unlocking P.5-34
High-mounted stop light
P.9-32 Tail lights P.5-220, 9-32, 9-37 Tire P.9-15
Tire pressure monitoring system
P.5-142
Liftgate (if so equipped) P.5-38 Tire inflation pressures P.9-18
Power liftgate (if so equipped) P.5-39 Changing tires P.8-6
Tire rotation P.9-20
Tire chains P.9-21
Size of tires and wheels P.11-7
Rear window wiper
P.5-236
Rear-view camera (if so equipped)

P.5-151, 5-154
License plate lights
P.5-220, 9-32, 9-39 Rear side-marker lights P.5-220, 9-32
Stop lights P.5-220, 9-32, 9-37
Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System

(if so equipped) P.5-127 Rear turn signal lights P.5-230, 9-32, 9-37
Parking sensors (if so equipped) P.5-147
Back-up lights P.9-32, 9-38
Spare tire P.8-7
Overview 1-8
If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

2
N00200702276
NOTE
 For information regarding warning displays in the multi-information display (Color liquid crystal display type), refer to “Multi-information display” on
page 5-164.
 These warning lights will come on for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to “ON” or the operation mode is put in ON.
Warning lights Do this Ref. Page
 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assis- P. 5-217
tance.
Charging system warning light
 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine, then check the engine oil
level.
If the light comes on while the engine oil level is normal, have the system checked P. 5-218
Oil pressure warning light at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon
(Vehicles equipped with mono-color as possible.
liquid crystal display)
 If this light comes on while driving, check to see that the parking brake is fully
released.
 If this light stays on after releasing the parking brake, immediately stop and check
or the brake fluid level. P. 5-216
 If the brake fluid level is correct, there may be a system malfunction. Avoid hard
Brake warning light (red) braking and high speed, and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for assistance.
Quick index 2-1

BK0239700US.book 2 ページ２０１６年７月１日　金曜日　午後３時１５分

2  If the warning light comes on during driving, there is the possibility that the parking
brake cannot be operated or released. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place,
P. 5-216
and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
Electric parking brake warning light choice for assistance.
(yellow) (if so equipped)
 Park your vehicle in a safe place.

Selector lever position indicator in the Idle the engine until the selector lever position indicator stops flashing. P. 5-70,
instrument cluster flashes rapidly If the indicator does not go off, have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubi- 5-78
(once per second) shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.
(Vehicles equipped with mono-color
 Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, have the
or engine system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice as soon as possible. If the vehicle is not drivable, contact emergency
P. 5-217
roadside assistance at 1-888-648-7820 (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.) or 1-888-576-
Engine malfunction indicator 4878 (for vehicles sold in Canada), an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, or local
(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or towing company for assistance.
“Check engine light”)
2-2 Quick index


2
 If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may become harder to turn the
steering wheel. Have your vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors P. 5-99
Electric power steering system (EPS) dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.
warning light
 When this light comes on, the anti-lock braking system is not functioning and only
the ordinary braking system is functioning.
Test the system as described on page 5-98. P. 5-98
 If the light does not go out after the test, or if it comes on again, we recommend that
Anti-lock braking system warning you have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
light facility of your choice as soon as possible.
 Immediately have the airbag and the pre-tensioner seat belt system checked at an
P. 4-40
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
SRS warning light
Selector lever position indicator in the  Have the automatic transaxle checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or P. 5-70,
instrument cluster flashes slowly a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. 5-78
(once every 2 seconds)
Quick index 2-3


2 Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out.
 If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected
and by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon P. 5-102
as possible.
ASC indicator and ASC OFF indicator  When this indicator comes on, the active stability control is not functioning and
normal operation of the vehicle will not be affected.
Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out.
 If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon P. 5-96
as possible.
ASC indicator  When this indicator comes on, the hill start assist is not functioning.
Start off carefully on a steep uphill slope.
 If the warning light comes on, you should stop and adjust the tires to the proper
inflation pressure as soon as possible.
(See “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-18.)
Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few minutes
of driving.
P. 5-142
Tire pressure monitoring system warn-  If the warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then remains continu-
ing light ously illuminated, the system is not operating properly. If the system returns to nor-
mal, the warning light will go off. If the warning light does not go off, have the
vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
 If the warning light comes on, there may be a malfunction in the LED headlight
unit.
P. 5-223
Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
facility of your choice.
LED headlight warning light
2-4 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

2
N00200901936
Problem Do this Ref. Page

Unable to turn the key. Will not turn from “LOCK” to “ACC”. (Vehicles with steering lock system)
P. 5-65
(except for vehicles equipped Turn the key while turning the steering wheel in either direction.
with the F.A.S.T.-key)
Will not turn from “ACC” to “OFF” or “LOCK”.

Check the position of the selector lever.
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is set to the “P” (PARK) position. P. 5-64
On vehicles with steering lock system, push the key in at the “ACC” position and keep it
depressed until it is turned to the “LOCK” position.
The engine does not start when

the engine switch is pressed.
(for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key)
Make sure the F.A.S.T.-key is in the vehicle.
Make sure the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position, and then press the engine switch P. 5-25
while depressing the brake pedal.
The F.A.S.T.-key does not oper-

ate. Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot of the instrument panel, and then start the engine or P. 5-27,
(for vehicles equipped with the change the operation mode. Use the emergency key to lock and unlock the driver’s door. 5-28
F.A.S.T.-key)
Quick index 2-5


Cannot shift the selector lever Shift the selector lever while pressing the brake pedal.
2 from the “P” (PARK) position. Check that the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON.
P. 5-68
The windows are fogged up.
Push the defogger switch to change to the “ ” position. P. 7-8
The engine does not start.

The lights do not come on.
P. 8-2,
The lights are dim. Have the battery checked. Recharge or replace as needed.
9-13
The horn does not honk.
The horn sound is weak.
2-6 Quick index


The information screen in the
multi information display will 2
be interrupted and the engine
coolant temperature warning
display will appear. Also “ ”
will blink. (Type 1: Color liquid
crystal display type)
The high coolant temperature
warning light will illuminate.
(Type 2: Mono-color liquid
Type 1
The engine is overheated.
and P. 8-4
Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Type 2
Steam comes out of the engine

compartment.
Quick index 2-7


1. Slowly press down on the accelerator pedal to get your vehicle moving again. For an all-
2 wheel drive vehicle, set the drive mode-selector to the “4WD AUTO” or “4WD LOCK”
If your vehicle becomes stuck in position (Electronically controlled 4WD), “SNOW” or “LOCK” position (S-AWC) and
P. 8-15
sand, mud or snow then slowly press down on the accelerator pedal to get your vehicle moving.
2. If there is nothing to stop your tires from slipping, rock your vehicle out of the stuck posi-
tion.
WARNING
 When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, be sure that no one is near the vehicle. The rocking motion may cause the vehicle to
suddenly lurch forward or backward, possibly injuring bystanders.
 Avoid revving the engine or spinning the wheels. Prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in overheating and transaxle failure.
If the vehicle remains stuck after several rocking attempts, have a towing service pull the vehicle out.

The brakes are not functioning
P. 5-90,
properly after crossing a puddle Dry out the brakes by driving slowly while lightly pressing the brake pedal.
6-5
or stream.
The automatic transaxle makes
no gear change when accelerat-
ing. The initial movement of the There may be a problem in the automatic transaxle.
vehicle is slow when the vehicle Have the system inspected by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of P. 5-74
starts moving. your choice.
(for vehicles with automatic
transaxle)
2-8 Quick index


The continuously variable trans-
mission (CVT) makes no shift There may be a problem in the CVT.
2
change when accelerating. The
initial movement of the vehicle If the or warning lights on the multi-information display (Color liquid crystal display P. 5-81
is slow when the vehicle starts type) will not turn off, or if they come on frequently, please have the vehicle checked at your
moving. nearest Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
(for vehicles with CVT)
A tire is punctured.
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place where the surface is flat and level.
P. 8-6
2. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire.
Quick index 2-9

General information
3
Fuel selection ...................................................................................3-2
Filling the fuel tank ..........................................................................3-3
Modifications to and racing of your vehicle ....................................3-5
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts ....................................................3-7
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ...............................3-7
Fuel selection
oline to minimize fuel-injector clogging and the oxygenates may not be identified by those
Fuel selection minimize intake-valve deposits. Detergent names. Oxygenates are required in some
N00301001951
gasoline helps keep your engine in tune and areas of the country. Oxygenated fuel can be
Your vehicle is designed to use unleaded gas- your emission-control system working prop- used in your vehicle.
3 oline only. It is equipped with a fuel tank erly.
filler pipe specifically designed to accept only
a small diameter unleaded gasoline dispens-
Ethanol (Gasohol)
ing nozzle.
Octane requirement
A mixture of up to 10 % ethanol (grain alco-
hol) and 90 % unleaded gasoline may be used
WARNING 2.4 liter engine model in your vehicle, provided the octane number
 Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
is at least as high as that recommended for
sive. You could be burned, seriously
Your vehicle is designed to operate on unleaded gasoline.
injured or killed when handling it. When-
ever you refuel your vehicle, stop the unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane
engine and keep flames, sparks, and number of 87 [(MON+RON)/2] or 91 RON. Methanol
smoking materials away from the vehicle.
Always handle fuel in well-ventilated out-
3.0 liter engine model Do not operate your vehicle on gasoline con-
door areas.
taining methanol (wood alcohol). Using this
Unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane type of alcohol could adversely affect the
CAUTION number of 87 [(MON+RON)/2] or 91 RON vehicle’s performance and damage critical
 Using leaded gasoline in your vehicle will may be used, though it is recommended your parts of the vehicle’s fuel system.
damage the engine, catalytic converter, and vehicle be operated on premium grade
unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane
the oxygen sensors. Also, using leaded gaso- Reformulated gasoline
line is illegal, and will void your warranty number of 91 [(MON+RON)/2], or 95 RON.
coverage of the engine, catalytic converter, To obtain maximum performance, premium
and oxygen sensors. gasoline is recommended. Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning fuel referred to as “Reformu-
lated Gasoline”.
Oxygenated gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates
Gasoline detergent additives
and is specially blended to reduce vehicle
Gasoline sold at some service stations con- emissions and improve air quality.
In the United States, fuel suppliers are
tains oxygenates such as ethanol, although
required by law to add detergents to their gas-
3-2 General information
Filling the fuel tank

Mitsubishi Motors Corporation strongly sup- cator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or
ports the use of reformulated gasoline. Prop- “Check engine light”) to come on. Illumina-
NOTE
 Repeatedly driving short distances at low
erly blended reformulated gasoline has no tion of this indicator while using high-sulfur
speeds can cause deposits to form in the fuel
adverse effect on vehicle performance or the gasoline does not necessarily mean the vehi-
system and engine, resulting in hard starting
durability of the engine and the fuel system. cle’s emission-control system is malfunction- and poor acceleration. If these problems 3
ing. Your authorized Mitsubishi Motors occur, you are advised to add a detergent
dealer may suggest using a different, lower-
MMT (methylcyclopentadienyl additive to the gasoline when you refuel the
sulfur brand of unleaded gasoline to deter- vehicle. The additive will remove the depos-
manganese tricarbonyl) mine if the problem is fuel-related. its, thereby returning the engine to a normal
condition. Be sure to use a Mitsubishi
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic Motors Genuine cleaning additive. Using an
NOTE unsuitable additive could make an engine
additive that is blended into some gasolines  Poor-quality gasoline can cause problems malfunction. For details, please contact the
to increase the octane number. Mitsubishi such as hard starting, stalling during idling, nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Motors Corporation recommends using gaso- abnormal engine noise, and poor accelera-
lines without MMT. tion. If you experience any of these prob-
Use of gasolines blended with MMT may lems, try using a different brand of gasoline. Filling the fuel tank
adversely affect performance, and cause the If the engine malfunction indicator (“SER- N00301101965
malfunction indicator on your instrument VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine
panel to come on. If this happens, contact an light”) flashes, have the vehicle inspected as WARNING
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a soon as possible by the nearest authorized  When handling fuel, comply with the
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility safety regulations displayed by garages
of your choice. and filling stations.
 Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
Sulfur in gasoline sive. You could be burned, seriously
injured or killed when handling it. When
Your vehicle may have been designed to sat- refueling your vehicle, always turn the
isfy California’s low-emission regulations engine off and keep away from flames,
based on clean-burning low-sulfur gasoline. sparks, and smoking materials. Always
handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor
Gasoline sold in parts of the country other
areas.
than California is allowed to have a higher
sulfur content. Using such gasoline could
adversely affect the vehicle’s catalytic con-
verter and cause the engine malfunction indi-
General information 3-3
Filling the fuel tank
WARNING Refueling
 Before removing the fuel tank filler cap,
be sure to get rid of your body’s static 1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine.
electricity by touching a metal part of the 2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear
3 car or fuel pump. Any static electricity on driver side of your vehicle.
your body could create a spark that The fuel tank filler door can be opened
ignites fuel vapor. from inside the vehicle with the fuel tank
 Perform the whole refueling process filler door release lever located at the left
(opening the fuel tank filler door, remov- side of the driver’s seat.
ing the fuel cap, etc.) by yourself; do not
let any other person near the fuel tank
filler. If you allowed a person to help you 1- Remove
and that person was carrying static elec- 2- Close
tricity, fuel vapor could be ignited.
 Do not move away from the fuel tank filler
until refueling is finished. If you moved WARNING
away and did something else (for example,  Since the fuel system may be under pres-
sitting on a seat) part-way through the sure, remove the fuel tank filler cap
refueling process, you could pick up a slowly. This relieves any pressure or vac-
fresh charge of static electricity. uum that might have built up in the fuel
 Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor. Fuel tank. If the cap is venting vapor or if you
contains toxic substances. hear a hissing sound, wait until the sound
3. Open the fuel tank filler pipe by slowly
 Keep the doors and windows closed while stops before removing the cap. Otherwise,
turning the fuel tank filler cap counter- fuel may spray out, injuring you or others.
refueling the vehicle. If they were open,
fuel vapor could get into the cabin. clockwise.
Fuel tank capacity NOTE

 While filling with fuel, hang the fuel cap on
the hook (A) located on the inside surface of
All-wheel drive vehicles: 15.8 gal (60 L) the fuel tank filler door.
Front-wheel drive vehicles: 16.6 gal (63 L)

Modifications to and racing of your vehicle

6. To re-install, turn the fuel tank filler pipe
cap slowly clockwise until you hear click- Modifications to and racing
ing sounds, then gently push the fuel tank of your vehicle
filler door closed. N00301601205
This vehicle should not be modified with 3

WARNING non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts. Mit-
 Make sure the fuel tank filler cap is subishi Motors designs and manufactures
securely closed. If the fuel cap were loose, high quality vehicles with an emphasis on
fuel could leak, resulting in a fire.
safety and durability. Modifications using
non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts may
affect the performance, safety and/or durabil-
4. Fueling correctly depends mainly on cor- CAUTION ity of your vehicle, and may violate applica-
rect handling of the fuel filler nozzle. Do  If you need to replace the fuel tank filler cap, ble state and/or federal regulations.
not tilt the nozzle. Insert the nozzle in the use only the cap specified for your model
vehicle. DAMAGE OR PERFORMANCE PROB-
fuel tank filler port as far as it goes.
LEMS RESULTING FROM MODIFICA-
CAUTION NOTE TIONS TO OR RACING OF YOUR
 Your vehicle can only be operated using VEHICLE ARE NOT COVERED
 If the fuel tank filler cap is not tight while
unleaded gasoline. Serious engine and cata- UNDER WARRANTY.
driving, the engine malfunction indicator
lytic converter damage will result if leaded (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check
gasoline is filled into these vehicles, and Examples of modifications to your vehicle
engine light”) may come on when the
consequently, this must never be attempted. that can cause damage or performance prob-
onboard diagnostic (OBD) system performs
a self check. lems include the following:
5. When the nozzle stops automatically, do Always tighten the fuel tank filler cap until
you hear at least 3 clicks.
 Failure to use Mitsubishi Motors genuine
not add more fuel.
The indicator will go off after several driving parts
cycles. If the indicator does not go off, con-  Failure to use required fuel and fluids
CAUTION  Failure to use proper size tires and wheels
tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
 To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as  Modification of the fuel, intake, exhaust,
“top-off” the fuel tank. Spilled fuel could
soon as possible. emission, suspension, engine, drive train
discolor, stain, or crack the vehicle’s paint-
work. If fuel spills on the paintwork, wipe it or electrical wiring systems
off with a soft cloth.

Modifications to and racing of your vehicle

 Modification of any onboard com- Only Mitsubishi Motors approved acces-
Important point!
puter/control module, including repro- sories should be fitted to your vehicle.
gramming, or replacing/adding chips to  Improper installation of electrical parts
any onboard computer/control module could cause a fire. Refer to the “Modifica- Due to the large number of accessory and
3 tion/alterations to the electrical or fuel replacement parts provided by different man-
ufacturers in the market, it is not always pos-
Review the Warranty and Maintenance Man- systems” section within this owner’s man-
ual for further details regarding warranty cov- ual. sible for an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
erage.  Using a cellular phone or radio set inside dealer to check whether the attachment or
the vehicle without an external antenna installation of a non-Mitsubishi Motors genu-
may cause electrical system interference, ine parts affects the driving safety of your
Installation of accessories Mitsubishi-vehicle.
N00301701251
which could lead to unsafe vehicle opera-
tion.
CAUTION  Tires and wheels which do not meet spec- Modification/alterations to the
 Before any electrical or electronic accesso- ifications must not be used. electrical or fuel systems
ries are installed, consult an authorized Mit- Refer to the “Specifications” section for
N00301800141
subishi Motors dealer. information regarding wheel and tire
 Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnosis sizes. Mitsubishi Motors manufactures high quality
connector (data link connector) for checking vehicles with an emphasis on safety. It is
and servicing the electronic control system. important to consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Mitsubishi Motors does not recommend con- WARNING Motors dealer before installation of any
necting a device other than the Scan Tool for  While driving, do not use a cellular phone accessory which may involve modification of
inspections and service to this connector in a way that hinders safe driving. Any- the electrical or fuel systems.
because an unexpected problem could result. thing, including cellular phone usage, that
In addition, malfunctions caused by connect- distracts you from the safe operation of
ing a device other than the Scan Tool may your vehicle increases your risk of an acci- CAUTION
not be covered under warranty. dent.  Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Refer to and follow all state and local laws Motors dealer concerning any such acces-
in your area regarding cellular phone sory fitment or modification.
 The installation of accessories, optional usage while driving. If the wires interfere with the vehicle body or
parts, etc., should only be performed improper installation methods are used (pro-
within the limits prescribed by law, and in tective fuses not included, etc.), electronic
accordance with the guidelines and warn- devices may be adversely affected, resulting
ings contained within the documents in a fire, vehicle damage, or other accident.
accompanying this vehicle.

Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors

parts
N00301400219
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are 3

designed and manufactured to meet high stan-
dards of performance, and are recommended
for all of your maintenance needs. Also avail-
able from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer are
a wide variety of accessories to personalize
your new vehicle. Each Mitsubishi Motors
vehicle has a selection of Mitsubishi Motors
authorized accessories to choose from to tai-
lor your new vehicle to your own personal
preference. Your Mitsubishi Motors dealer’s
Parts Manager has information on various
audio systems, protection items, as well as
interior and exterior accessories available for
your specific model.
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
N00300100017
Certain components of this vehicle, such as

airbag modules, seat belt pretensioners, and
button cell batteries, may contain perchlorate
materials.
Special handling may apply. For additional
information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardous-
waste/perchlorate.

Seat and restraint systems
Seats .................................................................................................4-2 4
Seat arrangement .............................................................................4-3
Seats and restraint systems ..............................................................4-4
Front seats ........................................................................................4-4
Second row seats ..............................................................................4-8
Third row seat (Seating 7 passengers) ...........................................4-10
Head restraints ...............................................................................4-11
Making a cargo area .......................................................................4-13
Making a flat seat ...........................................................................4-16
Seat belts ........................................................................................4-18
Seat belt use during pregnancy ......................................................4-25
Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems ..........................4-25
Child restraint systems ...................................................................4-27
Maintenance and inspection of seat belts ......................................4-34
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag .............................4-34
Seats
Seats
N00408401519
 To adjust the seatback  Page 4-8

1 - Front seat  Arm rest  Page 4-10
 To adjust the seat forward or back-  Accessing the third row seat (Seating 7
wardPage 4-5 passengers)  Page 4-10
 To adjust the seat height (Driver’s seat 3 - Third row seat (Seating 7
only)  Page 4-6 passengers)
 Heated seat (if so equipped)  Page 4-8
2 - Second row seats
 To adjust the seat forward or backward
(vehicles with second row seat slide func-
tion)  Page 4-8
4-2 Seat and restraint systems

Seat arrangement
Seat arrangement
N00401701122
You may arrange your seats in the following positions.
Seating 5 passengers Seating 7 passengers

4
Ordinary use
Flat seatPage 4-16
Folding the second row

seats
Page 4-13
Making a cargo
area
Folding the third row

—
seatsPage 4-16
Seat and restraint systems 4-3

Seats and restraint systems
Seats and restraint systems WARNING WARNING

N00401601251  Do not place objects under the seats. This  After adjusting the seat, make sure that it
could prevent the seat from locking is securely locked into position.
Your vehicle has seat belts and other safety
securely, and it could lead to an accident.  To reduce the risk to the driver of serious
features that help protect you and your pas- It may also cause damage to the seat or injury or death during deployment of the
sengers in an accident. other parts.
4 Seat belts are the most important safety
driver’s airbag, always properly wear the
seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far
device. When worn properly, seat belts can back as possible while maintaining a posi-
reduce the chance of serious injury or death tion that still enables you to fully apply the
in various types of crashes. For added protec-
Front seats pedals, easily control the steering wheel,
N00401801426
tion during a severe frontal collision, your and safely operate the vehicle.
vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System Position the driver’s seat as far back as possi-  To reduce the risk to the front passenger
(SRS) with airbags for the driver and passen- ble while maintaining a position that still of serious injury or death during deploy-
gers. The seats, head restraints, and door enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily ment of the passenger’s airbag, always
locks also are safety equipment, which must control the steering wheel and safely operate properly wear the seat belt and adjust the
the vehicle. front passenger’s seat as far back as possi-
be used correctly.
ble.
Always check the following before you drive:  Always place children 12 years old and
Manual seat adjustment Power seat adjustment under in the rear seat and use appropriate
 That everyone in your vehicle is properly child restraint systems.
wearing their seat belt.
 That infants and small children are prop-
erly secured in an appropriate child CAUTION
restraint system in the rear seat.  Make sure that the seat is adjusted by an
 That all doors are fully closed and locked. adult. If it is adjusted by a child, an unex-
pected accident might occur.
 That seatbacks are upright, with head
 Do not place a cushion or the like between
restraints properly adjusted.
your back and the seatback while driving.
The effectiveness of the head restraints will
Safety equipment cannot prevent injury or be reduced in the event of an accident.
death in all motor vehicle accidents. How- WARNING  When sliding the seats, be careful not to
ever, you can help reduce the risk of injury or  Do not attempt to adjust the seat while catch your hand or leg.
death, by following the instructions in this driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con-
manual. trol and result in an accident.

Front seats
CAUTION To adjust the seat forward or Power seat adjustment

 When sliding or reclining the seat rearward, backward
pay careful attention to the second row seat N00401901326 Operate the switch forward or backward to
passengers. move the seat to the desired position. Release
 When adjusting the front seat while the sec- the switch to lock the seat in place.
Manual seat adjustment
ond row seat is folded, be careful not to
apply strong force to the flipped second row
4
seat cushion. Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the
Doing so could cause damage to the cover of seat forward or backward to the desired posi-
the front seat and the fitting of the second tion. Release the adjusting lever to lock the
row seat cushion. seat in place.
1- Forward (toward the front of the vehicle)

2- Backward (toward the rear of the vehi-
cle)
NOTE
 To prevent the battery from completely dis-
WARNING charging, operate the power seat with the
 To make sure that the seat is securely engine running.
locked, try to move it forward or back-
ward without using the adjusting lever.

Front seats
To adjust the seatbacks Power seat adjustment WARNING

N00402001379  To reduce the risk of serious injury or
Operate the switch in the direction of the death in the event of an accident or sud-
Manual seat adjustment arrows to adjust the seatback. den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
the upright position while the vehicle is in
motion.
4 To adjust the seatback, lean forward slightly, Seat belt performance during an accident
gently pull the seatback lock lever up, then can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
lean backward to a comfortable position and are reclined. The more a seatback is
release the lever. The seatback will lock in reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
place. mance will be adversely affected. If the
seat belt is not properly positioned against
the body during an accident, there is
increased risk you will slide under the belt
and receive serious injury or death.
1- Move forward
2- Move backward
To adjust the seat height
(Driver’s seat only)
N00402101253
NOTE
 To prevent the battery from completely dis- Manual seat adjustment
charging, operate the power seat with the
engine running.
CAUTION Operate the lever repeatedly to raise or lower
 The reclining mechanism used in the seat- the seat.
back is spring loaded, and will cause the
seatback to return quickly to the vertical
position when the lock lever is operated.
When pulling the lever, sit close to the seat-
back or hold the seatback with your hand to
control its return motion.

Front seats
1- Raise 1- Raise or lower the front end of the seat 3- Raise or lower the entire seat
2- Lower
Power seat adjustment
Operate the switch in the direction of the

arrows to raise or lower the seat.
NOTE
 To prevent the battery from completely dis-
charging, operate the power seat with the
engine running.
2- Raise or lower the back end of the seat

Second row seats

3 (LO) - Heater low (to keep the seat
Heated seat (if so equipped) warm)
CAUTION
N00435601463  When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine,
The heated seats can be operated by pushing kerosene, gasoline, alcohol, or other organic
the switch when the ignition switch or the WARNING solvents; doing so can cause damage not
operation mode is in ON. The indicator light  Persons who are unable to feel tempera- only to the surface of the seat, but also to the
ture change or skin pain due to age, ill- heater.
4 (A) will illuminate while the heater is on.
ness, injury, medication, alcohol use,  If water or any other liquid is spilled on the
fatigue or other physical conditions or seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before
Type 1 who have sensitive skin may suffer burns attempting to use the heater. Turn the heater
when using the heated seat even at low off immediately if it appears to be malfunc-
temperatures. To reduce the risk of burns, tioning during use.
people with such conditions must use care
when using the heated seat.
Second row seats
N00402501231
CAUTION When sitting in the middle seating position of

 Switch off the heated seats when not in use. the second row seat, adjust the head restraints
Operate the heaters at the “HI” position for to an appropriate height where they lock in
quick heating. After the seat has become
position. Refer to “Head restraints” on page
warm, set the heater switch to the “LO” posi-
Type 2
tion to keep it warm. Slight variations in the
4-11.
seat temperature may be felt while using the
heated seats. This is caused by the operation To adjust the seat forward or
of the heater’s internal thermostat and does
not indicate a malfunction. backward (vehicles with sec-
 Do not place heavy objects on the seat or ond row seat slide function)
stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects
into the seat.
Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the
 Do not place a blanket, cushion, or other
seat forward or backward to the desired posi-
insulating material on the seat while using
the heater; doing so can cause the heater ele-
tion. Release the adjusting lever to lock the
1 (HI) - Heater high (for quick heat- seat in place.
ing) ment to overheat.
2 (neutral - Heater off
position)

Second row seats
To adjust the seatbacks WARNING

 Seat belt performance during an accident
Pull the lever up and adjust the seatback by can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
are reclined. The more a seatback is
hand to the desired position, and release the
reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
lever. The seatback will lock in place.
mance will be adversely affected. If the
seat belt is not properly positioned against 4
the body during an accident, there is
increased risk you will slide under the belt
 When a person is sitting in the middle
seating position of the second row seats,
NOTE the two sides of the second seats must have
 You can adjust the seat forward or backward the same forward/backward position
on either side separately. (vehicles with second row seat slide func-
tion) and the same seatback angle.
WARNING
 To make sure that the seat is securely
locked, try to move it forward or back- NOTE
ward without using the adjusting lever.  You can adjust the seatback forward or back-
ward on either side separately.
CAUTION
 When sliding (vehicles with second row seat WARNING
slide function) or reclining the seat rearward,  To reduce the risk of serious injury or
pay careful attention to the third row seat death in the event of an accident or sud-
passengers. den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
the upright position while the vehicle is in
motion.

Third row seat (Seating 7 passengers)

To return the seat, slide the entire seat back-
Arm rest ward to the desired position and then raise the Third row seat (Seating 7
N00403001318
To use the armrest, tilt the arm rest down for

seatback until it locks securely. passengers)
After returning the seat, gently try to move it N00419501073
use as shown.
forward and backward to check that it is
The arm rest includes a cup holder. WARNING
securely retained and adjust the seatback to
4 the normal seating position.  The third row seats are intended for use
by no more than two belted occupants,
each of which does not exceed 160 cm (63
inches) in height.
Exceeding these limitations can result in
an increased risk of personal injury or
death in the event of an accident.
To adjust the seatback
Pull up the strap and adjust the seatback by

NOTE hand to the desired position, and release the
 Never sit on an arm rest. strap.
Doing so could damage the arm rest.
WARNING
 To make sure that the seat is securely
locked, try to move it forward or back-
ward without using the lever. To reduce
Accessing the third row seat the risk of serious injury or death in the
(Walk-in function, Seating 7 event of an accident or sudden stop, all
seatbacks should be kept in the upright
passengers) position while the vehicle is in motion.
N00400101031
For third row seat passenger entry or exit, the

second row seats can be moved forward.
Pull up the lever (A) and tilt the seatback for-
ward. Then slide the entire seat forward.

Head restraints
Head restraints WARNING WARNING

N00404301594  Driving without the head restraints in  When a person sits in the second center
place can cause you and your passengers seating position, pull up the head restraint
Head restraints can reduce the risk of a whip-
serious injury or death in an accident. To to a height at which it locks in position. Be
lash injury if your vehicle is hit from the rear. reduce the risk of injury in an accident, sure to make this adjustment before start-
The head restraints are equipped in the illus- always make sure the head restraints are ing to drive. Serious injuries could other-
trated position. installed and properly positioned when wise be suffered in the result of an impact. 4
To maximize the effectiveness of the head the seat is occupied.
restraints, adjust the seatback to the upright  In order to minimize the risk of a neck
position, and the head restraint to the proper injury due to a rear impact, the seatback
position. Sit back against the seatback with must be adjusted to the upright position
your head close to the head restraint. and the head restraint must be adjusted to
the proper position before vehicle opera-
tion. The driver should never adjust the
seat while the vehicle is in motion.
 Never place a cushion or similar device on
the seatback. This can adversely affect
head restraint performance by increasing
the distance between your head and the NOTE
restraint.  The head restraint height in the second row
outboard seats and the third row seats cannot
be adjusted.
*: Seating 7 passengers

Head restraints
pressing the lock knob (A) until the restraint
Adjustment of the head To remove locks into place.
restraint height (front seats)
Press the lock knob (A) in the direction
shown by the arrows. Then pull the head CAUTION
To reduce the risk of injury in an accident, restraint up and out of the seatback.  Check that the lock knob (A) is extended out
adjust the head restraint height so that the
4 center of the restraint is at your ear level
as shown in the illustration. Then pull the
head restraint up to make sure that it is
when seated. Any person too tall for the locked in place and will not come out of the
restraint to reach their ear level when seated seatback.
should raise the restraint to the highest locked
position.
 To raise the restraint, pull it straight up.

 To lower the restraint, push down on it
while pressing the lock knob (A) in the
direction shown by the arrow.
 After adjusting the height, push down on
the restraint to make sure it is locked in
position. WARNING
 To help minimize the risk of neck injury in
the event of an accident, the head
restraints must be properly installed and
positioned to proper height before vehicle CAUTION
operation.  The shape and size of the head restraint dif-
fers according to the seat. Always use the
correct head restraint provided for the seat
and do not install the head restraint in the
To install wrong direction.
First check that the head restraint is facing in

the right direction as shown in the previous
illustration, and then insert it into the seat-
back. Push the head restraint down while

Making a cargo area
WARNING NOTE
 When driving the vehicle, do not allow  You can separately fold the right and left side
anyone to sit on the third row seat if the of the second row seat.
second row seat is in the folded position.
CAUTION
To fold the second row seat 4
 In the cargo area, do not load the luggage 1. When folding the left side second row
higher than the top of the seats and make seat, store the seat belt for the middle
sure that the luggage is firmly secured. seating position of the second row seat.
Restricted rear vision or flying objects enter- Refer to “Detachable center seat belt for
ing the passenger compartment during sud- second row” on page 4-21.
den braking could result in a serious accident
Making a cargo area 2. Lower the head restraint for second row
and/or injury.
middle seating position to its lowest posi-
N00405501115  Seats should always be operated by an adult.
Seat adjustments by a child could lead to an
tion.
WARNING unexpected accident. Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-11.
 Never adjust the seats to make a cargo  When adjusting the seats, be careful not to 3. Pull the strap (A), then fold forward the
area when the vehicle is in motion or on a catch your hand or leg. Personal injury could head restraints for second row outside
slope. The seats could move more than result. seating position.
necessary or move suddenly and causing a
serious accident and/or injury.
 When returning a seat back to its seating NOTE
position after folding down, make sure  When the seatback of a front seat is reclined,
that the seat is firmly secured and seat belt return it to the upright position before driv-
buckles are in proper position. If the seat ing.
is not secured, it could move causing a
serious accident.
 Do not allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area while the vehicle is in motion. People Folding the second row seats
who are not properly seated and N00405701146
restrained can be seriously injured or The second row seat can be folded to create
killed in an accident. an additional cargo area.

Making a cargo area

4. On vehicles with the second row seat slide 6. Fold forward the seat belt buckle.
function, move the second row seat fully
CAUTION
 Do not allow any person to sit on the flipped
backward.
seat cushion, and do not place luggage on it.
Refer to “To adjust the seat forward or
The seat’s mounting fittings could bend
backward” on page 4-8. under the weight, making it impossible for
the seat cushion to be secured when it returns
4 NOTE to the original position.
 If you do not move the second row seat fully
backward, you may not be able to fold the
second row seat. NOTE
 If the seatback cannot be folded, follow the
5. Pull the strap (B), then flip the seat cush- steps below.
ion forward. 1. Raise the seatback once until it locks.
CAUTION 2. Pull the strap again.
 Do not allow any person to get on the plastic 3. Pull up the lever, then fold the seatback
cover (C), and do not place luggage on it. forward.
Doing so could damage the plastic cover.
7. Pull up the lever (D), then fold the seat-

back forward.

Making a cargo area
To return NOTE WARNING

 A rubber strap (C) is attached to the seat belt  Ensure that the head restraints are
1. Raise the seatback until it locks securely buckle for the left outboard seating position. returned to their original positions before
into place. This helps raise the seat belt buckle while the the seats are occupied. Failure to do so
2. While lifting the seat belt buckle (A), gen- seat cushion returns to the original position. could cause serious injury if involved in an
tly lower the seat cushion. Make sure that accident.
there is a hook (B) at the position shown 4
in the illustration. 6. If the center seat belt is stored;
• Pull out the detachable anchor plate (D)
from the seatback.
• Pull the small latch plate (E) slowly and
insert it into the detachable anchor plate
until a click is heard.
• Make sure that the seat belt is not
3. Push down the seat cushion until it locks twisted.
securely into place. For details, refer to “Detachable center
seat belt for second row” on 4-21.
4. Make sure that all seat belt buckles are

properly positioned on the seat cushion.
5. Return the folded head restraint to its
original position.

Making a flat seat
Folding the third row seats Making a flat seat

(Seating 7 passengers) N00404801166
N00409800021 The entire interior of the vehicle may be used

for sleeping accommodations by removing
To fold the head restraints and fully reclining all the
4 seats when the vehicle is stopped.
1. Remove the head restraints from the third
row seats. (Refer to “Head restraints” on
page 4-11.)
WARNING
 Never drive with passengers or cargo on
2. Pull up the strap (A), then fold the seat-
the flat seat. This is extremely dangerous
back forward. and can cause severe or fatal injury or
death in an accident or if heavy braking is
To return required.
1. Pull the strap (A), then raise the seatback
until it locks securely into place.
Push lightly on the seatback to confirm CAUTION
that it has actually been secured.  Adjust the seats only when the vehicle is
stopped in a safe place.
 Seat should be adjusted only by adults to
avoid accidents.
 When sliding the seats, be careful not to
catch your hand or leg.
3. Stow the removed head restraints in the  Do not walk around on top of the seats after
luggage floor box with their front faces they have been laid flat because the footing
is uneven. It is safest to move about on your
facing downward.
hands and knees.
 To ensure the seats are locked securely,
attempt to move them back and forth.
 Do not jump on or drop heavy objects on the
2. Install the head restraints. seatbacks.

Making a flat seat
CAUTION
 To raise the seatback of the front seat, firmly
place your hand on the seatback, pull the
seatback lock knob up, and raise the seatback
slowly. (Refer to “To adjust the seatback” on
page 4-6.) Do not let children adjust the seat-
back. 4
1. Remove the head restraints from the front
seats and raise the arm rest on the second
row seats.
For vehicles with a cargo area cover,
3. Slide the front seats fully forward, then 5. The flat seat configuration is now com-
remove the cover.
recline their seatbacks backward to plete.
(Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-11,
achieve a flat surface. To return the seats to the normal position,
“Arm rest” on page 4-10 and “Cargo area
(Refer to “To adjust the seat forward or reverse the above procedure.
cover” on page 5-281.)
backward” on page 4-5 and “To adjust the
seatback” on page 4-6.)
2. Slide the second row seats back as far as

possible (vehicles with second row seat
4. Recline the seatbacks of the second row
slide function).
seats.
(Refer to “To adjust the seat forward or
(Refer to “To adjust the seatback” on page
backward” on page 4-8.)
4-8.)

Seat belts
Seat belts WARNING WARNING

N00406001511  Never insert any foreign object, such as a  Never hold an infant or child in your arms
Seat belts are installed in your vehicle to help piece of plastic, paper clip, button or coin, or on your lap when riding in this vehicle
reduce the risk of injury to the driver and pas- into the seat belt buckle. even when you are wearing your seat belt.
senger in the event of an accident. Always Never place any part of the seat belt you
are wearing around an infant or child.
4 use the provided seat belts.
Failure to follow these simple instructions
Carefully review the following information creates a risk of serious injury or death to
for proper seat belt usage. your child in the event of an accident or
sudden stop.
WARNING  Children 12 years old and under should
 To help reduce the risk of injury or death always ride in the rear seat and be prop-
in an accident, seat belts and child erly restrained. This reduces their risk of
restraint systems must always be used.  Never modify or alter the seat belts in serious injury or death in an accident,
Refer to “Child restraint systems” on page your vehicle. especially due to a deploying front passen-
4-27 for additional information.  To reduce the risk to the driver of serious ger’s airbag. Refer to “Child restraint sys-
injury or death during deployment of the tems” on page 4-27 for additional
 Never use one seat belt for more than one
driver’s airbag, always properly wear the information.
person.
seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far  Any child who is too small to properly
 Never carry more people in your vehicle
back as possible while maintaining a posi- wear a seat belt must be properly
than there are seat belts.
tion that still enables you to fully apply the restrained in an appropriate child
 Always adjust the seat belt for a snug fit.
pedals, easily control the steering wheel, restraint system.
 Always place the shoulder belt over your and safely operate the vehicle.  Infants MUST be placed in a rear-facing
shoulder and across your chest. Never put
 To reduce the risk to a front seat passen- child safety seat and positioned in the rear
it behind you or under your arm.
ger of serious injury or death from a seat.
 Always wear the lap belt as low as possible deploying airbag, make sure the passenger  In the event of an accident, all seat belt
across your hips, not around your waist. always wears the seat belt properly, assemblies, including retractors and
remains seated all the way back and attachment hardware, should be inspected
upright in their seat, and moves the seat as by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
far back as possible. Refer to “Supplemen- dealer to determine whether replacement
tal Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” on is necessary.
page 4-34 for additional information.

Seat belts
1. Occupants should always sit back in their
Seat belt instructions seats with their backs against the upright
WARNING
N00406201513  To reduce the risk of serious injury or
seatback. To reduce the risk of serious
All seats are equipped with a seat belt which death in the event of an accident or sud-
injury or death during deployment of the
den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
uses one combined lap-and-shoulder belt with airbag, adjust the driver’s seat as far back the upright position while the vehicle is in
an emergency locking retractor. as possible while maintaining a position motion.
that still enables you to fully apply the 4
This system is designed to provide both com- pedals, easily control the steering wheel, Seat belt performance during an accident
fort and safety. It permits full extension and can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
and safely operate the vehicle. The front
automatic retraction of the belts during nor- are reclined. The more a seatback is
passenger seat should also be moved as
mal vehicle operation. A sensing device reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
far back as possible. Refer to “Supple-
inside the belt retractor is designed to lock the mance will be adversely affected. If the
mental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag”
retractor in the event of a sudden change in seat belt is not properly positioned against
on page 4-34. Also refer to “To adjust the the body during an accident, there is
the vehicle’s motion.
seat forward or backward” on page 4-5. increased risk you will slide under the belt
NOTE
 For instructions on installing a child restraint
2. Before using the center seat belt for sec-
system using a seat belt, refer to “Installing a
child restraint system using the seat belt” on ond row, make sure that the detachable
page 4-32. anchor is securely latched and the seat
belt is not twisted. For details, refer to
page 4-21.

Seat belts
3. Grasp the latch plate and slide it up the
webbing so that it easily pulls across your
NOTE NOTE
 If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled  With the exception of the seat belt for the
body.
out, pull it once with force and let it retract driver, the seat belts in all other seating posi-
all the way. tions are equipped with an Automatic Lock-
Then, pull the belt out slowly once again. ing Retractor (ALR) function. If you pull the
seat belt fully out of the retractor, the retrac-
4 tor will switch to its ALR child restraint
5. The lap part of the belt must always be
installation function (see page 4-32).
worn low and snug across the hips. Pull When the ALR function has been activated,
up on the shoulder portion of the belt to the seat belt will only retract. If this happens,
take up any slack in the lap belt. let the belt fully retract, then pull the seat
belt back out, repeating steps 1 through 4.
4. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding WARNING

the latch plate. Push the latch plate into  Be sure the lap belt portion fits snugly and
the buckle until you hear a “click”. Pull is worn as low as possible across the hips,
up on the belt to be sure the latch plate is not around the waist. Failure to follow this
locked securely in the buckle. instruction will increase the risk of serious
injury or death in the event of an accident.
 Be sure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted when worn. Twisted webbing may
adversely affect seat belt performance.

Seat belts
6. To release the belt, press the button on the
Detachable center seat belt for To attach
buckle and allow the belt to retract.
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it second row 1. Pull out the detachable anchor plate (C)
out and check for kinks or twists in the N00409900035
from the storage pocket on seat back
webbing. Then make sure it remains The center seat belt for the second row can be
cushion.
untwisted as it retracts. detached to fold the left side second row seat.
2. Pull out the small latch plate (A) and then
This seat belt must be worn correctly as illus-
pull out the latch plate (B) by tilting it as 4
NOTE trated.
shown in the illustration.
 If the seat belt (A) or ring (B) becomes dirty,
the belt may not retract smoothly. If the seat
belt and ring are dirty, clean them with a
mild soap or detergent solution.
WARNING NOTE
 Never detach the center seat belt except  Pulling out the latch plate by force may dam-
age the headliner.
when the left side seat back in the second
row is folded. Using the center seat belt
with the detachable anchor unlatched
increases the risk of serious injury or
death in an accident. Make sure the small
latch plate (A) is properly latched to the
detachable anchor before the center seat
belt is used.

Seat belts
3. Pull the small latch plate (A) slowly and 3. After the seat belt has retracted com-
To detach
insert it into the detachable anchor plate pletely, insert the latch plate (B) into the
until a click is heard. Make sure that the 1. While holding the seat belt, insert a metal upper slit (F), and then insert the small
seat belt is not twisted. plate, such the latch plate of the seat belt latch plate (A) into the lower slit (G).
or a key, into the slit (E) on the detachable
anchor (C) and release the center seat belt
4 from the detachable anchor.
4. Store the detachable anchor in the storage

NOTE pocket on the seatback.
 If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled
out, pull it once with force and let it retract 2. Retract the seat belt slowly by holding the
all the way. seat belt.
Then, pull the belt out slowly once again.
 The seat belt can be buckled up by inserting
the latch plate (B) into the buckle (D) like
NOTE
other seat belts.  If the seat belt is not held, the seat belt will
rapidly retract. This could cause damage to
 If the seat belt switch to the ALR child
the interior trim.
restraint installation function and cannot be
pulled out, detach the latch plate (B) and
move the second row seat fully backward.
Refer to “Installing a child restraint system
using the seat belt” on page 4-32.

Seat belts
warning light will come on and a tone will
Driver’s seat belt sound for approximately 6 seconds to remind
Front passenger seat belt warn-
reminder/warning light and you to fasten your seat belt. ing light
display If the vehicle is driven with the seat belt still N00418301247
N00418401394 unfastened, the warning light will blink and The front passenger seat belt warning light is
the tone will sound intermittently until the located in the instrument panel.
Type 1 seat belt is fastened. At the same time, “FAS- 4
TEN SEAT BELT” is displayed on the infor-
mation screen in the multi information
display (Type 1 only).
WARNING
 In order to reduce the risk of serious
injury or death in an accident, always fas-
ten your own seat belt. Do not allow any-
one to ride in your vehicle unless he or she
is also seated and fastening a seat belt.
Type 2
Children should additionally be restrained
in a secure child restraint system. When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the operation mode is put in
ON, this indicator normally comes on and
NOTE goes off a few seconds later.
 If the seat belt subsequently remains unfas- The light comes on when a person sits on the
tened, the warning light and the tone will front passenger seat but does not fasten the
issue further warnings each time the vehicle seat belt. It goes off when the seat belt is sub-
starts moving from a stop.
sequently fastened.
A tone and warning light are used to remind

the driver to fasten the seat belt.
If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position or the operation mode is put in ON
without the driver’s seat belt being fastened, a
Seat belts
WARNING WARNING Storing the second row (out-

 When a child booster seat is used on the  Always adjust the shoulder belt anchor so board seating positions) and
front passenger seat, the front passenger that the shoulder belt is positioned across
seat belt warning light will not come on, if the center of your shoulder without touch- third row seat belts
the seat belt is not fastened when the ing your neck. The shoulder belt should N00406501112
booster seat is used. Confirm that the not be able to fall off your shoulder. Fail- When seat belts for the second row outboard
4 child is wearing the seat belt properly. ure to follow this instruction can adversely seating position and for the third row are not
 Do not install any accessory or sticker that affect seat belt performance and increase used, the seat belts can be stored.
makes the light difficult to see. the risk of serious injury or death in the
event of an accident.
 Adjust the shoulder belt anchor only when
the vehicle is not in motion.
Adjustable seat belt shoulder
 Make sure the anchor is securely locked in
anchor (front seats) position after adjusting it.
N00406301354
The seat belt shoulder anchor height can be

adjusted. To move the anchor down, press the
lock knob (A) and slide the anchor down to
the desired position. To move the anchor up,
slide the anchor up to the desired position.
Anchor down Anchor up

Seat belt use during pregnancy

Put the seat belt webbing in the back slot (A)
on the clip and insert the metal plate of the
Seat belt extender Seat belt use during preg-
latch plate into the front slot (B) as shown in
N00406701202
If your seat belt is not long enough, even

nancy
the illustration. N00406800134
when fully extended, a seat belt extender
must be obtained. The extender may be used Seat belts work for everyone, including preg-
nant women. Like all occupants, pregnant
for either of the front seats.
women are more likely to be seriously injured
4
or killed in an accident if they do not wear
seat belts.
WARNING
 To reduce the risk of serious injury or
death to pregnant women and unborn
children in an accident, pregnant women
should always wear a seat belt. The lap
portion of the seat belt should be worn
snug and low across the hips and below
the rounding. Consult your doctor if you
have any additional questions or concerns.
WARNING
 The extender should only be used if the
existing belt is not long enough. Anyone
who can use the standard seat belt should
Seat belt pre-tensioner and
not use an extender. Unnecessary use of an force limiter systems
extender can adversely affect seat belt N00417701710
performance in an accident. The driver’s and front passenger’s seats each
 When not required, the extender must be have a seat belt equipped with a pre-tensioner
removed and stowed.
system and force limiter system.

Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems

The seat belt pre-tensioners will operate
Pre-tensioner system under the same conditions as the airbag con-
trol unit.
The driver and front passenger seat belts are
equipped with a seat belt pre-tensioner sys- When the seat belt pre-tensioners activate,
tem. In a moderate-to-severe frontal or side some smoke is released and a loud noise will
4 collision or when a rollover or overturning of be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care
the vehicle is detected, the pre-tensioner sys- should be taken not to intentionally inhale it,
tem operates simultaneously with the deploy- as it may cause some temporary irritation to
ment of the front airbags, side airbags or people with respiratory problems.
curtain airbags. Even in the event of a severe impact, the pre-
The seat belt pre-tensioners are located in the 1- SRS warning light tensioners will not operate if the seat belts are
driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt retrac- 2- Front impact sensors not fastened. The seat belt pre-tensioners may
tors (A) and in the front passenger seat’s final 3- Seat belt pre-tensioner not activate in certain collisions, even though
anchor (B). When activated, the pre-tension- 4- Airbag control unit the vehicle may appear to be severely dam-
ers quickly draw back seat belt webbing and 5- Side impact sensors aged. Such non-activation does not mean that
increase seat belt performance. 6- Seat belt buckle switches something is wrong with the seat belt pre-ten-
sioner system, but rather that the collision
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness forces were not severe enough to activate the
of the electronic parts of the system whenever system.
the ignition switch or the operation mode is
under the following conditions. These include WARNING
all of the items listed above and all related  The seat belt pre-tensioner system is
wiring. designed to work only once. After the seat
[Except for vehicles equipped with the belt pre-tensioners have been activated,
F.A.S.T.-key] they will not work again. They must
The ignition switch is in the “ON” or promptly be replaced and the entire seat
“START” position. belt pre-tensioner system inspected by an
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
The seat belt pre-tensioner system includes The operation mode is in ON.
the following components:

Child restraint systems

The child restraint system should be appropri-  Children who weigh more than 40 pounds
SRS warning ate for your child’s weight and height, and (18 kg) or who are more than 40 inches
N00408701147
should properly fit your vehicle’s seat. (100 cm) tall, regardless of age, should
This warning light tells you if there is a prob- For detailed information, refer to the instruc- use a suitable child seat or a booster seat
lem involving the SRS airbags and/or the seat tion manual accompanying the child restraint in the rear seat until the vehicle’s lap-and-
belt pre-tensioner system. Refer to “SRS system. shoulder belt fits them properly.
warning light/display” on page 4-40. 4
Guidelines for child restraint WARNING
Force limiter system system selection  All children must be seated in the rear
N00408900126 seat, and properly restrained.
In the event of an accident, the seat belt force Accident statistics show that children of
All children should be properly restrained in all sizes and ages are safer when properly
limiter system will help reduce the force
a restraint device that offers the maximum restrained in the rear seat, rather than in
applied to the driver and front seat passenger.
protection for their size and age. the front seat.
Be sure to check local, state, or provincial  Be sure to select a child restraint system
Child restraint systems requirements for child size and age that may that is appropriate not only for the child’s
N00407101740 vary from the recommendations listed below. size and age but also for your vehicle.
Some child restraint systems may not fit
When transporting infants or small children  Children less than 1 year old and who your vehicle properly.
in your vehicle, an appropriate child restraint weigh 22 pounds (10 kg) or less MUST
system must always be used. This is required ride in a rear-facing child safety seat that
by law in the U.S. and Canada. MUST ONLY be used in the second row
Child restraint systems specifically designed seat.
for infants and small children are offered by  Children older than 1 year of age and who
several manufacturers. Choose only a child weigh less than 40 pounds (18 kg) or who
restraint system with a label certifying that it are less than 40 inches (100 cm) tall must
complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety be in a forward-facing restraint used only
Standard 213 (FMVSS 213) or Motor Vehicle in the rear seat.
Restraint Systems and Booster Seats Safety
Regulations (RSSR). Look for the manufac-
turer’s statement of compliance on the box
and child restraint system itself.

WARNING WARNING WARNING

 Any child who is too large to use a child  Never hold an infant or child in your arms  Your vehicle is also equipped with a front
restraint system should ride in the rear or on your lap when riding in this vehicle, passenger’s airbag.
seat and wear the lap-and-shoulder belt even when you are wearing your seat belt. Never put REAR-FACING CHILD
properly. The shoulder belt must be posi- Never place any part of the seat belt you RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT
tioned over the shoulder and across the are wearing around an infant or child. RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas-
4 chest, not across their neck, and with the Failure to follow these simple instructions senger seat. This places the infant too
lap belt positioned low on the child’s hips, creates a risk of serious injury or death to close to the passenger’s airbag. During
not across their stomach. If necessary, a your child in the event of an accident or deployment of that airbag, the infant can
booster seat should be used to help achieve sudden stop. be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing
a proper seat belt fit. Follow the booster child restraint systems or infant restraint
seat manufacturer’s instructions. Only use systems must only be used in the rear seat.
a booster seat that is certified as comply-
ing with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint Sys-
tems and Booster Seats Safety Regula- Airbag
tions.

WARNING WARNING NOTE

 FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT  When installing a child restraint system,  Before purchasing a child restraint system,
SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat follow the instructions provided by the try installing it in the rear seat to ensure
whenever possible. If one must be used in manufacturer and follow the directions in proper fit. Due to the location of the seat belt
the front passenger seat, move the seat to this manual. Failure to do so can result in buckles and the shape of the seat cushion, it
the most rearward position and make sure serious injury or death to your child in an may be difficult to securely install some
the child stays in the child restraint sys- accident or sudden stop. manufacturer’s child restraint systems. 4
tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow  After installation, push and pull the child If the child restraint system can be pulled
these instructions could result in serious restraint system back and forth, and side forward or to either side easily on the seat
injury or death to the child. to side, to see that it is firmly secured. If cushion after the seat belt has been tightened,
the child restraint system is not installed choose another manufacturer’s child restraint
securely, it may cause injury to the child system.
or other occupants in the event of an acci- Depending on the seating position in the
dent or sudden stop. vehicle and the child restraint system that
 When not in use, keep your child restraint you have, the child restraint system can be
system secured with the seat belt, or attached using one of the following 2 meth-
remove it from the vehicle, in order to pre- ods:
vent it from being thrown around inside • Attach to the lower anchorage in the second
the vehicle during an accident. row seat ONLY if the child restraint system
is compatible with the LATCH system (See
page 4-30).
• Attach to the seat belt (See page 4-32).
WARNING
 It is important to use an approved rear-
facing infant restraint until the infant is
one year old (unless the infant outgrows
the seat sooner). This allows the infant’s
neck and spine to develop enough to sup-
port the weight of their head in the event
of an accident.

Installing a child restraint sys- Tether anchor locations Examples of child restraint sys-
tem using the LATCH (Lower N00418901201 tems compatible with the LATCH
Your vehicle has 3 attachment points on the system
Anchors and Tethers for chil- backside of the second row seats. These are
dren) system
N00419000198
for securing a child restraint system tether
4 N00418801167 strap to each of the 3 rear seating positions in
your vehicle.
Lower anchor locations
The outboard seating positions in the second

row seat of your vehicle are equipped with
lower anchors for attaching child restraint
systems compatible with the LATCH system.
A- Rear-facing child restraint system

B- Front-facing child restraint system
C- Child restraint system lower anchor
connectors
D- Tether strap
(These are only examples.)
Using the LATCH system

N00419101271
1. In order to securely fasten the tether strap,

NOTE remove the head restraint from the loca-
 The symbols on the seatback show the location where you wish to install the child
tion of the lower anchor points. restraint system.
2. Open the gap a little between the seat
cushion (A) and the seatback (B) with
your hand to locate the lower anchors (C).


3. For easier access, the seatback may be D- Connector 4. Latch the tether strap hook (E) of the child
recline rearward. restraint system to the tether anchor bar
Push the anchor connectors (D) on the NOTE (F) and tighten the tether strap so it is
child restraint system into the lower  In order to secure a child restraint system securely fastened.
anchors (C) in accordance with the compatible with the LATCH system, use the
instructions provided by the child restraint lower anchor points in the outboard positions
system’s manufacturer. of the second row seat. It is not necessary to 4
After it is security fastened, adjust the use the vehicle’s seat belt. The vehicle’s seat
seatback to 4 steps forward from most belt, however, MUST be used to secure a
reclined position. child restraint system in the middle seating
Remember, the lower anchors (C) pro- position of the second row seat.
vided with your vehicle are designed to
secure suitable child restraint systems
compatible with the LATCH system in WARNING
the outboard positions of the second  If there is any foreign material in or
row seats only. The anchor connectors around the lower anchors, remove it
are NOT designed to secure a suitable
before installing the child restraint sys- NOTE
tem. Also, make sure the seat belt is away  If it is difficult to latch the tether strap hook,
child restraint system in the middle from, not looped through or otherwise
seating position of the second row seat. turn the hook sideways.
interfering with, the child restraint sys-
tem. If foreign matter is not removed
and/or the seat belt interferes with the 5. Push and pull the child restraint system in
child restraint system, the child restraint all directions to ensure it is firmly
system will not be secured properly, could secured.
detach and move forward in the event of
sudden braking or an accident, and could WARNING
result in injury to the child or other vehi-
 Child restraint system tether anchors are
cle occupants.
designed only to withstand loads from cor-
 When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under
the seat where the child restraint system is no circumstances are they to be used for
installed. adult seat belts, harnesses, for attaching
A- Vehicle seat cushion other items, or equipment to the vehicle.
B- Vehicle seatback
C- Lower anchor

Installing a child restraint sys- WARNING

tem using the seat belt (with  When you install a child restraint system
using the seat belt, always make sure the
emergency/automatic locking retractor has been switched to the ALR
mechanism) child restraint installation function. The
ALR function will keep the child restraint
4 N00407301494
system tightly secured to the seat.
With the exception of the driver, the seat belt
Failure to convert the retractor to the
in all other seating positions can be converted ALR function may allow the child
from normal Emergency Locking Retractor restraint system to move forward during
(ELR) mode, to Automatic Locking Retractor sudden braking or an accident, resulting
(ALR) mode. This means that when you pull in serious injury or death to the child or
3. To activate the ALR child restraint instal-
the seat belt fully out of the retractor, the other occupants.
lation function, slowly pull the shoulder
retractor will switch to its ALR child restraint
part of the belt all the way out of the
installation function. Always use the ALR
retractor until it stops. Then let the belt
child restraint installation function when you Installation
feed back into the retractor.
install a child restraint system using the seat
belt. 1. Place the child restraint system on the seat
Children 12 years old and under should where you wish to install it.
always be restrained in the rear seat, when- To help assure proper fitting of the child
ever possible, although the front passenger restraint system, always remove the head
seat belt can also be converted to ALR mode. restraint.
When installing the front-facing child
restraint system on the second row seat,
adjust the angle of the second row seat-
back to the most upright position.
2. Route the seat belt through the child
restraint system according to the instruc-
tions provided by the child restraint sys- 4. After the belt has retracted, tug on it.
tem’s manufacturer. Then insert the seat
belt latch plate into the buckle. Make sure
you hear a “click” when you insert the
latch plate into the buckle.


If the belt is in the ALR function, you will 6. Latch the tether strap hook (A) of the 7. Before putting your child in the restraint,
not be able to pull it out. If the webbing child restraint system to the tether anchor push and pull the restraint in all directions
can be pulled out from retractor, the ALR bar (B) and tighten the tether strap so it is to be sure it is firmly secure. Do this
function has not been activated and you securely fastened. before each use. If the child restraint sys-
will need to repeat steps 3 and 4. tem is not firmly secure, repeat steps 1
5. After confirming that the belt is locked, through 6.
grab the shoulder part of the belt near the 8. To remove a child restraint system from 4
buckle and pull up to remove any slack the vehicle and deactivate the ALR mode,
from the lap part of the belt allowing the remove the child from the restraint.
slack to feed into the retractor. Remember, Unlatch the buckle. Then remove the belt
if the lap belt portion is not tight, the child from the restraint and let the belt fully
restraint system will not be secure. It may retract.
help to put your weight on the child 9. Reinstall the head restraint.
restraint system and/or push on its seat- Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-11.
back while pulling up on the belt (See
illustration).
NOTE Children who have outgrown
 If it is difficult to latch the tether strap hook, child restraint systems
turn the hook sideways. N00407601628
Children who have outgrown a child restraint

system should be seated in the rear seat and
WARNING wear the seat belt. If the shoulder belt crosses
 Child restraint system tether anchors are their face or neck, and/or the lap belt crosses
designed only to withstand loads from cor- their stomach, a commercially available
rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under
booster seat must be used to raise the child so
no circumstances are they to be used for
that the shoulder belt crosses their shoulder
adult seat belts, harnesses, for attaching
other items, or equipment to the vehicle. and the lap belt remains positioned low
If your child restraint system requires the use across their hips. The booster seat should fit
of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap in the vehicle seat and have a label certifying
accordance with the following procedures. compliance with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint

Maintenance and inspection of seat belts

Systems and Booster Seats Safety Regula- cuts, tears, increase in thickness in any sec-
tions. tion of the webbing from broken fibers, or Supplemental Restraint Sys-
severe fading from sunlight. All of these con- tem (SRS) - airbag
WARNING ditions indicate a weakening of the belt, N00407701863
 Any child who is too small to properly

which may adversely affect seat belt perfor- This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
mance in an accident. Restraint System (SRS), which includes air-
4 wear a seat belt must be properly
restrained in an appropriate child bags for the driver and passengers.
restraint system, to reduce their risk of WARNING
serious injury or death in an accident.  Do not attempt to repair or replace any The SRS front airbags are designed to supple-
 A child should never be left unattended in, part of the seat belt assemblies. This work ment the primary protection of the driver and
or unsupervised around, your vehicle. should be done by an authorized front passenger seat belt systems by provid-
When you leave the vehicle, always take Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Failure to have ing those occupants with protection against
the child out as well. an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer head and chest injuries in certain moderate to
 Children can die from heat stroke if left or perform the work could reduce the effec- severe frontal collisions. The SRS front air-
trapped inside the vehicle, especially on tiveness of the belts and could result in a bags, together with sensors at the front of the
hot days. serious injury or death in an accident. vehicle and sensors attached to the front
 Keep your vehicle locked when not in use.  Never use an organic solvent to clean the
Keep your vehicle keys away from chil-
seats, form an advanced airbag system.
seat belt webbing. Do not attempt to
dren. bleach or re-dye the seat belt webbing. The SRS side airbags and the curtain airbags
These may weaken the seat belt webbing,
are also designed to supplement the seat belts.
increasing risk of injury or death in an
The SRS side airbags provide the driver and
Maintenance and inspection accident.
Clean seat belt webbing only with mild front passenger with protection against chest
of seat belts soap or detergent solution and rinse it injuries by deploying the bag on the side
N00407001390 with lukewarm water, and dry the seat impacted in moderate to severe side impact
belt webbing completely before retracting collisions. The SRS curtain airbags provide
Regularly check your seat belt buckles and
it. the driver and the passengers on the front seat
their release mechanisms for positive engage-
and the second row outboard seats with pro-
ment and release of the latch plate. Check the
tection against head injuries by deploying the
retractors for automatic locking when in the
curtain airbag on the side impacted in moder-
Automatic Locking Retractor function.
ate to severe side impact collisions and by
The entire seat belt assembly should be deploying both curtain airbags when a roll-
replaced if the webbing shows any obvious over is detected. The curtain airbags are also
designed to help reduce the risk of complete
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

and partial ejection from the vehicle through
side windows in both side impact and roll-
WARNING WARNING
• Seat belts reduce the risk of injury in • To reduce the risk to the front passenger
over type accidents.
rear impact collisions, and in lower- of serious injury or death from a deploy-
The SRS airbags are NOT a substitute for use speed frontal collisions because the air- ing passenger’s airbag, make sure the
bags are not designed to inflate in those passenger always wears the seat belt
of the seat belts. For maximum protection in
situations. properly, remains seated upright and all
all types of accidents, seat belts must
• Seat belts reduce the risk of being the way back in the seat, and positions 4
ALWAYS be worn by everyone who drives or thrown from your vehicle in a collision or the seat as far back as possible.
rides in this vehicle (with infants and small rollover. • Seat all infants and children in the rear
children in an appropriate child restraint sys- seat, properly restrained in an appropri-
tem in the rear seat, and older children buck- ate child restraint system.
led in the rear seat). Refer to “Child restraint WARNING
systems” on page 4-27.  IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROP- WARNING
ERLY SEATED.  Airbags inflate very quickly and with
WARNING • A driver or front passenger sitting too great force. Do not sit on the edge of the
 IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS close to the steering wheel or instrument seat or sit with your lower legs too close to
WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT PROPERLY panel during airbag deployment can be the instrument panel, or lean your head or
EVEN WITH AN AIRBAG. seriously injured or killed. chest close to the steering wheel or the
• Airbags inflate very quickly and with instrument panel.
• Seat belts help keep the driver and pas-
sengers properly positioned. This great force. If the driver and front pas-  Do not put your feet or legs on or against
reduces the risk of injury in all collisions, senger are not properly seated and the instrument panel.
and reduces the risk of serious injuries or restrained, the airbag may not provide
death when the airbags inflate. the proper protection, and can cause
During sudden braking just before a col- serious injuries or death when it inflates.
lision, an unrestrained or improperly • To reduce the risk to the driver of serious
restrained driver or front passenger can injury or death due to a deploying
move forward into direct contact with, or driver’s airbag, always properly wear
within close proximity to, the airbag your seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat
when it begins to inflate. as far back as possible, maintaining a
The beginning stage of airbag inflation is position that still allows the driver to
the most forceful and can cause serious have good control of the steering wheel,
injuries or death if the occupant comes in brake, accelerator, and other vehicle con-
contact with the airbag at this time. trols.


 Infants and small children should never  NEVER put REAR-FACING CHILD  FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
ride unrestrained, or lean against the RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat
instrument panel. They should never ride RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas- whenever possible. If they must be used in
held in your arms or on your lap. They senger seat. This places the infant too the front passenger seat, move the seat to
can be seriously injured or killed in an close to the passenger’s airbag. During the most rearward position and make sure
4 accident, especially when the airbags deployment of that airbag, the infant can the child stays in the child restraint sys-
inflate. Seat all infants and children in the be seriously injured or killed. tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow
rear seat, properly restrained in an appro- Rear-facing child restraint systems or these instructions could result in serious
priate child restraint system. Refer to infant restraint systems must only be used injury or death to the child.
“Child restraint systems” on page 4-27. in the rear seat.
Airbag
WARNING
 Older children should be seated in the
rear seat with their seat belt properly
worn, and with an appropriate booster
seat if needed.
Refer to “Children who have outgrown
child restraint systems” on page 4-33.


When the impact sensors detect a sufficient
How the Supplemental front or side impact to deploy the airbag(s),
Restraint System works the appropriate airbag(s) will be deployed.
N00407801532
The SRS includes the following components: When the airbag control unit detects rollover
of the vehicle, curtain airbags will be
deployed. 4
When airbags deploy, some smoke is released
accompanied by a loud noise. The smoke is
not harmful, but do not intentionally inhale
10- Side airbag modules the smoke as it may cause temporary irrita-
11- Curtain airbag modules tion to people with respiratory problems.
12- Side impact sensors
An inflated airbag will deflate quickly, so you
may not even notice that the airbag was
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness inflated.
1- Airbag module (Driver) of the electronic parts of the system whenever Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver
2- SRS warning light the ignition switch or the operation mode is from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle,
3- Passenger’s airbag off indicator under the following conditions. These include and does not prevent people from leaving the
4- Front impact sensors all of the items listed above and all related vehicle.
5- Airbag module (Passenger) wiring.
6- Airbag module (Driver’s knee) [Except for vehicles equipped with the
7- Driver’s seat position sensor F.A.S.T.-key] CAUTION
The ignition switch is in the “ON” or  Airbags inflate very quickly and with great
8- Passenger’s seat occupant classifica-
“START” position. force. In certain situations, contact with an
tion sensor system inflating airbag may cause small cuts, abra-
9- Airbag control unit [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
sions, and bruises.
The operation mode is in ON.
The airbags will operate under the same con-

ditions as the airbag control unit. Event Data Recording
N00418601266
This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder (EDR).

The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in the instrument panel will come on. Refer to
certain crash or near crash-like situations,
NOTE “SRS warning light/display” on page 4-40.
 EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only
such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
road obstacle, data that will assist in under- WARNING
are recorded by the EDR under normal driv-
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed. ing conditions and no personal data (e.g.,  If the SRS warning light or warning dis-
The EDR is designed to record data related to name, gender, age, and crash location) are
4 vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a recorded. However, other parties, such as
play comes on, have the vehicle inspected
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or law enforcement, could combine the EDR dealer as soon as possible.
less. data with the type of personally identifying  Please observe the following instructions
data routinely acquired during a crash inves- to ensure that the driver’s seat position
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record tigation. sensor can operate correctly.
such data as: • Adjust the seat to the correct position,
and sit well back against the seatback.
 How various systems in your vehicle were To read data recorded by an EDR, special
Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-4.
operating; equipment is required, and access to the vehi-
• Do not recline the seatback more than
 Whether or not the driver and front pas- cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the necessary when driving.
senger safety belts were buckled/fastened; vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as • Do not place metallic objects or luggage
 How far (if at all) the driver was depress- law enforcement, that have the special equip- under the front seat.
ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; ment, can read the information if they have  If the vehicle is involved in a severe
and, access to the vehicle or the EDR. impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by
 How fast the vehicle was traveling. an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
soon as possible.
Driver’s seat position sensor
These data can help provide a better under- N00417900177
standing of the circumstances in which
The driver’s seat position sensor is attached
crashes and injuries occur. Passenger’s seat occupant clas-
to the seat rail and provides the airbag control
unit with information on the seat’s fore-aft sification sensor system
position. The airbag control unit controls N00418001374
deployment of the driver’s front airbag in The passenger’s seat occupant classification
accordance with the information it receives sensor system is attached to the front passen-
from this sensor. ger seat cushion and provides the airbag con-
If there is a problem involving the driver’s trol unit with information regarding the
seat position sensor, the SRS warning light in occupant on the front passenger seat. The air-


bag control unit controls deployment of the
passenger’s front airbag in accordance with
WARNING WARNING
• The SRS warning light comes on while • If any liquid is spilled on the seat, wipe it
the information it receives from this system.
you are driving. and dry the seat immediately.
The passenger’s front airbag will not deploy
 To ensure that the passenger’s seat occu-  If the vehicle is involved in a severe
in an impact when the system senses no occu-
pant classification sensor system can sense impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by
pant on the front passenger’s seat or a child in
a child restraint system. In this case, the pas-
correctly, observe the following instruc-
tions. Failure to follow these instructions
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
soon as possible.
4
senger airbag off indicator will come on. can adversely affect the performance of
Refer to “Passenger’s airbag off indicator” on the passenger’s airbag system.
page 4-39. • Adjust the seat to the correct position,
Passenger’s airbag off indicator
If there is a problem involving the passen- and sit well back against the seatback. N00418101346
ger’s seat occupant classification sensor sys- Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-4. The passenger’s airbag off indicator is
tem, the SRS warning light in the instrument • Do not recline the seatback more than located in the instrument panel.
panel will come on. Refer to “SRS warning necessary.
light/display” on page 4-40. • Never have more than one person (adult
or child) sitting on the seat.
• Do not place anything between the seat
WARNING and the floor console.
 If any of the following conditions occur, • When attaching a child restraint system,
you should immediately have your vehicle secure it firmly.
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi • Do not place luggage or other objects on
Motors dealer as soon as possible: the seat.
• The SRS warning light does not initially • Do not use a seat cover or a cushion.
come on when the ignition switch or the
• Do not modify or replace the seat and
operation mode is under the following
seat belt.
conditions.
• Do not place luggage or other objects
[Except for vehicles equipped with the The indicator normally comes on when the
under the seat.
F.A.S.T.-key] ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
The ignition switch is in the “ON” or • Do not place and use an electronic device
such as a computer on the seat. or the operation mode is put in ON, and goes
“START” position.
• Do not place heavy objects on the seat or out a few seconds later. In the following situ-
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
The operation mode is in ON. stick pins, needles, or other objects into ations, the indicator will stay on to show that
• The SRS warning light does not go out it. the passenger front airbag is not operational.
after several seconds. • Do not remove the seat cushion skin.
 The front passenger’s seat is not occupied.

 The system senses that a child is using a onds and then go out. This is normal and
child restraint system on the front passen-
WARNING means the system is working properly.
 Do not attach any accessory to your vehi-
ger’s seat. If there is a problem involving one or more of
cle that makes the passenger’s airbag off
the SRS components, the warning light will
indicator difficult or impossible to see.
When the passenger’s seat occupant classifi- come on and stay on. At the same time, the
You must be able to see the passenger’s
cation sensor system sense there is a person airbag off indicator and verify the status warning display will appear on the informa-
4 seated in the front passenger’s seat, the indi- of the passenger’s airbag system. tion screen in the multi information display
cator goes out to show that the passenger’s (Type 1 only).
front airbag is operational. The SRS warning light/display is shared by
SRS warning light/display the SRS airbag and the seat belt pre-tensioner
N00408301589
WARNING system.
There is a Supplemental Restraint System
 If any of the following conditions occur,
(SRS) warning light on the instrument panel.
you should immediately have the airbag WARNING
system in your vehicle inspected by an  If any of the following conditions occur,
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as Type 1 there may be a problem with the SRS air-
soon as possible: bags and/or seat belt pre-tensioners, and
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator they may not function properly in a colli-
comes on when an adult is sitting on the sion or may suddenly activate without a
front passenger seat. collision:
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does • Even when the ignition switch or the
not come on when the front passenger operation mode is in ON, the SRS warn-
seat is not occupied. ing light does not come on or it remains
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does Type 2 on.
not come on when the ignition switch is • The SRS warning light and/or the warn-
turned to the “ON” position or the oper- ing display comes on while driving.
ation mode is put in ON. The SRS airbags and seat belt pre-ten-
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does sioners are designed to help reduce the
not come on when a child is in a child risk of serious injury or death in certain
restraint system on the front passenger’s collisions. If either of the above conditions
seat. occurs, immediately have your vehicle
The system checks itself every time the igni-
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or
comes on and goes out repeatedly. Motors dealer.
the operation mode is put in ON. The SRS
warning light will come on for several sec-


designed to deploy at the same time as the
Driver’s and passenger’s front driver’s front airbag.
airbag system
N00407901331
The driver’s airbag is located under the pad-

ded cover in the middle of the steering wheel.
The front passenger’s airbag is contained in 4
the instrument panel above the glove com-
partment. The driver’s airbag and the front
passenger’s airbag are designed to deploy at
the same time. However, the front passen-
ger’s airbag does not deploy when the front
passenger seat is not occupied or when the
system senses that a child is in the child
restraint system.
Driver
Front passenger
Driver’s knee airbag system

N00404500010
The driver’s knee airbag is located under the

steering wheel. The driver’s knee airbag is
Deployment of front airbags

N00408001616
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when …
4 Head-on collision with a solid wall at speeds of Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded
approx. 15 mph (25 km/h) or higher area between the arrows
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag another stationary vehicle, a pole or a guard
designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a will deploy if the impact to the vehicle’s main rail).
moderate to severe frontal impact. A typical structure is above a specific threshold level. The initial stage of airbag inflation is the
condition is shown in the illustration to the The threshold level is approximately 15 mph most forceful, and can cause serious injury or
left. (25 km/h) for a frontal collision straight into a death if you are too close to the deploying air-
solid flat wall that does not bend or deform. If bag. Accordingly, it is important that you
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are the impact to the vehicle’s main structure is always wear the available seat belt.
designed to deploy only in certain moderate below this threshold level, the front airbags
to severe frontal collisions within the shaded and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy. This
area between the arrows in the illustration to threshold level may also be higher if the vehi-
the right. cle hits something that absorbs the impact,
either by bending or moving (for example,


they cannot provide protection to the occu-
The front airbags and driver’s Collision with a utility pole, tree or other
pants.
knee airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY narrow object
Some typical situations are shown in the
when … illustration.
In certain types of front collisions, the front Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air-
airbags and driver’s knee airbag may not bag do not protect the occupants in all types 4
deploy, even if the deformation of the body of collisions, be sure to always wear your seat
Collision where the vehicle slides under the
seems to be large, because the vehicle’s body belts properly.
rear body of a truck
structure is designed to absorb the impact and
deform in order to help protect the occupants. Rear end collision to your vehicle
Some typical situations where the front air-
bags and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy
are shown in the illustrations.
Oblique frontal impact
Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air- Side collision to your vehicle
bag do not protect the occupant in all types of
frontal collisions, be sure to always wear your
seat belts properly.
The front airbags and driver’s Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
knee airbag ARE NOT
DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when
…
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are

not designed to deploy in situations where

The front airbags and driver’s Collision with an elevated median/island or WARNING
knee airbag MAY DEPLOY when curb  Do not attach anything to the steering
… wheel’s padded cover, such as trim mate-
rial, badges, etc. These could strike and
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag
4 may deploy if the underside of the vehicle
 Do not set anything on, or attach anything
to, the instrument panel above the glove
suffers a moderate to severe impact (under- Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole compartment. Such items could strike and
carriage impact). Some typical situations are injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.
shown in the illustration.
Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air-

bag may deploy in certain types of unex-
pected impacts, as shown in the illustrations, Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the
and these unexpected impacts can move you ground
out of position, it is important to always wear
your seat belts properly. When worn properly,
seat belts can help maintain your distance
from the airbags when they begin to inflate.
The initial stage of airbag inflation is the
most forceful and can cause serious injury or
death if you are close to the deploying airbag.
WARNING
 Do not attach accessories to, or put them
in front of, the windshield. They could
restrict the airbag inflation, or strike and
injure an occupant, when the airbag
inflates.

WARNING WARNING Side airbag system

 Do not attach additional keys or accesso-  Do not place objects, such as packages or N00408101431
ries (hard, pointed or heavy objects) to the pets, between the airbags and the driver The side airbags (A) are contained in the
ignition key. Such objects could prevent or the front passenger. Such objects can driver and front passenger seatbacks.
the driver’s knee airbag from inflation adversely affect airbag performance, or The side airbag is designed to inflate only on
normally or could be propelled to cause cause serious injury or death when the
serious injury if the airbag inflates. airbag deploys.
the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even 4
with no passenger in the front seat.
 Do not attach accessories to the lower por-  Immediately after airbag inflation, some
tion of the driver’s side instrument panel. parts of the airbag system will be hot. Do
Such objects could prevent the driver’s not touch them. You could otherwise be
knee airbag from inflating normally or burned.
could be propelled to cause serious injury  The airbag system is designed to work
if the airbag inflates. only once. After the airbags deploy, they
will not work again. They must promptly
be replaced and the entire airbag system
must be inspected by an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer.
A label is attached to the seatbacks in vehi-

cles equipped with side airbags.
WARNING
 Do not attempt to remove, install, disas-
semble or repair the SRS airbags.

Curtain airbag system WARNING WARNING

N00419201315  The side airbags and curtain airbags can  Do not place any objects around the area
The curtain airbags are contained in the front cause serious injury or death to anyone where the side airbags deploy. Such
pillar, the rear pillar and the side sections of too close to the airbag when it deploys. To objects can interfere with proper side air-
the roof. reduce the risk of injury from a deploying bag deployment, and cause injury during
side airbag or curtain airbag, driver and deployment of the side airbag.
4 The curtain airbag is designed to inflate only
front passenger must be properly  Do not place stickers, labels or additional
on the side of the vehicle that is impacted,
restrained and seated well back, upright, trim on the back of either front seat. They
even with no passenger in the seat.
and in the middle of the seat. Do not lean can interfere with proper side airbag
Also, when the airbag control unit detects against the door. deployment.
rollover of the vehicle, the curtain airbags
 Do not attach a microphone (A) or any
will deploy. other object around the part where the
curtain airbag (B) deploys, such as on the
windshield, side door glass or front and
rear pillars and roof side rail. When the
curtain airbag inflates, the microphone or
other object may be hurled with great
force or the curtain airbag may not inflate
correctly, resulting in death or serious
injury.
WARNING
 In order to reduce the risk of injury from
a deploying side airbag, do not allow any
second row seat passengers to hold onto
the back of either front seat. Special care
should be taken with children.

WARNING WARNING Deployment of side airbag and

 Do not put a hanger or any heavy or  Do not allow a child to lean against or sit curtain airbag
pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur- close to the passenger door, even if the N00408201591
tain airbag was activated, any such item child is seated in a child restraint system.
could be propelled away with great force The child’s head should also not lean
and could prevent the curtain airbag from against or be close to the section of the The side airbag and curtain airbag
inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly seatback where the side airbag and cur- ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY 4
on the coat hook (without using a hanger). tain airbag are located. It is dangerous if when...
Make sure there are no heavy or sharp the side airbag or curtain airbag deploys.
objects in the pockets of clothes that you Failure to follow all of these instructions The side airbag and curtain airbag are
hang on the coat hook. could lead to serious injury or death to the designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a
 Do not install seat covers or re-cover seats child.
moderate to severe side impact to the middle
that have side airbags. Covers can inter-  Work done on or in the vicinity of the side
of the passenger compartment.
fere with proper side airbag deployment airbag or curtain airbag components
and adversely affect side airbag perfor- should be done only by an authorized Mit-
Also when the vehicle detects rollover of the
mance. subishi Motors dealer. There is a risk of a vehicle, the curtain airbags will deploy.
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint serious injury or death. Improper work Typical situations are shown in the illustra-
system in the front passenger seat. Rear- methods can cause accidental side airbag tion.
facing child restraint systems MUST or curtain airbag deployment, or render a
ONLY be used in the rear seat. side airbag or curtain airbag inoperable. Moderate to severe impact to the middle of the
 Front-facing child restraint systems Either of these situations could result in vehicle body’s side structure
should also be used ONLY in the rear seat. serious injury or death.
If a front-facing child restraint system
must be used in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible, and
make sure that the child stays in the child
restraint system, properly restrained and
away from the door. When the vehicle detects rollover of the vehicle
(Curtain airbag only)


The seat belts in your vehicle are your pri- Since the side airbags and curtain airbags do
Oblique side impact
mary means of protection in an accident. The not protect the occupant in all types of side
SRS side airbags and curtain airbags are collisions, be sure to always wear the seat
designed to provide additional protection. belts properly.
Therefore, for your safety and the safety of all
occupants, be sure to always wear your seat
4 belts properly.
Side impact in an area away from the passenger
compartment
The side airbag and curtain airbag Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof (Side airbag
MAY NOT DEPLOY when... only)
In certain types of side collisions, the side air-

bag and curtain airbag may not deploy, even Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle
collision with the side of vehicle
if the deformation of the body seems to be
large, because the vehicle’s body structure is
designed to absorb the impact and to deform The side airbag and curtain airbag
in order to help protect the occupants. There
are also cases where the side airbag and cur-
ARE NOT DESIGNED TO
tain airbag may not deploy at the same time, DEPLOY when...
depending on the location of the impact. Collision with a utility pole, tree or other
narrow object
Some typical situations where the side air- The side airbag and curtain airbag are not
bags and curtain airbags may not deploy are designed to deploy in situations where they
shown in the illustrations. cannot provide protection to the occupants.
Some typical situations are shown in the
illustration.


Since the side airbags and curtain airbags do
not protect the occupant in all types of colli-
SRS servicing WARNING
N00408500669  Do not modify your front seats, center pil-
sions, be sure to always wear your seat belts
lar or center console. Such modifications
properly. WARNING can adversely affect SRS performance and
 Any maintenance performed on or near may lead to injury.
Also, if you discover any tear or open
Head-on collision the components of the SRS should be per-
formed only by an authorized Mitsubishi seam in the seat fabric near the side air- 4
Motors dealer. Do not permit anyone else bag, have the seat inspected by an autho-
to do any service, inspection, maintenance rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
or repair on any SRS components or wir-  If you have found any scratch, crack or
ing. Similarly, no part of the SRS should damage to the portion of the front and
ever be handled, removed or disposed by rear pillars and roof side rail, you should
anyone except an authorized Mitsubishi have the SRS inspected by an authorized
Rear end collision to your vehicle Motors dealer. Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Improper work methods on the SRS com-
ponents or wiring could result in an acci-
dental airbag deployment or could make NOTE
the SRS inoperable. Either of these situa-  When you transfer ownership of the vehicle
Pitch end over end tions could result in serious injury or to another person, we urge you to alert the
death. new owner that it is equipped with the SRS
 Do not modify your steering wheel or any and refer that owner to the applicable sec-
other SRS component or related vehicle tions in this owner’s manual.
part. For example, replacement of the  If you decide to junk or scrap your vehicle,
steering wheel, or modifications to the we urge you to first take it to an authorized
front bumper or body structure can Mitsubishi Motors dealer so that the SRS can
adversely affect SRS performance and be made safe for disposal.
may lead to injury.
 If any of the following parts needs to be
 If your vehicle has received any damage, modified for use by a handicapped person,
you should have the SRS inspected by an the advanced airbag system will be greatly
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to affected. Please consult an authorized Mit-
make sure it is in proper working order. subishi Motors dealer.
• Driver’s seat
• Front passenger seat
• Front seat belt

NOTE [For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico] [For vehicles sold in American Samoa]
• Steering wheel
To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of To contact Pacific Marketing Inc.
• Instrument panel
Caribbean, Inc. call 684 (699) 9140 or write to:
call 1-787-251-8715 or write to: Pacific Marketing, Inc.
[For vehicles sold in U.S.A.] Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Caribbean, P.O. Box 698
4 To contact Mitsubishi Motors North Inc. PAGO PAGO,
America, Inc. Customer Service Department AMERICAN SAMOA AS, 96799
call 1-888-648-7820 or write to: P.O. Box 192216
Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc. SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
Customer Relations Department
P.O. Box 6400 [For vehicles sold in Guam]
Cypress, CA 90630-0064 To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc.
call (671) 649-3673 or write to:
[For vehicles sold in Canada] Triple J Enterprises, Inc.
To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of P.O. Box 6066
Canada, Inc. TAMUNING
call 1-888-576-4878 or write to: GUAM 96931
Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc.
Customer Relations Department [For vehicles sold in Saipan]
P.O. Box 41009 To contact Triple J Motors
4141 Dixie Road call (670) 234-7133 or write to:
Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9 Triple J Motors
P.O. Box 500487
SAIPAN, MP96950-0487

Warning label
N00408600354
Occupant restraint warning labels for the SRS

are located in the vehicle as shown in the
illustration.
4
* - Located in the passenger’s side as well.

Features and controls
Break-in recommendations ..............................................................5-3 Cautions on the handling of 4-wheel drive vehicles .....................5-91
Keys .................................................................................................5-3 Service brake .................................................................................5-92
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) ........................5-4 Brake auto hold (if so equipped) ....................................................5-93 5
Keyless entry system (if so equipped) ..............................................5-7 Hill start assist (if so equipped) ......................................................5-95
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) Brake assist system ........................................................................5-96
(if so equipped) ..........................................................................5-13 Anti-lock braking system ..............................................................5-97
Door locks ......................................................................................5-34 Electric power steering system (EPS) ...........................................5-99
Power door locks ...........................................................................5-36 Active stability control (ASC) .....................................................5-100
Child safety locks for rear door .....................................................5-37 Cruise control (if so equipped) .....................................................5-102
Liftgate (except for vehicles equipped with the power liftgate) ....5-38 Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) (if so equipped)............5-106
Power liftgate (if so equipped) .......................................................5-39 Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM) (if so equipped).... 5-117
Inside liftgate release .....................................................................5-46 Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System (if so equipped) ..5-127
Theft-alarm system ........................................................................5-46 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (with Lane Change Assist) (if so
Power window control ...................................................................5-49 equipped) ..................................................................................5-131
Sunroof (if so equipped) .................................................................5-51 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) .......................5-136
Parking brake .................................................................................5-53 Lane Departure Warning System (LDW) (if so equipped)...........5-139
Steering wheel height and reach adjustment ..................................5-57 Tire pressure monitoring system .................................................5-142
Inside rearview mirror ...................................................................5-57 Parking sensors (Front/Rear) (if so equipped)..............................5-147
Outside rearview mirrors ...............................................................5-60 Rear-view camera (if so equipped)...............................................5-151
Ignition switch ...............................................................................5-63 Multi Around Monitor (if so equipped)........................................5-154
Steering wheel lock (if so equipped) ..............................................5-65 Instrument cluster ........................................................................5-163
Starting the engine .........................................................................5-66 Multi Information display - Type 1 .............................................5-164
Automatic transaxle (if so equipped)..............................................5-67 Multi Information display - Type 2 .............................................5-183
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)..........5-75 Indicator light, warning light, and information
Electronically controlled 4WD system (if so equipped).................5-82 screen display list (multi information display - Type 1) ..........5-191
S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control) (if so equipped) .....................5-85 Indicator and warning light package
4-wheel drive operation .................................................................5-88 (multi information display - Type 2) .......................................5-214
Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation ........5-91 Indicators .....................................................................................5-215
Features and controls
Warning lights ............................................................................. 5-216 Luggage hooks ............................................................................ 5-283

Information screen display
5 (Vehicle equipped with the multi information display - Type 1)
.................................................................................................. 5-219
Combination headlights and dimmer switch ............................... 5-220
Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped) .................................. 5-229
Turn signal lever .......................................................................... 5-230
Hazard warning flasher switch .................................................... 5-231
ECO mode switch ........................................................................ 5-231
Front fog light switch (if so equipped)......................................... 5-231
Wiper and washer switch ............................................................ 5-232
Wiper deicer switch (if so equipped)............................................ 5-237
Electric rear window defogger switch ......................................... 5-237
Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped)............................. 5-239
Horn switch ................................................................................. 5-239
Link System ................................................................................. 5-239
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface .............................................................. 5-240
USB input terminal ...................................................................... 5-263
Sun visors .................................................................................... 5-266
12 V power outlets ...................................................................... 5-267
HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped) ............... 5-268
Interior lights ............................................................................... 5-273
Storage spaces ............................................................................. 5-276
Cup holders ................................................................................. 5-279
Bottle holders .............................................................................. 5-280
Cargo area cover (if so equipped) ............................................... 5-281
Assist grips .................................................................................. 5-283
Coat hooks ................................................................................... 5-283
Break-in recommendations
Break-in recommendations Keys Type 2

N00508701366 N00508801716
Two F.A.S.T.-keys and two emergency keys
Advanced automobile manufacturing tech- are provided.
niques permit you to operate your new vehi- Type 1 Keep one F.A.S.T.-key and one emergency
cle without requiring a long break-in period key in a safe place together as a set of spare
of low-speed driving. Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks.
keys.
However, you can add to the future perfor- Keep one in a safe place as a spare key.
mance and economy of your vehicle by 5
observing the following precautions during
the first 300 miles (500 km).
Drive your vehicle at moderate speeds during
the break-in period.
 Avoid revving the engine.

 Avoid rough driving such as sudden starts,
sudden acceleration, prolonged high-
speed driving and sudden braking. These
actions would have a detrimental effect on
the engine and lead to increased fuel and 1- F.A.S.T.-key
1- Key for the electronic immobilizer and
oil consumption; this could ultimately (with electronic immobilizer and key-
keyless entry system
result in the malfunction of engine com- less entry system function)
2- Key number plate
ponents. Be particularly careful to avoid 2- Emergency key
full acceleration while in low shift posi- 3- Key number plate
tion (low gears).
 Do not overload the vehicle. Stay within
the seating capacity. (Refer to “Cargo load NOTE
precautions” on page 6-10.)  The key is a precision electronic device with
 Refrain from towing a trailer or other a built-in signal transmitter. Please observe
vehicle (Refer to “Trailer towing” on page the following in order to prevent damage.
6-11). • Do not leave where it may be exposed to
heat caused by direct sunlight, such as on
top of the dashboard.
Features and controls 5-3

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)

[Except for vehicles equipped with the Free-
NOTE NOTE hand Advanced Security Transmitter
• Do not take the remote control transmitter  No keys other than those registered in
(F.A.S.T.-key)]
apart. advance can be used to start the engine.
The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
• Do not excessively bend the key or subject Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft
starting system)” on page 5-4. nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
it to strong impacts.
Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
• Keep the remote control transmitter dry.
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): “Electronic bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
• Keep away from magnetic objects such as
attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
5 key rings. immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)” on
page 5-18. achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
• Keep away from devices that produce mag-
netism, such as audio systems, computers  When the theft-alarm is in the system opera- a key “registered” to the immobilizer system.
and televisions. tional status, the alarm operates if a door or All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
liftgate is opened after using the key, the cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s
• Keep away from devices that emit strong
electromagnetic waves, such as cellular door lock knob or the power door lock electronics.
switch to unlock the vehicle.
phones, wireless devices and high fre-
quency equipment (including medical  The system does not enter the preparation
devices). status if the keyless entry system or the NOTE
F.A.S.T.-key operation was not used to lock  In the following cases, the vehicle may not
• Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners.
the vehicle. be able to recognize the registered ID code
• Do not leave the key where it may be
from the key. This means the engine will not
exposed to high temperature or high humid-
start even when the key is turned to the
ity. Electronic immobilizer “START” position.
 If you lose your key, to prevent the theft of
the vehicle immediately contact an autho- (Anti-theft starting system) • When the key contacts a key ring or other
metallic or magnetic object
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. N00509101888
If you notify an authorized Mitsubishi [For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand
Motors dealer of the key number, they can Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
make a new key. The key number is stamped
key)]
on the key number plate. Keep the key num-
For information on operations for vehicles
ber plate in a safe place separate from the
key itself. equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to
“Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
(F.A.S.T.-key): Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
theft starting system)” on page 5-18.
5-4 Features and controls


Take your vehicle and all remaining keys to
NOTE NOTE your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to
• When the key grip contacts metal of  Electronic immobilizer is not compatible
have your ID code changed.
another key with commercially available remote starting
systems. Use of commercially available
remote starting systems may result in vehicle Additional keys
starting problems and a loss of security pro-
tection.
To add a key, you must already have 2 regis-
 A system failure is suspected when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “START” posi- tered keys. You need to register the ID code 5
tion, and the engine does not start. In such a to the vehicle.
case, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Registering the ID code can be done by your-
Motors dealer. self (except for vehicles sold in Canada), or
• When the key contacts or is close to other by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
immobilizer keys (including keys of other For you to register the ID code yourself, fol-
vehicles) CAUTION low the “Customer key programming” proce-
 Do not make any alterations or additions to dure below.
the immobilizer system. Alterations or addi- If you choose to have your authorized Mit-
tions could cause failure of the immobilizer. subishi Motors dealer register the ID code,
take your vehicle and all remaining keys to
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Replacement keys
NOTE
Only keys that have been programmed to the  You are provided with 2 keys, but you may
 In cases like the above, move the offending
vehicle’s electronics can be used to start the register up to 8 keys.
object(s) away from the key and turn the key
vehicle.
back to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
Then try to start the engine again. If the
If you lose the key, you can order a key from
engine does not start, contact an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by
 The key may not operate properly when it is
referring to the key number.
near an object or facility that emits strong To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the
electromagnetic waves. vehicle keys must be changed.


4. When the immobilizer display starts
Customer key programming blinking, turn the second valid key to the
NOTE
(Except for vehicles sold in “OFF” or “LOCK” position and remove  Perform the operation when the interrupt dis-
play screen is not showing. The interrupt dis-
Canada) it. Within 30 seconds after doing so, insert
play screen may prevent you from seeing the
N00562201149 a blank immobilizer key into the ignition immobilizer display.
You can program new keys to the system if switch and turn it to the “ON” position.  It is not possible to register a key if:
you have two valid (already registered) keys Perform this operation no more than 30 • the immobilizer display goes off during the
seconds after the immobilizer display
5 and blank immobilizer key (specially cut for
starts blinking. When registration of the
procedure
your vehicle at your Mitsubishi Motors • the immobilizer display does not come on
dealer) by doing the following: ID code is complete, the immobilizer dis- within 30 seconds after step 4.
play will come on for 30 seconds then go  The procedure will be terminated automati-
1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition off. If an error occurs, the blinking immo- cally if:
switch and turn the key to the “ON” posi- bilizer display will go off during the pro- • a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
tion for 5 seconds. cedure. from the moment when the first key is
2. Turn the key to the “OFF” or “LOCK” turned to the “OFF” or “LOCK” position to
position and remove the first key. Type 1 the moment when the second key is turned
to the “ON” position
3. Within 30 seconds of removing the first
• a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
key, insert the second valid key into the
from the moment when the second key is
ignition and turn it to the “ON” position. turned to the “OFF” or “LOCK” position to
About 10 seconds later, the immobilizer the moment when the blank immobilizer
display will start to blink. key is turned to the “ON” position
Type 2
 To use the new remote control transmitters, it
is necessary to register the key with both the
electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys-
tem.
Also refer to “Keyless entry system: Cus-
tomer remote control transmitter program-
ming” on page 5-10.
5. If you wish to register another key, per-
form the process again from step 1.

Keyless entry system (if so equipped)
General information Keyless entry system (if so NOTE

N00562301094  On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-
equipped)
Your electronic immobilizer operates on a tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors auto-
N00509002028
matically retract or extend when the doors
radio frequency subject to Federal Communi-
Press the remote control transmitter buttons and the liftgate are locked or unlocked using
cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi-
to lock or unlock the doors and the liftgate. the remote control switches of the keyless
cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada entry system.
It can also help you signal for attention by
Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This
device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules
setting off the panic alarm. Refer to “Features and controls: Outside
rearview mirrors” on page 5-60.
5
and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS
standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two con- To lock
ditions.
 This device may not cause harmful inter- Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the
ference. doors and the liftgate.
 This device must accept any interference The turn signal lights will also blink once.
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation. NOTE
 On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-
CAUTION 1- LOCK ( ) button tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors auto-
matically retract when the LOCK button(1)
 Changes or modifications not expressly 2- UNLOCK ( ) button is pressed.
approved by the manufacturer for compli- 3- PANIC button  If you press the LOCK button (1) twice the
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
4- Indicator light horn will sound once.
ate the equipment.
To unlock
Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the

driver’s door only.


Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCK In a vehicle equipped with the Mitsubishi
button one more time to unlock all the doors
Operation of the outside rear- Multi-Communication System, it is possible
and liftgate. view mirrors (Vehicles to change the setting by means of screen
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds. equipped with the mirror operations.
The turn signal lights will also blink twice. retractor switch) Refer to the separate owner’s manual for
The front side-marker and parking lights will details.
also turn on for about 30 seconds. Refer to
“Welcome light” on page 5-228.
5 To retract Answerback function
NOTE Within 30 seconds of locking the doors and The horn and turn signal lights of the keyless
 On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac- entry system answerback function can be
liftgate using the LOCK button, press the
tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors auto-
LOCK button twice rapidly to retract the out- changed as required. This is done with the
matically extend when the UNLOCK
button(2) is pressed. side rearview mirrors. key removed from the ignition switch.
 On vehicles equipped with a Mitsubishi
Multi-Communication System, the functions To extend NOTE
can be adjusted on the screen. For details,  The answerback function will not operate if
refer to the separate operation manual. any of the doors are open.
Within 30 seconds of unlocking the doors and
 The door and liftgate unlock function can be
set so that all doors and liftgate unlock when
liftgate using the UNLOCK button, press the
the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed once. UNLOCK button twice rapidly to return the
outside rearview mirrors to their extended Horn deactivation/reactivation
Refer to “Setting of door and liftgate unlock
function” on page 5-9. positions.
The answerback function can be set in the
The outside rearview mirrors are not initially following three ways.
set to work as described above. If you want Each time the answerback function is set, a
them to work as described above, you need to chime will sound to tell you the condition of
set them so that they do not retract/extend the answerback function.
when the doors and liftgate are
locked/unlocked using the keyless entry sys- One chime: The horn will not sound.
tem. Two chimes: The horn will sound.
For details, please consult an authorized Mit-


Four chimes: The horn will sound if the 3. Press the UNLOCK button (2) for 4 to 10
seconds and press the LOCK button (1)
Setting of door and liftgate
LOCK button is pressed twice
within 1 second. during this time. unlock function
4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and N00543601160
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. LOCK buttons within 5 seconds of press- The door and liftgate unlock function can be
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the coming the LOCK button in step 3. set to the following two conditions.
bination headlights and dimmer switch to Each time the door and liftgate unlock func-
the “OFF” position. Number of tion is set, a chime will sound to tell you the
3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec- chimes
To lock To unlock
condition of the door and liftgate unlock
5
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2) One chime One flash Two flashes function.
during this time.
4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and Two chimes One flash No flash
Number of
LOCK buttons within 5 seconds of press- Three chimes No flash Two flashes Condition
chimes
ing the UNLOCK button in step 3. Four chimes Two flashes One flash All doors and the liftgate
One chime
Five chimes No flash One flash unlock
NOTE
 On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi Six chimes Two flashes No flash Two chimes Driver’s door unlock only
Multi-Communication System, the functions Seven
can be adjusted on the screen. For details, No flash No flash
chimes 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
refer to the separate operation manual.
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
bination headlights and dimmer switch to
NOTE the “OFF” position.
Turn signal lights deactiva-  On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi 3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec-
tion/reactivation Multi-Communication System, the functions onds and press the UNLOCK button (2)
can be adjusted on the screen. For details, during this time.
The answerback function can be turned ON 4. Release in sequence the LOCK and
or OFF separately. UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
pressing the LOCK button in step 3.
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
bination headlights and dimmer switch to
the “OFF” position.


your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by
NOTE referring to the key number.
Customer remote control trans-
 On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi
To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the mitter programming (Except
Multi-Communication System, the functions
can be adjusted on the screen. For details,
remote control transmitter must be changed. for vehicles sold in Canada)
refer to the separate operation manual. Take your vehicle and all remote control N00544001190
transmitters to your authorized Mitsubishi You can program new remote control trans-
Motors dealer to have your ID code changed. mitters to the system if you have one valid
5 Using the panic alarm (already registered) remote control transmit-
N00543701060 Additional remote control ter by doing the following:
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat- transmitters 1. Have available all (current and new)
ened, you may activate the alarm to call atten- N00543900049
remote control transmitters you wish to
tion as follows: To add a remote control transmitter, you must register.
already have 1 registered remote control 2. With a valid (already registered) remote
1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than
transmitter. control transmitter, press the UNLOCK
1 second.
Registering the ID code can be done by your- button (2) for 4 to 10 seconds. Then press
2. The headlights will blink on and off and
self or by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors and hold the LOCK button (1).
the horn will sound intermittently for
dealer. For you to register the ID code your- 3. Within 10 seconds of pressing the LOCK
about 3 minutes.
self, follow the “Customer remote control button, release the LOCK and UNLOCK
3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on
transmitter programming” procedure below. buttons in sequence.
the remote control transmitter.
If you choose to have your authorized At this time, ID codes for all remote con-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID trol transmitters except for the transmitter
Replacement remote control code, take your vehicle and any remaining used in steps 2 and 3 are erased and the
transmitters keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors answerback function (door is locked and
N00543801087
dealer. unlocked) informs you that the registra-
tion mode has been activated.
Only remote control transmitters pro-
grammed with the vehicle’s electronics can NOTE 4. Within 60 seconds after step 3, complete
 You are provided with 2 remote control the following ID code registration opera-
lock or unlock all doors and the liftgate.
transmitters, but you may register up to 8 tion using the next remote control trans-
If you lose the remote control transmitter, you remote control transmitters. mitter you wish to register within 4
can order a remote control transmitter from seconds.


i) Press both the LOCK and UNLOCK
buttons for 2 seconds.
NOTE NOTE
 If the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed when  To use the new remote control transmitters, it
ii) Release both the LOCK and UNLOCK
all doors and the liftgate are locked and no is necessary to register the key with both the
buttons for 1 second.
doors or the liftgate are opened within about electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys-
iii) Press the UNLOCK button. The 30 seconds, the doors and the liftgate will tem.
answerback function informs you that the automatically re-lock. Also refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
ID code registration of the transmitter is On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi theft starting system): Customer key pro-
completed.
5. To register the ID codes of additional
gramming” on page 5-6.
5
remote control transmitters, repeat step 4 refer to the separate operation manual.
within 60 seconds after step 4.  If the following conditions are observed after
General information
N00546101124
6. If no ID code of a remote control trans- pressing the LOCK (1) or UNLOCK (2) but-
mitter is registered within 60 seconds ton on the remote control transmitter, the Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
battery in the remote control transmitter may frequency subject to Federal Communica-
after step 4, the registration mode is can-
need to be replaced. tions Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles
celed and the normal mode returns.
• The doors and the liftgate cannot be locked sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules
or unlocked. (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device
NOTE • The panic alarm cannot be operated. complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and
 For verification purposes, try to lock and • The indicator light (4) is dim or does not Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS stan-
unlock the doors after the registration is come on.
dard(s).
completed.  If you lose your remote control transmitter,
Operation is subject to the following two con-
 The indicator light (4) comes on each time a please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer for a replacement.
ditions.
button is pressed.
 The keyless entry system does not work if  If you wish to obtain an additional remote
 This device may not cause harmful inter-
the key is in the ignition switch. control transmitter, please contact an autho-
ference.
 The remote control transmitter can be used rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. A maximum
of 8 remote control transmitters can be pro-  This device must accept any interference
from about 40 feet (12 m) away. However,
grammed for your vehicle. received, including interference that may
this distance may change if your vehicle is
near a TV transmitting tower, a power sta- cause undesired operation.
tion, or a radio station.


3. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,
CAUTION insert the cloth-cov-ered tip of a flat blade
NOTE
 Changes or modifications not expressly  The Federal Communications Commission
screwdriver into the notch in the remote
approved by the manufacturer for compli- (FCC) ID number, the Industry Canada (IC)
control transmitter case and use it to open
ance could void the user’s authority to oper- number and the model number (radio certifi-
ate the equipment. the case. cation) are indicated in the illustrated posi-
tion.
5 Procedure for replacing the

remote control transmitter bat-
tery
N00544101205
1. Before replacing the battery, remove static

electricity from your body by touching a
metal grounded object.
2. Remove the screw (A) from the remote 4. Remove the old battery.
control transmitter. 5. Install a new battery with the +side (B)
NOTE up.
 Be sure to perform the procedure with the
Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the Mitsubi-
shi mark is not facing you when you open the + side
remote control transmitter case, the buttons
may come out.
- side
Coin type bat-

tery CR1620
6. Close the remote control transmitter case

firmly.
7. Attach the screw (A) removed in step 2.

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

8. Check the keyless entry system to see that system” on page 5-30.
it works.
The F.A.S.T.-key must be carried by the
driver. The F.A.S.T.-key is required for
NOTE
vehicle operations such as locking and
 You may purchase a replacement battery at
unlocking the doors and the liftgate,
an electric appliance store.
starting the engine and changing the
 An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can
operation mode. When leaving the vehi-
replace the battery for you if you prefer.
cle, make sure you are carrying the
5
F.A.S.T.-key and then lock the vehicle.
CAUTION
 When the remote control transmitter case is
opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc.
WARNING
out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-  Individuals who use implantable pace-
nents. makers or implantable cardiovascular- A- External transmitter
defibrillators should keep away from the
B- Internal transmitter
external and internal transmitters. The
electromagnetic waves used in the
Free-hand Advanced Secu- F.A.S.T.-key may affect the operation of
WARNING
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.- implantable pacemakers and implantable
cardiovascular-defibrillators.  Individuals using other electro-medical
key) (if so equipped) apparatus besides implantable pacemak-
N00503101163
ers and implantable cardiovascular-defi-
brillators should check with the
The Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit- manufacturer of the apparatus to confirm
ter (F.A.S.T.-key) enables the doors and the the effect of the electromagnetic waves
liftgate to be locked and unlocked, the engine used by the F.A.S.T.-key. The electromag-
to be started and the operation mode to be netic waves may affect the operations of
the electro-medical apparatus.
changed simply by carrying it.
The F.A.S.T.-key can also be used as the
remote control transmitter of the keyless
entry system.
Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Keyless entry

The operations possible with the F.A.S.T.-
key can be modified as stated below.
NOTE
Use the emergency key in such circum-
(Keyless entry operations are possible.)
stances.
For details, contact an authorized Mitsubi-
Refer to “To operate without using the
shi Motors dealer. F.A.S.T.-key” on page 5-28.
• Enabling only the locking and unlocking  The F.A.S.T.-key is constantly performing
of the doors and the liftgate reception operations in its communication
• Enabling only the starting of the engine
5 • Deactivating the F.A.S.T.-key
with the vehicle. This means that the battery
is always running down, regardless of how
often the F.A.S.T.-key is used. The battery
life is about 1 to 3 years, depending on the
NOTE usage conditions.
 The F.A.S.T.-key uses weak electromagnetic  Since the F.A.S.T.-key is constantly perform- NOTE
waves. ing reception operations, the reception of  When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key has run
In cases such as the following, operation strong electromagnetic waves can accelerate down or there are strong electromagnetic
may be improper or unstable. the running down of the battery. Do not place waves or noise in the area, the operating
• The vehicle is near a facility that emits near to electrical appliances such as televi- range could decrease or operations could
strong electromagnetic waves, such as a TV sions or computers. become unstable.
transmitting tower, a power station, a radio
station or an airport
• The key is carried together with other com- Operating range of the
Operating range for locking and
munication devices such as cellular phones F.A.S.T.-key
or radios, or electrical appliances such as N00503201177
unlocking the doors and the lift-
computers
When a person enters the operating range of
gate
• The F.A.S.T.-key touches or is covered by a
metal object the F.A.S.T.-key while carrying the F.A.S.T.-
key and presses the driver’s or front passen- The operating range is within about 2.3 feet
• A keyless entry system is being used
ger’s door lock/unlock switch, the liftgate (70 cm) of the handles of the driver’s door,
nearby
LOCK switch or the liftgate OPEN switch, front passenger door and liftgate.
• The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key is run down
• The vehicle is in a location with strong verification of the ID code is performed.
electromagnetic waves or noise The doors and the liftgate can be locked and
unlocked and the engine can be started only
when the ID codes of the vehicle and
F.A.S.T.-key match.

Operating range for starting the NOTE

engine and changing the opera-  Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is inside the vehicle,
tion mode it may not be possible to start the engine and
N00503301077
change the operation mode if the key is too
close to a door or door window.
The operating range is the interior of the
vehicle.
To operate using the F.A.S.T.-
key 5
N00503401283
*: Front of the vehicle

To lock
: Operating range
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, press the

NOTE driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock
 The door or liftgate switch can only be used switch (A), or the liftgate LOCK switch (B)
for locking or unlocking when a matching within the operating range to lock all the
F.A.S.T.-key is detected. doors and the liftgate.
 The system may not operate if the F.A.S.T.- *: Front of the vehicle The turn signal lights will blink once and the
key is too close to the windshield, door win- : Operating range buzzer will sound once.
dows or liftgate.
 Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within about 2.3 Also refer to “Doors locks”, “Power door
feet (70 cm) of the handle of the driver’s NOTE locks”, “Liftgate” and “Power liftgate” on
door, front passenger’s door or liftgate, the  Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operat-
pages 5-34, 5-36, 5-38 and 5-39 respectively.
system may not operate if the key is close to
ing range, it may not be possible to start the
the ground or in a high position.
engine and change the operation mode if the
 If the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operating key is in a storage space such as the glove
range, even a person not carrying the compartment, on top of the instrument panel,
F.A.S.T.-key can lock and unlock the doors or in the door pocket or luggage compart-
or the liftgate by pressing the driver’s or ment.
front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch,
the liftgate LOCK switch or the liftgate
OPEN switch.


Press the driver’s door lock/unlock switch
Driver’s and front passenger’s door lock/unlock NOTE (A) to unlock only the driver’s door.
switches • There is a F.A.S.T.-key in the passenger
Within about 2 seconds, press the driver’s
compartment
door lock/unlock switch one more time to
• A door or the liftgate is open or ajar
unlock all the doors and the liftgate.
• The operation mode is not in OFF.
 The liftgate OPEN switch (C) can be used to
confirm that the vehicle is locked properly. Driver’s door lock/unlock switch
5 Press the liftgate OPEN switch within about
3 seconds of locking.
 If the liftgate OPEN switch is pressed 3 sec-
onds or more after the vehicle is locked, the
doors and the liftgate are unlocked.
Liftgate switches  The time within which locking confirmation
is possible can be adjusted. See an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.
On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi
Multi-Communication System, the function
refer to the separate operation manual. NOTE
 On the vehicles equipped with the mirror
To unlock retractor switch, the outside rearview mirrors
automatically extend when the driver’s door
is unlocked using the driver’s lock/unlock
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key within the switch (A), front passenger’s door
NOTE operating range, you can unlock the doors lock/unlock switch (B) or the liftgate open
 On the vehicles equipped with the mirror and the liftgate by using the F.A.S.T.-key switch (C).
retractor switch, the outside rearview mirrors operation.  Settings can be changed so that all doors and
automatically retract when all doors and lift- The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds. the liftgate are unlocked automatically by
gate are locked using the driver’s or front The turn signal lights will blink twice and the pressing the driver’s door lock/unlock switch
passenger’s door lock/unlock switch (A) or once.
buzzer will sound twice.
the lift gate lock switch (B). Refer to “Setting of door and liftgate unlock
 In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.- Also refer to “Door locks”, “Power door function” on page 5-32.
key does not operate.
locks”, “Liftgate” and “Power liftgate” on
pages 5-34, 5-36, 5-38 and 5-39 respectively.

Press the front passenger’s door lock/unlock
switch (B) or the liftgate OPEN switch (C) to
NOTE NOTE
 If the doors and the liftgate are unlocked  Functions settings can be modified as stated
unlock all the doors and the liftgate.
using the driver’s or front passenger’s door below.
lock/unlock switch when all doors and the See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
Front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch liftgate are locked and no doors or the lift- for details.
gate are opened within about 30 seconds, the On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi
doors and the liftgate will automatically re- Multi-Communication System, the functions
lock.
 The amount of time after unlocking until the
5
vehicle re-locks automatically can be • Activating the operation confirmation func-
adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi tion (blinking of the turn signal lights) only
Motors dealer for details. during locking, or only during unlocking.
On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi • Deactivating the operation confirmation
Multi-Communication System, the functions function (blinking of the turn signal lights)
can be adjusted on the screen. For details, and buzzer.
refer to the separate operation manual. • Modifying the number of blinks in the
Liftgate OPEN switch  In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.- operation confirmation function (blinking
key does not operate. of the turn signal lights).
• A door or the liftgate is open or ajar • Making the buzzer sound when the
• The operation mode is not in OFF. F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger
 The doors and the liftgate cannot be compartment when all the doors and the
unlocked by using the liftgate OPEN switch liftgate are closed.
for about 3 seconds after locking.
 The time within which locking confirmation
is possible can be adjusted. See an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.
On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi
Multi-Communication System, the function


On vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi
Operation of the outside rear- Multi-Communication System, it is possible
Engine switch
view mirrors (Vehicles to change the setting by means of screen
N00513501115
To prevent vehicle theft, no F.A.S.T.-keys

equipped with the mirror operations.
other than those registered in advance can be
retractor switch) Refer to the separate owner’s manual for
used to start the engine. (Electronic immobi-
details.
N00585700027 lizer function)
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, the engine
5 To retract NOTE switch can be used to start the engine.
 On vehicles with F.A.S.T.-key and equipped
with the mirror retractor switch, the outside
Within 30 seconds of locking the doors and
rearview mirrors automatically retract when
liftgate using the LOCK switch, press the all the doors and liftgate are locked using the
LOCK switch twice rapidly to retract the out- F.A.S.T.-key function.
side rearview mirrors. Refer to “Features and controls: Outside
rearview mirrors” on page 5-60.
To extend
Within 30 seconds of unlocking the doors and Electronic immobilizer (Anti-

liftgate using the UNLOCK switch, press the theft starting system)
UNLOCK switch twice rapidly to return the N00529600114
outside rearview mirrors to their extended The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
positions. nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
CAUTION
 The indicator light (A) will flash orange
theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
The outside rearview mirrors are not initially when there is a problem or malfunction in
bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
set to work as described above. If you want Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter.
attempted. A valid start attempt can only be Never drive if the indicator light on the
them to work as described above, you need to
achieved (subject to certain conditions) using engine switch is flashing orange. Immedi-
set them so that they do not retract/extend
a F.A.S.T.-Key “registered” to the immobi- ately contact your authorized Mitsubishi
when the doors and liftgate are
lizer system. Motors dealer.
locked/unlocked using the F.A.S.T.-key or the
All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
keyless entry system of the F.A.S.T.-key.
cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s
For details, please consult an authorized Mit-
electronics.


The indicator light on the engine switch illu-
CAUTION minates orange.
 If the engine switch operation is not smooth
and feels like it is sticking, do not operate the
switch.  ON
Immediately contact an authorized Mitsubi-
shi Motors dealer. All electrical accessories can be used.
The indicator light on the engine switch illu-
NOTE
minates green. 5
The indicator light goes off when the engine
 When operating the engine switch, press the is running.
switch all the way in. If the switch is not
fully pressed, the engine may not start or the
operation mode may not change. If the NOTE CAUTION
engine switch is pressed correctly, there is no  Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic  When the engine is not running, put the oper-
need to hold the engine switch down. immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code ation mode in OFF. Leaving the operation
which the F.A.S.T.-key sends must match the mode in ON or ACC for a long time when
one registered to the immobilizer computer. the engine is not running may cause the bat-
(Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft tery to be discharged, making it impossible
Operation mode of the engine starting system)” on page 5-18) to start the engine.
switch and its function  When the battery is disconnected, the current
operation mode is memorized. After recon-
Changing the operation mode necting the battery, the memorized mode is
 OFF N00568001035 selected automatically. Before disconnect-
ing the battery for repair or replacement,
If you press the engine switch without press- make sure to put the operation mode in OFF.
The indicator light on the engine switch turns
ing the brake pedal while the vehicle is sta- Be careful if you are not sure which opera-
off.
tionary, you can change the operation mode tion mode the vehicle is in when the battery
The operation mode cannot be put in OFF
in the order of OFF, ACC, ON, OFF. is run down.
when the selector lever is in any position
 The operation mode cannot be changed from
other than the “P” (PARK) position.
OFF to ACC or ON if the F.A.S.T.-key is not
detected to be in the vehicle. Refer to “Oper-
 ACC ating range for starting the engine and
changing the operation mode” on page 5-15.
Allows operation of electrical accessories.

ACC power auto-cutout function NOTE NOTE

N00568101023  It is possible to modify functions as follows: For details, we recommend you to consult an
After approximately 30 minutes has elapsed • The time until the power cuts out can be authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
with the operation mode in ACC, the function changed to approximately 60 minutes. On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi
automatically cuts out the power for the audio • The ACC power auto-cutout function can Motors Multi-Communication System,
be deactivated. screen operations can be used to make the
system and other electric devices that can be
adjustment.
operated with that mode.
5 When the engine switch is pressed while the
Refer to the separate Mitsubishi Multi-Com-
munications System manual for details.
operation mode is in ACC, the power is sup-
plied again to those devices.
Warning activation
N00503501213
With the F.A.S.T.-key, warnings are given through buzzers and displays on the information screen in the multi information display in order to pre-
vent mistaken operations or vehicle theft.
When a warning operates, be sure to check the vehicle and the F.A.S.T.-key. A warning is also displayed if there is a problem in the F.A.S.T.-key.
Type 1: Color liquid crystal display type Type 2: Mono-color liquid crystal display type
Type 1 Type 2
Item Solution Note
Display Buzzer Indicator Buzzer
Detection of Inner buzzer No sounds There is a problem in the F.A.S.T.- —
failure sounds once key.
Illuminates


Type 1 Type 2
Item Solution Note
Fall of battery Inner buzzer No sounds The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key is The warning is not activated if the
voltage sounds once run down. battery is completely dead.
Blinks
F.A.S.T.-key Inner buzzer Inner buzzer When the vehicle is parked with •The F.A.S.T.-key take-out moni- 5
take-out mon- sounds once sounds once the operation mode in any mode toring system does not function if
itoring system other than OFF, if you close the the F.A.S.T.-key is removed
Outer Outer door after opening any of the through a window without open-
Blinks
buzzer buzzer doors and taking the F.A.S.T.-key ing a door.
sounds sounds out of the vehicle, a warning is This setting can be changed.
intermit- intermit- issued until the F.A.S.T.-key is Contact an authorized Mitsubishi
tently tently detected in the vehicle. Motors dealer for details.
•The warning may display even if

the F.A.S.T.-key is in the operating
range for starting the engine and
changing the operation mode. The
surrounding environment or elec-
tromagnetic waves may make it
impossible to verify the ID codes
of the F.A.S.T.-key and vehicle.


Type 1 Type 2
Item Solution Note
Key lock-in Inner buzzer Outer When the operation mode is in Make sure you have the F.A.S.T.-
prevention sounds once buzzer OFF, the F.A.S.T.-key is left in the key with you before locking the
system sounds passenger compartment, all the doors. Even if you leave the
Outer about 3 sec- doors and the liftgate are closed, F.A.S.T.-key inside the vehicle, it
Blinks
buzzer onds inter- and someone tries to lock the vehi- is possible that the doors will lock
5 sounds mittently cle by pressing the driver’s or depending on the surrounding
about 3 sec- front passenger’s door lock/unlock environment and wireless signal
onds inter- switch, or the liftgate LOCK conditions.
mittently switch, a warning is issued and
you cannot lock the doors and lift-
gate.
Door ajar pre- Inner buzzer Outer When the operation mode is in —
vention sys- sounds once buzzer OFF, and someone tries to lock the
tem sounds vehicle by pressing the driver’s or
Outer about 3 sec- front passenger’s door lock/unlock
Blinks
buzzer onds inter- switch, or the liftgate LOCK
sounds mittently switch while one of the doors or
about 3 sec- the liftgate is not fully closed, a
onds inter- warning is issued and you cannot
mittently lock the doors and liftgate.


Type 1 Type 2
Item Solution Note
Operation Inner buzzer Outer When the operation mode is in any —
mode OFF sounds once buzzer mode other than OFF, all the doors
reminder sys- sounds and the liftgate are closed, and
tem Outer about 3 sec- someone tries to lock the vehicle
Blinks
buzzer onds inter- by pressing the driver’s or front
sounds mittently passenger’s door lock/unlock 5
about 3 sec- switch, or the liftgate LOCK
onds inter- switch, a warning is issued and
mittently you cannot lock the doors and lift-
gate.

Steering wheel lock (if so equipped) To unlock NOTE

N00514301080  When the steering wheel does not unlock,
The following methods can be used to unlock the warning display will appear. Press the
the steering wheel. engine switch again while moving the steer-
To lock ing wheel slightly right and left.
 Put the operation mode in ACC.
Warning display
After pressing the engine switch and opera-  Start the engine.
5 tion mode in OFF, when driver’s door is
opened, the steering wheel is locked.
WARNING
 If the engine is stopped while driving, do
NOTE not open a door or press the LOCK switch
 When the following operation is performed on the remote control switch until the  When the steering wheel lock is abnormal,
with the operation mode in OFF, the steering vehicle stops in a safe place. This could the warning display will appear and the inner
wheel is locked. cause the steering wheel to lock, making it buzzer will sounds. Put the operation mode
• Open or close one of the doors. (except the impossible to operate the vehicle. in OFF and then press the lock switch of the
liftgate) F.A.S.T.-key. If the warning will appear
• Lock all door and the liftgate by using the again, contact an authorized Mitsubishi
F.A.S.T.-key operation or the remote con- CAUTION Motors dealer.
trol transmitter of the F.A.S.T.-key.  Carry the F.A.S.T.-key with you when leav-
warning display
 When the driver’s door is opened while the ing the vehicle.
steering wheel does not unlock, warning dis- If your vehicle needs to be towed, put the
play will appear and the buzzer sounds to operation mode in ACC to unlock the steer-
alert the steering wheel is unlocked. ing wheel.
Warning display


If the engine does not start, wait for a
NOTE while and then attempt to start the engine
CAUTION
 If there is a fault in the steering wheel lock,  Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive
again. Trying repeatedly with the engine
the warning display will appear. Immediately at high speeds until the engine has had a
or starter motor still turning will damage
stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact chance to warm up.
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. the starter mechanism.
 If the engine will not start because the bat-
Warning display tery is weak or discharged, refer to Starting the engine
“Jump-starting the engine” on page 8-2
for instructions. Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni-
5
 A longer warm up period will only con- cally controlled fuel injection system. This
sume extra fuel. system automatically controls fuel injection.
The engine is warmed up enough for driv- There is usually no need to depress the accel-
ing when the bar graph of engine coolant erator pedal when starting the engine.
Starting and stopping the temperature display starts to move or the To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds
low coolant temperature indicator goes between attempts to restart the engine.
engine out. Refer to “Engine coolant temperature
N00514601399
display” on page 5-171 or “Low coolant 1. Make sure all occupants are properly
temperature indicator” on page 5-215. seated with seat belts fastened.
Tips for starting 2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal down
 The operation mode can be in any mode WARNING firmly with your right foot.
to start the engine.  Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
 The starter motor will be turning for up to ventilated area any longer than is needed NOTE
approximately 15 seconds if the engine to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-
 After the engine has not started for a while,
switch is released at once. Pressing the bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and
the brake pedal effort needed to start the
engine switch again while the starter extremely poisonous, could build up and
engine may become greater. If this occurs,
cause serious injury or death.
motor is still turning will stop the starter depress the brake pedal more firmly than
motor. usual.
The starter motor will be turning for up to
approximately 30 seconds while the
CAUTION
 Do not push-start the vehicle.
4. Make sure the selector lever is in the “P”
engine switch is pressed. (PARK) position.


3. If the engine still will not start, the engine The transaxle will warm up, and you will be
NOTE could be flooded with too much gasoline. able to start normally.
 The engine can only be started when the
While depressing the brake pedal, push Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up
selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) or “N”
the accelerator pedal all the way down operation.
(NEUTRAL) position.
For safety reasons, the engine should be and hold it there, then press the engine
switch to crank the engine. If the engine Using the MIVEC engine
started when the selector lever is in the “P”
(PARK) position in which the driving wheels does not start after 5 to 6 seconds, push
The MIVEC engine automatically switches
the engine switch to stop cranking the
5 lock.
engine, and release the accelerator pedal.
its intake-valve control between a low-speed
mode and a high-speed mode in accordance
5. Press the engine switch. Put the operation mode in OFF. Wait a
with driving conditions for maximum engine
6. Confirm that all warning lights and warn- few seconds, and then press the engine
performance.
ing displays are functioning properly. switch to crank the engine again while
depressing the brake pedal, but do not
push the accelerator pedal. If the engine NOTE
NOTE fails to start, repeat these procedures. If  To protect the engine, the high-speed mode
 Minor noises may be heard on engine start- the engine still will not start, contact your may not be selected while the engine coolant
up. These will disappear as the engine warms local Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair temperature is low. In such a case, the engine
up. revolutions do not rise to over 5,000 rpm
facility of your choice for assistance.
even if the accelerator pedal is depressed.
Startability of the engine with an ambient
When the engine is hard to start
temperature of -22 °F (-30 °C) or lower
When the ambient temperature is -22 °F (-30 Stopping the engine
After several attempts, you may experience
N00568201024
that the engine still does not start. °C) or lower, it may not be possible to start
from a standstill even with the selector lever
1. Make sure that all electric devices, such
WARNING
in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE)
 Do not operate the engine switch while
as lights, air conditioning blower and rear position. driving except in an emergency. If the
window defogger, are turned off. This phenomenon occurs because the trans- engine is stopped while driving, the brake
2. While depressing the brake pedal, press axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does servomechanism will cease to function and
the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also,
there, then crank the engine. Release the the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position the power steering system will not func-
accelerator pedal, immediately after the and let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes. tion and it will require greater manual
engine starts. effort to operate the steering. This could
result in a serious accident.

NOTE If the F.A.S.T.-key is not operat- NOTE

 If you have to bring the engine to an emer- ing properly  Remove the object or additional key from the
gency stop while driving, press and hold the N00568301083
F.A.S.T.-key before inserting the key into the
engine switch for 3 seconds or more, or press key slot. The vehicle may not be able to
Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot in the
it quickly 3 times or more. The engine will receive the registered ID code from the regis-
instrument panel. Starting the engine and
stop and the operation mode will go to ACC. tered key. Therefore, the engine may not start
changing the operation mode should be now and the operation mode may not change.
 Do not stop the engine with the selector lever
possible.
in any position other than the “P” (PARK)
position. If the engine is stopped with the Remove the F.A.S.T.-key from the key slot
 The F.A.S.T.-key is fixed in the key slot
when inserted in the illustrated direction.
5
selector lever in any position other than the after starting the engine or changing the oper- Simply pull out the key to remove it from the
“P” (PARK) position, the operation mode ation mode. key slot.
will go to ACC rather than OFF.
Put the operation mode in OFF after placing
the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) posi-
F.A.S.T.-key reminder
tion.
Warning display (color liquid crystal display
type)
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Fully engage the parking brake while
depressing the brake pedal.
3. Move the selector lever to the “P”
(PARK) position, and then press the
engine switch to stop the engine.
Warning light (mono-color liquid crystal dis-
play type)
NOTE
 Do not insert into the key slot anything other
than the F.A.S.T.-key. This could cause dam-
age or a malfunction.
If the operation mode is in OFF and the
driver’s door is opened with the F.A.S.T.-key
in the key slot, a warning is issued with the
warning display and the buzzer buzzing for


approximately 3 seconds to remind you to
remove the key.
NOTE Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
 Only use the emergency key in an emer- theft starting system)
gency. When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key N00529600055
To operate without using the has run down, replace the battery as soon as
possible and use it as a F.A.S.T.-key again. The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
F.A.S.T.-key nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
 After using the emergency key, be sure to
N00514800017
reinsert it into the F.A.S.T.-key. theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
5 Emergency key attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
Locking and unlocking the driver’s door
N00515201158 achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
The emergency key is built into the F.A.S.T.- Turn the emergency key toward the front of a F.A.S.T.-Key “registered” to the immobi-
key. the vehicle to lock the door. After checking lizer system.
When the F.A.S.T.-key cannot be used, such that the door is locked, turn the emergency All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
as when the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key or the key back to the center and remove it. cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s
vehicle has run down, the emergency key can electronics.
be used to lock and unlock the driver’s door.
To use the emergency key (A), unlock the

Replacement F.A.S.T.-keys
N00561000042
lock knob (B) and remove it from the
F.A.S.T.-key (C). Only the F.A.S.T.-keys that have been pro-
grammed to the vehicle’s electronics can be
used to start the vehicle.
If you lose the F.A.S.T.-key, you can order a

F.A.S.T.-key from your authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer by referring to the key number.
1- Insert or remove the emergency key To prevent vehicle theft, take your vehicle
2- Lock and the remaining F.A.S.T.-keys to an autho-
3- Unlock rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have the ID
codes reprogrammed.


3. Insert the new F.A.S.T.-key into the key
Additional F.A.S.T.-keys Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
slot in the illustrated direction.
N00561100014 ming (Except for vehicles sold in
To add a F.A.S.T.-key, you must already have Canada)
2 registered F.A.S.T.-keys. You need to regis- N00561201227
ter the ID code to the vehicle. You can program new F.A.S.T.-keys to the
Registering the ID code can be done by your system if you have two valid (already regis-
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it tered) F.A.S.T.-keys and a blank (not regis-
can be done by yourself (except for vehicles tered) F.A.S.T.-key.
5
sold in Canada).
For you to register the ID code yourself, fol- For F.A.S.T.-key programming, follow the
low the “Customer F.A.S.T.-key program- procedures below.
ming” procedure below.
If you choose to have your authorized 1. Open the driver’s door. 4. With the first valid F.A.S.T.-key, press the
Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds and
code, take your vehicle and all remaining NOTE press the LOCK button during this time.
F.A.S.T.-keys to your authorized Mitsubishi  Keep the driver’s door open until F.A.S.T.- 5. Release in sequence the LOCK and
Motors dealer. key programming is finished. Do not open or UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
close other doors. pressing the LOCK button in step 4. (Per-
NOTE form the following procedure within 30
 You are provided with 2 F.A.S.T.-keys, but 2. While carrying the first valid F.A.S.T.- seconds.)
you may register up to 4 F.A.S.T.-keys. key, put the operation mode in ON. (Per- 6. With the second valid F.A.S.T.-key, press
You can obtain blank F.A.S.T.-keys specially form the following procedure within 30 the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds
cut for your vehicle from your Mitsubishi seconds.) and press the LOCK button during this
Motors dealer. time.


7. Release in sequence the LOCK and 3- Power liftgate button (if so equipped)
UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
NOTE 4- PANIC button
 The immobilizer display will go off immedi-
pressing the LOCK button in step 6. The 5- Operation indicator light
ately if the operation mode is put in OFF.
immobilizer display on the information
 Perform the operation when the interrupt dis-
screen in the multi-information display NOTE
play screen is not showing. The interrupt dis-
will blink. play screen may prevent you from seeing the  On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-
immobilizer display. tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors auto-
5  It is not possible to register a F.A.S.T.-key if
the immobilizer display goes off during the
matically retract or extend when the doors
and the liftgate are locked or unlocked using
procedure. the remote control transmitter buttons.
Refer to “Features and controls: Outside
When registration of ID code is complete, rearview mirrors” on page 5-60.
the buzzer will sound 3 times and the
Keyless entry system
immobilizer display will come on for 30
N00515501249
seconds. To lock
If an error occurs, F.A.S.T.-key program- Press the remote control transmitter buttons
ming will be terminated and the buzzer to lock or unlock the doors and the liftgate.
Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the
will sound for 3 seconds. It can also help you signal for attention by
doors and the liftgate.
setting off the panic alarm.
NOTE The turn signal lights will also blink once.
 F.A.S.T.-key programming will be termi-
nated if the operation mode is put in OFF
before the immobilizer display starts blink-
NOTE
ing.  On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-
tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors auto-
matically retract when the LOCK button (1)
8. If you wish to register another F.A.S.T.- is pressed.
key, repeat the process from step 1 after  If you press the LOCK button (1) twice, the
the operation mode is put in OFF. horn will sound once.
9. When all F.A.S.T.-keys are registered,
remove the F.A.S.T.-key from the key
slot. 1- LOCK ( ) button
2- UNLOCK ( ) button

To unlock Answerback function NOTE

Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the The horn and turn signal lights of the keyless Multi-Communication System, the functions
driver’s door only. entry system answerback function can be can be adjusted on the screen. For details,
changed as required. This is done with the refer to the separate operation manual.
Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCK key removed from the ignition switch.
button one more time to unlock all the doors
Turn signal light deactivation/reactiva-
and liftgate.
Horn deactivation/reactivation tion
5
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.
The turn signal lights will also blink twice. The answerback function can be set in the The answerback function from the turn signal
The front side-marker and parking lights will following three ways. lights can be turned ON or OFF separately.
also turn on for about 30 seconds. Refer to
“Welcome light” on page 5-228. One chime: The horn will not sound. 1. Put the operation mode in OFF.
Two chimes: The horn will sound. 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
NOTE Four chimes: The horn will sound if the bination headlights and dimmer switch to
 On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac- LOCK button is pressed twice the “OFF” position.
tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors auto- within 1 second. 3. Press the UNLOCK button (2) for 4 to 10
matically extend when the UNLOCK button seconds and press the LOCK button (1)
(2) is pressed. during this time.
 On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi 1. Put the operation mode in OFF. 4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and
Multi-Communication System, the functions 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
can be adjusted on the screen. For details, bination headlights and dimmer switch to pressing the LOCK button in step 3.
refer to the separate operation manual. the “OFF” position.
 The door and liftgate unlock function can be 3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec- Number of
To lock To unlock
set so that all doors and liftgate unlock when onds and press the UNLOCK button (2) chimes
the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed once. during this time. One chime One flash Two flashes
Refer to “Setting of door and liftgate unlock 4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and
function” on page 5-32. Two chimes One flash No flash
LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3. Three chimes No flash Two flashes
Four chimes Two flashes One flash
Five chimes No flash One flash


Number of condition of the door and liftgate unlock
To lock To unlock Operating the power liftgate
chimes function.
N00579500020
Six chimes Two flashes No flash After unlocking the doors and the liftgate, the
Number
Seven chimes No flash No flash Condition power liftgate can be operated by pressing the
of chimes
power liftgate button (3).
All doors and the liftgate Refer to “Power liftgate” on page 5-39.
One chime
NOTE unlock
5  On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi Two
Driver’s door unlock only Using the panic alarm
Multi-Communication System, the functions chimes N00544701067
refer to the separate operation manual. If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-
1. Put the operation mode in OFF. ened, you can activate the alarm to call atten-
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- tion as follows:
Buzzer deactivation/reactivation bination headlights and dimmer switch to
the “OFF” position. 1. Press the PANIC button (4) for more than
The buzzer answerback function can be 3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec- 1 second.
turned ON or OFF as required. onds and press the UNLOCK button (2) 2. The headlights will blink on and off and
during this time. the horn will sound intermittently for
NOTE 4. Release in sequence the LOCK and about 3 minutes.
 On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of 3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on
Multi-Communication System, the functions pressing the LOCK button in step 3. the remote control transmitter.
refer to a separate operation manual.
NOTE NOTE
 On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi  The indicator light (5) comes on each time a
Multi-Communication System, the functions button is pressed.
Setting of door and liftgate unlock can be adjusted on the screen. For details,  The F.A.S.T.-key can be used from about 40
function refer to the separate operation manual. feet (12 m) away. However, this distance
N00544601095
may change if your vehicle is near a TV
The door and liftgate unlock function can be transmitting tower, a power station, or a
set to the following two conditions. radio station.
Each time the door and liftgate unlock func-
tion is set, a chime will sound to tell you the

NOTE General information Procedure for replacing the

 If the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed when N00562001062
remote control transmitter bat-
all doors and the liftgate are locked and no
doors or the liftgate are opened within about
Your F.A.S.T.-key operates on a radio fre- tery
quency subject to Federal Communications
30 seconds, the doors and the liftgate will N00562101076
automatically re-lock. Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold 1. Before replacing the battery, remove static
On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For electricity from your body by touching a
vehicles sold in Canada). This device com- metal grounded object.
can be adjusted on the screen. For details, plies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry 2. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,
5
refer to the separate operation manual. Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). insert the cloth-covered tip of a flat blade
 If the following conditions are observed after Operation is subject to the following two con- screwdriver into the notch in the case and
pressing the LOCK (1) or UNLOCK (2) but- ditions. use it to open the case.
ton on the remote control transmitter, the •This device may not cause harmful
battery in the F.A.S.T.-key may need to be interference.
replaced.
•This device must accept any interference
• The doors and the liftgate cannot be locked
received, including interference that
or unlocked.
may cause undesired operation.
• The panic alarm cannot be operated.
• The indicator light (5) is dim or does not
come on.
 If you lose your F.A.S.T.-key, please contact CAUTION
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for a  Changes or modifications not expressly
replacement. approved by the manufacturer for compli-
 If you wish to obtain an additional F.A.S.T.- ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
key, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi ate the equipment.
Motors dealer. A maximum of four F.A.S.T.- NOTE
key can be programmed for your vehicle.  Be sure to perform the procedure with the
 To use the new remote control transmitters, it Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the Mitsubi-
is necessary to register the key with both the shi mark is not facing you when you open the
electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys- case, the transmitter may come out.
tem.
Also refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
theft starting system): Customer F.A.S.T.- 3. Remove the old battery.
key programming” on page 5-29.

Door locks
4. Install a new battery with the +side (A)
up. Door locks To lock and unlock with the key
N00509201544 (driver’s door)
+ side
WARNING Turn the key toward the front of the vehicle to
 Make sure all doors are tightly closed and lock the door. After checking that the door is
locked while driving. locked, turn the key back to the center and
- side • Locked doors, in combination with the remove it.
5 use of seat belts, can help reduce the risk
of ejection in an accident.
Coin type bat-
• Locked doors can help keep passengers,
tery CR2032
especially small children, from opening
doors and falling out of moving vehicles.
• Locked doors can help prevent outsiders
5. Close the case firmly. from gaining access to your vehicle when
6. Check the keyless entry system to see that you slow or come to a stop.
it works.  Lock your vehicle whenever you leave it.
Children who get into unlocked vehicles
may not be able to get out. Children
NOTE trapped inside vehicles can quickly be
 You may purchase a replacement battery at overcome by heat and suffer serious
1- Insert or remove the key
an electric appliance store. injury or death due to heat stroke.
2- Lock
 An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can  Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. In
3- Unlock
replace the battery for you if you prefer. addition to the risk of heat stroke, chil-
dren can activate switches and controls,
resulting in an injury or fatal accident.
CAUTION  When closing a door, make sure that the
door is fully closed and the door-ajar
 When the remote control transmitter case is
warning display goes out on the informa-
opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc.
tion screen on the multi-information dis-
out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-
play. If the door is ajar it could open while
nents.
driving and cause an accident.

Door locks
2. Be sure the keys are not inside the vehi-
NOTE To lock or unlock the door from cle. Close the door.
 When locking or unlocking with the key, the inside
only the driver’s door will be locked or
unlocked. Move the lock knob to the lock position to
To lock or unlock all doors and liftgate, use lock the door.
the power door lock switch, the keyless entry
All doors should be kept locked while driv-
system or the F.A.S.T.-key operation.
ing.
Refer to “Power door locks” on page 5-36,
“Keyless entry system” on pages 5-7 and
5
5-30, and “To operate using the F.A.S.T.-
key” on page 5-15.
 In vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key,
the driver’s door can be locked and unlocked
using the emergency key.
Refer to “Emergency key” on page 5-28.
Key reminder system (except
for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key)
N00549601250
1- Lock
2- Unlock
The driver’s door can be unlocked without

using the lock knob by pulling on the inside
door handle.
If the ignition switch is turned off and the
driver’s door is opened with the key in the
To lock the door without using ignition switch, the key reminder buzzer will
the key sound intermittently to remind you to remove
the key.
1. Move the inside lock knob to the locked The warning display will be displayed on the
position. information screen in the multi-information

Power door locks

display. (Color liquid crystal display type
only) Power door locks To lock and unlock the doors
N00509301617 and liftgate
Lock out protection NOTE
N00517301052  When locking or unlocking with the key on
Using the power door lock switch
If the key is in the ignition switch or the oper- the driver’s door, only the driver’s door will
ation mode is in any mode other than OFF, lock or unlock.
5 when you push the lock knob forward with  Repeated continuous operation between lock
and unlock could activate the power door
the driver’s door or passenger’s door open,
locking system’s built-in protection circuit,
the lock knob will automatically return to the and prevent the system from operating. If
unlocked position. this occurs, wait about 1 minute before oper-
ating the power door lock switch.
Operation mode ON reminder
system (vehicles equipped with
F.A.S.T.-key)
N00503801157
1- Lock
2- Unlock
All of the doors and the liftgate can be locked

or unlocked by pressing the power door lock
switch on the driver’s or the front passenger
If the driver’s door is opened while the engine door.
is stopped and the operation mode is in any
mode other than OFF, the operation mode ON
buzzer will sound intermittently to remind
you put the operation mode in OFF.
The warning display will be displayed on the
information screen in the multi-information
display. (Color liquid crystal display type
only)

Child safety locks for rear door
To unlock the doors and liftgate Child safety locks for rear
N00563401119
door
You can select the functions to unlock the N00509401298
doors and liftgate either using the ignition

switch position or the engine switch, or
using the selector lever position.
These functions are not activated when the
vehicle is shipped from the factory. To acti-
5
vate or deactivate these functions, please
contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
NOTE
Using the ignition switch or the Multi-Communication System, the functions
engine switch can be adjusted on the screen. For details, 1- To lock
refer to a separate operation manual. 2- To release
All doors and the liftgate will unlock when
the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” or Child safety locks help prevent rear passen-
“LOCK” position or the operation mode is gers, especially children, from opening the
put in OFF. rear door using the inside door handle.
A lock lever for the child safety lock is pro-
vided on each rear door.
Using the selector lever position When the lever is in the lock position (1), the
rear door cannot be opened using the inside
All doors and the liftgate will unlock when door handle.
the selector lever is moved to the “P” (PARK) To open the rear door when the child safety
position with the ignition switch or the opera- lock lever is in the lock position, pull the out-
tion mode in ON. side door handle.
When the lever is in the release position (2),
the child safety lock is released and the rear

Liftgate (except for vehicles equipped with the power liftgate)

door can be opened using the inside door han-
dle.
WARNING
 When opening the liftgate, always fully
open it. A partially opened liftgate can
WARNING unexpectedly close due to its own weight.
 Always keep the doors tightly closed and  When the vehicle is parked on a slope, the
locked when driving. An unlocked door effort required to open or close the liftgate
may be accidentally opened by a passen- may be greater or less than expected.
5 ger, especially by a child who could fall
out. Also, if the doors are not locked, there
The liftgate may also open or close more
quickly.
is a greater risk of someone being thrown
from the vehicle in an accident.
CAUTION
 Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when CAUTION
Liftgate (except for vehicles loading and unloading luggage. Heat from  Make sure there is no one standing nearby
the exhaust could lead to burns.
equipped with the power  To avoid damage to the liftgate, make sure
when opening the liftgate.
liftgate) that area above and behind the liftgate is

clear before opening it.
N00510101282
NOTE
 The liftgate cannot be raised if it is not raised
WARNING immediately after pressing the liftgate open
 It is dangerous to drive with the liftgate NOTE switch.
open since carbon monoxide (CO) gas can  Locking and unlocking the doors by using If this happens, raise the liftgate again after
enter the passenger compartment. power door locks (driver and front passenger pressing the liftgate open switch.
CO is an invisible, odorless gas that can side), keyless entry system, or F.A.S.T.-key  It is not possible to open the liftgate while
cause unconsciousness and even death. operation (vehicles equipped with the the battery is disconnected. If necessary, use
 When opening and closing the liftgate, F.A.S.T.-key) also locks and unlocks the lift- the inside liftgate release.
make sure that there are no people nearby gate.
 When the battery is reconnected, all doors
and be careful not to hit your head or
and the liftgate will be locked. Unlock them
pinch your hands, neck, etc.
before trying to open the liftgate.
 If snow or ice has accumulated on the lift- To open
gate, remove it before opening the liftgate.
Otherwise the liftgate may abruptly close 1. After unlocking, push the liftgate open
due to the weight of the snow or ice.
switch (A) and raise the liftgate.

Power liftgate (if so equipped)
NOTE CAUTION Power liftgate (if so equipped)

 On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-  Before starting the vehicle, be sure to con- N00575900026
tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors auto- firm that the liftgate is locked. If the liftgate
matically extend when the liftgate and all opens while driving the vehicle, objects Before operating the power liftgate, unlock
doors are unlocked using the liftgate open stored in the luggage compartment could fall the power liftgate by pushing the power door
switch (A). out into the road. lock switch or the unlock button on the key-
less entry system or F.A.S.T.-key.
To close NOTE
Refer to “Keyless entry system”, “Free-hand 5
Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
1. Pull the liftgate grip (B) downward as  Gas struts (C) are installed in the locations key)” and “Power door locks” on pages 5-7,
illustrated in order to support the liftgate. 5-13 and 5-36 respectively.
illustrated and release it before the liftgate
Please observe the following in order to pre-
closes completely. Gently close the lift-
vent damage or faulty operation:
gate from the outside so that it is com- Operating the power liftgate
• Do not touch, push or pull the gas struts
pletely closed. when closing the liftgate. N00576000037
• Do not attach any plastic material, tape,

etc., to the gas struts. WARNING
• Do not tie string, etc., around the gas struts.  The luggage area was not designed for
• Do not hang objects on the gas struts. people to ride in. Do not let your children
ride in or play in the luggage area. Riding
or playing in the luggage area could result
in a serious accident and/or injury.
 Before driving, make sure the power lift-
gate is securely closed.
If you drive with the power liftgate open,
exhaust gas may enter the vehicle and
cause carbon monoxide poisoning.
 To avoid injury, the power liftgate should
CAUTION not be operated by children.
 To avoid injuring your hand or arm, do not
attempt to close the liftgate without releasing
the liftgate grip (B).

WARNING Automatic operation

 When opening and closing the power lift- N00576500045
gate, make sure that there are no people When the power liftgate main switch (A) is
nearby and be careful not to hit your head on, the power liftgate can be operated using
or pinch your hands, neck, etc. either the power liftgate switch on the
Make sure the power liftgate is completely F.A.S.T.-key, the driver’s side power liftgate
open before loading and unloading lug-
switch or the open/close switches on the
5 gage.
power liftgate.
Refer to “Operating conditions” on page
5-41.
CAUTION
 Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when
loading and unloading luggage. NOTE
The heat from the exhaust could cause burns.  When opening and closing the power lift-
 Before driving, make sure the power liftgate gate, do not place your hands near the arm
is securely closed. If the liftgate opens while (B) and gas struts (C).
driving, objects stored in the luggage com-  To prevent damage to the gas struts:
partment could fall out into the road. • Do not push or pull on the gas struts.
 Do not install any accessory other than Mit- • Do not wrap, attach or hang anything on the
subishi Motors Genuine parts on the power gas struts.
liftgate. The weight of the accessory may
cause faulty operation of the liftgate.
 Before closing the liftgate, make sure there is
no foreign object around the striker (A).
If a foreign object matter gets into the striker, WARNING
it could prevent the power liftgate from clos-  To avoid accidental or unintended opera-
ing securely. tion of the power liftgate, turn off the
power liftgate main switch when not oper-
ating the power liftgate.
 Do not turn off the power liftgate main
switch while the power liftgate is opening
or closing.


 The power liftgate is completely closed.
CAUTION NOTE  The power liftgate is unlocked.
 Do not apply excessive force to the power  If one of the power liftgate switches is oper-
liftgate when opening or closing it. Doing so ated while the power liftgate is operating, the
<Using the open switch on the power lift-
could damage to the power liftgate. power liftgate will reverse and return to the
gate>
full open or close position.
 If the selector lever is moved from “P”  The power liftgate is unlocked.
NOTE (PARK) position to another position while
 The F.A.S.T.-key is within the operating
 Do not start the engine while the power lift- the power liftgate is operating or completely
open, a warning buzzer will sound for
range (2.3 feet (70 cm) from the power 5
gate is operating. The sudden operation pre- liftgate open switch) and the power lift-
vention mechanism could operate, making approximately 10 seconds to notify the
driver that the power liftgate is open. gate is locked.
the power liftgate stop intermittently while it
moves.  If the battery or fuse is replaced while the
power liftgate is open, it cannot be closed The power liftgate can be closed automati-
 The power liftgate cannot be opened when
automatically. cally when all of the following conditions are
the battery is discharged or disconnected.
The liftgate must be then opened using the In this case close the power liftgate manu- met.
inside liftgate release. ally. <Using the F.A.S.T.-key>
Refer to “Inside liftgate release” on page
 The operation mode is in OFF.
5-46. Operating conditions  The power liftgate is completely open.
 If the keyless entry system or close switch is N00576100038
operated when the power liftgate main  Nothing is touching the auto reverse sen-
switch is off, the warning buzzer sounds 4 The power liftgate can be opened automati- sors (A) on the power liftgate.
times to notify the driver that the power lift- cally when all of the following conditions are
gate cannot be operated. met.
 The power liftgate does not operate normally <Using the F.A.S.T.-key>
under the following conditions:
• When parked on an incline  The operation mode is in OFF.
• In strong winds  The power liftgate is completely closed.
• When the power liftgate is covered with  The power liftgate is unlocked.
snow
 Repeated continuous opening and closing <Using the driver’s side power liftgate
operation of the power liftgate will activate a switch>
built-in protection circuit and switch the
power liftgate to manual operation.  The operation mode is in ON with the
selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position.

<Using the driver’s side power liftgate switch •While open: The warning buzzer sounds
or the close switch on the power liftgate> and the power liftgate com-
pletely closes.
 The operation mode is in ON with the If the power liftgate switch is pressed once
selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position, while the power liftgate is operating, the
or the operation mode is in ACC or OFF. warning buzzer sounds and the liftgate will
 The power liftgate is completely open. reverse and return to the full open or closed
 Nothing is touching the auto reverse sen- position.
5 sors on the power liftgate.
NOTE
Operating the power liftgate using  If the power liftgate switch is pressed 3 or
the F.A.S.T.-key or the driver’s more times in a row, the power liftgate may
side power liftgate switch not operate normally.
If this occurs, wait a short time before again
pressing the power liftgate switch twice.
After unlocking the doors and the power lift-
gate, the power liftgate can be operated by
<Using the driver’s side power liftgate
pressing the switch (A) of the F.A.S.T.-key or
switch>
the driver’s side power liftgate switch (B).
If the driver’s side power liftgate switch is
pressed for more than 1 second, the power
liftgate will operate after the buzzer sounds
and the hazard warning flasher blinks.
<Using the F.A.S.T.-key> The power liftgate operates as follows.
If the power liftgate switch is pressed twice in
a row, the power liftgate operates after the •While closed: The warning buzzer sounds
warning buzzer sounds and the hazard warn- and the power liftgate com-
ing flasher blinks. pletely opens.
The power liftgate operates as follows: •While open: The warning buzzer sounds
and the power liftgate com-
•While closed: The warning buzzer sounds pletely closes.
and the power liftgate com-
pletely opens.


If the driver’s side power liftgate switch is liftgate will open after the warning buzzer If the close switch on the power liftgate is
pressed once while the power liftgate is oper- sounds and the hazard warning flasher blinks. pressed, the power liftgate will close after the
ating, the warning buzzer will sound and the warning buzzer sounds 3 times and the hazard
power liftgate will move in the direction NOTE warning flasher blinks 2 times.
opposite to the one in which it was operating.  When you are carrying the F.A.S.T.-key with
If the close switch is pressed once while the
the power liftgate is locked, the power lift- power liftgate is closing, the warning buzzer
WARNING gate can be opened by pressing the open sounds once and the power liftgate opens.
 When operating the power liftgate, make switch even if the power liftgate is locked.
5
sure that there are no people near the  For vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac- NOTE
power liftgate and that there is sufficient tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors auto-
 If the close switch is again pressed once
space behind and above the vehicle. matically extend when the power liftgate and while the power liftgate is operating in the
all doors are unlocked using the liftgate open
opening direction, the warning buzzer will
switch (C).
sound once and the power liftgate will close.
Opening the power liftgate using
the open switch Closing the power liftgate using Auto reverse
the close switch
The power liftgate can be opened by pressing N00576200026
the open switch (C). If the auto reverse sensors (A) on either side
The power liftgate can be closed by pressing of the power liftgate detect that something is
the close switch (D) on the power liftgate. being trapped by the closing power liftgate,
the warning buzzer will sound once and the
liftgate will automatically reverse direction
and return to the full open position.
If the open switch is pressed while the power

liftgate and all doors are unlocked, the power

CAUTION Sudden operation prevention

 Do not damage the auto reverse sensor, when mechanism
loading or unloading luggage. If the sensor is
damaged, the power liftgate will not close
If the engine is started while the power lift-
automatically.
gate is operating, the power liftgate may
intermittently move or stop moving to pre-
vent the power liftgate from moving abruptly.
5 Drop prevention mechanism Approximately 10 seconds after the power
liftgate has fully closed or opened, power lift-
After the power liftgate has opened automati- gate operation will again resume.
cally, if it is detected that the power liftgate is
WARNING dropping due to factors such as accumulated
CAUTION
 The auto reverse mechanism will not oper- snow, the power liftgate will close automati-
 The auto reverse will not operate while the
ate just before the power liftgate becomes cally.
sudden operation prevention mechanism is
fully closed. Therefore, be careful not to A warning buzzer will sound continuously
activated.
trap a hand, part of your body or an while the drop prevention mechanism is oper-
object at this time. ating.
 When the power liftgate is closed manu-
ally, the auto reverse mechanism will not Manual operation
operate. NOTE N00576300030
 If the auto reverse mechanism has been  If snow has accumulated on the power lift-
When the power liftgate main switch is off,
repeatedly activated, the power liftgate gate, remove it before operating the power
liftgate. the power liftgate can be manually opened
may stop and then, depending on its posi-
 Do not install any accessory other than Mit- and closed.
tion, may abruptly open or close. Once the
power liftgate is completely closed or subishi Motors Genuine parts on the power
liftgate. The drop prevention mechanism
After unlocking the power liftgate, push the
open, automatic operation will be
may be activated due to the weight of the power liftgate open switch (A) and pull up
resumed.
accessory. the power liftgate.
 The drop prevention mechanism could be
activated if you attempt to close the liftgate
manually immediately after the power lift-
gate has been completely opened automati-
cally.

NOTE CAUTION
 When the battery is discharged or discon-  Do not fully close the power liftgate with
nected, the power liftgate cannot be opened your hand still on the power liftgate grip.
even manually. At that time, the liftgate can Doing so could trap and injure your hand or
be opened only by using the inside liftgate arm.
release. Refer to “Inside liftgate release” on
page 5-46.
Power liftgate easy closer
To close the power liftgate, pull the power N00576400028
5
liftgate grip (B) downward and release it The power liftgate easy closer is designed to
before the power liftgate is completely help the power liftgate close securely.
closed, and then gently close the power lift- If the power liftgate is closed to a position
WARNING gate from the outside. where it is detected as being ajar, it closes
 When the power liftgate is closed manu- automatically.
ally, the auto reverse mechanism will not
operate even if something is trapped
under the liftgate. WARNING
 Keep your hands and fingers away from
the power liftgate while the power liftgate
CAUTION easy closer is activated. To return the
power liftgate to the slightly ajar position
 Make sure there is no one around the power
while the power liftgate easy closer is acti-
liftgate when opening it.
vated, press the power liftgate open
switch.
NOTE
 The liftgate cannot be opened if it is not
CAUTION CAUTION
raised immediately after pressing the power
 The auto reverse mechanism will not operate  Do not touch the latch (A) on the inside of
liftgate open switch.
when the power liftgate is closed manually. the power liftgate. The power liftgate easy
If this happens, raise the liftgate again after
Therefore be especially careful not to trap a closer could operate and catch your fingers.
pressing the liftgate open switch.
hand or finger.

Inside liftgate release
Liftgate Power liftgate
You and your family should familiarize your- 3. Push out on the liftgate to open it.
NOTE selves with the location and operation of the
 The power liftgate easy closer operates even
liftgate release lever.
when the power liftgate main switch is OFF. CAUTION
 Repeated continuous operation of the handle  Always keep the release lever lid on the lift-
could activate the protection circuit and tem- To open gate closed when driving so that your lug-
porarily prevent the power liftgate easy gage cannot accidentally bump the lever and
closer from operating. 1. Open the lid (A) inside of the liftgate. open the liftgate.
If this occurs, wait about 1 minute before
operating the power liftgate easy closer
again.
Theft-alarm system
N00510201267
The theft-alarm system is designed to provide

Inside liftgate release protection from unauthorized entry into the
N00523101084
vehicle. This system is operated in three
The inside liftgate release is designed to pro- stages: the first is the “armed” stage, the sec-
vide a way to open the liftgate if the battery is ond is the “alarm” stage, and third is the “dis-
dead or disconnected. armed” stage. If triggered, the system
The liftgate release lever (see illustration) is provides both audible and visual alarm sig-
mounted on the liftgate. 2. Move the lever (B) to open the liftgate. nals.

Theft-alarm system
At this time, the theft-alarm indicator (A)
CAUTION on the instrument panel flashes for confir-
NOTE
 Do not modify or add parts to the theft-alarm  The system will be disarmed if, while the
mation.
system. Doing so could cause the theft-alarm theft-alarm indicator is illuminated, the fol-
to malfunction. lowing operation is performed.
• Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key, if the ignition switch is turned
Armed stage to the “ON” position.
N00510301226
• For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
key, if the operation mode is put in ON.
5
Park the vehicle and stop the engine. Arm the  The system will not be armed if a door, the
system as described below. liftgate or the engine hood is not completely
closed. If this happens, rearm the system as
1. Except for vehicles equipped with the described above.
F.A.S.T.-key, remove the key from the  The theft-alarm system can be activated
ignition switch. when people are riding inside the vehicle or
4. The system has entered the armed stage
For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- when the windows are open. To prevent acci-
after about 20 seconds, when the theft-
key, put the operation mode in OFF. dental activation of the alarm, do not set the
alarm indicator (A) flashing becomes system to the system armed mode while peo-
2. Make sure that the engine hood is closed.
slower. ple are riding in the vehicle.
3. Lock all doors and the liftgate by using
The theft-alarm indicator (A) continues to
the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-
flash while the system is in the armed
key operation.
stage. Alarm stage
N00510401230
Arm the system and leave
NOTE The alarm will be activated if any of the fol-
 If the engine hood is open, the theft-alarm lowing occur while the vehicle is parked and
indicator (A) illuminates and the system can- the system is armed.
not enter the armed stage.
The system enters the armed stage about 20  One of the doors and the liftgate is opened
seconds after the engine hood is closed. without using the keyless entry system or
 The system will be disarmed if, while the the F.A.S.T.-key operation.
theft-alarm indicator (A) is illuminated, all  The engine hood is opened.
doors and the liftgate are unlocked by using
the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-key
operation.

Theft-alarm system
Type of alarm Alarm deactivation Disarm...by using the keyless entry system or
N00582500040 N00582600025 F.A.S.T.-key operation
When the alarm is activated: The alarm can be deactivated in the following
ways.
1. The headlights blink on and off for 3 min-
utes.  By using the keyless entry system or the
After 3 minutes the headlights automati- F.A.S.T.-key operation to lock or unlock
5 cally shut off. the doors and liftgate.
2. The horn will sound intermittently for 3  Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
minutes. tion or put the operation mode in ON.
Horn sounds!
Headlights blink on and off! Disarmed stage NOTE
N00510501172  If the UNLOCK button on the remote control
transmitter, or the driver’s or front passen-
The system will be disarmed if the following
ger’s door lock/unlock switch is pressed
operation is performed. when all doors and the liftgate are closed and
no door is opened within approximately 30
 Except for vehicles equipped with the
seconds, re-arming will automatically occur.
F.A.S.T.-key, if the ignition switch is
 The amount of time after unlocking until the
turned to the “ON” position. vehicle relocks automatically can be
 For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi
key, if the operation mode is put in ON. Motors dealer for details.
NOTE  All doors and the liftgate are unlocked by On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi
 The alarm will continue to operate for 3 min- using the keyless entry system or the Multi-Communication System, the functions
F.A.S.T.-key operation. can be adjusted on the screen. For details,
utes. At the end of that period, the alarm will
automatically shut off to save battery power. refer to a separate operation manual.
The system will then be rearmed until the  Once the system has been disarmed, it can-
proper disarming step is taken. not be rearmed except by repeating the arm-
ing procedure.
 The alarm will resume if unauthorized
actions are taken again, even if the alarm has
stopped.

Power window control
Testing the theft-alarm system Power window control WARNING

N00510601157 N00510800383  Never leave the vehicle without carrying
Use the following procedure to test the sys- the key.
tem:  Never leave children or unreliable adults
unattended inside the vehicle.
1. Lower the driver’s window.
2. Arm the system as explained in “Armed
stage”. 5
3. Make sure that the theft-alarm indicator
comes on and flashes for approximately
20 seconds.
4. Wait a few seconds and then unlock the
driver’s side door by using the inside door
lock knob. Open the door. 1- Open (down)
5. Make sure that the horn sounds intermit- 2- Close (up)
tently and the headlights blink when a
door is opened.
6. Disarm the system by unlocking all doors
NOTE
and the liftgate by using the keyless entry  Never try to operate the main switch and
sub-switch in different directions at the same
system or the F.A.S.T.-key operation.
time. This will freeze the window in posi-
tion.
 Operating the power windows repeatedly
with the engine stopped will run down the
battery. Use the window switches only while
the engine is running.
WARNING
 Before operating the power windows,
make sure that nothing can be trapped
(head, hands, fingers, etc.) in the window.

Power window control

stopped. However, once the driver’s door or
Main switch Sub switch the front passenger’s door is opened, the
N00548701137 N00548800102
power windows cannot be operated.
The main switch located on the driver’s door
can be used to operate all the windows. Lock switch
A window can be opened or closed by operat- N00549001166
ing the corresponding switch. When this switch is in the lock mode, the pas-
5 Press the switch down to open the window,
and pull up the switch to close it.
senger door switches cannot be used to open
or close the door windows, and the main
If the driver’s door window switch is fully switch will open or close only the driver’s
pressed down/pulled up, the driver’s door door window. To unlock the switch, press it
window automatically opens/closes com- again.
pletely.
If you want to stop the window movement, 1- Close
operate the switch lightly in the reverse direc- 2- Open
tion.
Each sub-switch can be used for it’s own pas-
senger door window, unless the driver’s win-
dow lock switch is activated.
NOTE
 The rear door windows open only half-way.
1- Lock
Power window timer function 2- Unlock
N00548901155
1- Driver’s door window switch The power windows can be run up or down
2- Front passenger door window switch when the ignition switch or the operation
3- Left rear door window switch mode is in ON.
4- Right rear door window switch The door windows can be opened or closed
5- Lock switch for a 30-second period after the engine is

Sunroof (if so equipped)
WARNING CAUTION What to do if you hear wind

 Before driving with a child in the vehicle,  The safety mechanism is deactivated while buffeting when driving
be sure to lock the window switch to make the switch is pulled up. Therefore be espe- N00551400014
it inoperative. Children tampering with cially careful that fingers are not trapped in
the switch could easily trap their hands or the door window opening. Wind buffeting can be described as the per-
heads in the window.  Do not deliberately trap your hands or head ception of pressure on the ears or a booming
in order to activate the safety mechanism. or rumbling sound. Your vehicle may exhibit
wind buffeting when driving with one or both
Your hand or head could be trapped and per-
sonal injury could result. rear door windows down or partially opened.
5
Safety mechanism (Driver’s
This is a normal occurrence that can be mini-
door window only) mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
N00528801129
NOTE door windows open, open the front door win-
If a hand or head is trapped, for safety the  The safety mechanism can be activated if the dows as well as the rear door windows to
door window is automatically lowered a little. driving conditions or other circumstances minimize the condition.
After the obstruction is removed, pull up the cause the door window to be subjected to a
switch again to close the door window. physical shock similar to that caused by
trapped hand or head. Sunroof (if so equipped)
 If the battery terminals are disconnected or
WARNING the fuse for power window is replaced, the
N00511001682
 If the battery terminals are disconnected safety mechanism will be cancelled and the The sunroof can be opened and closed with
or the fuse for electric window is replaced, door window will not automatically the ignition switch or the operation mode in
the safety mechanism will be cancelled. open/close completely. ON.
If a hand or head got trapped, a serious If the window is open, repeatedly raise the
injury could result. driver’s door window switch until the win-
dow has been fully closed.
Following this, release the switch, raise the
CAUTION switch once again and hold it in this condi-
 The safety mechanism is deactivated just tion for at least 1 second, then release it. You
before the door window closes. This allows should now be able to operate the driver’s
the door window to close completely. There- door window in the normal function.
fore be especially careful that fingers are not
trapped in the door window opening.

Sunroof (if so equipped)

After that, the sunroof can be set the initial-
To open NOTE ized state in the following procedure.
 Be sure to tilt down the sunroof before clos-
Press the switch (1), the sunroof automati- ing the sunshade. 1. Move the sunroof in slide open position.
cally opens. 2. Press the tilt up switch (2) continually in
To stop the moving sunroof, press the switch. 10 seconds.
Sunroof timer function 3. The sunroof will be moved to tilt up posi-
NOTE tion automatically bit by bit.
5 The sunroof can be operated when the igni- 4. The initialize is completed when the sun-
 The sunroof stops just before reaching the
fully open position. If the vehicle is driven tion switch or the operation mode is in ON. roof is stopped at tilt up position.
with the sunroof in this position, wind buf- The sunroof can be opened or closed for a 30- If the sunroof does not return to normal,
feting is lower than with the sunroof fully second period after the engine is stopped. consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
open. However, when the driver’s door or the front dealer.
passenger door is opened, the sunroof cannot
be operated. Turn on the ignition switch again NOTE
To close to operate.  The safety mechanism can be activated if the
driving conditions or other circumstances
Press the switch (3), the sunroof automati- Safety mechanism cause the sunroof to be subjected to a physi-
cally closes. cal shock similar to that caused by a trapped
To stop the moving sunroof, press the switch. hand or head.
If a hand or head is trapped in the closing
sunroof opening, the safety mechanism will
To tilt up cause the sunroof to re-open automatically. CAUTION
The opened sunroof will become operational  The safety mechanism is deactivated while
When the switch (2) is pressed, the rear of the again after a few seconds. the switch (2) is pressed. Therefore be espe-
sunroof raises for ventilation. cially careful that fingers are not trapped in
If the safety mechanism is activated 5 or the sunroof opening.
more times consecutively, normal closing of  Do not deliberately trap your hands or head
To tilt down the sunroof will be aborted. in order to activate the safety mechanism.
As an emergency measure, the sunroof can be Personal injury and malfunction of the sun-
Press the switch (3). closed bit by bit until the sunroof is com- roof could result.
pletely closed by repeatedly pressing the
switch (2).
Parking brake
Sunshade NOTE NOTE

 When leaving the vehicle unattended, be  Operating the sunroof repeatedly with the
The sunshade can be opened or closed manu- sure to close the sunroof and carry the key. engine turned off will run down the battery.
ally while the sunroof is closed.  Do not try to operate the sunroof if it is fro- Operate the sunroof only while the engine is
zen closed (after snowfall or during extreme running.
cold).
 Do not sit on or place heavy luggage on the
Parking brake
sunroof or roof opening edge.
N00511401468
5
 Do not apply any force that may cause dam-
age to the sunroof. To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
 Release the switch when the sunroof has plete stop, firmly apply the parking brake,
reached a completely open or completely and then move the selector lever to the “P”
closed position. (PARK) position.
 If the sunroof does not operate when the sun- Make sure the brake warning light (red) is
roof switch is operated, release the switch illuminated.
and check whether something is trapped by
the sunroof. If nothing is trapped, have the
CAUTION sunroof checked at an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
 Do not attempt to close the sunshade when
the sunroof is opened.  Be careful when tilting up the sunroof if a ski
carrier or a roof carrier is installed. Depend-
 Be careful that hands are not trapped when
ing on the model of ski carrier or roof carrier,
closing the sunshade.
the sunroof may contact the carrier when the
sunroof is tilted up.
 Be sure to close the sunroof completely
WARNING when washing the vehicle or when leaving
 Do not stick your head, hands or anything the vehicle.
else in the sunroof opening.  Do not put any wax on the weatherstrip
 Before operating the sunroof, make sure (black rubber) around the sunroof opening. If
that nothing can be trapped (head, hands, it is waxed, the weatherstrip cannot maintain
fingers, etc.). a weatherproof seal with the sunroof.
 Never leave a child unreliable adults unat-  After washing the vehicle or after rain be
tended inside the vehicle. sure to wipe off any water that is on the sun-
roof before operating it.

Parking brake
Lever type parking brake (if so To release CAUTION

equipped)  Before driving, be sure that the parking
brake is fully released and brake warning
N00593100020
light is off.
If you drive without the parking brake fully
To apply released, the warning display will appear on
the information screen in the multi-informa-
5 tion display.
If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
parking brake, the brakes will be overheated,
resulting in ineffective braking and possible
brake failure.
Warning light (red)

1- Pull the lever up slightly.
2- Press and hold the button at the end of
the hand grip. or
3- Push the lever downward.
Warning display
1- Pull the lever up without pushing the Before driving, be sure to release the parking
button at the end of hand grip. brake.
When the parking brake is set and the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the brake warning light in the instru-
ment cluster will come on.
Electric parking brake (if so
When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,
equipped)
and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
N00593200021
downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill.
The Electric parking brake is the system that
applies the parking brake by the electric
motor.

Parking brake
When the parking brake is applied, the brake
NOTE warning light (red) in the instrument cluster
NOTE
 You may hear an operation noise from the  When parking on steep grades, pull up the
and the indicator light (A) on the Electric
vehicle body when operating the Electric Electric parking brake switch twice (once
parking brake switch will come on.
parking brake. This does not indicate a mal- more after the operation is completed once).
function and the Electric parking brake is The maximum effect of the parking brake
operating normally. will be obtained.
 When the battery is weak or dead, the Elec-  If the parking brake does not hold the vehicle
downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill.
tric parking brake cannot be applied or
released. Refer to “Jump-starting the engine”
stationary after the foot brake is released,
contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
5
on page 8-2. CAUTION dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
 You may feel the brake pedal moving when  While the vehicle is in motion, do not apply  When the operation mode is other than ON,
operating the Electric parking brake. the Electric parking brake. Doing so may if the parking brake is applied, the Electric
This does not indicate a malfunction. cause overheating and/or premature wear of parking brake indicator light comes on for a
brake parts, reducing brake performance. while.
 If the Electric parking brake switch is repeat-
To apply edly operated in a short time, the following
NOTE warning display will appear in the multi-
information display and the Electrical park-
 If the Electric parking brake must be applied
ing brake will temporarily stop working. In
in an emergency situation, pull and hold the
such case, wait for approximately 1 minute
Electric parking brake switch to apply the
until the warning display disappears, and
Electric parking brake. At that time, the fol-
operate the Electric parking brake switch
lowing warning display will appear in the
again.
multi-information display and a buzzer will
sound, however you should continue to pull
and hold the Electric parking brake switch.
 The brake warning light (red) and the indica-

1. Stop the vehicle completely.
tor light on the Electric parking brake switch
2. Pull up the Electric parking brake switch
may blink. This does not indicate a malfunc-
while depressing the brake pedal. tion, the lights go off when/if the Electric
parking brake is released.

Parking brake
 The engine is running.
NOTE  The selector lever is in the “D” (DRIVE)
CAUTION
 Depending on the situation, the Electric  If the brake warning light (red) does not go
or the “R” (REVERSE) position.
parking brake may be applied automatically. off after the parking brake has been released,
 The driver’s seat belt is fastened.
Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 5-93. the brake system may be malfunctioning.
Contact the nearest authorized Mitsubishi
When the parking brake is released, the brake Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
To release warning light (red) and the indicator lamp on choice.
the Electric parking brake switch go off.
5  If the acceleration of the vehicle seems
abnormally slow after the vehicle has been
Manual operation Before driving, be sure that the parking brake parked with the Electric parking brake
is released and brake warning light is off. applied in cold weather, stop the vehicle in a
safe place, then apply and release the Elec-
CAUTION tric parking brake. If the vehicle acceleration
is still slow, contact the nearest authorized
 After the Electric parking brake switch has
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
been operated to apply or release the Electric
of your choice.
parking brake, if the brake warning light
(red) and the indicator on the Electric park-
ing brake switch remain blinking or the Elec-
tric parking brake warning light (yellow) NOTE
remain illuminated, the Electric parking  When the operation mode is other than ON,
brake system may be malfunctioning and the the parking brake cannot be released.
1. Make sure that the operation mode is parking brake may not be applied or  If the Electric parking brake does not auto-
ON. released. Immediately park your vehicle in a matically release, it may be released by man-
safe place and contact the nearest authorized ual operation.
2. Press down the Electric parking brake
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility  When the selector lever is other than “P”
switch while depressing the brake pedal.
of your choice. (PARK) position, if you try to release the
 If a vehicle is driven without releasing the Electric parking brake without depressing
parking brake, the brake will overheat, the brake pedal, the warning display will
Automatic operation appear.
resulting in ineffective braking and possible
brake failure.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed
slowly while all of the following conditions
are met, the Electric parking brake is auto-
matically released.

Steering wheel height and reach adjustment

Under normal conditions, the warning light
NOTE only comes on when the operation mode is
 If you start driving without releasing the
put in ON and goes off a few seconds later. 1
Electric parking brake, the warning display
will appear.
CAUTION
 When the Electric parking brake warning
light (yellow) does not illuminate or remains 2
illuminated when the operation mode is put
in ON, or comes on while driving, the Elec-
5
 If the driver’s foot contacts the accelerator tric parking brake may not be applied or
pedal in the condition that the Electric park- released.
Immediately contact the nearest authorized 1- Wheel lock
ing brake can release by an automatic opera-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility 2- Release
tion, the Electric parking brake may be
released automatically. of your choice. For details, refer to “Electric
parking brake warning light (yellow)” on
page 5-216. WARNING
Warning display When parking your vehicle while the Elec-  After adjusting, make sure the lock lever
tric parking brake warning light (yellow) is is secured in the locked (1) position.
Warning light (yellow) illuminated, park the vehicle on level and  Do not attempt to adjust the steering
stable ground, move the selector lever to the wheel while driving. This can be danger-
“P” (PARK) position and place chocks, ous.
blocks, stones behind and in front of the tires
to prevent the vehicle from moving.
Warning display
Inside rearview mirror
Steering wheel height and N00511601398
Adjust the inside rearview mirror only after

reach adjustment making any seat adjustments so as to have a
N00511501241
clear view to the rear of the vehicle.
To adjust the steering wheel to the desired
If there is a malfunction in the system, the position, move the lever upward or down-
warning light will come on. In addition, the ward while moving the steering wheel to the
warning display appears on the information desired position.
screen in the multi information display.

Type 1 To adjust the vertical mirror To adjust the mirror position

position It is possible to move the mirror up/down and
It is possible to move the mirror up and down left/right to adjust its position.
to adjust its position.
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4
WARNING
 Do not attempt to adjust the inside rear-
view mirror while driving. This can be
dangerous.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driv-
ing.
Adjust the inside mirror to maximize the

view through the rear window.

To reduce the glare Type 2 Type 3

When the headlights of the vehicles behind When the headlights of the vehicles behind
you are very bright, the reflection factor of you are very bright, the reflection factor of
Type 1
the rearview mirror is automatically changed the rearview mirror is automatically changed
The day/night knob (A) at the bottom of the to reduce the glare. to reduce the glare.
mirror can be used to adjust the mirror to
reduce the glare from the headlights of vehi- 5
cles behind you during night driving.
Normally, use the automatic mode. When the Normally, use the automatic mode. When the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
or the operation mode is put in ON, the or the operation mode is put in ON, the green
1- Daytime position reflection factor of the mirror is automatically indicator (1) illuminates and the reflection
2- Night position changed. factor of the mirror is automatically changed.
NOTE NOTE
 Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner  Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner
on the sensor (1), as reduced sensitivity on the sensor (2), as reduced sensitivity
could result. could result.

Outside rearview mirrors
NOTE Type 4 NOTE

 If you want to stop automatic mode, press  If you want to stop automatic mode, press
the switch (3) for approximately 2 seconds When the headlights of the vehicles behind the switch (3) and the indicator will go off.
and the indicator (1) will go off. you are very bright, the reflection factor of To return to automatic mode, press the
To return to automatic mode, press the the rearview mirror is automatically changed switch again or perform the following opera-
switch again or perform the following opera- to reduce the glare. tion.
tion. [Except for vehicles equipped with the Free-
5 [Except for vehicles equipped with the Free-
hand Advanced Security Transmitter
hand Advanced Security Transmitter
(F.A.S.T.-key)]
(F.A.S.T.-key)] Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position after turning to “OFF” or “ACC” position.
after turning to “OFF” or “ACC” position. [For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.- key)]
key)] Put the operation mode in ON after putting
Put the operation mode in ON after putting the operation mode in OFF.
the operation mode in OFF.

Normally, use the automatic mode. When the N00512201232
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
Adjust the outside rearview mirrors only after
or the operation mode is put in ON, the green
making any seat adjustments so as to have a
indicator (1) illuminates and the reflection
clear view to the rear of the vehicle.
factor of the mirror is automatically changed.
WARNING
NOTE  Do not attempt to adjust the outside rear-
 Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner view mirrors while driving. This can be
on the sensors (2), as reduced sensitivity dangerous.
could result. Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driv-
ing.


4- Left
WARNING To adjust the mirror position
 Your passenger’s side mirror is convex.
The objects you see in the mirror will look
N00549101167
The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted

NOTE
 After adjusting, return the lever to the
smaller and farther away than they when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“•”(OFF) position.
appear in a regular flat mirror. “ACC” position or the operation mode is put
Do not use this mirror to estimate the dis- in ON or ACC.
tance of vehicles following you when
Move the lever (A) to the same side as the
changing lanes.
mirror you wish to adjust. To retract the mirror 5
N00549201142
The outside mirror can be retracted towards

Except for vehicles equipped
with the mirror retractor
the side window to prevent damage when
switch parking in tight locations.
Except for vehicles equipped with the
mirror retractor switch
Push the mirror towards the back of the vehi-

Vehicles equipped with the
cle with your hand to retract it in. When
mirror retractor switch
extending the mirror, pull it out towards the
front of the vehicle until it clicks to lock in
place.
L- Left outside mirror adjustment

R- Right outside mirror adjustment
Press the switch (B) to adjust the mirror posi-

tion.
1- Up
2- Down
3- Right

For vehicles equipped with the mirror CAUTION Retracting and extending the mir-
retractor switch  It is possible to retract and extend the mirrors rors without using the mirror
by hand. After retracting a mirror using the retractor switch (automatic exten-
Retracting and extending the mir- mirror retractor switch, however, you should
extend it by using the switch again, not by
sion function)
rors using the mirror retractor hand. If you extended the mirror by hand
switch after retracting it using the switch, it would [Vehicles with the keyless entry system]
5 With the ignition switch in the “ON” or
not properly lock in position. As a result, it
could move because of the wind or vibration
The mirrors automatically retract or extend
when the doors are locked or unlocked using
“ACC” position or the operation mode in ON while you are driving, taking away your rear- the remote control switches of the keyless
or ACC, push the mirror retractor switch to ward visibility.
entry system.
retract the mirrors. Push it again to extend the Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page 5-7.
mirrors to their original positions. [Vehicles with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-
After placing the ignition switch in the NOTE rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T-key)]
“LOCK” position or the operation mode in  Be careful not to get your hands trapped The mirrors automatically retract or extend
OFF, it is possible to retract and extend the while a mirror is moving.
when the doors are locked or unlocked using
mirrors using the mirror retractor switch for  If you move a mirror by hand or it moves
the remote control switches or the F.A.S.T-
about 30 seconds. after hitting a person or object, you may not
be able to return it to its original position
key.
using the mirror retractor switch. If this hap- Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page 5-30
pens, push the mirror retractor switch to or “To operate using the F.A.S.T.-key” on
place the mirror in its retracted position and page 5-15.
then push the switch again to return the mir-
ror to its original position.
NOTE
 When freezing has occurred and mirrors fail
 Functions can be modified as stated below.
to operate as intended, please refrain from
Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi
repeated pushing of the retractor switch as
Motors dealer.
this action can result in burn-out of the mir-
On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi-
ror motor circuits.
Communication System, screen operations
can be used to make the adjustment. Refer to
the separate owner’s manual for details.

Ignition switch
inside the mirrors, thus clearing away frost or
NOTE condensation. Ignition switch
• Automatically extend when the ignition
The indicator light (A) will illuminate while N00512401696
switch is turned to the “ON” position or the
the defogger is on. [For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand
operation mode is put in ON with the
driver’s door closed, and automatically The heater will be turned off automatically in Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
retract when the ignition switch is turned to about 15 to 20 minutes depending on the out- key).]
the “LOCK” position or the operation mode side temperature. For information on operations for vehicles
equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-
is put in OFF with the driver’s door opened.
• Automatically extend when the vehicle rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to 5
speed reaches approximately 19 mph (30 “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
km/h). (F.A.S.T.-key):
• Deactivate the automatic extension func- Engine switch” on page 5-18.
tion.
 The outside rearview mirrors can be [Except for vehicles equipped with the
retracted or extended by the following opera- Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-
tions, even if changing to the any of above. ter (F.A.S.T.-key).]
After pressing the LOCK button on the key
to lock the doors and liftgate, if the LOCK
button is pressed again twice in a row within Type 1 Type 2
approximately 30 seconds, the outside rear-
view mirrors will retract.
After pressing the UNLOCK button on the
NOTE
 The door mirror heater can be turned on
key to unlock the doors and liftgate, if the
automatically.
UNLOCK button is pressed again twice in a
For further information, please contact your
row within approximately 30 seconds, the
outside rearview mirrors will extend again.
Door mirror heater (if so equipped) can be used to make the adjustment.
N00549301260
Refer to the separate owner’s manual for
details.
When the rear window defogger switch is
pressed with the engine running, the outside
rearview mirrors are defogged or defrosted.
Current will flow through the heater element
Ignition switch
LOCK (Type 2) NOTE NOTE

 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic For details, we recommend you to consult an
The engine is off and the steering wheel is immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
which the transponder inside the key sends On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi-
locked. The key can be inserted and removed
must match the one registered to the immobi- Communication System, screen operations
only when the switch is in this position.
lizer computer. (Refer to “Electronic immo- can be used to make the adjustment.
bilizer” on page 5-4.) Refer to the separate Mitsubishi Multi-Com-
5 OFF (Type 1) munications System manual for details.
The engine is off. The key can be inserted and ACC power auto-cutout func- To remove the key
removed only when the switch is in this position N00550901211
tion. N00539601071
After about 30 minutes has elapsed with the Type 1

ACC ignition switch in the “ACC” position, the
function automatically cuts out the power for When removing the key, first set the selector
Allows operation of electrical accessories the audio system and other electric devices lever to the “P” (PARK) position, and then
with the engine off. that can be operated with that position. turn the key to the “OFF” position and
When the ignition switch is turned from the remove it.
“ACC” position, the power is supplied again
ON to those devices.
All accessories can be used. NOTE

 It is possible to modify functions as follows:
START • The time until the power cuts out can be
changed to about 60 minutes.
• The ACC power auto-cutout function can
Engages the starter. Release the key when the be deactivated.
engine starts.It will automatically return to
the “ON” position.

Steering wheel lock (if so equipped)

ter (F.A.S.T.-key).] (Vehicles with steering
NOTE CAUTION lock system)
 The key cannot be removed unless the selec-  If the engine is stopped while driving, the
tor lever is set to the “P” (PARK) position, power brake booster will stop functioning
which allows the ignition switch to turn to and greater effort for braking will be
the “OFF” position. required. Also, the power steering system
will not function and it will require greater
effort to manually steer the vehicle.
Type 2  Do not leave the key in the “ON” position for
a long time when the engine is not running.
5
This will cause the battery to run down.
When removing the key, first set the selector  Do not turn the key to the “START” position
lever to the “P” (PARK) position, and push when the engine is running. It will damage
the key in at the “ACC” position and keep it the starter motor.
depressed until it is turned to the “LOCK”
position, and remove it.
Steering wheel lock (if so To lock
equipped)
N00512501235 Remove the key at the “LOCK” position.
Turn the steering wheel until it is locked.
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand
key).] To unlock
For information on operations for vehicles
equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu- Turn the key to the “ACC” position while
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to moving the steering wheel slightly.
(F.A.S.T.-key): Steering wheel lock” on page
5-24.
CAUTION
NOTE  Remove the key when leaving the vehicle.
 The key cannot be removed unless the selec- [Except for vehicles equipped with the
tor lever is set to the “P” (PARK) position, Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-
which allows the ignition switch to turn to
the “LOCK” position.

Starting the engine
NOTE Tips for starting CAUTION

 If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft  Do not push-start the vehicle.
lock may sometimes make it difficult to turn  Do not operate the starter motor continu-  Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive
the key from “LOCK” to “ACC”. Firmly ously for longer than 15 seconds as this at high speeds until the engine has had a
turn the steering wheel to the left or to the could run the battery down or damage the chance to warm up.
right as you turn the key. starter motor. If the engine does not start,  Release the ignition switch as soon as the
turn the ignition switch back to the “OFF” engine starts. Otherwise, the starter motor
5 or “LOCK” position, wait a few seconds, will be damaged
Starting the engine and then try again. Trying repeatedly with
N00512601845 the engine or starter motor still turning
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand
will damage the starter mechanism. Starting the engine
 If the engine will not start because the bat-
tery is weak or discharged, refer to This model is equipped with an electronically
key).]
“Jump-starting the engine” (on page 8-2) controlled fuel injection system. This is a sys-
For information on operation for vehicles
for instructions. tem that automatically controls fuel injection.
equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-
 A longer warm up period will only con- There is usually no need to depress the accel-
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to
sume extra fuel. The engine is warmed up erator pedal when starting the engine.
enough for driving when the bar graph of The starter should not be run for more than 15
(F.A.S.T.-key): Starting” on page 5-13.
engine coolant temperature display starts seconds at a time.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the to move or the low coolant temperature To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit- indicator goes out. Refer to “Engine cool- between attempts to restart the engine.
ter (F.A.S.T.-key).] ant temperature display” on page 5-171 or
“Low coolant temperature indicator” on 1. Make sure all occupants are properly
page 5-215. seated with seat belts fastened.
2. Insert the ignition key.
WARNING 3. Press and hold the brake pedal down with
your right foot.
 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
ventilated area any longer than is needed 4. Make sure the selector lever is in the “P”
to move your vehicle out of the area. Car- (PARK) position.
bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and
extremely poisonous, could build up and
cause serious injury or death.

Automatic transaxle (if so equipped)

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi- 3. If the engine still will not start, the engine lever in the “P” (PARK) position and let the
tion and make certain that all warning could be flooded with too much gasoline. engine idle for at least 10 minutes.
lights are functioning properly before While depressing the brake pedal, push The transaxle will warm up, and you will be
starting the engine. the accelerator pedal all the way down able to start normally.
6. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” and hold it there, then crank the engine for Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up
position without pressing the accelerator 5 to 6 seconds. Return the ignition switch operation.
pedal. Release the ignition switch when to the “OFF” or “LOCK” position and
the engine starts. release the accelerator pedal. Wait a few
seconds, and then crank the engine again
Using the MIVEC engine 5
NOTE for 5 to 6 seconds while depressing the
 Minor noises may be heard on engine start- brake pedal, but do not push the accelera- The MIVEC engine automatically switches
up. These will disappear as the engine warms tor pedal. Release the ignition key if the its intake-valve control between a low-speed
up. engine starts. If the engine fails to start, mode and a high-speed mode in accordance
repeat these procedures. If the engine still with driving conditions for maximum engine
will not start, contact your local Mitsubi- performance.
When the engine is hard to start shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of
your choice for assistance. NOTE
After several attempts, you may experience  To protect the engine, the high-speed mode
that the engine still does not start. Startability of automatic transaxle may not be selected while the engine coolant
temperature is low. In such a case, the engine
1. Make sure that all electric devices, such
vehicle and CVT vehicle with revolutions do not rise to over 5,000 rpm
as lights, air conditioning blower and rear ambient temperature of -22 °F (-30 even if the accelerator pedal is depressed.
window defogger, are turned off. °C) or lower
2. While depressing the brake pedal, press
the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it When the ambient temperature is -22 °F (-30 Automatic transaxle (if so
there, then crank the engine. Release the °C) or lower, it may not be possible to start equipped)
accelerator pedal, immediately after the from a standstill even with the selector lever N00513200216
engine starts. in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE)
position. Automatic transaxle will automatically
This occurs because the transaxle has not change its gear depending on road and driv-
warmed up sufficiently; it does not indicate a ing conditions. This helps achieve smooth
problem. If this occurs, place the selector driving and excellent fuel efficiency.


Also you can manually shift up and shift
down the transaxle. Refer to “Sports mode”
Selector lever operation
N00513801424
on page 5-72.
As an additional safety precaution, models
equipped with an automatic transaxle have a
DRIVING UPHILL shift-lock device that holds the selector lever
in the “P” (PARK) position. To move the
The transaxle prevents unnecessary upshifts selector lever from the “P” (PARK) position
5 even when the accelerator pedal is released to another position, follow the steps below.
and ensures smooth driving.
1. Press and hold the brake pedal down.
2. Move the selector lever to the desired
DRIVING DOWNHILL position.
According to the conditions, the transaxle

will automatically shift to a lower gear to NOTE
achieve stronger engine braking. This may  The selector lever cannot be moved from “P”
(PARK) to other position if the operation
help reduce your need to use the service
mode is put in OFF or ACC, or if the brake
brake. pedal is not pressed and held down.
NOTE The transaxle has 6 forward gears and 1

 During the break-in period or immediately reverse gear.
after reconnecting the battery, your vehicle The individual gears are selected automati-
may not shift smoothly. This does not indi- Set the selector lever in the gate to
cally, depending on the position of the gear
cate a problem in the transaxle. Shifting will operate while the brake pedal is
become smoother once the transaxle has
selector lever, the speed of the vehicle and the
depressed.
been shifted several times by the electronic position of the accelerator pedal.
control system. Set the selector lever in the gate to
operate.


3. Insert a screwdriver with a cloth over its
WARNING When the selector lever cannot be
tip into the notch (A) of the cover. Pry
 Always press the brake pedal when shift- shifted from the “P” (PARK) posi- gently as shown to remove the cover.
ing the selector lever into a gear from the tion
“N” (NEUTRAL) position. N00563101086
When beginning to drive, do not shift the
selector lever from the “N” (NEUTRAL) When the selector lever cannot be shifted
position while pressing the accelerator from the “P” (PARK) position to another
position while the brake pedal is pressed and
pedal. This will cause the vehicle to
“jump” forward or backward. held down with the operation mode in ON,
5
the battery may be flat or the shift-lock mech-
anism may be malfunctioning.
NOTE Immediately have your vehicle checked by an
 To prevent mistakes in operating the lever, authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
make sure you stop briefly at each position. repair facility of your choice.
After operating, check the position in the If you need to move the vehicle, shift the 4. Depress the brake pedal with the right
multi-information display. selector lever as follows. foot.
 If the brake pedal is not depressed and held, 5. Insert a screwdriver in the shift-lock
the shift-lock device activates to prevent the 1. Make sure the parking brake is firmly release hole (B). Shift the selector lever to
selector lever from being moved from the applied. the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while
“P” (PARK) position. 2. Stop the engine if it is running. pressing the screwdriver down.
 For a shift indicated by in the illustra-
tion, depress the brake pedal before moving
the selector lever. If you attempt to move the
selector lever before depressing the brake
pedal, the selector lever may become
immovable.


When the selector lever position indicator
Selector lever position display blinks while you are driving, there could be a
CAUTION
N00513901441  If a malfunction occurs in the A/T while
malfunction in the automatic transmission
When the operation mode is put in ON, the driving, the indicator will blink.
system or A/T fluid temperature becomes
In this case, immediately park your vehicle
selector lever position is shown on the multi- abnormally high. in a safe place and follow these procedures:
information display.
[If the indicator blinks rapidly (once per sec-
ond), the A/T fluid is overheating.]
5 Type 1 Type 2 Park your vehicle in a safe place but do not
turn off the engine. Move the selector lever
to the “P” (PARK) position and open the
bonnet. Keep the engine, idling.
After a while, move the selector lever into
any position other than “P” (PARK) position
and confirm that the indicator stops blinking.
It is safe to continue driving if the indicator
no longer blinks.
If the indicator continues blinking or blinks
intermittently, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
NOTE a repair facility of your choice.
 The “A” indicator on the selector lever posi- [If the indicator blinks slowly (once per 2
Warning display tion display will only blink if there is a prob- seconds), the A/T safety device may be oper-
N00514001292 lem with the A/T position switch. ating due to a malfunction.]
[For vehicles equipped mono-color liquid It is not seen during normal driving. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized
crystal display meter] Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice immediately.
[For vehicles equipped with color liquid

crystal display meter]
or


When the warning display or the warn- CAUTION Selector lever positions
ing display appears on the information screen  If a malfunction occurs in the automatic N00514201425
in the multi-information display while you
transaxle while driving, the warning dis-
are driving, there could be a malfunction in “P” PARK
the automatic transaxle. play or the warning display will appear
on the information screen in the multi-infor-
mation display. This position locks the transaxle to prevent
the vehicle from moving. The engine can be
In this case, immediately park your vehicle
in a safe place and follow these procedures: started in the “P” (PARK) position. 5
When warning display is showing “R” REVERSE
The automatic transaxle fluid is overheating.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place, put the
selector lever in the “P” position, and open Move the lever to this position only after the
the engine hood with the engine running to vehicle has come to a complete stop.
allow the engine to cool down. After a while,
confirm that the warning display is no CAUTION
longer showing. It is safe to continue driving  Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R”
if the display is no longer showing. If the (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
warning display remains or flashes fre- motion. If the lever is shifted into the “P”
quently, have your vehicle inspected by an (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position while
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a the vehicle is in motion, the transaxle may be
repair facility of your choice. damaged.
When warning display is showing

It may be that there is something unusual “N” NEUTRAL
happening in the automatic transaxle, caus-
ing a safety device to activate. Have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubi- At this position, the transaxle is disengaged.
shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your It is the same as the neutral position on a
choice immediately. manual transaxle and should be used when
the vehicle is not moving for an extended
length of time during driving, such as in a
traffic jam.
WARNING “L” LOW

 Never move the selector lever to the “N” SHIFT SHIFT
(NEUTRAL) position while driving since This position is for driving up very steep hills DOWN UP
you could accidentally slip it into the “P” and for engine braking at low speeds when
(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position, driving down steep hills.
damaging the transaxle.
 To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
WARNING
5 stopped on a slope, the engine should be
started in the “P” (PARK) position, not in  This position can be used for maximum
“N” (NEUTRAL) position. engine braking.
 To prevent rolling, always keep your foot Be very careful not to shift into “L”
on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in (LOW) suddenly.
“N” (NEUTRAL) position, or when shift- Sudden engine braking may cause the
ing into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL) posi- tires to skid.
tion. Select this position according to the road
conditions and vehicle speed. + (SHIFT UP)
The transaxle shifts up by one gear with
each operation.
“D” DRIVE
Sports mode
− (SHIFT DOWN)
This position is used for most city and high- N00514401456
The transaxle shifts down by one gear with
way driving. The transaxle will automatically While the vehicle is stopped or being driven each operation.
change its gear depending on road and driv- with the selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) or
ing conditions. “L” (LOW) position, sports mode can be
selected by pulling one of the sportronic To return to “D” (DRIVE) or “L” (LOW)
steering wheel paddle shifter towards you. operation, pull the sportronic steering wheel
CAUTION paddle shifter on the + (SHIFT UP) side for
In sports mode, rapid shifting is possible sim-
 To prevent transaxle damage, never shift into longer than 2 seconds.
the “D” (DRIVE) position from the “R” ply by operating the sportronic steering wheel
paddle shifter. When returning to “D” (DRIVE) or “L”
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
Unlike the manual transaxle, sports mode (LOW) operation, the selector lever position
motion.
allows shifting with the accelerator pedal display will change to “D” (DRIVE) or “L”
depressed. (LOW) position.

CAUTION NOTE Type 1 Type 2

 In sports mode, the driver must execute  When the selector lever is in the “D”
upward shifts in accordance with prevailing (DRIVE) position and sports mode is
road conditions, taking care to keep the selected, the vehicle will automatically
engine speed below the red zone. return to “D” (DRIVE) operation if the vehi-
 Repeated continuous operation of the spor- cle is stopped.
tronic steering wheel paddle shifter will con-  When the selector lever is in the “L” (LOW)
tinuously switch shift position.
 Gears may not change when the lateral pad-
position and sports mode is selected, the
vehicle will stay in sports mode and not
5
dle shifters are operated at the same time. return to “L” (LOW) operation even if the
vehicle is stopped.
 The upward shift may be made automatically
NOTE in sports mode when the engine revolutions NOTE
rise and approach the tachometer’s red zone  While driving in sports mode, the sports
 Gears can only be selected in a forward
(the red-coloured part of the tachometer mode display may change to show “D” and
direction from 1st gear to 6th gear. To
dial). shifting in sports mode may no longer be
reverse or park the vehicle, move the selector
lever to the “R” or “P” position.  When pulling away from a standstill on a possible.
slippery road, pull the sportronic steering This indicates that controls to drive in the
 To maintain good running performance, the
wheel paddle shifter on the + (SHIFT UP) “D” position are operating normally in order
transaxle may refuse to perform an upshift
side to select 2nd gear. Pull the sportronic to lower the temperature of the automatic
when the selector lever is moved to the
steering wheel paddle shifter on the − transaxle fluid; it does not indicate a mal-
“+(SHIFT UP)” position at certain vehicle
(SHIFT DOWN) side to shift back to 1st function. Once the temperature of the auto-
speeds. Also, to prevent over-revving of the
gear. matic transaxle fluid drops, shifting in the
engine, the transaxle may refuse to perform a
 When the sportronic steering wheel paddle sports mode will be possible again.
downshift when the lever is moved to the “−
(SHIFT DOWN)” position at certain vehicle shifter is operated with the selector lever in
speeds. When this happens, a buzzer sounds the “L” (LOW) position, gear is not shifted
to indicate that a downshift is not going to because the selectable shift range is limited.
take place.
 Downward shifts are made automatically Sports mode display
when the vehicle slows down. Before the N00538801180
vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically
selected.
In sports mode, the currently selected gear is
displayed on the information screen in the
multi-information display.

Operation of the automatic CAUTION Waiting

transaxle  Use the selector lever in the correct shift
N00514501372
position in accordance with driving condi- For short waiting periods, such as at traffic
tions. lights, the vehicle can be left in gear and held
CAUTION Never coast downhill backward in the driv- stationary with the service brake.
ing shift position {“D” (DRIVE), “L”
 Before selecting a gear with the engine run- For longer waiting periods with the engine
(LOW) position or sports mode} or coast
ning and the vehicle stationary, firmly running, place the selector lever in the “N”
5 depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehi-
forward in the “R” (REVERSE) position.
Engine stopping and increased brake pedal (NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking
cle from creeping. brake, while holding the vehicle stationary
and steering effort could lead to an accident.
The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the with the service brake.
 Do not rev the engine with the brake pedal
gear is engaged, especially when the engine
pressed when the vehicle is stationary. Prior to moving off after having stopped the
speed or idle speed is high, or with the air
conditioning operating. This can damage the transaxle. vehicle, make sure that the selector lever is in
Do not release the brake pedal until you are
Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal “D” (DRIVE) position or Sports mode posi-
while holding down the brake pedal with the tion.
ready to drive away.
selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) position,
 Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at
the engine revolutions may not rise as high
all times.
as when performing the same operation with CAUTION
Using the left foot could cause driver move-
the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL)  To avoid transaxle overheating, never try to
ment delay in case of an emergency.
position. keep your vehicle stationary on a hill by
 To prevent sudden acceleration, never run using the accelerator pedal. Always apply
the engine at high rpms when shifting from the parking brake and/or service brake.
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL). Passing acceleration  Do not rev the engine unnecessarily while
 Operating the accelerator pedal while the the vehicle is stationary. Unexpected acceler-
other foot is resting on the brake pedal will To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE) ation may occur if the selector lever is in a
affect braking efficiency and may cause pre- position other than “P” (PARK) or “N”
position (when passing another vehicle) push
mature wear of brake pads. (NEUTRAL).
the accelerator to the floor. The automatic
transaxle will automatically downshift.
NOTE Parking
 In sports mode, downshifts do not take place
when the accelerator is depressed all the way To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
to the floor. plete stop, firmly apply the parking brake,

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)

and then move the selector lever to the “P”
(PARK) position. Continuously variable Selector lever operation
transmission (CVT) (if so N00560301090
As an additional safety precaution, models

When the automatic transaxle equipped) equipped with a continuously variable trans-
makes no gear change N00560201060
mission have a shift-lock device that holds
The CVT will automatically and continuously the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position.
If the transaxle does not change gears while To move the selector lever from the “P”
driving, or your vehicle does not pick up
change its gear ratio depending on road and
driving conditions. This helps achieve (PARK) position to another position, follow 5
enough speed when starting on an uphill smooth driving and excellent fuel efficiency. the steps below.
slope, it may be that there is something If your vehicle is equipped with the spor-
unusual happening in the transaxle, causing a 1. Press and hold the brake pedal down.
tronic steering wheel paddle shifter, you can
safety device to activate. Have your vehicle 2. Move the selector lever to the desired
manually shift up and shift down the trans-
checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors position.
mission. Refer to “Sports mode” on page
dealer or a repair facility of your choice 5-80.
immediately. NOTE
 The selector lever cannot be moved from “P”
NOTE DRIVING UPHILL (PARK) to other position if the ignition
switch is set to the “OFF” or “LOCK” or
 When the warning display and “SLOW “ACC” position, or if the key has been
The transmission prevents unnecessary
removed, or the operation mode is put in
DOWN” or the warning display and upshifts even when the accelerator pedal is OFF or ACC, or if the brake pedal is not
“SERVICE REQUIRED” appear on the released and ensures smooth driving. pressed and held down.
information screen in the multi-information
display, there could be a malfunction in the
automatic transaxle. Refer to “Automatic DRIVING DOWNHILL The CVT selects an optimum ratio automati-
transaxle: Warning display” on page 5-70. cally when the selector lever is in the “D”
According to the conditions, the transmission (DRIVE) position, depending on the speed of
will automatically shift to a lower gear ratio the vehicle and the position of the accelerator
to achieve stronger engine braking. This may pedal.
help reduce your need to use the service
brake.


Set the selector lever in the gate to When the selector lever cannot be
operate. shifted from the “P” (PARK) posi-
tion
WARNING N00563301062
 Always press the brake pedal when shift- When the selector lever cannot be shifted
ing the selector lever into a selector posi- from the “P” (PARK) position to another
tion from the “N” (NEUTRAL) position. position while the brake pedal is pressed and
5 When beginning to drive, do not shift the
held down with the ignition switch at the
selector lever from the “N” (NEUTRAL)
position while pressing the accelerator
“ON” position or the operation mode in ON,
pedal. This will cause the vehicle to the battery may be flat or the shift-lock mech-
“jump” forward or backward. anism may be malfunctioning.
Except for vehicles equipped with sportronic Immediately have your vehicle checked by an
steering wheel paddle shifter authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
NOTE repair facility of your choice.
 To prevent mistakes in operating the lever, If you need to move the vehicle, shift the
make sure you stop briefly at each position. selector lever as follows.
After operating, check the position in the
multi-information display. 1. Make sure the parking brake is firmly
 If the brake pedal is not depressed and held, applied.
For vehicles equipped with sportronic steering the shift-lock device activates to prevent the 2. Stop the engine if it is running.
wheel paddle shifter selector lever from being moved from the
“P” (PARK) position.
 For a shift indicated by in the illustra-

tion, depress the brake pedal before moving
the selector lever. If you attempt to move the
selector lever before depressing the brake
pedal, the selector lever may be immovable.
Set the selector lever in the gate to

operate while the brake pedal is
depressed.


3. Insert a screwdriver with a cloth over its If the ambient temperature is low, the selector
tip into the notch (A) of the cover. Pry
Selector lever position display lever position display on the multi informa-
N00560401088
gently as shown to remove the cover. tion display may blink when the selector
When the ignition switch is turned to the lever is placed in the “D” (DRIVE), “Ds”
“ON” position or the operation mode is put in (DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING), “L”
ON, the selector lever position is shown on (LOW) or “R” (REVERSE) position immedi-
the multi-information display. ately after the engine has been started. This
indicates that the transmission requires warm-
ing up. While the display is blinking, the
5
Type 1 Type 2
vehicle will not move, because the transmis-
sion keeps disengaging until the warm up is
completed even if the selector lever is placed
in the “D”, “Ds”, “L” or “R” position.
4. Depress the brake pedal with the right When the selector lever position display is
foot. blinking, perform the following procedure:
5. Insert a screwdriver in the shift-lock 1. Depress the brake pedal with your right
release hole (B). Shift the selector lever to foot and place the selector lever in the
the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while “N” (NEUTRAL) position for several
pressing the screwdriver down. seconds.
When the selector lever position 2. Keep depressing the brake pedal and then
display blinks place the selector lever in the “D”
N00582900031 (DRIVE), “Ds” (DOWNSHIFT &
SPORTY DRIVING), “L” (LOW) or “R”
WARNING (REVERSE) position. If the selector lever
 To avoid unintended vehicle movement, position display stops blinking, the warm
keep brake pedal applied with your right
up is completed and the transmission will
foot and do not depress the accelerator
pedal, while the selector lever position dis-
function normally.
play is blinking. 3. If the display is still blinking, repeat steps
1 and 2 above.

NOTE CAUTION When the warning display or the warn-

 While the selector lever position display is  If a malfunction occurs in the CVT while ing display appears on the information screen
blinking, a buzzer will sound intermittently. driving, the indicator will blink. in the multi-information display while you
In this case, immediately park your vehicle are driving, there could be a malfunction in
in a safe place and follow these procedures: the CVT.
[If the indicator blinks rapidly (once per sec-
Warning display ond), the CVT fluid is overheating.]
N00560501089 CAUTION
5 [For vehicles equipped mono-color liquid
Park your vehicle in a safe place but do not
turn off the engine. Move the selector lever  If a malfunction occurs in the CVT while
crystal display meter] to the “P” (PARK) position and open the driving, the warning display or the
When the selector lever position indicator bonnet. Keep the engine, idling. warning display will appear on the informa-
blinks while you are driving, there could be a After a while, move the selector lever into tion screen in the multi-information display.
malfunction in the automatic transmission any position other than “P” (PARK) position In this case, follow these procedures:
and confirm that the indicator stops blinking.
system or CVT fluid temperature becomes [When warning display is showing]
It is safe to continue driving if the indicator
abnormally high. no longer blinks. The continuously variable transmission
If the indicator continues blinking or blinks (CVT) fluid is overheating. The engine con-
intermittently, have your vehicle inspected trol may activate to lower the CVT fluid tem-
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or perature, causing the engine revolutions and
a repair facility of your choice. vehicle speed to decrease, In this case, take
[If the indicator blinks slowly (once per 2 one of the following procedures.
seconds), the CVT safety device may be • Slow down your vehicle.
operating due to a malfunction.] • Stop your vehicle in a safe place, put the
Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position,
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility and open the engine hood with the engine
of your choice immediately. running to allow the engine to cool down.

crystal display meter]
NOTE
 The “A” indicator on the selector lever posi-
or
tion display will only blink if there is a prob-
lem with the CVT position switch.
It is not seen during normal driving.

CAUTION CAUTION WARNING

After a while, confirm that the warning  Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R”  To prevent rolling, always keep your foot
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in
display is no longer showing. It is safe to
motion. If the lever is shifted into the “P” “N” (NEUTRAL) position, or when shift-
continue driving if the display is no longer
(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position while ing into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
showing. If the warning display remains or
the vehicle is in motion, the transmission tion.
flashes frequently, have your vehicle
may be damaged.
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your “D” DRIVE 5
choice.
[When warning display is showing]
“N” NEUTRAL
This position is used for most city and high-
It may be that there is something unusual way driving. The transmission will automati-
happening in the CVT, causing a safety At this position, the transmission is disen- cally and continuously change its gear ratio
device to activate. Have your vehicle gaged. It is the same as the neutral position on depending on road and driving conditions.
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi a manual transaxle and should be used when
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your the vehicle is not moving for an extended
choice immediately. length of time during driving, such as in a CAUTION
traffic jam.  To prevent transmission damage, never shift
into the “D” (DRIVE) position from the “R”
Selector lever positions (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
N00560601107 WARNING motion.
 Never move the selector lever to the “N”
“P” PARK (NEUTRAL) position while driving since
you could accidentally slip it into the “P” “Ds” DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY
(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position,
This position locks the transmission to pre-
damaging the transmission. DRIVING (except for vehicles
vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can equipped with sportronic steering
 To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
be started in the “P” (PARK) position. stopped on a slope, the engine should be wheel paddle shifter)
started in the “P” (PARK) position, not in
“R” REVERSE “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
Use when engine braking is needed, or for
high-power sport drive.
Move the lever to this position only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.


Unlike the manual transaxle, sports mode When returning to “D” (DRIVE) operation,
“L” LOW
allows shifting with the accelerator pedal the selector lever position display will change
depressed. to “D” (DRIVE) position.
This position is for driving up very steep hills
and for engine braking at low speeds when
driving down steep hills. CAUTION
SHIFT SHIFT  Upward shifts do not take place automati-
DOWN UP cally in sports mode. The driver must make
WARNING
5  This position can be used for maximum
upward shifts in accordance with prevailing
road conditions, making sure the engine rpm
engine braking. remains below the red zone on the tachome-
Be very careful not to shift into “L” ter.
(LOW) suddenly.  Repeated continuous operation of the spor-
Sudden engine braking may cause the tronic steering wheel paddle shifter will con-
tires to skid. tinuously switch shift position.
Select this position according to the road  Shift ranges may not change when the lateral
conditions and vehicle speed. paddle shifters are operated at the same time.
Sports mode (for vehicles NOTE

equipped with sportronic steer- + (SHIFT UP)  Shift ranges can only be selected in a for-
Transmission shifts up once by each opera- ward direction from 1st to 6th. To reverse or
ing wheel paddle shifter tion. park the vehicle, move the selector lever to
N00560701081
the “R” or “P” position.
While the vehicle is stopped or being driven − (SHIFT DOWN)
with the selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE), Transmission shifts down once by each oper-
sports mode can be selected by pulling one of ation.
the sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter
towards you. To return to “D” (DRIVE) operation, pull the
In sports mode, rapid shifting is possible sim- sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter on
ply by operating the sportronic steering wheel the + (SHIFT UP) side for longer than 2 sec-
paddle shifter. onds.

NOTE Type 1 Type 2 CAUTION

 To maintain good running performance, the  Operating the accelerator pedal while the
transmission may refuse to perform an other foot is resting on the brake pedal will
upshift when the sportronic steering wheel affect braking efficiency and may cause pre-
paddle shifter is moved to the “+(SHIFT mature wear of brake pads.
UP)” position at certain vehicle speeds.  Use the selector lever in the correct shift
Also, to prevent over-revving of the engine, position in accordance with driving condi-
the transmission may refuse to perform a
downshift when the sportronic steering
tions.
Never coast downhill backward in the driv-
5
wheel paddle shifter is moved to the “− ing shift position {“D” (DRIVE), “DS”
(SHIFT DOWN)” position at certain vehicle (DOWN SHIFT & SPORTY DRVING), “L”
speeds. When this happens, a buzzer sounds (LOW) position or sports mode} or coast
to indicate that a downshift is not going to forward in the “R” (REVERSE) position.
take place. Operation of the CVT Engine stopping and increased brake pedal
 Downward shifts are made automatically N00560801082 and steering effort could lead to an accident.
when the vehicle slows down. Before the  Do not rev the engine with the brake pedal
vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically CAUTION pressed when the vehicle is stationary.
selected.  Before selecting a position with the engine This can damage the CVT.
Also, the vehicle will automatically return to running and the vehicle stationary, firmly Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal
“D” (DRIVE) operation if the vehicle is depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehi- while holding down the brake pedal with the
stopped. cle from creeping. selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) position,
 When the selector lever is in the “L” (LOW) The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the the engine revolutions may not rise as high
position, the sport mode is not selected even CVT is engaged, especially when the engine as when performing the same operation with
if you operate the sportronic steering wheel speed or idle speed is high, or with the air the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL)
paddle shifter. conditioning operating. position.
Do not release the brake pedal until you are
Sports mode display ready to drive away. Passing acceleration
N00560901067
 Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at
all times.
In sports mode, the currently selected shift Using the left foot could cause driver move- To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE)
range is displayed on the information screen ment delay in case of an emergency. position (when passing another vehicle) push
in the multi-information display.  To prevent sudden acceleration, never run the accelerator to the floor. The CVT will
the engine at high rpms when shifting from automatically downshift.
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL).

Electronically controlled 4WD system (if so equipped)
NOTE Parking NOTE

 In sports mode, downshifts do not take place  [For vehicles equipped with mono-color liq-
when the accelerator is depressed all the way To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com- uid crystal display meter]
to the floor. plete stop, firmly apply the parking brake, When the selector lever position indicator
and then move the selector lever to the “P” blinks while you are driving, there could be a
malfunction in the automatic transmission
(PARK) position.
Waiting system or CVT fluid temperature becomes
5 When the CVT makes no speed
abnormally high.
For short waiting periods, such as at traffic crystal display meter]
change
lights, the vehicle can be left in selector lever When the warning display and “SLOW
position and held stationary with the service
brake. If the CVT does not shift while driving, or DOWN” or the warning display and
For longer waiting periods with the engine your vehicle does not pick up enough speed “SERVICE REQUIRED” appear on the
running, place the selector lever in the “N” when starting on an uphill slope, it may be information screen in the multi-information
that there is something unusual happening in display, there could be a malfunction in the
(NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking
the transmission, causing a safety device to CVT. Refer to “Continuously variable trans-
brake, while holding the vehicle stationary mission (CVT): Warning display” on page
with the service brake. activate. Have your vehicle checked at an
5-78.
Prior to moving off after having stopped the authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
vehicle, make sure that the selector lever is in repair facility of your choice immediately.
“D” (DRIVE) position or Sports mode posi-
tion.
Electronically controlled
4WD system (if so equipped)
CAUTION N00548301045
 To avoid transmission overheating, never try The electronically controlled 4WD system
to keep your vehicle stationary on a hill by
helps improve acceleration and vehicle stabil-
using the accelerator pedal. Always apply
ity by controlling the front-rear distribution of
the parking brake and/or service brake.
driving torque using the electronic control
 Do not rev the engine unnecessarily while
the vehicle is stationary. Unexpected acceler- coupling in the rear differential assembly.
ation may occur if the selector lever is in a
position other than “P” (PARK) or “N”
(NEUTRAL).

NOTE Drive mode Function Drive mode-selector

 On vehicles with lever type parking brake, if This mode is for driving in N00548401046
the parking brake lever is pulled up while the slippery conditions, such as The drive mode can be switched by pressing
vehicle is moving, the front-rear distribution snow covered roads or on the drive mode switch while the ignition is in
of driving torque control will be temporarily sand. the “ON” position or the operation mode in
suspended, which will allow the rear wheels 4WD LOCK
Large traction torque is dis- ON.
to lock easier.
tributed to the rear wheels to
assist in getting out of slip- 5
pery areas.
Drive mode
4-wheel drive operation requires special driv-
Select the drive mode from the following 3 ing skills.
types to suit the driving conditions. Carefully read the “4-wheel drive operation”
section on page 5-88 and take care to drive
Drive mode Function safely.
This is most fuel efficient
mode
4WD ECO Normal operation is 2WD, If you press the switch, you can change the
but 4WD will engage in the drive mode in the order of 4WD ECO, 4WD
event of wheel slip. AUTO, 4WD LOCK, 4WD ECO.
All driving is in 4WD and
the distribution of traction CAUTION
torque to each wheel is  Do not operate the drive mode-selector with
4WD AUTO
automatically controlled the front wheels spinning on a snowy road or
depending on the driving in similar conditions. The vehicle could
conditions. lunge in an unexpected direction.
 Driving on dry, paved roads in “4WD
LOCK” mode causes increased fuel con-
sumption and noise.


After a few seconds, the information screen
NOTE returns from the drive mode display to the
CAUTION
 The drive mode can be switched while driv-  If the selected drive mode indicator begins
previous screen.
ing or stopped. blinking, the drive mode will automatically
switch to protect the drive-system compo-
Drive mode Display nents. A warning will also be displayed in
the information screen in the multi informa-
Drive mode indicator tion display.
N00549401030
5 Normally the indicator illuminates when the
4WD ECO
Warning display (color liquid crystal dis-
operation mode put in ON, and then the drive play)
mode is displayed a few seconds after the
engine is started.
The status of each drive mode display is as
4WD AUTO
follows.
Reduce speed and, if the indicator stops
Drive mode indicator blinking, you may resume normal driving.
mono-color For vehicles equipped with mono-color liq-
Drive Mode color liquid uid crystal display meter, drive mode indica-
liquid crys- 4WD LOCK
crystal dis- tor (“4WD-E”, “LOCK”) is blinking
tal display
play meter alternately
meter
4WD ECO 4WD ECO 4WD-E
4WD AUTO 4WD AUTO —
4WD LOCK 4WD LOCK LOCK
On vehicles with color liquid crystal display

meter, the drive mode is displayed as an inter-
rupt display on the information screen in the
multi information display when the drive
mode is switched.

S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control) (if so equipped)

ON, the drive mode will be changed to “4WD
CAUTION ECO” mode.
CAUTION
 If the drive mode indicator (4WD) is blink-  Do not over-rely on the S-AWC. Even the S-
If the ECO mode switch is switched OFF, the
ing, a problem has occurred with the elec- AWC cannot prevent the natural laws of
drive mode will be returned to “4WD AUTO”
tronically controlled 4WD. A warning will physics from acting on the vehicle. This sys-
also be displayed in the information screen mode. tem, like any other system, has limits and
in the multi information display. Refer to the “ECO mode switch” on page cannot help you to maintain traction and con-
5-231. trol of the vehicle in all circumstances. Reck-
Warning display (color liquid crystal dis-
play)
less driving can lead to accidents. It is the
driver’s responsibility to drive carefully.
5
NOTE
This means taking into account the traffic,
 If the drive mode is switched in any mode
road and environmental conditions.
after the drive mode is switched in “4WD
ECO”, the drive mode will not be changed
even if the ECO mode switch is switched
OFF. Electronically Controlled 4WD
Have your vehicle inspected by an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
For vehicles equipped with mono-color liq- The electronically controlled 4WD is a sys-
uid crystal display meter, drive mode indica- S-AWC (Super-All Wheel tem that improves acceleration performance
tor (“4WD-E”, “LOCK”) is blinking at the and stability performance by controlling
same time.
Control) (if so equipped) front-rear distribution of driving torque with
N00541301088
 Make sure that all four tires are the same operating the electronic control coupling
specified size, type, and brand, and have no arranged in the rear differential assembly.
S-AWC is an integrated vehicle dynamics
significant difference in the amount of wear.
control system that helps enhance driving
Otherwise, the electronically controlled
4WD system may not work properly, and the performance, cornering performance, and Active Yaw Control (AYC)
4WD system warning (overheating or ser- vehicle stability over a wide range of driving
vice required) may displayed. conditions through integrated management of
The AYC is a system, with a left-right differ-
the electronically controlled 4WD, the AYC
ential limiting function and yaw control func-
(Active Yaw Control), the ABS and the ASC.
When the ECO mode switch is tion, that controls the left-right
ON driving/braking force by managing the AFD*
N00576600020
(Active Front Differential), the brake, the
EPS.
While the drive mode is in the “4WD AUTO”
*: AFD (Active Front Differential)
position, if the ECO mode switch is switched


The Differential assembly that limits the front S-AWC
left-right differential speed by operating elec-
CAUTION
 Control of the braking force does not
drive Function
tronic control clutch arranged in the transfer mode
enhance the stopping performance of the
assembly.
vehicle, therefore, pay careful attention to This mode is for driving where
the safety of your surroundings when driv- maximum traction is required.
Left-right differential limiting ing. LOCK This mode is suitable for driv-
function ing on rough roads or driving
5 in mud, sand or fresh snow.
The left-right differential limiting function is S-AWC drive mode
a function that enhances driving performance N00542401086 4-wheel drive operation requires special driv-
and vehicle stability by preventing idle spin- Select the drive mode from the following four ing skills.
ning of a wheel when driving on slippery types to suit the driving conditions. Carefully read the “4-wheel drive operation”
road or when the road surfaces of left and section on page 5-88 and take care to drive
right wheels are different. S-AWC safety.
drive Function
Yaw control function mode S-AWC drive mode-selector
This is the most fuel efficient N00583000055
mode. Normal operation is in The drive mode can be switched by press the
The yaw control function is a function that
AWC ECO 2WD, but 4WD performance switch while the operation mode in ON.
enhances vehicle cornering performance and
vehicle stability with management of vehicle will be provided under slippery
turning power (yaw moment) by controlling conditions.
the drive power difference of the left and This mode can be used on both
right wheels and the braking force when the dry and wet roads. The distri-
vehicle does not turn in response to steering bution of driving/braking
NORMAL
input, such as when the steering wheel is torque to each wheel is auto-
turned quickly or when driving on slippery matically controlled according
road. to the driving condition.
This mode is for driving on
SNOW slippery road surfaces, such as
snow-covered roads.


If you press the switch, you can change the The currently selected drive mode is dis-
drive mode in the order of AWC ECO, NOR- played on the multi-information display.
CAUTION
 If the drive mode indicator (4WD) is blink-
MAL, SNOW, LOCK, AWC ECO. In addition, when the drive mode is changed,
ing, a problem has occurred with the S-
the selected mode appears on the interrupt
AWC. A warning will also be displayed in
CAUTION display screen of the information screen in the information screen in the multi informa-
 Do not operate the drive mode-selector with
the multi-information display. tion display.
the front wheels spinning on a snowy road or The drive mode display will appear on the
information screen for a few seconds, and Warning display
in similar conditions. The vehicle could
lunge in an unexpected direction. then the original screen will return.
5
 Driving on dry, paved roads in “LOCK”
mode causes increased fuel consumption and CAUTION
noise.
 If the selected drive mode indicator begins
blinking, the drive mode will automatically
Have your vehicle inspected by an autho-
switch to protect the drive-system compo- rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
NOTE nents. A warning will also be displayed in
 Make sure that all four tires are the same
 The drive mode can be switched while driv- the information screen in the multi informa-
specified size, type, and brand, and have no
ing or stopped. tion display.
significant difference in the amount of wear
Warning display for all 4 wheels. Otherwise, the S-AWC sys-
tem may not work properly, and a 4WD sys-
S-AWC drive mode display tem warning (overheating or service
N00583100030 required) may be displayed.
S-AWC operation display

Reduce speed and, if the indicator stops N00542501074
blinking, you may resume normal driving.
The S-AWC operation status can be displayed
mation display.
To display the status, press the multi-informa-
tion meter switch to change the information
screen.
Example: “AWC ECO” mode is selected. Refer to “Information screen (With the igni-
tion switch or the operation mode in ON)” on
4-wheel drive operation

page 5-169.
WARNING 4-wheel drive operation
 Always concentrate on your driving first. N00530601182
Display example Keep your eyes and mind on the road. Dis-
Your vehicle has been designed primarily for
tractions while driving can lead to an acci-
dent.
use on pavement.
The S-AWC operation status is displayed. But its unique 4 -wheel drive system allows
you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads,
to campgrounds, picnic sites, and similar
5 When the ECO mode switch is locations.
ON Not only does this ensure better handling on
N00576700021 dry, paved roads but also permits better trac-
While the drive mode is in the “NORMAL” tion when driving on slippery, wet or snow-
position, if the ECO mode switch is switched covered roads and when moving out of mud.
ON, the drive mode will be changed to But it is not suitable for heavy off road use or
“AWC ECO” mode. towing in rough conditions.
If the ECO mode switch is switched OFF, the It is particularly important to note that 4-
drive mode will be returned to “NORMAL” wheel drive may not give sufficient hill
Yaw control function display mode. climbing ability and engine braking on steep
The amount of the yaw moment is displayed Refer to the “ECO mode switch” on page slopes. You should try to avoid driving on
as a bar graph. 5-231. steep slopes.
A, D- Clockwise yaw moment about the Also, you must exercise caution when driving
vehicle’s center of gravity on sand and mud and when driving through
B, C- Counterclockwise yaw moment
NOTE
water because sufficient traction may not be
 If the drive mode is switched in any mode
about the vehicle’s center of gravity available in certain circumstances.
after the drive mode is switched in “AWC
ECO”, the drive mode will not be changed Please avoid driving the vehicle through areas
Differential limiting function display even if the ECO mode switch is switched where the tires may get stuck in deep sand or
The strength of the differential limiting OFF. mud.
operation (between front-rear wheels and
between left-right wheels) is displayed in
section E of the meter as a bar graph.


slight difference in steering may be experi-
WARNING NOTE enced similar to feeling as if the brakes were
 Do not over-rely on the 4-wheel drive vehi-  Note that the stopping distance required of
applied. This is called tight corner braking
cles. Even 4-wheel drive vehicles have lim- the 4-wheel drive vehicle differs very little
and results from each of the four tires being at
its to the system and ability to maintain from that of the front-wheel drive vehicle.
control and traction. Reckless driving may When driving on a snow-covered road or a a different distance from the corner. The phe-
lead to accidents. Always drive carefully, slippery, muddy surface, make sure that you nomenon is typical of 4-wheel drive vehicles.
taking account of the road conditions. keep a sufficient distance between your vehi- If this occurs, either straighten out the steer-
ing wheel or change to another mode.
 Improperly operating this vehicle on or
off-pavement can cause an accident or
cle and the one ahead of you.
 The driving posture should be more upright;
5
rollover in which you and your passengers adjust the seat to a good position for easy
could be seriously injured or killed. steering and pedal operation. Be sure to wear
On snowy or icy roads
• Follow all instructions and guidelines in the seat belt.
the owner’s manual.  After driving on rough roads, check each Set the drive mode-selector to “4WD
• Keep your speed low and do not drive part of the vehicle and wash it thoroughly AUTO”, “4WD LOCK” (Electronically con-
faster than conditions. with water. Refer to the “Inspection and trolled 4WD) or “SNOW” (S-AWC) in accor-
maintenance following rough road opera- dance with the road conditions, and then
tion” section and “Vehicle care and Mainte- gradually depress the accelerator pedal for a
NOTE nance” sections.
smooth start.
 Driving on rough roads can be hard on a
vehicle. Before you leave the pavement, be
sure all scheduled maintenance and service CAUTION NOTE
 Setting the drive mode-selector to “4WD  The use of snow tires is recommended.
has been done, and that you have inspected
your vehicle. Pay special attention to the LOCK” (Electronically controlled 4WD) or  Maintain a safe distance between vehicles,
condition of the tires, and check the tire pres- “LOCK” (S-AWC) position to drive on dry avoid sudden braking, and use engine brak-
sures. paved road will increase fuel consumption, ing (downshifting).
 Mitsubishi Motors is not responsible to the with possible noise generation.
operator for any damage or injury caused or
liability incurred by improper and negligent CAUTION
operation of a vehicle. All techniques of Turning sharp corners  Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration
vehicle operation depend on the skill and and sharp turning. Skidding occurs and con-
experience of the operator and other partici- trol of the vehicle could be lost.
pating parties. Any deviation from the rec- When turning a sharp corner in “4WD
ommended operating instructions above is at LOCK” (Electronically controlled 4WD) or
their own risk. “LOCK” (S-AWC) position at low speed, a

Driving on sandy or muddy CAUTION Climbing/descending sharp

roads • If the “ ” warning display and “SLOW grades
DOWN” or the “ ” warning display and
Set the drive mode-selector to “4WD LOCK” “SERVICE REQUIRED” appear on the Your vehicle may not provide sufficient hill
(Electronically controlled 4WD) or “LOCK” information screen in the multi-information climbing ability and engine braking on steep
(S-AWC) and then gradually depress the display. slope. Avoid driving on steep slopes even
accelerator pedal for a smooth start. Keep the though the vehicle is an 4-wheel drive vehi-
5 pressure on the accelerator pedal as constant
Refer to “Warning display” on page 5-70,
5-78. cle.
as possible, and drive at low speed.
WARNING Driving through water

CAUTION  When attempting to rock your vehicle out N00537800085
 Do not force the vehicle or drive recklessly of a stuck position, be sure that the area If the electrical circuits become wet, further
on sandy surfaces. In comparison with nor- around the vehicle is clear of people and operation of the vehicle will be impossible;
mal road surfaces, the engine and other physical objects. The rocking motion may
drive-system components are put under
therefore, avoid driving through water unless
cause the vehicle to suddenly launch for- absolutely necessary. If driving through water
excessive strain when driving on such a sur- ward/backward, causing injury or dam-
face. This could lead to accidents. is unavoidable, use the following procedure:
age to nearby people or objects.
 If any of the following conditions occur
while the vehicle is being driven, immedi- Check the depth of the water and the terrain
ately park your vehicle in a safe place and before attempting to drive through it. Drive
follow these procedures:
NOTE slowly to avoid creating excessive water
• If the engine coolant temperature display  Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration splashing.
and sharp turning; such operations could
flashes on the information screen in the result in the vehicle becoming stuck.
multi-information display or the engine  If the vehicle becomes stuck in sandy or
power drops suddenly. muddy roads, it can often be moved with a
Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4. rocking motion. Move the selector lever
alternately between the “D” (DRIVE) and
“R” (REVERSE) positions while pressing
lightly on the accelerator pedal.
 Driving on rough road can cause rust on the
vehicle; wash the vehicle thoroughly as soon
as possible after such use.

Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation

Drive the vehicle slowly while lightly Pay close attention to the tires.
CAUTION depressing the brake pedal in order to dry
 Never drive through water that is deep  Install only the specified tires on all
out the brakes. If the brakes still do not
enough to cover wheel hubs, axles or exhaust wheels. Refer to “Tires and wheels” on
function properly, contact an authorized
pipe. Do not change the selector lever posi- page 11-7.
tion while driving through water. Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
ity of your choice as soon as possible to  Be sure all four tires and wheels are the
Frequent driving through water can
adversely affect the life span of the vehicle; have the brakes checked. same size and type.
 Remove the insects, dried grass, etc. clog- When it is necessary to replace any of the
consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice and ging the radiator core. tires or wheels, replace all four. 5
take the necessary measures to prepare,  After driving through water, check the  All tires should be rotated before the wear
inspect, and repair the vehicle. engine, transaxle and differential oil. If difference between the front and rear tires
 After driving through water, apply the brakes the oil or grease is milky or cloudy is recognizable.
to be sure they are functioning properly. If because of water contamination, it must
the brakes are wet and not functioning prop-
be replaced with new oil. Good vehicle performance cannot be
erly, dry them out by driving slowly while expected if there is a difference in wear
 Check the inside of the vehicle. If water
lightly depressing the brake pedal. Inspect between tires. Refer to “Tire rotation” on
each part of the vehicle carefully. entry is found, dry the carpet etc.
 Inspect the headlights. If water is in the page 9-20.
headlight housing, have it drained at an
 Check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
Inspection and maintenance repair facility of your choice.
following rough road opera- CAUTION
tion Cautions on the handling of  Always use tires of the same size, type, and
brand that have no wear differences. Using
N00530700085
4-wheel drive vehicles tires of different size, type, brands or degree
After operating the vehicle in rough road con- N00530801214
of wear, will increase the differential oil tem-
ditions, be sure to perform the following perature and result in possible damage to the
inspection and maintenance procedures: driving system. Further, the drive train will
Tires and wheels be subject to excessive loading, possibly
 Check that the vehicle has not been dam- leading to oil leakage, component seizure, or
aged by rocks, gravel, etc. Since the driving torque can be applied to the other serious failures.
 Carefully wash the vehicle with water. four wheels, the driving performance of the
vehicle when operating in 4-wheel drive is
greatly affected by the condition of the tires.

Service brake
Towing Jacking up a 4-wheel drive CAUTION

vehicle  It is important not to drive the vehicle with
your foot resting on the brake pedal when
braking is not required. This practice can
WARNING result in very high brake temperatures, pre-
mature lining wear, and possible damage to
 Do not crank the engine while jacking up
the brakes.
the vehicle.
5 The tire on the ground may turn and the
vehicle may roll off the jack.
Power brakes
N00517600364
Service brake Your vehicle is equipped with power brakes

N00517500275 for more braking force with less brake pedal
effort.
Brake pedal Your brakes are designed to operate at full
capacity, even if the power assist is not being
used.
Overuse of the brake can cause weakening,
CAUTION resulting in poor brake response and prema-
If the power assist is not being used, the effort
 Do not tow 4-wheel drive vehicles with the needed to press the brake pedal is greater.
ture wear of the brake pads. If you should lose the power assist for some
front or rear wheels on the ground (Type A
or Type B) as illustrated. This could result in When driving down a long or steep hill, use reason, the brakes will still work.
damage to the drivetrain, or unstable towing. engine braking by downshifting. If the power brake unit or either of the two
If you tow 4-wheel drive vehicles, use Type brake hydraulic systems stops working prop-
C or Type D equipment. WARNING erly, the rest of the brake system will still
 Even in “4WD ECO” (Electronically con-  Do not leave any objects near the brake work, but the vehicle will not slow down as
trolled 4WD) or “AWC ECO” (S-AWC) pedal or let a floor mat slide under it; quickly.
drive mode, the vehicle cannot be towed doing so could prevent the full pedal You will know this has happened if you find
with the front or the rear wheels on the stroke that would be necessary in an
ground.
you need to press the brake down farther, or
emergency. Make sure that the pedal can harder when slowing down or stopping, or if
be operated freely at all times. Make sure
the brake warning light and the warning dis-
the floor mat is securely held in place.
play in the multi-information display come
on.

Brake auto hold (if so equipped)
WARNING Brake auto hold (if so equipped) How to use brake auto hold
 Never coast downhill with the engine OFF. N00592000035
Keep the engine running whenever your
vehicle is in motion. If you turn off the When the vehicle is stopped at traffic lights To turn on brake auto hold
engine while driving, the power brake etc., the vehicle can be held stationary with
booster will stop working and your brakes the brake auto hold system even if you If the brake auto hold switch is pressed while
will not work as well. release your foot from the brake pedal. all of the following conditions are met, the
 If the power assist is lost or if either brake
hydraulic system stops working properly,
When the accelerator pedal is depressed, the system will change to the standby state and 5
brakes are released. the indicator light (A) on the switch comes
take your vehicle to an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
on.
of your choice immediately. WARNING  The operation mode in ON.
 Do not overly rely on the brake auto hold
 The driver’s seat belt is fastened.
system. On steep slope, depress the brake
pedal firmly because the system may not  The driver’s door is closed.
Brake pad wear alarm
hold the vehicle stationary.
N00550700124
 Never leave the vehicle while it is being
The disc brakes have an alarm that makes a stopped by the brake auto hold system.
metallic squeal when the brake pads have When leaving the vehicle, apply the park-
worn down enough to need service. ing brake and move the selector lever to
If you hear this sound, have the brake pads the “P” (PARK) position.
replaced at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors  Do not use brake auto hold system when
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. driving on slippery roads. The system may
not hold the vehicle stationary and could
result in an accident.
WARNING
 Driving with worn brake pads will make it
harder to stop, and can cause an accident. NOTE
 While operating the brake auto hold system,
you may hear an operation noise to increase
braking force when the system detected the
movement of the vehicle. This does not indi-
cate a malfunction.

Brake auto hold (if so equipped)
NOTE NOTE To activate brake auto hold

 When the brake auto hold system cannot be • When there is a malfunction in the system
used, a buzzer will sound and the message When the vehicle is stopped by depressing
will appear on the information screen in the the brake pedal with the selector lever in any
multi information display. position other than “P” (PARK) or “R”
(REVERSE), the brake auto hold activates
and the vehicle will be held stationary.
5  If keeping pressing the brake auto hold The brake auto hold indicator light in the
switch after setting the brake auto hold to instrument cluster will come on while the
ON (stand by), the brake auto hold will system activates.
 If the brake auto hold switch is pressed with return to OFF as a protection function is
the driver’s seat belt is not fastened, a buzzer operated.
will sound and the message will appear on After returning to OFF, the brake auto hold
the information screen in the multi informa- will not be switched to ON (Stand by) even if or
tion display. the brake auto hold switch is pressed. To set
the brake auto hold to ON, restart the engine
and press the brake auto hold switch again.
 If any of the following occur while the sys-

tem is standby state, the brake auto hold sys-
tem will be turned off automatically and the
indicator light on the switch goes off.
A buzzer will sound and the message will
CAUTION
appear on the information screen in the multi  Release the brake pedal only after the brake
information display. auto hold indicator light has illuminated.
• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
• When the driver’s door is opened.
NOTE
 If the following operation is performed, the
brake auto hold will be deactivated automati-
cally and the brake auto hold indicator light
in the instrument cluster goes off.

Hill start assist (if so equipped)
NOTE NOTE To turn off brake auto hold

• When shifting the selector lever to the “P” If the Electric parking brake cannot be
(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position with applied automatically due to the system mal- Press the brake auto hold switch to turn off
depressing the brake pedal. function, the message will appear on the the brake auto hold. The indicator light on the
• When the Electric parking brake is applied information screen in the multi information switch goes off.
by using the Electric parking brake switch. display. Depress the brake pedal. If you want to turn off the system while the
 While the vehicle is held stationary with the brake auto hold indicator light is illuminated,
brake auto hold system, the Electric parking press the switch with depressing the brake 5
brake will be automatically applied under the pedal.
following conditions, and a buzzer will
sound and the message will appear on the
information screen in the multi information  If the operation mode is put in OFF with the
NOTE
display.  If the brake auto hold system is turned off
selector lever in any position other than “P”
• After approximately 10 minutes has elapsed without the brake pedal being depressed, a
(PARK) position, the message may appear
with applying the brake auto hold system. buzzer will sound and the message will
on the information screen in the multi infor-
appear on the information screen in the multi
• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened. mation display.
• When the driver’s door is opened. If the message appears, shift the selector
• When the operation mode is put in OFF. lever to the “P” (PARK) position while
• When the system detects the vehicle sliding depressing the brake pedal.
down a slope.
Hill start assist (if so equipped)

To start the vehicle N00562601097
Depress the acceleration pedal with the selec- The hill start assist makes it easy to start off
tor lever in any position other than “P” on a steep uphill slope by preventing the
(PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL). vehicle from moving backwards. It keeps the
The brakes are released, and the brake auto braking force for about 2 second when you
hold indicator light in the instrument cluster move your foot from the brake pedal to the
will go off. accelerator pedal.

Brake assist system

3. Depress the accelerator pedal and the hill Warning display
CAUTION start assist will gradually decrease the
 Do not overly rely on the hill start assist to
braking force as the vehicle starts moving.
prevent backwards movement of the vehicle.
Under certain circumstances, even when hill
start assist is activated, the vehicle may NOTE
move backwards if the brake pedal is not suf-  The hill start assist is activated when all of
ficiently depressed, if the vehicle is heavily the following conditions are met.
5 loaded, or if the road is very steep or slip- • The engine is running. CAUTION
pery.  If the warning is displayed, the hill start
(The hill start assist will not be activated
 The hill start assist is not designed to keep while the engine is starting or immediately assist will not operate. Start off carefully.
the vehicle stopped in place on uphill slopes after the engine is started.)  Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
for more than 2 seconds. engine.
• The selector lever is in any position other
 When facing uphill, do not rely on using the than “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL). Restart the engine and check whether the
hill start assist to maintain a stopped position indicator/display goes out, in which case the
• The vehicle is completely stationary, with
as an alternative to depressing the brake the brake pedal depressed. hill start assist is again working normally.
pedal. If they remain displayed or reappear fre-
• The parking brake is released.
Doing so could cause an accident. quently, it is not necessary to stop the vehicle
 The hill start assist will not operate if the
 Do not turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”, immediately, but the vehicle should be
accelerator pedal is depressed before the
“LOCK” or “ACC” position while the hill inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
brake pedal is released.
start assist is operating. The hill start assist Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
could stop operating, which could result in  The hill start assist also operates when
choice as soon as possible.
reversing on an uphill slope.
an accident.
Warning display Brake assist system

To operate N00567301132
N00562801103
N00562701128
If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys- The brake assist system is a device assisting
1. Stop the vehicle completely using the
tem, the following display/indicator will turn drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal
brake pedal.
on. firmly such as in emergency stop situations
2. Release the brake pedal and the hill start
and provides greater braking force.
assist will maintain the braking force
applied while stopped for approximately 2
- ASC indicator If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the
seconds. brakes will be applied with more force than
usual.

Anti-lock braking system

 Operation of anti-lock braking system is
CAUTION NOTE not restricted situations where brakes are
 The brake assist system is not a device  When the anti-lock brake system warning
applied suddenly. This system may also
designed to exercise braking force greater light or only active stability control warning
prevent the wheels from locking when
than its capacity. Make sure to always keep a light illuminate, the brake assist system in
sufficient distance between your vehicle and not functioning. you drive over manholes, steel roadwork
a vehicle in front of you without relying too plates, road markings, or any uneven road
much on the brake assist system. surface.
Anti-lock braking system  When the anti-lock braking system is in
N00517900240 use, you may feel the brake pedal vibrat-
5
NOTE The anti-lock braking system helps prevent ing and hear a unique sound. It may also
 Once the brake assist system is operational, the wheels from locking up when braking. feel as if the pedal resists being pressed.
it maintains great braking force even if the This helps maintain vehicle drivability and In this situation, simply hold the brake
brake pedal is lightly released. steering wheel handling. pedal down firmly. Do not pump the
To stop its operation, completely remove brake, which will result in reduced
your foot from the brake pedal. braking performance.
 The brake assist system may become opera- Driving hints
tional when the brake pedal is fully
depressed even if it has not been depressed  When using the anti-lock brakes (sudden CAUTION
suddenly. braking), steering is slightly different  The anti-lock braking system cannot prevent
 When the brake assist system is in use while from normal driving conditions. Use the accidents. It is your responsibility to take
driving, you may feel as if the depressed steering wheel carefully. safety precautions and to drive carefully.
brake pedal is soft, the pedal moves in small  Always keep a safe distance from the  To prevent failure of the anti-lock braking
motions in conjunction with the operation vehicle in front of you. Even if your vehi- system, be sure all 4 wheels and tires are the
noise, or the vehicle body and the steering cle is equipped with the anti-lock braking same size and the same type.
wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake system, leave a greater braking distance
assist system is operating normally and does
when:
not indicate faulty operation. Continue to
• Driving on gravel or snow-covered NOTE
depress the brake pedal.
roads.  A whining sound is emitted from the engine
 You may hear an operation noise when the compartment when driving immediately
brake pedal is suddenly or fully depressed • Driving on uneven road surfaces.
after starting the engine. These are the nor-
while stationary. This does not indicate a mal sounds the anti-lock braking system
malfunction and the brake assist system is makes when performing a self-check. It does
operating normally. not indicate a malfunction.

Anti-lock braking system

However, if the warning light / display do
NOTE CAUTION not disappear, or if they come on again
 The anti-lock braking system can be used  Any of the following indicates that the anti-
when the vehicle is driven, have the vehi-
after the vehicle has reached a speed over lock braking system is not functioning and
cle checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It stops only the standard brake system is working.
working when the vehicle slows below 3 (The standard brake system is functioning Motors dealer or repair facility of your
mph (5 km/h). normally.) If this happens, take your vehicle choice as soon as possible.
to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
5 Anti-lock braking system warn- a repair facility of your choice.
• When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
If the anti-lock braking system
ing light / display position or the operation mode is put in ON,
warning light / display and brake
N00531601684 the warning light does not come on or it warning light / display illuminate
Warning light
remains on and does not go off at the same time
• The warning light comes on while driving
• The warning display appears while driving Warning light
Warning display
If the warning light / display
illuminate while driving Warning display
N00531701614
If only the anti-lock braking sys-

If there is a malfunction in the system, the tem warning light/display illumi-
anti-lock braking system warning light will nate
come on and the warning display will appear
on the information screen in the multi-infor-  Avoid hard braking and high-speed driv-
mation display. ing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Under normal conditions, the anti-lock brak- Test the system by restarting the engine
ing system warning light only comes on when and driving at a speed of about 12 mph
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” (20 km/h) or higher. The anti-lock braking system and brake force
position or the operation mode is put in ON If the warning light / display then remains distribution function may not work, so hard
and goes off a few seconds later. off during driving, there is no abnormal braking could make the vehicle unstable.
condition.

Electric power steering system (EPS)

Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact an Electric power steering sys- NOTE
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or repair tem (EPS)  During repeated full-lock turning of the
steering wheel (for example, while you are
facility of your choice. N00568401084
manoeuvring the vehicle into a parking
The power steering system operates while the space), a protection function may be acti-
NOTE engine is running. It helps reduce the effort vated to prevent overheating of the power
 The anti-lock braking system warning light needed to turn the steering wheel. steering system. This function will make the
and brake warning light illuminate at the The power steering system has mechanical steering wheel gradually harder to turn. In
this event, limit your turning of the steering
5
same time and the warning displays appear steering capability in case the power assist is
alternately on the information screen in the wheel for a while. When the system has
lost. If the power assist is lost for some rea-
multi-information display. cooled down, the steering effort will return
son, you will still be able to steer your vehi- to normal.
cle, but you will notice it takes much more  If you turn the steering wheel while the vehi-
effort to steer. If this happens, have your vehicle is stationary with the headlights on, the
After driving on icy roads cle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi headlights may become dim. This behavior
N00529201090 Motors dealer or a repair facility of your is not abnormal. The headlights will return to
After driving on snow or icy roads, remove choice. their original brightness after a short while.
any snow and ice which may have be left
around the wheels. On vehicles that have an WARNING
anti-lock braking system, be careful not to  Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is Electric power steering system
damage the wheel speed sensors (A) or the moving. Stopping the engine would make warning display
cables located at each wheel. the steering wheel extremely hard to turn,
possibly resulting in an accident.
Warning lamp
Front Rear
Warning display

Active stability control (ASC)

If there is a malfunction in the system, the Traction control function  P.5-100
warning light will come on and the warning Skid control function  P.5-100
NOTE
 When the ASC is activated, you may feel a
display will appear on the information screen
vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whin-
in the multi information display. CAUTION ing sound from the engine compartment.
Under normal conditions, the warning light  Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC This indicates that the system is operating
come on when the ignition switch is turned to cannot prevent the natural laws of physics normally. It does not indicate a malfunction.
the “ON” position or the operation mode is from acting on the vehicle. This system, like  When the anti-lock braking system warning
put in ON, and goes off after the engine has
5 started.
any other system, has limits and cannot help
you to maintain traction and control of the
light is illuminated, the ASC is not active.
vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driv-

ing can lead to accidents. It is the driver’s Traction control function
CAUTION responsibillty to drive carefully, This means N00559200021
 If the warning display appears while the taking into account the traffic, road and envi- On slippery surfaces, the traction control
engine is running, have the vehicle inspected ronmental conditions.
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or function prevents the drive wheels from spin-
 Be sure to use the same specified type and ning excessive, thus helping the vehicle to
a repair facility of your choice as soon as
size of tire on all four wheels. Otherwise, the
possible. It may become harder to turn the start moving from a stopped condition. It also
ASC may not work properly.
steering wheel. provides sufficient driving force and steering
 Do not install any aftermarket limited slip
performance as the vehicle turns while press-
differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASC
may stop functioning properly. ing the acceleration pedal.
Active stability control
(ASC) CAUTION
N00559100147
NOTE  When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy
 An operation noise may be emitted from the road, be sure to install snow tires and drive
The Active stability control (ASC) takes engine compartment in the following situa- the vehicle at moderate speeds.
overall control of the anti-lock braking sys- tions. The sound is associated with checking
tem, traction control function and skid control the operations of the ASC. At this time, you
function to help maintain the vehicle’s control may feel a shock from the brake pedal if you Skid control function
and traction. Please read this section in con- depress it. These do not indicate a malfunc-
N00559300019
junction with the page on the anti-lock brak- tion.
ing system, traction control function and skid • When the ignition switch is set to the “ON” The skid control function is designed to help
control function. position. the driver maintain control of the vehicle on
• When the vehicle is driven for a while after slippery roads or during rapid steering
Anti-lock braking system  P.5-97 the engine is turned on.

Active stability control (ASC)

maneuvers. It works by controlling the engine ASC OFF indicator
output and the brake on each wheel.
CAUTION -
This indicator will turn on when the
 For safety reasons, the ASC OFF switch
ASC is turned off with the ASC OFF
should be operated when your vehicle is
NOTE stopped. switch.
 The skid control function operates at speeds  Be sure to keep the ASC on while driving in
of about 9 mph (15 km/h) or higher. normal circumstances. CAUTION
 When display/indicator blinks, ASC is
operating, which means that the road is slip- 5
ASC OFF switch NOTE pery or that your vehicle’s wheels are begin-
N00559401307  Using the ASC OFF switch turns off both the ning to slip. If this happens, drive slower.
stability control function and the traction  If the temperature in the braking system con-
The ASC is automatically activated when the control function. tinues to increase due to continuous brake
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-  When moving out of mud, sand or fresh control on a slippery road surface, the
tion. You can deactivate the system by press- snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not indicator will blink.
ing down the ASC OFF switch for 3 seconds allow the engine speed to increase. In such To prevent the brake system from overheat-
or longer. situations, temporarily turning off ASC with ing, the brake control of the traction control
the ASC OFF switch will make it easier to function will be temporarily suspended.
When the ASC is deactivated, the indica-
move out your vehicle. The engine control of the traction control
tor will turn on. To reactivate the ASC,  If you continue to press the ASC OFF switch function and normal brake operation will not
momentarily press the ASC OFF switch; the after the ASC is turned off, the “mistaken be affected.
indicator is turned off. operation protection function” will activate Park your vehicle in a safe place. When the
and the ASC will turn back on. temperature in the braking system has come
down, the indicator will be turned off and
the traction control function will start operat-
ASC operation display or ASC ing again.
OFF indicator
N00559501249
ASC operation display/ASC indicator

-
The display/indicator will blink when
the ASC is operating.

Cruise control (if so equipped)
NOTE CAUTION Cruise control (if so equipped)

 The indicator may come on when you  The system may be malfunctioning. N00518301626
Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
start the engine. This means that the battery
engine. Restart the engine and check whether Cruise control is an automatic speed control
voltage momentarily dropped when the
engine was started. It does not indicate a
the display/indicator goes out. If they go out, system that keeps a set speed. It can be acti-
there is no abnormal condition. If they do not vated at speeds from about 25 mph
malfunction, provided that the display goes
go out or if they turn on frequently, it is not (40 km/h). Cruise control does not work at
out immediately.
5  When a spare tire has been put on your vehi-
necessary to stop the vehicle immediately,
but you should have your vehicle inspected
speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
cle, the gripping ability of the tire will be
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
lower, making it more likely that the dis- a repair facility of your choice as soon as CAUTION
play/indicator will blink. possible.  When you do not wish to drive at a set speed,
turn off the cruise control for safety.
 Do not use cruise control when driving con-
ASC warning display Towing ditions will not allow you to stay at the same
speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads
N00546601129 N00546301070
that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet,
If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys- slippery, on a steep downhill slope.
tem, the following display/indicator will turn
CAUTION
 If the 2WD vehicle is towed with the ignition
on.
switch in the “ON” position or the operation
mode in ON and only the front wheels or NOTE
- ASC indicator only the rear wheels raised off the ground,  Cruise control may not be able to keep your
the ASC may operate, resulting in an acci- speed on uphills or downhills.
- ASC OFF indicator dent. When towing the 2WD vehicle with the  Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill.
front wheels raised, keep the ignition switch You may use the accelerator pedal if you
in the “OFF”, “LOCK” or “ACC” position or want to stay at your set speed.
Warning display the operation mode in ACC or OFF. When  Your speed may increase to more than the set
towing the vehicle with the rear wheels speed on a steep downhill. You have to use
raised, keep the ignition switch in the “ACC” the brake to control your speed. As a result,
position or the operation mode in ACC. the set speed driving is deactivated.
Refer to “Towing” on page 8-14.


The “SET” indicator appears on the infor-
Cruise control switches To activate mation display in the meter cluster. (For
N00518401395
vehicles equipped with color liquid crys-
1. With the operation mode in ON, press the
tal display meter)
CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch (A)
to turn on the cruise control. The indica-
tor/indicator display in the meter cluster
will come on.
5
A- CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch

Used to turn on and off the cruise control.
B- SET - switch NOTE
Used to reduce the set speed and to set the  When you release the SET - switch (B), the
desired speed. vehicle speed will be set.
C- RES + switch Indicator
Used to increase the set speed and to return to
the original set speed. To increase the set speed
D- CANCEL switch N00518501354
Used to deactivate the set speed driving. Indicator display There are 2 ways to increase the set speed.
NOTE
 When operating the cruise control switches,
RES + switch
press the cruise control switches correctly. 2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired
The set speed driving may be deactivated speed, then push down and release the Push up and hold the RES + switch (C) while
automatically if two or more switches of the SET - switch (B) when the indicator/indi- driving at the set speed, and your speed will
cruise control are pressed at the same time. cator display is illuminated. The vehicle then gradually increase.
will then maintain the desired speed.


When you reach your desired speed, release
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
set.
To slow down your speed in small amounts,

push down the SET - switch (B) for less than
To decrease the set speed
about 1 second and release it.
N00518601283
Each time you push down the SET - switch
To increase your speed in small amounts, There are 2 ways to decrease the set speed. (B), your vehicle will slow down by about 1
push up the RES + switch (C) for less than mph (1.6 km/h).
about 1 second and release it. SET - switch
Each time you press the RES + switch (C),
your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
Brake pedal
Push down and hold the SET - switch (B)
faster.
while driving at the set speed, and your speed While driving at the set speed, use the brake
will slow down gradually. pedal, which disengages the cruise control,
Accelerator pedal When you reach your desired speed, release then push down the SET - switch (B) and
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now release the switch momentarily to set a new
While driving at the set speed, use the accel- set. desired cruising speed.
erator pedal to reach your desired speed and
then push down the SET - switch (B) and
release the switch momentarily to set a new
desired cruising speed.

NOTE
To temporarily increase or  In some driving conditions, the set speed To deactivate
decrease the speed driving may be deactivated. If this happens, N00518801575
N00541701066
refer to “To activate” on page 5-103 and The set speed driving can be deactivated as
repeat the speed setting procedure.
follows:
To temporarily increase the speed
 Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
To temporarily decrease the speed switch (A) (Cruise control will be turned
Depress the accelerator pedal as you would off.)
normally. When you release the pedal, you  Press the CANCEL switch (D).
Depress the brake pedal to decrease the
will return to your set speed.  Depress the brake pedal.
speed. To return to the previously set speed,
push up the RES + switch (C).
Refer to “To resume the set speed” on page
5-106.

Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) (if so equipped)

The set speed driving is deactivated automati-
cally in any of the following ways.
CAUTION
 When the set speed driving is deactivated
 When your speed slows to about 10 mph automatically in any situation other than
(15 km/h) or more below the set speed those listed above, there may be a system
malfunction.
because of a hill, etc.
Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
 When your speed slows to about 25 mph switch to turn off the cruise control and have
(40 km/h) or less.
5  When the active stability control (ASC)
your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of
starts operating. (if so equipped) your choice.
Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)”
on page 5-100.
Under either of the following conditions,
To resume the set speed however, using the switch does not allow you
WARNING N00518901345 to resume the previously set speed. In these
 Although the set speed driving will be If the set speed driving is deactivated by the situations, repeat the speed setting procedure:
deactivated when shifting to the “N” condition described in “To deactivate” on
(NEUTRAL) position, never move the page 5-105, you can resume the previously  The CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) set speed by push up the RES+ switch (C) switch is pressed.
position while driving.
while driving at a speed of about 25 mph (40  The operation mode is put in OFF.
You would have no engine braking and  Indicator go off.
km/h) or higher.
could cause a serious accident.
The “SET” indicator appears on the informa-
Also, the set speed driving may be deacti-

tion display in the meter cluster. (For vehicles Adaptive Cruise Control
equipped with the color liquid crystal display
vated as follow: meter)
System (ACC) (if so equipped)
N00576800048
 When the engine speed rises and
approaches the tachometer’s red zone (the ACC maintains a set speed with no need for
red-coloured part of the tachometer dial). you to use the accelerator pedal. Using a sen-
sor (A), the system also measures the relative
speed and distance between your vehicle and
a vehicle in front, and maintains a set follow-
ing distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front by automatically decelerating


your vehicle if it becomes too close to the 3- “RES +” switch
vehicle in front.
WARNING Used to resume the control function
 Before using the ACC, read this entire sec-
The cruising set speed can be set from 25 after cancelling the ACC or the conven-
tion to understand the limitations of this
mph (40 km/h) to 110 mph (180 km/h). The tional cruise control.
system. Failure to follow instructions
distance can be selected from three levels. could result in an accident. Also used to increase the set speed.
If the vehicle in front decelerates, the ACC  Never rely solely on the ACC. The ACC is 4- “CANCEL” switch
will automatically apply limited braking to not a collision avoidance system or an Used to cancel the control function of
maintain the distance, and if the front vehicle the ACC or the cruise control.
then accelerates, the ACC will automatically
automatic driving system. It is designed to
use only limited braking and is never a 5- ACC distance switch
5
accelerate your vehicle up to the set speed. If substitute for your safe and careful driv- Used to set or change the following dis-
your vehicle is approaching too close to the ing. Always be ready to apply the brakes tance between your vehicle and a vehi-
front vehicle, a buzzer will sound and a warn- manually. cle in front.
ing is shown in the multi information display.
When the ACC detects no vehicle ahead, the NOTE
set speed will be maintained. Cruise control switch  Operate the individual switches correctly and
Conventional cruise control mode without the N00577000021
one after another.
distance control can also be selected. The ACC may be turned off or its control
Stop lights are illuminated during automatic function may be cancelled if two or more
braking. switches are pressed concurrently
ACC Indicators
N00577100035
While the ACC is turned on, indicators for

the ACC are shown in the multi information
display.
1- “ACC ON/OFF” switch
Used to turn on and off the ACC sys-
tem.
2- “SET -” switch
Used to set a desired speed or to reduce
the set speed.


State How to use ACC
Display
Stand by Active N00577200049
Vehicle in
To turn on ACC
front detected When the operation mode is in the “ON”
position, press the “ACC ON/OFF” switch.
5
5-Following distance indicator:
Indicating the following distance.
1- ACC indicator: Two states: “Stand by” and “Active”
Indicating that the ACC is turned on. When a front vehicle is detected while
2- Control state indicator: the ACC is activated, the ‘Active’ fol-
Indicating that ACC is activated. lowing distance indicator shown in the
3- Set speed indicator: illustration below will illuminate.
Indicating the set speed. When a front vehicle is detected while
If the set speed is not set, “---” is the ACC is not activated or the ACC is
shown. canceled, the ‘Stand by’ following dis-
4- Front vehicle indicator: tance indicator will illuminate.
Indicating when the ACC detects a The ACC indicators will appear in the multi
vehicle ahead. information display.
When a front vehicle is detected while Following State
the ACC is activated, the ‘Active’ front distance set-
vehicle indicator shown in the illustra- ting symbol Stand by Active
tion below will illuminate.
When a front vehicle is detected while Long
the ACC is not activated or the ACC is
canceled, the ‘Stand by’ front vehicle Middle
indicator will illuminate.
Short


You can set the speed anywhere from approx-
NOTE To activate ACC control
imately 25 mph (40 km/h) to 110 mph (180
 Every time the operation mode is turned to
With the ACC turned on, push down the km/h).
the “OFF” position, the ACC is turned off.
“SET -” switch while driving, and when your While a vehicle in front is being detected and
vehicle reaches your desired speed, release your vehicle speed is between approximately
the “SET -” switch. The ACC will activate 6 mph (10 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h), you
To turn off ACC can activate the ACC. In this case, the set
and initiate the speed control to maintain the
speed will be set at 25 mph (40 km/h).
Press the “ACC ON/OFF” switch to turn off set speed.
The ACC cannot otherwise be activated while
5
the ACC.
your vehicle is traveling less than 25 mph (40
km/h) or greater than 110 mph (180 km/h).
NOTE
 When any of the following conditions are
present, the ACC will not activate.
• When your vehicle speed is lower than
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or greater
than 110 mph (180 km/h).
• When your vehicle is driven at speeds
between approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
The set indicator comes on, the set speed is and 25 mph (40 km/h) and the ACC is not
indicated and the following distance indicator detecting a vehicle in front.
NOTE changes to the ‘active’ display. Also a buzzer • When ASC is in the OFF position.
 The ACC can be turned off even while the will sound. • While ABS, ASC or TCL is activated.
ACC is active. • When the selector lever is in positions other
 Every time the operation mode is turned off, than “D” (DRIVE) and “Ds” (DOWN-
the ACC is turned off and the set speed is SHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING).
erased. • While the brake pedal is depressed.
• While the parking brake is applied.
• When the ACC system has judged that the
performance for detecting a front vehicle is
degraded.

NOTE NOTE
• When an abnormality in the ACC system  If the brake pedal is not depressed within 2
has been detected. seconds after your vehicle has been stopped
by the ACC, a warning buzzer will sound,
the above warning will be shown in the multi
When ACC detects no vehicle information display to alert the driver, and
in front within the set distance the ACC control will be canceled.
5 N00581300025  When depressing the brake pedal while the
automatic brake is applied, the brake pedal
The speed of your vehicle will be maintained
will feel firm. This is normal. Depress the
at the speed you have set. The speed can be When the front vehicle stops, the ACC will brake pedal harder to apply greater braking
set between approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) automatically apply the brakes to stop your force.
and 110 mph (180 km/h). vehicle.  During the automatic braking, operation
A few seconds after your vehicle has stopped, sounds may be heard. This is normal.
NOTE the ACC will release the brakes and your
 If the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed on vehicle will start to move or creep slowly.
a down slope, the system will automatically You must apply the brakes to keep your vehi- WARNING
apply the brake to maintain the vehicle set cle stationary.  Never leave the vehicle while it is being
speed. stopped by the ACC.
When the ACC no longer detects a vehicle in

When ACC detects a vehicle in front, the buzzer will sound, the vehicle sym-
front within the set distance bol in the display will disappear and your
N00581400039 vehicle will slowly accelerate to the set
The ACC will maintain the distance to the speed.
front vehicle and will apply the brakes auto-
matically when the system judges braking is
necessary. The distance can be selected from
three levels.

WARNING WARNING
 When the vehicle in front has changed its  The ACC will not decelerate your vehicle
course or lane, if a stationary vehicle and/or give the approach alarm in the fol-
appears in front your vehicle, the ACC lowing cases.
will not decelerate your vehicle. • When an object other than a vehicle,
such as a pedestrian, is in front.
• When a malfunction is detected in the
Approach alarm
N00576900036
system. 5
 The ACC will not decelerate your vehicle
While the ACC is activated, if your vehicle is in the following cases, but will give the
WARNING approaching too closely to the vehicle in approach alarm.
 Your vehicle may accelerate up to the set front, the ACC gives a warning by sounding a • When the front vehicle is stationary or
speed in the following situations. Apply buzzer and displaying a message. Apply the moving at an extremely slow speed.
the brake, if necessary, to slow down. brakes to maintain the appropriate distance to • When your brake system has a problem,
• When your vehicle no longer follows the the vehicle in front. such as overheating.
vehicle in front, e.g. at a freeway exit or  The ACC may not be able to maintain the
when your vehicle or the vehicle in front set speed or the distance to a vehicle in
changes its lane. front and may not alert the driver, if the
system cannot detect the front vehicle
properly. Typical situations include:
• When a vehicle cuts into your path at a
close distance.
• When a vehicle in front is not completely
in your path.
• When a vehicle in front is towing a
trailer.
• When driving on a curve. WARNING
• When a motorcycle or a bicycle is in
 When the ACC is not being used, turn off
front.
the system to avoid unexpected ACC acti-
• When a vehicle in front is a truck loaded
vation.
with freight that protrudes rearward
 Never operate the ACC from outside the
from the cargo bed.
vehicle.

WARNING WARNING CAUTION

• When the height of a vehicle in front is • When driving on a winding road.  To maintain proper performance of the ACC:
extremely low or the road clearance of • Always clean the surface of the radar sen-
the vehicle is extremely high. sor.
• When driving on a road with alternating • Avoid impacting the radar sensor or its sur-
up and down surfaces. rounding area.
• When driving on a curve. • Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor or
5 • When driving on a bumpy or rough road. its surrounding area.
• When driving in a tunnel. • Do not paint the radar sensor.
• When driving in construction zones.  Never use the ACC in the following situa- • Do not install a grill guard.
• When the rear of your vehicle is weighed tions: • Do not modify the radar sensor or its sur-
down with the weight of passengers and • In heavy traffic. rounding area.
luggage • On winding roads. • Always use tires of the same size, same
• For up to two minutes after starting driv- • On slippery roads, such as icy, snow-cov- type, and same brand, and which have no
ing. ered or dirt roads. significant wear differences.
• When driving in curved sections of road • In adverse weather conditions, such as • Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.
including their entrance/outlet or run- rain, snow or sand storms, etc.
ning beside a closed lane in a traffic work • On steep downslopes.
or similar zone.
• When the inclination of a road fre- To increase the set speed
quently changes. N00581500027
• When the approach alarm frequently
There are two ways to increase the set speed.
sounds.
• When your vehicle is towed or is towing
another vehicle. By using the “RES +” switch:
• When your vehicle is on a chassis dyna-
mometer or free rollers. The set speed will increase by 1 mph (1
• When the surface of the sensor is covered • When tire inflation pressures are not km/h) every time you push up the “RES +”
with dirt, snow, ice, etc. adequate. switch while the ACC is activated. If you
• When a front vehicle or an oncoming • When the temporary spare tire is being
vehicle is splashing water, snow or dirt.
hold the switch pushed up, the set speed
used.
increases in 5 mph (5 km/h) increments.
• When the radar sensor and/or its sur-
rounding area are damaged or deformed.


switch and release the accelerator pedal; the
new speed is then set in the system.
To decrease the set speed
N00581600028
There are two ways to decrease the set speed.
By using the “SET -” switch:
The set speed will decrease by 1 mph (1 5

km/h) every time you push down the “SET -”
switch while the ACC is activated. If you
hold the switch pushed down, the set speed
NOTE decreases in 5 mph (5 km/h) increments.
 There is some time lag until the vehicle
begins accelerating to the new set speed after
the set speed has been changed. WARNING
 The set speed can be changed even while  The ACC braking control and approach
your vehicle is following a vehicle in front alarm functions will not work while the
using the ACC. In this case, however, accelerator pedal is depressed.
although the set speed itself is increased,
your vehicle will not accelerate.
 When the switch is held, a buzzer will sound NOTE
every time the set speed changes  The set speed indicator in the multi informa-
tion display will show “---” while the accel-
erator pedal is depressed.
By using the accelerator pedal:  If the “SET -” button is not pushed down
while depressing the accelerator pedal, your NOTE
vehicle speed will return to the set speed,  There is some time lag until the vehicle
When the accelerator pedal is depressed
after the accelerator pedal is released. When begins decelerating after the set speed has
while driving with the ACC control working, been changed.
the accelerator pedal is released, the ACC
you can accelerate the vehicle beyond the braking control and approach alarm func-
presently set speed. tions may not immediately work.
When the vehicle speed reaches your desired
speed, push down and release the “SET -”

NOTE NOTE NOTE

 The set speed can be changed even while  The ACC control will not resume after  The set speed indication on the display turns
your vehicle is following a vehicle in front releasing the brake pedal. to “---” when the accelerator pedal is
using the ACC. In this case, however, depressed. This indication remains as long as
although the set speed itself is decreased, the pedal is in a depressed position.
your vehicle will not decelerate.  In certain conditions, the braking control and
To temporarily accelerate the
 When the switch is held, a buzzer will sound alarming functions of ACC may not work for
vehicle
5 every time the set speed changes
N00582800027
a short while after releasing the accelerator
pedal.
By using the brake pedal: Simply depress the accelerator pedal to tem-
porarily accelerate the vehicle. Releasing the
By depressing the brake pedal while the ACC
pedal automatically slows down the vehicle To cancel ACC control
to the set speed and ACC restarts its control. N00581700061
is activated, the ACC control is canceled and
There are two ways to cancel the ACC con-
your vehicle speed will decrease.
trol.
At the point where the vehicle speed reaches
your desired speed, push down and release  By pressing the “CANCEL” switch.
the “SET -” switch; the new speed is then set  By depressing the brake pedal.
in the system.
WARNING
 The ACC braking control and approach
alarm functions will not work while the
accelerator pedal is depressed.


In any of the situations listed below, the ACC When the ACC system determines that its
NOTE control is automatically canceled, a buzzer performance has been degraded, a buzzer will
 You can also cancel the ACC control by
sounds and a message is shown in the multi- sound and a message will be displayed in the
pressing the “ACC ON/OFF” switch. If this
information display. multi information display.
switch is pressed while the ACC is “ON”,
the ACC will be turned off.
When the ACC is canceled, the “SET” indi-

cator goes off and the following distance indi-
cator turns to the ‘standby’ display. The front 5
vehicle indicator also turns to the ‘standby’
display when a front vehicle is detected.
 When your vehicle stops. This can occur when

 When the ASC is turned off.
 While ABS, ASC or TCL is activated.  Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice,
 When the selector lever is in a position adhere to the surface of the radar sensor.
other than “D” (DRIVE) and “Ds”  In adverse weather conditions, such as
(DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING). rain, snow or sand storms, etc.
 When the parking brake is applied.  A front vehicle or an oncoming vehicle is
splashing water, snow or dirt.
 Driving on a nonbusy road with a few
vehicles and obstacles in front.
 The brake system is overheating due to
continuous brake control on long down-
hill slope.


If the display keeps showing the message, tance will change from “Long” to “Middle”,
there is a possibility that the ACC has a mal-
NOTE to “Short”, and return to “Long” again.Every
 When any of the following conditions are
function. Contact your authorized Mitsubishi time the ACC is turned to ON, the following
present, the ACC control cannot be resumed.
Motors dealer. distance is reset to “Long”.
• When your vehicle speed is lower than
When the ACC system detects an abnormal- approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher
than 110 mph (180 km/h).
ity in the system, the ACC system will be
• When your vehicle is driven at speeds
turned off, a buzzer will sound and a message
5 will be displayed in the multi information dis-
between approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
and 25 mph (40 km/h) and the ACC is not
play. If the message remains after the opera- detecting a vehicle in front.
tion mode has been turned to the “OFF” • When ASC is in the OFF position.
position and then turned back to the “ON” • While ABS, ASC or TCL is activated.
position, contact your authorized Mitsubishi • When the selector lever is in positions other
Motors dealer. than “D” (DRIVE) and “Ds” (DOWN-
SHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING).
• While the brake pedal is depressed.
• While the parking brake is applied.
• When the ACC system has judged that the
NOTE
performance for detecting a front vehicle is  Actual distance will vary depending on your
degraded. vehicle speed and the front vehicle speed.
• When an abnormality in the ACC system The distance will become longer when the
has been detected. vehicle speeds are higher.
The following distance indicator shows the

To resume the control To change the following dis- level of the following distance:
“Long”
N00581800059
tance
After the ACC control has been canceled with N00581900021
the ACC turned on, the ACC control can be
With the ACC turned on, the distance
resumed by pushing up and releasing the
between your vehicle and a vehicle ahead can
“RES +” switch. “Middle”
be selected from three levels by pushing the
ACC distance switch. Each time the ACC
distance switch is pushed, the following dis-

Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM) (if so equipped)

“Short”
General information
N00582100020
FCC ID:OAYARS3-B (for vehicles sold in

the U.S.A)
To activate conventional cruise IC: 4135A-ARS3B (for vehicles sold in the
Canada)
control
N00582000029 This device complies with Part 15 of FCC 5
Press and hold the “ACC ON/OFF” switch Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt
while the operation mode is in the “ON” posi- RSS standard(s).
tion. A buzzer will sound and the multi infor- Operation is subject to the following two con-
mation display will show the following ditions.
indicator.
 this device may not cause harmful inter-
ference.
 this device must accept any interference Forward Collision Mitiga-
The conventional cruise control is turned off
cause undesired operation. tion System (FCM) (if so
when the operation mode is tuned off.
equipped)
For operation of the cruise control, refer to
“Cruise control” on page 5-102.
 Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the manufacturer for compli- The Forward Collision Mitigation System
NOTE ance could void the user’s authority to oper- (FCM) is designed to help reduce the risk of a
 The conventional cruise control does not ate the equipment. collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian
sound or display the approach alarm, will not straight ahead of your vehicle. The FCM uses
adjust your vehicle speed, and does not con- a sensor (A) to determine the distance and
trol the distance between your vehicle and a relative speed to a vehicle and a pedestrian in
vehicle in front. front. The FCM is not designed as an auto-
matic driving system or as a collision avoid-
ance system.
When your vehicle is approaching a vehicle
or a pedestrian straight-ahead in your path


and the FCM judges that there is the risk of a
collision, the system will give audible and
WARNING
 The FCM is designed to help avoid certain
visual warnings.
frontal collisions or reduce the crash
When the FCM judges that a collision with
speed in such collisions. It is not a substi-
the vehicle or the pedestrian straight-ahead is tute for your safe and careful driving.
imminent, the system will automatically Under certain circumstances, the system
apply moderate braking to warn you to apply may not operate or may not detect cor-
the brakes immediately.
5 When the FCM judges that a collision with
rectly a vehicle or a pedestrian in front.
When your vehicle is approaching a vehi-
the vehicle or the pedestrian straight-ahead is cle or a pedestrian too closely, take all nec-
highly unavoidable, the system will apply essary actions to avoid a collision, such as
emergency braking to reduce the severity of braking and steering, regardless of
whether the FCM is activated or not.
the collision and, if possible, to avoid the col-
Never rely on the FCM to prevent a colli-
lision.
sion.
Stop lights are illuminated during automatic
 Never attempt to test the operation of the
braking. FCM. Doing so could cause an accident,
If you turn the FCM ON/OFF, the Ultrasonic resulting in serious injury or death.
misacceleration Mitigation System also turns
ON/OFF at the same time. (Vehicle is
equipped with the Ultrasonic misacceleration
Mitigation System.)
WARNING
 Before using the FCM, read this entire
section to fully understand the limitations
of this system. Failure to follow instruc-
tions could result in an accident.

Forward collision warning FCM braking function WARNING

function N00577700073  If the ASC is turned off, the FCM braking
N00577400041
When the FCM judges that a collision with function will not operate. Refer to “Active
the vehicle or the pedestrian straight-ahead is stability control” on page 5-100.
If the system judges that there is a risk of
imminent, the FCM will automatically apply  If the brake pedal is not depressed within
your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or the
moderate braking to warn the driver to apply 2 seconds after your vehicle has been
pedestrian in front, this function warns you of
the brakes immediately. stopped by the FCM, a warning buzzer
the potential hazard with visual and audible
alarms. If the FCM judges that the collision is highly will sound and the brakes activated by the
FCM will automatically be released.
5
When this function is triggered, a buzzer unavoidable, it will automatically apply
Apply the brakes as necessary to keep
sounds and, at the same time, a “BRAKE” emergency braking to reduce the severity of your vehicle stationary.
message appears on the information screen of the collision and, if possible, to avoid the col-  The FCM will not activate and will not
the multi-information display. lision. provide either warning or braking in cer-
The FCM will also prepare to provide quick When the FCM applies emergency braking, a tain situations. Some of these include:
brake response and greater brake force when buzzer sounds and a warning message is dis- • When the selector lever is in the “P”
you apply the brakes. played in the information screen of the multi- (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position.
information display. • When an object other than a vehicle or a
pedestrian is in front.
• When the FCM has detected a problem
in the system.
• When a vehicle or a pedestrian suddenly
cuts in front of your vehicle.
 The FCM may or may not detect a motor-
cycle, bicycle or wall depending on the sit-
uation. The FCM is not designed to detect
these objects.
The forward collision warning function oper-  The forward collision warning function
ates when the following vehicle speed: The FCM braking function operates when the and/or the FCM braking function may not
following vehicle speed: activate in certain situations. Some of
 Against a vehicle: Approximately 10 mph these include:
(15 km/h) to 87 mph (140 km/h).  Against a vehicle: Approximately 3 mph • When a vehicle suddenly appears just in
 Against a pedestrian: Approximately 5 (5 km/h) to 50 mph (80 km/h) front of your vehicle.
mph (7 km/h) to 40 mph (65 km/h).  Against a pedestrian: Approximately 3 • When a vehicle cuts into your path at a
mph (5 km/h) to 40 mph (65 km/h) close distance.


• When a vehicle ahead is not completely • When the system recognizes driver’s • If the pedestrian is wearing loose-fitting
in your path. steering, accelerating, braking or gear clothes.
• When your vehicle changed lanes, and shifting actions as evasive actions to • If part of a pedestrian’s body is hidden,
your vehicle approached immediately avoid collision. such as when holding an umbrella, large
behind the vehicle ahead. • When the rear of your vehicle is weighed bag, etc.
• When a vehicle ahead is towing a trailer. down with the weight of passengers and • If a pedestrian bends forward, sits or lies
5 • When a vehicle ahead is a truck loaded luggage.
• Up to several seconds after starting driv-
on the road.
with freight that protrudes rearward • When a pedestrian is pushing/pulling
from the cargo bed. ing. something, such as a stroller, bicycle or
• When the height of a vehicle ahead is • In adverse weather conditions, such as wheelchair.
extremely low or its road clearance is rain, snow, fog or sand-storm. • When pedestrians gather in a group.
extremely high. • When the windshield of the sensor por- • When a pedestrian clothing appears to
• When a vehicle ahead is extremely dirty. tion is covered with dirt, water droplets, be nearly the same color or brightness as
• When a vehicle ahead is covered with snow and ice, etc. its surroundings.
snow. • When a vehicle ahead or an oncoming • When a pedestrian is very close to an
• When a vehicle ahead has a large glass vehicle is splashing water, snow or dirt. object, such as a vehicle.
surface. • When using a windshield washer. • When a pedestrian is in a dark area, such
• When a vehicle ahead does not have • If windshield wipers are not Mitsubishi as at night or in a tunnel.
reflectors (light reflector) or the position Motors Genuine parts or equivalent. • When a pedestrian is walking fast or
of the reflector is low. • When the sensor becomes extremely hot running.
• When a vehicle ahead is a car carrier or or cold. • When a pedestrian suddenly rushes in
a similar shaped vehicle. • If the battery becomes weak or runs front of the vehicle.
• When accelerating and decelerating down. • When the position of a pedestrian is close
quickly. • When the sensor is affected by strong to the edge of the vehicle.
• When driving on a slippery road covered light, such as direct sunlight or the head-  When the system recognizes driver’s
by rain water, snow, ice, etc. lights of an oncoming vehicle. steering or accelerating actions as evasive
• When driving on a road with alternating  The FCM may not detect a pedestrian in actions to avoid a collision, FCM control
up and down steep slopes. certain situations. Some of these include: and alarm functions may be canceled.
• When driving on a curve. • If the pedestrian is shorter than approxi-  In certain situations, though there is little
• When driving on a bumpy or rough road. mately 3.2 feet (1 m) or taller than or no risk of a collision, the FCM may
• When driving in dark areas, such as in a approximately 6.5 feet (2 m). activate. Examples include:
tunnel or at night. • When overtaking a vehicle.


• When driving on a curve. • When a vehicle in the next lane becomes • When your vehicle is towed or your vehi-
• When there is a road side object (B) that positioned directly in front of your vehicle tows another vehicle.
reflects the radar sensor signal, such as a cle due to winding road conditions. • When your vehicle is carried on a truck.
road sign. • When your vehicle is on a chassis dyna-
mometer or free rollers.
• If the windshield on or surrounding the
sensor is cracked or scratched. 5
NOTE
• When passing through an area that  When depressing the brake pedal while auto-
• When approaching a gate, a railroad objects may contact the vehicle, such as matic braking is applied, the brake pedal will
crossing, an underpass, a narrow bridge, thick grass, tree branches, or a banner. feel firm. This is normal. Depress the brake
manhole lid or a speed bump. • When there are patterns on the road that pedal harder to apply greater braking force.
• When driving under an overpass or may be mistaken for a vehicle or a pedes-  During the automatic braking, operating
pedestrian bridge. trian. sounds may be heard. This is normal.
• When driving in a narrow tunnel. • When a vehicle cuts into your path in the
• When driving in a parking structure. detecting range of the sensor.
• When approaching a slope where the • When an oncoming vehicle is positioned
incline changes significantly. straight ahead of your vehicle on a
• When trying to stop your vehicle very curved road.
close to a vehicle or an object in front. • When the FCM detects a long object car-
• When passing a vehicle, a pedestrian or ried on your vehicle, such as skies or a
an object closely. roof carrier.
• When driving through fog, steam, smoke
or dust.
 The FCM should be tuned off if any of fol-
lowing situations occur:
• When using an automatic car wash.
• When the tires are not properly inflated.
• When the emergency spare tire is used.


To turn on the FCM and Ultrasonic misaccel-
FCM and Ultrasonic misaccel- To turn on/off the FCM and Ultra-
eration Mitigation System again, press and
eration Mitigation System sonic misacceleration Mitigation hold the FCM and Ultrasonic misacceleration
ON/OFF switch System Mitigation System switch. The indicator
N00577800061
Every time the operation mode is put in will go off, and a current distance mode for
This switch is used to turn on or off the FCM the forward collision warning will be shown
“ON”, the FCM and Ultrasonic misaccelera-
and Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation in the multi-information display.
tion Mitigation System will automatically be
System, and also to select the distance which
5 will trigger the forward collision warning
turned on.
To turn off the FCM and Ultrasonic misaccel-
function.
eration Mitigation System, press and hold the
FCM and Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitiga-
tion System switch. The following message
and indicator will appear in the multi-
NOTE
 When the FCM and Ultrasonic misaccelera-
tion Mitigation System ON/OFF switch is
held pressed to change the ON/OFF state of
the FCM, the ON/OFF state of the Ultrasonic
misacceleration Mitigation System is also
changed at the same time.
 The indicator is combined with the
“Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation Sys-
tem OFF” indicator.
To change forward collision warn-

ing distance
The distance to the vehicle ahead which trig-

gers the forward collision warnings can be
selected from three levels, “FAR”, “MID-
DLE” or “NEAR”.


To change the distance mode, push the FCM “DRIVER ASSISTANCE CAMERA
and Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation
NOTE
BLOCKED” message will appear and the
 Actual distance which triggers the forward
System ON/OFF switch. Every time the indicator will appear on the information
collision warnings will vary depending on
switch is pushed, the distance mode will be screen of the multi-information display.
your vehicle speed and the front vehicle
switched. The selected distance mode is speed. The distance will become longer When the sensor performance returns, the
shown on the information screen of the multi- when the vehicle speeds are higher. FCM functions will resume operation.
information display.  The distance which will trigger the FCM If the message continues showing, there is a
When “FAR” is selected
braking function cannot be adjusted. possibility that the sensor has a malfunction.
Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
5
dealer for inspection of the sensor.
When a problem is detected
N00593300035
When the FCM system determines that its

performance has been degraded, the FCM
When “MIDDLE” is selected will become inoperative.
This can occur when
 Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow, ice,

mist or dew condensation adhere to the
windshield of the sensor portion.
 In adverse weather conditions, such as NOTE
When “NEAR” is selected  The “DRIVER ASSISTANCE CAMERA
rain, snow, sand storms, etc.
BLOCKED” message may temporarily
 A front vehicle or an oncoming vehicle is
appear on the information screen when the
splashing water, snow or dirt. sensor cannot detect a vehicle, a pedestrian
or an object within range. This is not a mal-
function. When a vehicle or an object comes
within range, the FCM function will resume
and the message will go off.


If the system becomes temporarily unavail- If the FCM detects a malfunction in the sys-
NOTE able due to the high or low temperature of the tem, either of the following messages will
 The “DRIVER ASSISTANCE CAMERA
sensor, the following message will appear. appear, the indicator will appear on the
BLOCKED” message may appear on the
information screen when driving on a non- The indicator will appear on the informa- information screen of the multi-information
busy road with a few vehicles and obstacles tion screen of the multi-information display display and the FCM will automatically be
in front. and the FCM will automatically be turned off. turned off.
After the temperature of the sensor has been If the message remains even after the opera-
If the system becomes temporarily unavail-
5 able for some reason, the following message
in range, the system will automatically return
to operation.
tion mode is put in “OFF” and then turned
back to “ON”, please contact your authorized
may appear. If the message continues showing, there is a Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
The indicator will appear on the informa- possibility that the FCM has a malfunction.
tion screen of the multi-information display Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
and the FCM will automatically be turned off. dealer for inspection of the sensor.
If the message continues showing, there is a
possibility that the FCM has a malfunction.
Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for inspection of the system.

NOTE Handling of the sensor CAUTION

 If the sensor or its surrounding area becomes N00593400036 • Do not put anything including a sticker or
extremely high temperature when parking The sensor (A) is located inside the wind- film on the windshield in front of or sur-
the vehicle under a blazing sun, the “FCM shield as shown in the illustration. rounding the area of the sensor.
SERVICE REQUIRED” message may The sensor is shared in the following sys-
appear. tems:
After the temperature of the sensor or its sur-
rounding area has been in range, if the mes-
sage remains even after restarting the engine,
 FCM 5
 Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
 Automatic high beam system
Motors dealer.
• Do not attempt to detach or disassemble the

sensor.
• If the windshield is misted, remove the mist
from the windshield by using the defogger
switch.
• Maintain the wiper blades in good condi-
tion. Refer to “Wiper blades” on page 9-44.
When replacing the wiper blades, use only
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine parts or equiva-
lent.
• Do not dirty or damage the sensor.
CAUTION • Do not spray glass cleaner on the sensor.
 To maintain proper performance of the FCM, Also, do not spill liquid, such as a bever-
LDW and Automatic high beam system; age, to the sensor.
• Always keep clean the windshield. • Do not install an electronic device, such as
If the inside of the windshield where the antenna, or a device that emits strong elec-
sensor is installed becomes dirty or fogged, tric waves, near the sensor.
contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors • Always use tires of the same size, same
dealer. type and same brand, and which have no
• Do not apply an impact or load on the sen- significant wear differences.
sor or its surrounding area. • Do not modify the vehicle’s suspensions.

CAUTION Laser classification label

 If the windshield on the sensor or in the sur-
rounding area of the sensor is cracked or
scratched, the sensor may not detect an
object properly. This could cause a serious
accident. Turn off the FCM and have your
vehicle inspected as soon as possible at an
5 authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
If you need to replace the windshield, con-
tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
 The sensor emits infrared rays when the
operation mode is in ON. Do not look into
the sensor by using optical goods such as a
magnifying glass. The infrared ray might
injure your eyes.
Laser radar specifications
Laser classification
Max average power 45 mW

Pulse duration 33 ns
Wavelength 905 nm
Divergent angle
28° x 12°
(horizon x vertical)


N00586500035
The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System operates to prevent sudden starts and mitigate collision-caused damage by suppressing the
engine output for up to approximately 5 seconds when the system detects a vehicle or obstacle up to approximately 157 inches (4 m) in front of
and behind your vehicle and the accelerator pedal has been depressed too aggressively for safe operation. This system will only operate when the
vehicle is at a stop or is moving forward or backward at less than 6 mph (10 km/h).
The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System incorporates 8 ultrasonic sensors (A) on the front and rear bumpers. 5
When the Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System operates, the warning display will appear on the information screen of the multi informa-
tion display, and a buzzer will sound intermittently.


Situation Operation display Buzzer
When an obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle with the
selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE), “Ds” (DOWNSHIFT &
SPORTY DRIVING), “L” (LOW) or in the sport mode, if the
accelerator pedal is depressed too aggressively, the engine output
will be suppressed for up to approximately 5 seconds.
Intermittent
beeping
When an obstacle is detected behind your vehicle with the selec-
tor lever in “R” (REVERSE), if the accelerator pedal is depressed
too aggressively, the engine output will be suppressed for up to *UMS: Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System
approximately 5 seconds.
On vehicles equipped with the Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM), when the FCM system is turned on/off, the Ultrasonic misaccelera-
tion Mitigation System is also turned on/off simultaneously.
WARNING WARNING
 Before using the Ultrasonic misaccelera-  Do not rely solely on the Ultrasonic misac-
tion Mitigation System, read this entire celeration Mitigation System. It is never a
section to fully understand the limitations substitute for your safe and careful driv-
of this system. Failure to follow instruc- ing.


 Under certain circumstances, the system  While the Active Stability Control system • When the sensor is extremely hot or cold
may not operate or may not detect cor- (ASC) is turned off by operating the ASC (after the vehicle has been parked for a
rectly an object in front or behind the OFF switch, the Ultrasonic misaccelera- prolonged time under a blazing sun or in
vehicle. When your vehicle is approaching tion Mitigation System does not operate. cold weather).
the object too closely, take all necessary Refer to “ASC OFF switch” on page • Immediately after the engine switch is
actions to avoid a collision, such as brak- 5-101. turned on.
ing and steering, regardless of whether the
Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation
 The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation
System may not operate in certain situa-
• When driving on a curve. 5
• When driving on a road with steep and
System is activated or not. tions. Some of these include: alternating up and down slopes.
 The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation • The sensors or surroundings have been • When driving on a bumpy or rough road.
System is not designed to detect a pedes- wiped by hand. • When the system recognizes driver’s
trian or bicycle. • The stickers or accessories have been steering, accelerating, braking or gear
 When propulsion power is immediately attached to the sensors or surroundings. shifting actions as evasive actions to
required while the Ultrasonic misaccelera- • When the ambient temperature is rap- avoid a collision.
tion Mitigation System is activated, take idly changing. For example, immediately • Immediately after the system has judged
one of the following actions. after the vehicle has exited from a tunnel that the accelerator pedal has repeatedly
• Release the foot from the accelerator or a garage. been depressed and released within a few
pedal and lightly depress the pedal again. • Under adverse weather conditions (rain, seconds.
• Press and hold the Forward collision mit- strong winds, snow, sand storms, etc.) • When the vehicle body is extremely
igation system (FCM) and Ultrasonic • When approaching an obstacle too inclined due to heavy loads on the vehicle
misacceleration Mitigation System closely. or improper adjustment of the tire pres-
ON/OFF switch for three seconds or • When another vehicle is crossing just in sure.
more to turn off the Ultrasonic misaccel- front of or behind your vehicle. • When the systems is affected by nearby
eration Mitigation System. • When your vehicle is closely approaching ultrasonic noise, such as honking from
• Keep depressing the accelerator pedal an obstacle while changing its path. other vehicles or sound from motorcycle
for 5 seconds or more. • When only a part of an obstacle is engines, brakes, radios, pouring rain,
• Fully depress and release the accelerator detected. splashing water or tire chains.
pedal three times or more in quick suc- • When rain, snow, water or dirt adheres • When an obstacle does not stand verti-
cession. cally on the ground, an object does not
to the ultrasonic sensor or surrounding
 Never attempt to test the Ultrasonic area. face the vehicle with a right angle or the
misacceleration Mitigation System. Doing surface of an object is uneven or wavy.
so could result in an accident. • When a vehicle ahead or behind is a
trailer.


• When a vehicle ahead or behind is a • When a parking gate or crossing gate is • When driving on a circuit.
truck loaded with freight that protrudes not fully opened. • When the tires are not properly inflated.
rearward from the cargo bed. • When the vehicle is in smoke, fog or • When the ultrasonic sensor and its sur-
• If the height of an object is low. steam. rounding area is damaged or deformed.
• If the ground clearance of an object is • When attempting to park the vehicle
extremely high. very close to another vehicle or an object.
5 • When an object is covered by snow. • When the vehicle is exiting from parallel CAUTION
• When the shape of an object is rounded, parking.  To maintain proper performance of the Ultra-
such as a pole. • When the system detects ultrasonic sonic misacceleration Mitigation System,
• When ultrasonic waves are absorbed by noise, such as the noise from motorcycle follow the instructions below.
an object, such as snow or a spongy engines, brakes, radios, pouring rain, • Do not hit or apply load to the sensors.
material. splashing water, tire chains or a ultra- • Wipe the sensors and surrounding areas if
• When an obstacle is a chain fence. sonic wave from a sonar sensor on an object, such as dirt, adheres.
• When an object is moving. another vehicle.
• Do not cover the sensors.
• If an aftermarket electrical device, such • If an aftermarket electrical device, such
• Do not modify the suspension of your vehi-
as a radio antenna, is installed near the as a radio antenna, is installed near the
cle.
sensor sensor.
 If the bumper has experienced an impact, the
 The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation • When the vehicle is on a gravel road.
sensor area may have been damaged and the
System operation may be cancelled when • When the vehicle is in a tall grass area. Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation Sys-
the system recognizes evasive actions by  The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation tem may not function properly. Have the
the driver to avoid a collision or when the System should be tuned off if any of fol- vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi
obstacle moves out of the detection range lowing situations occur: Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
of the sensor. • When attempting to get out of a road choice.
 In certain situations, though there is little groove or a mud.
or no risk of a collision, the Ultrasonic • When using an automatic car wash.
misacceleration Mitigation System may • When the vehicle is entering or exiting a
activate. Examples include: car elevator.
• When a vehicle ahead or an oncoming • When your vehicle is on a chassis dyna-
vehicle is splashing water, snow or dirt. mometer or free rollers.
• When a bump or step is ahead of the • When your vehicle is towed or your vehi-
vehicle. cle tows another vehicle.
• When your vehicle is carried on a truck.

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (with Lane Change Assist) (if so equipped)
NOTE Warning display When there is a malfunction in the

 The ultrasonic sensors do not detect objects N00586900026 sensor or the system
in areas directly below or very close to the N00587100038
bumpers. If the height of an object is lower When the sensor is temporarily Example: When there is a malfunction in
than the sensors, the sensors may not con- both sensors
tinue detecting it while the vehicle is
not available
N00587000037
approaching the object, even if the sensors
Example: When the front and/or rear sensors
can initially detect it.
are temporarily not available 5
To turn on/off the Ultrasonic

misacceleration Mitigation Sys- If the Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation
System detects a malfunction in the system,
tem the Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation
N00586800038
This display will appear if more than one sen- System will not operate normally and this
Every time the operation mode is turned to sor is temporarily not available for some rea- massage is displayed.
“ON”, the Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitiga- son such as an environmental condition. This Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized
tion System will automatically be turned on. can typically occur when the sensor is heated. Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
In addition, on vehicles equipped with the When the radar sensor performance returns, of your choice.
Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM), the message will disappear and the system
the Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation
System and the FCM are simultaneously
will resume operation. Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
If the message is continuously displayed,
turned off and on by operating the FCM and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors (with Lane Change Assist) (if
Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System dealer or a repair facility of your choice. so equipped)
ON/OFF switch.
N00592200024
Refer to “FCM and Ultrasonic misaccelera-
tion Mitigation System ON/OFF switch” on The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) is a driving
page 5-122. aid system that alerts the driver when another
vehicle which may not be visible through the
outside rearview mirror is traveling in the
next lane behind your vehicle.

When a vehicle in the next lane is traveling at
same speed or faster in the detection areas,
WARNING
 Never rely solely on the BSW system when
the Blind Spot Warning light in the corre-
changing lanes. BSW is an aid only. It is
sponding outside rearview mirror will illumi-
not a substitute for your safe and careful
nate. If the turn signal lever is operated to the driving. Always check visually behind and
side where the Blind Spot Warning light is all around your vehicle for other vehicles.
illuminated, the Blind Spot Warning light will The performance of the BSW may vary
blink and the system will beep three times to
5 alert the driver.
depending on driving, traffic and/or road
conditions.
Depending on the speed of your vehicle, the
Blind Spot Warning system will detect up to
Detection areas
approximately 230 feet (70 m) from your
N00592300038
vehicle.
The BSW uses 2 sensors (A) located inside
the rear bumper.
The detection areas are shown as illustrated.
WARNING
 In certain situations, the BSW may not
detect a vehicle in the detection areas or
WARNING the detection may be delayed. Some of
 Before using the BSW, read this entire sec- these include;
tion to fully understand the limitations of • When a small motorcycle or a bicycle is
this system. Failure to follow instructions behind your vehicle.
could result in an accident. • When a vehicle is traveling alongside of
your vehicle at nearly the same speed for
prolonged periods of time.

WARNING WARNING To operate

• When the heights of the next lane and • When the sensor is extremely hot or cold N00593500037
your lane are different. (while the vehicle is parked for a long When the BSW switch is pressed while the
• Immediately after the BSW has been period of time under a blazing sun or in operation mode is ON, the BSW indicator
turned on. cold weather). light in the instrument cluster comes on and
• Immediately after the engine switch is the BSW becomes in stand by state. When the
turned on. BSW switch is pressed again, the BSW indi-
• Under adverse weather conditions, such CAUTION cator light in the instrument cluster goes off 5
as rain, snow, strong winds, snow or sand  To maintain proper performance of the BSW, and the BSW turns off.
storm. follow the instructions below.
• When your vehicle becomes too close to • Always clean the bumper surface around Indicator light
another vehicle. the sensor.
• While multiple vehicle are overtaking • Avoid impacting the sensor or its surround-
your vehicle. ing area.
• When driving near a pot hole and tram- • Do not put a sticker on the sensor or its sur-
line. rounding bumper surface.
• When a surrounding vehicle or an • Do not paint the sensor or its surrounding
oncoming vehicle is splashing water, bumper surface.
snow or dirt. • Do not modify the sensor or its surrounding
• When driving on a curve including the area.
beginning and the end of the curve.  If the bumper has experienced an impact, the
• When driving on a road with alternating sensor may have been damaged and the BSW
up and down steep slopes. may not function properly. Have the vehicle
• When driving on a bumpy or rough road. inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
• When the rear of your vehicle is weighed dealer.
down or your vehicle is leaning to the
right or left due to the weight of passen-
gers and luggage or the improper adjust- If you turn the BSW ON/OFF, the Rear Cross
ment of tire pressure. Traffic Alert (RCTA) also turns ON/OFF at
• When the bumper surface around the the same time.
radar sensor is covered with dirt, snow
and ice, etc.

NOTE When the sensor detects an NOTE

 When the operation mode is set to OFF, the approaching vehicle • When driving on the entrance and outlet of
selected condition just before setting to OFF the tunnel or very near the wall or near the
is retained. However, the retained BSW state When the BSW indicator light in the instru- evacuation area inside the tunnel.
is cleared when the battery is removed, and ment cluster is on, if a vehicle is approaching • When turning a intersection in a town area.
the BSW turns ON when the operation mode your vehicle in the detection area, the Blind • Under adverse weather conditions (rain,
is set to ON at next time. Spot Warning light in the outside rearview snow, sand stream etc.).
5  The BSW operates when all of the following
conditions are met.
mirror illuminates. • When the your vehicle drives with blowing
If the turn signal lever is operated to the side up the water, snow or sand etc. on the road.
• The operation mode is put in ON. where the Blind Spot Warning light is illumi- • When driving near a curb, pot hole and
• The selector lever is in positions other than nated, the Blind Spot Warning light will blink tramline.
“P” (PARK) and “R” (REVERSE).  Set the BSW to OFF when towing.
and the system will beep three times to alert
• The speed of your vehicle is approximately  The Blind Spot Warning light in the outside
the driver.
6 mph (10km/h) or higher. rearview mirror may not look due to strong
direct sunlight or the glare from the head-
lamps of vehicles behind you during night
driving.
System problem warning

N00592400039
If a problem occurs with the system, a visual

warning specific to the type of the problem is
given together with an audible alarm.
The warnings are combined with the Rear
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system.
NOTE
 The Blind Spot Warning light in the outside
rearview mirror may come on or blink in the
following conditions.
• When driving very near the guardrail or the
concrete wall.

When there is a malfunction in the When the sensor is temporarily When there is a foreign objects on
system or the sensor not available the sensor
N00592700032 N00592800033 N00592900034
5
When the warning display appears, the BSW When the warning display appears, the sensor When the warning display appears, the radar
does not operate normally because there are is temporarily not available for some reason sensor cannot detect a vehicle traveling side
some malfunctions in the system or the sen- such as the environmental condition or by side or an approaching vehicle, because
sor. Have the vehicle inspected at an autho- increase of the sensor temperature. When the foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice,
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as warning display does not disappear after adhere to the bumper surface around the sen-
possible. waiting for a while, contact an authorized sor.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Remove a dirt, freezing or foreign material on
NOTE the bumper surface around the sensor.
 When the warning display appears, the BSW
When the warning display does not disappear
will be deactivated. after having cleaned the bumper surface
around the sensor, contact an authorized Mit-
General information
N00593900028
For vehicles sold in U.S.A

FCC ID:OAYSRR3A
For vehicles sold in Canada
Applicable law: Canada 310
Frequency bands: 24.05 - 24.25GHz
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped)

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC
Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt Rear Cross Traffic Alert
RSS standard(s). (RCTA) (if so equipped)
Operation is subject to the following two con- N00593000032
ditions:
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) is an
 This device may not cause harmful inter- aid system for backing up. When the RCTA
ference. system detects vehicles approaching from
5  This device must accept any interference sides while your vehicle is reversing, the
received, including interference that may Blind Spot Warning lights in outside rearview
cause undesired operation. mirrors on both sides will blink and a buzzer
will sound to alert the driver. A warning mes-
sage will also appear on the information
CAUTION screen of the multi-information display.
approved by the manufacturer for compli-
ate the equipment.
WARNING
 Before using the RCTA, read this entire
section to fully understand the limitations
of this system. Failure to follow instruc-

WARNING Detection areas CAUTION

 Never rely solely on the RCTA when back- • If the sensor detection area is blocked by a
ing up. The RCTA is an aid system. It is The detection area is shown as illustrated. nearby object, such as wall or parked vehi-
not a substitute for your safe and careful cle.
driving. Always check visually behind and • When a vehicle is approaching from
all around your vehicle for other vehicles, straight behind your vehicle.
persons, animals or obstructions. • When your vehicle is exiting from an
The performance of the RCTA may vary
depending on driving, traffic and/or sur-
angled parking spot. 5
rounding conditions.
NOTE
 The Blind Spot Warning lights in the outside
rearview mirrors on both sides will blink,
even when only one vehicle is approaching
from one side.
• Immediately after the RCTA has been
turned on.
• Immediately after the operation mode has
been put in ON.
• When the bumper surface around the sensor
is covered with dirt, snow and ice, etc.
• When the sensor becomes extremely hot or
cold, such as after the vehicle has been
parked for a prolonged time under the blaz-
ing sun or in cold weather.
CAUTION  If the bumper has experienced an impact, the
 In certain situations, the RCTA may not sensor may have been damaged and the
detect a vehicle in the detection areas. Some RCTA may not function properly. Have the
of these situations include; vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi
• When the reversing speed of your vehicle is Motors dealer.
approximately 5 mph (18 km/h) or higher.

To operate General information

N00594000026
1. Press the Blind Spot Warning switch
For vehicles sold in U.S.A
while the operation mode is put in ON.
FCC ID:OAYSRR3A
(Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW): To
operate” on page 5-134.)
Applicable law: Canada 310
2. When the selector lever is moved to the
Frequency bands: 24.05 - 24.25GHz
5 “R” (REVERSE) position, the RCTA will
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts
operate.
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC
NOTE Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt
 Set the RCTA to OFF when towing. RSS standard(s).
 The Blind Spot Warning light in the outside Operation is subject to the following two con-
rearview mirror may not look due to strong ditions:
direct sunlight or the glare from the head-
lights of vehicles behind you during night  This device may not cause harmful inter-
driving. ference.
 This device must accept any interference
When a problem is detected in cause undesired operation.
the system
CAUTION
If the system detects a problem, a warning is  Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer for compli-
displayed on the information screen in the
multi-information display. ate the equipment.
Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW): Sys-
tem problem warning” on page 5-134.

Lane Departure Warning System (LDW) (if so equipped)
Lane Departure Warning

System (LDW) (if so equipped)
N00577900059
The Lane Departure Warning system (LDW)

is a driving aid system to help prevent unin-
tentional lane departure. The LDW is
designed to read lane markers by using a sen- 5
sor (A) under certain conditions. The LDW
will give you both visual and audible warn-
ings when your vehicle is leaving or has left
Turning off the LDW
N00581000035
the lane.
WARNING To turn off the LDW, press the LDW switch.
 Never rely solely on the LDW. The LDW is The “LDW” indicator on the information
not a collision avoidance system and is not screen of the multi-information display will
a substitute for your safe and careful driv-
then go out.
ing.
To return the LDW to “ON”, press the LDW
 Before using the LDW, read this entire
section to understand the limitations of
switch again.
this system. Failure to follow instructions
could result in an accident.
Turning on the LDW

N00578000028
Every time the operation mode is turned to

“ON”, the LDW will automatically be turned
on and the “LDW” indicator will appear on
the information screen of the multi-informa-
tion display,


will not operate, however, and the “LDW”
NOTE indicator will be appeared if any of following
NOTE
 When you set the operation mode to “OFF”  The warnings will not continue for more than
conditions have occurred:
with the system “OFF,” the system will be 3 seconds, even if your vehicle continues
restored “ON.” (“LDW 1” mode)  The vehicle speed is less than 38 mph (60 leaving the lane.
You can also select the “LDW 2” mode  If the lane markers are only on one side of
km/h).
which makes always the LDW system in the road, the LDW will operate only for the
‘OFF state’.
 The turn signal lever is being operated or
appropriate side where the lane marker is
has been operated in the past 7 seconds.
5 1. Press the LDW switch, and the system is
placed in the ‘OFF state’.  The hazard warning light is being oper-
drawn.
2. Press and hold the LDW switch for more ated or has been operated in the past 7
than approximately 10 seconds. The seconds. WARNING
“LDW 2” indicator appears on the multi  The LDW will not function when no lane
Lane departure warning marker exists, such as at an intersection
3. Press the LDW switch, and the “LDW” or near a toll booth.
N00581200040
indicator on the top-right of the multi  The LDW may not operate correctly in the
information display goes out.
While the “LDW” indicator in the informa-
tion display is lit in green, if your vehicle is following situations and the LDW may not
To return to the “LDW 1” mode, put the sys- give warnings or may give false warnings:
tem in ‘OFF state’, press and hold the LDW leaving or has left the lane, a buzzer will
sound intermittently, “LANE DEPARTURE” • When lane markers are not clearly visi-
switch for more than approximately 10 sec- ble due to rain, snow, fog, dark area, etc.
onds. The “LDW 1” indicator appears on the will appear in the information display and
• When the road surface is shiny.
multi information display. the indicator will be flashing in amber. • When old lane markers remain on the
road surface.
• When the lane markers are double lines
Operation of the LDW or the shape of the lane markers are
N00581100036 complicated.
The LDW, when turned ON, is capable of • When driving in an extremely narrow
recognizing the lane in which your vehicle is lane.
travelling and issuing an audible warning • When the distance between your vehicle
and a vehicle in front is short.
when your vehicle begins to leave that travel
• When driving into the sun light.
lane. When operating, the “LDW” indicator
• When driving on curves.
on the multi-information display will be
• When driving on bumpy roads.
changed to indicator (green). The LDW • When driving in construction zones.

WARNING System problem warning Windshield is dirty

• When passing through a place where the N00578100045
brightness suddenly changes, such as at The alarm shown below is displayed if the
If a problem occurs with the system, a visual
the entrance to or exit of a tunnel. system becomes temporarily unavailable due
warning specific to the type of the problem is
• When the headlights of an oncoming to the dirty windshield of the sensor portion.
given together with an audible alarm.
vehicle are very bright. After having cleaned the windshield, the sys-
• When the rear of your vehicle is weighed tem will automatically return to operation.
down with the weight of passengers and Sensor is too hot or cold If the alarm continues showing, there is a pos- 5
luggage. sibility that the LDW has a malfunction. Con-
• When the headlights of your vehicle are The alarm shown below is displayed if the tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
not clean or are not properly aimed. system becomes temporarily unavailable due for inspection of the sensor.
• When the front windshield is not clean. to the high or low temperature of the sensor.
• When the front windshield wipers do not After temperature of the sensor has been in
clean the windshield properly. range, the system will automatically return to
operation.
If the alarm continues showing, there is a pos-
CAUTION sibility that the LDW has a malfunction. Con-
 To maintain proper function of the LDW: tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
• Always keep the windshield and the head- for inspection of the system.
lights clean.
• Do not put anything, such as a sticker, on
the front windshield in front of the sensor.
• Avoid applying a shock or load to the sen-
sor.
• Do not attempt to detach or disassemble the
sensor.
• Use only Mitsubishi Motors Genuine parts
when replacing the windshield wipers.
NOTE
 When driving conditions are not suitable to
use the LDW, turn off the LDW.

LDW deactivation due to fault Tire pressure monitoring NOTE

If the LDW is deactivated due to a malfunc- system  The tire pressure monitoring system is not a
substitute for regularly checking tire infla-
tion in the system, the either alarm shown N00530201638
tion pressures.
below is displayed. Contact your authorized The tire pressure monitoring system uses tire Be sure to check the tire inflation pressures
Mitsubishi Motors dealer for inspection of the inflation pressure sensors (A) on the wheels as described in “Tires” on page 9-15.
system. to monitor the tire inflation pressures. The  The tire inflation pressure sensor (B) is
system only indicates when a tire is signifi-
5 cantly under-inflated.
installed in the illustrated location.
• On vehicles with Type 1 sensor which has
the metallic air valve (C), replace grommet
and washer (D) with the new ones when the
tire is replaced.
• On vehicles with Type 2 sensor which has
the rubber air valve (E), replace rubber air
valve (E) with new one when the tire is
replaced.
NOTE
 If the sensor or its surrounding area becomes
extremely high temperature when parking
the vehicle under a blazing sun, the “LDW WARNING
SERVICE REQUIRED” message may  The compact spare wheel does not have a
appear. tire inflation pressure sensor.
If the message remains even after the tem- When the spare tire is used, the tire pres-
perature of the sensor or its surrounding area sure monitoring system will not work
has been in range, please contact an autho- properly.
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer as soon as possible to replace or
repair the original tire.


warning light normally illuminates and goes
NOTE off a few seconds later.
CAUTION
For details, please contact your authorized  If the tire pressure monitoring system warn-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. If one or more of the vehicle tires (except for ing light does not illuminate when the igni-
the spare tire) is significantly under-inflated, tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or
Type 1 the operation mode is put in ON, it means
the warning light will remain illuminated
that the tire pressure monitoring system is
while the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi- not working properly. Have the system
tion or the operation mode is put in ON.
Refer to “If the warning light / display illumi-
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
5
nates while driving” on page 5-144 and take In such situations, a malfunctioning of the
the necessary measures. system may be preventing the monitoring of
the tire pressure. Avoid sudden braking,
sharp turning and high-speed driving.
NOTE  If a malfunction is detected in the tire pres-
Type 2  In addition, the warning display is displayed
sure monitoring system, the tire pressure
monitoring system warning light will blink
mation display. for approximately 1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. The warning light
will issue further warnings each time the
engine is restarted as long as the malfunction
exists.
Check to see whether the warning light goes
off after few minutes driving.
If it then goes off during driving, there is no
Tire pressure monitoring sys- problem.
tem warning light / display However, if the warning light does not go
N00532701334 off, or if it blinks again when the engine is
restarted, have the vehicle inspected by an
In such situations, a malfunctioning of the
system may be preventing the monitoring of
When the ignition switch is turned to the the tire pressure. For safety reasons, when
“ON” position or the operation mode is put in the warning light appears while driving,
ON, the tire pressure monitoring system avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and
high-speed driving.


Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency allow the TPMS to continue to function prop-
NOTE and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi- erly.
 In addition, the warning display is displayed
cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
mation display. If the warning light / display
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pres- illuminates while driving
sure, even if under-inflation has not reached N00532801511
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS 1. If the tire pressure monitoring system
5 low tire pressure telltale. warning light illuminates, avoiding hard
braking, sharp steering maneuvers and
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a high speeds. You should stop and adjust
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the tires to the proper inflation pressure as
should be checked monthly when cold and the system is not operating properly. The soon as possible. Adjust the spare tire at
inflated to the inflation pressure recom- TPMS malfunction indicator is combined the same time. Refer to “Tires” on page
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the with the low tire pressure telltale. 9-15.
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. When the system detects a malfunction, the
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size telltale will flash for approximately one min- NOTE
than the size indicated on the vehicle placard ute and then remain continuously illuminated.  In addition, the warning display is displayed
or tire inflation pressure label, you should This sequence will continue upon subsequent on the information screen in the multi-infor-
determine the proper tire inflation pressure vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction mation display.
for those tires.) exists.  When inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has When the malfunction indicator is illumi- sure, do not apply excessive force to the
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring nated, the system may not be able to detect or valve stem to avoid breakage.
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire signal low tire pressure as intended.  After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
pressure telltale when one or more of your sure, always reinstall the valve cap on the
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
tires is significantly under-inflated. valve stem.
of reasons, including the installation of Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure tell- replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the get into the valve, resulting in damage to the
tale illuminates, you should stop and check vehicle that prevent the TPMS from function- tire inflation pressure sensor.
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate ing properly. Always check the TPMS mal-  Do not use metal valve caps, which may
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a sig- function telltale after replacing one or more cause a metal reaction, resulting in corrosion
nificantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that and damage of the tire inflation pressure sen-
overheat and can lead to tire failure. the replacement or alternate tires and wheels sors.


 A window tint that affects the radio wave
NOTE NOTE signals is installed.
 Once adjustments have been made, the warn-  To avoid the risk of damage to the tire infla-
ing light will go off after a few minutes of tion pressure sensors, have any punctured
driving. tire repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi NOTE
Motors dealer. If the tire repair is not done by  Tire inflation pressures vary with the ambi-
2. If the tire pressure monitoring system an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is ent temperature. If the vehicle is subjected to
warning light remains illuminated after not covered by your warranty. large variations in ambient temperature, the
you have been driving for about 20 min-
utes after you adjust the tire inflation pres-
 Do not use an aerosol puncture-repair spray
on any tire.
tire inflation pressures may be under-inflated
(causing the warning light / display come on)
5
sure, one or more of the tires may have a Such a spray could damage the tire inflation when the ambient temperature is relatively
puncture. Inspect the tire and if it has a pressure sensors. low. If the warning light / display comes on,
puncture, have it repaired by an autho- Have any puncture repaired by an authorized adjust the tire inflation pressure.
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
possible.
The tire pressure monitoring system may not Whenever the tires and wheels
WARNING work normally in the following circum- are replaced with new ones
 If the warning light / display illuminates stances: N00532900081
while you are driving, avoid hard braking, If new wheels with new tire inflation pressure
sharp steering maneuvers and high  A wireless facility or device using the
same frequency is near the vehicle. sensors are installed, their ID codes must be
speeds.
 Snow or ice is stuck inside the fenders programmed into the tire pressure monitoring
Driving with an under-inflated tire
and/or on the wheels. system. Have tire and wheel replacement per-
adversely affects vehicle performance and
can result in an accident.  The tire inflation pressure sensor’s battery formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
is dead. dealer to avoid the risk of damaging the tire
 Wheels other than Mitsubishi genuine inflation pressure sensors. If the wheel
CAUTION wheels are being used. replacement is not done by an authorized
 If a tire has a puncture, replace that tire with  Wheels that are not fitted with tire infla- Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is not covered by
the spare tire. Driving on a punctured tire tion pressure sensors are being used. your warranty.
could lead to an accident.  Wheels whose ID codes are not memo-
 The warning light / display may not illumi- rized by the vehicle are used.
nate immediately in the event of a tire blow-  Compact spare tire is fitted as a road
out or rapid leak. wheel.


3. Hold down the multi information display 2. Hold down the multi information display
CAUTION switch for about 3 seconds or more. The switch for 10 seconds or more. (A beep is
 The use of non-genuine wheels will prevent
setting changes to the selected tire ID set. heard.)
the proper fit of the tire inflation pressure
(Although the reset execution starts at
sensors, resulting air leakage or damage of
the sensors. holding down the switch for 3 seconds,
keep holding down the switch continu-
ously.)
5 Tire ID set change
N00584300026
In case that 2 sets of tire inflation pressure

sensor ID are registered in the receiver, the
valid tire ID set can be changed by following
procedure.
4. The valid tire ID set is changed, and the
[For vehicles equipped with color liquid crys- number of the tire pressure monitoring
tal display meter] system (TPMS) SET indicator is changed.
1. Operate the multi information display
NOTE 3. The valid tire ID set is changed, and the
switch to switch the information screen to
 Each time this procedure is done, the tire ID number of the tire pressure monitoring
the menu screen.
set is changed. (1 - 2 - 1 - 2 …) system (TPMS) SET indicator is changed.
Refer to “Multi information display
 The tire ID set is NOT changed, in case that
switch” on page 5-167. only 1 set of ID is registered.
Refer to “Changing the function settings” NOTE
on page 5-177.  Each time this procedure is done, the tire ID
2. Lightly press the multi information dis- [For vehicles equipped with mono-color liq- set is changed. (1 - 2 - 1 - 2 …)
uid crystal display meter]  The tire ID set is NOT changed, in case that
play switch to select “ ” (tire
only 1 set of ID is registered.
ID set change). 1. Transit the display by multi information
display switch until the tire pressure mon-
itoring system (TPMS) SET indicator is
displayed.

Parking sensors (Front/Rear) (if so equipped)
General information Parking sensors WARNING

N00533001233
(Front/Rear) (if so equipped)  The parking sensors are parking aid only.
It is not a substitute for your visual confir-
Your tire pressure monitoring system oper- N00589800039
mation.
ates on a radio frequency subject to Federal
Parking sensors will alert the driver with an The system is not designed to detect chil-
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
intermittent or continuous buzzer sound when dren, pedestrians, bicycles and pets. The
(For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry area within which the system can detect is
the vehicle approaches an object and the sen-
Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada).
This device complies with part 15 of FCC
sor detects that object during parking. The very limited, and objects outside the
detection area, such as under the bumper
5
system incorporates 8 ultrasonic sensors (A)
Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt or around either corner of the bumper,
on the front and rear bumpers.
RSS standard(s). cannot be detected. The sensors of the sys-
Operation is subject to the following two con- tem may not be able to detect certain
ditions. objects.
 Never rely solely on the parking sensors to
 This device may not cause harmful inter- clear the area in front and to the rear of
ference. your vehicle. Always check visually in
 This device must accept any interference front and to the rear of your vehicle for
received, including interference that may persons, animals, obstructions or other
vehicles.
cause undesired operation.
Failure to do so can result in damage to
your vehicle, serious injury or death.
CAUTION
approved by the manufacturer for compli- CAUTION
ance could void the user’s authority to oper- WARNING  The parking sensors may not operate prop-
ate the equipment.  Before using the parking sensors, read this erly in a certain situation. Some examples
entire section to fully understand the limi- are:
tations of this system. Failure to follow • The sensors or surroundings have been
instructions could result in an accident. wiped by hand.
• The stickers or accessories have been
attached to the sensors or surroundings.
• The sensors or surroundings are covered
with ice, snow, or mud.

CAUTION Detection areas Normal mode

• When the ambient temperature has rapidly
changed. The detection areas are within approximately
• When the sensor is frozen. WARNING 24 inches (60 cm) (A) from the front and cor-
• When the system detects ultrasonic noise,  The detection areas described below are ner sensors and 49 inches (125 cm) (B) from
such as the noise from motorcycle engines, for reference only. The actual detection the back sensors.
brakes, radios, pouring rain, splashing areas may vary depending on the shape,
5 water or tire chains. size and position of the object being
detected. Certain objects may not be
• When the sensor is extremely hot or cold
(after the vehicle has been parked for a long detected, even if the object is within the
period of time under a blazing sun or in detection area described below. Also false
cold weather). alerts may sound depending on the sur-
• When the vehicle is driven on a rough road rounding environment.
including a bumpy, gravel, hilly, or grassy
surface. “Normal mode” and “Towing hitch mode” for
• When the vehicle is too close to an object. a vehicle equipped with a towing hitch can be
• Immediately after the engine switch is selected.
turned on.
 The parking sensors may not properly detect
certain objects including;
• A thin object such as a wire net or rope.
• An object that absorbs ultrasonic sound
waves, such as snow.
• An object with sharp angles.
• An object with a smooth surface, such as
glass.
• A low height object such as a curb.
 If the bumper has experienced an impact, the
sensor area may have damage and the park-
ing sensors may not function properly. Have
the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mit-
your choice.

Towing hitch mode NOTE To operate

 The ultrasonic sensors do not detect objects N00590000031
If your vehicle is equipped with a towing in areas directly below or very close to the When the engine switch is tuned on, the park-
hitch and part of the towing hitch is close to bumpers. If the height of an object is lower ing sensors will be automatically tuned on
the center sensors (e. g. European type towing than the sensors, the sensors may not con- and the operation indicator light (A) will be
hitch), the center sensor may detect the tow- tinue detecting it while the vehicle is illuminated.
ing hitch and the alarm beeps may sound approaching the object, even if the sensors
To turn off the parking sensors, press the
though there is no obstacle behind the vehi-
cle. To avoid this detection, the parking sen-
have initially detected it.
“SONAR” switch. The operation indicator 5
light will go off.
sors can be switched to the towing hitch To switch to the towing hitch mode and return To turn back on the parking sensors, press the
mode. to the normal mode, refer to “Changing the “SONAR” switch again.
The detection areas are within approximately detection mode” on page 5-150.
24 inches (60 cm) (A) from the front and cor-
ner sensors, and 49 inches (125 cm) (B) from
the back sensors. The system will not detect
the areas (C), within approximately 8 inches
(20 cm) (D) from the rear bumper.


Front and corner sensor Distance to an Warning dis-
When the parking sensor detects
an obstacle Distance to an Warning dis- obstacle play/sound cycle
obstacle play/sound cycle Approx. 40 to 24
When a sensor detects an object; Approx. 24 to 16 inches (100 to Fast intermittent
Intermittent
inches (60 to 40 cm) 60 cm)
 The system will alarm the driver by inter-
mittent beeps. Approx. 16 to 12 Within approx. 24
Fast intermittent Continuous
inches (40 to 30 cm) inches (60 cm)
5 As the vehicle moves closer to the object,
the alarm will switch to shorter beeps and Within approx. 12
Continuous
then to a continuous beep. inches (30 cm) CAUTION
When the vehicle is too close to an object,  The distances are for reference only. The
the alarm may no longer sound or it may Back sensor (When the “normal mode” is actual distance may vary due to various fac-
return to intermittent beeps from a contin- selected) tors, such as the temperature, humidity or the
uous beep. shape of the object being detected.
Distance to an Warning dis-
 Also, in the multi-information display, an
obstacle play/sound cycle
indicator corresponding to the sensor
detecting the object will be blinking. Approx. 49 to 32 NOTE
inches (125 to Intermittent  When more than one object is detected, all
80 cm) indicators corresponding to the sensors
Approx. 32 to 16 detecting the objects will be blinking in the
Fast intermittent multi-information display and a buzzer will
inches (80 to 40 cm)
sound according to the closest object.
Within approx. 16
Continuous
inches (40 cm)
Changing the detection mode
Back sensor (When the “Towing hitch N00590100032
mode” is selected)
If your vehicle is equipped with a towing
Distance to an Warning dis- hitch and part of the towing hitch is close to
obstacle play/sound cycle the center sensors (e. g. European type towing
1- Corner sensor
2- Front sensor Approx. 49 to 40 hitch), the center sensor may detect the tow-
3- Back sensor inches (125 to Intermittent ing hitch and alarm beeps may sound though
100 cm) there is no obstacle behind the vehicle. To


avoid this detection, the parking sensors can Also, the indicator light (A) on the “SONAR”
be switched to the towing hitch mode.
NOTE switch will continue blinking until the sensor
 In the normal mode, even after the
resumes functioning.
To switch to the towing hitch mode; “SONAR” switch has been pressed to turn
Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized
While the selector lever is in the “R” off the parking sensors, the two rear center
sensors will continue functioning while the Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
(REVERSE) position, turn off the parking of your choice.
selector lever is in the “R” (REVERSE) posi-
sensors by pressing the “SONAR” switch, tion.
then press and hold the “SONAR” switch
approximately 3 seconds or more and release 5
it. A buzzer will sound twice to indicate the When a problem is detected
detection mode is switched to the towing N00590200033
hitch mode. To turn on the parking sensors, If the system detects a problem with a sensor,
press the “SONAR” switch again. a warning is displayed in the multi-informa-
tion display and a buzzer will sound for
To return to the normal mode; approximately five seconds.
While the selector lever is in the “R”
(REVERSE) position, turn off the parking
Example: Rear corner sensor (left) malfunction-
sensors by pressing the “SONAR” switch, ing
then press and hold the “SONAR” switch
approximately 3 seconds or more and release
it. A buzzer will sound once to indicate the
Rear-view camera (if so
detection mode is returned to the normal equipped)
mode. To turn on the parking sensors, press N00546201297
the “SONAR” switch again.

When the selector lever is in the “R”
(REVERSE) position with the ignition switch
NOTE in the “ON” position, or the operation mode
 The detection mode will not change if you is put in ON, the rear-view image will be dis-
keep the “SONAR” switch pressed for played on the screen of the Mitsubishi Multi-
10 seconds or more.
Communication System, the Smartphone
Link Display Audio or the DISPLAY
AUDIO.


When the selector lever is shifted out of the
“R” (REVERSE) position, the rear-view
Location of rear-view camera Reference lines on the screen
image will go off. The rear-view camera (A) is in the liftgate, at Reference lines and upper surface of the rear
the left side of the liftgate handle. bumper (A) are displayed on the screen.
WARNING
 Never rely solely on the rear-view camera  Red line (B) indicates approximately 20
to clear the area behind your vehicle. inches (50 cm) behind the rear bumper.
5 Always check visually behind and all
around your vehicle for persons, animals,
 Two Green lines (C) indicate approxi-
mately 8 inches (20 cm) outside of the
obstructions or other vehicles. Failure to vehicle body.
do so can result in vehicle damage, serious  Short transverse lines (1 to 3) indicate dis-
injury or death. tance from the rear bumper.
 The rear-view camera is an aid system for
backing up, but it is not a substitute for
your visual confirmation.
 The view on the screen is limited, and
objects outside the view, such as under the
bumper or around either corner of the
bumper end, cannot be seen on the screen.
CAUTION
 If the camera lens gets dirty, a clear image
cannot be obtained. As necessary, rinse the
lens with clean water and gently wipe with a
clean, soft cloth.
 To avoid damaging the camera;
• Do not rub the cover excessively or polish
it by using an abrasive compound. 1: Approximately at the rear edge of the
• Do not disassemble the camera. rear bumper
• Do not splash hot water directly on the lens. 2: Approximately 39 inches (100 cm)
• Do not spray the camera and its surround- 3: Approximately 79 inches (200 cm)
ings with high-pressure water.
• Make sure that the liftgate is securely
closed when backing up.

CAUTION Case 2
 The rear-view camera uses a wide-angle
lens. As a result, images and distances shown
on the screen are not exact.
 Actual distance may be different from dis-
tance indicated by the lines on the screen,
depending on the loading condition of the
vehicle and road surface condition.
The reference lines for distance and vehicle A- Actual objects 5
width are based on a level, flat road surface. B- Objects shown on the screen
In the following cases, objects shown on the
screen will appear to be farther off than they
actually are. CAUTION NOTE
• When the rear of the vehicle is weighed  The reference lines for distance and vehicle  Mirror image is displayed on the screen.
down with the weight of passengers and width are intended to indicate the distance to  On vehicles equipped with Smartphone Link
luggage in the vehicle. (Case 1) a flat object such as a level, flat road surface. Display Audio or Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
• When there is an upward slope at the back. They may not indicate correct distance nication System, it is possible to change the
(Case2) depending on the shape of an obstacle. display language of the screen.
For example, when there is an object behind For details, please refer to the separated
the vehicle that has upper sections projecting owner’s manual.
Case 1 in the direction of the vehicle, the reference  Under certain circumstances, it may become
lines on the screen will indicate that point A difficult to see an image on the screen, even
is the farthest point and point B is the closest when the system is functioning correctly.
point to the vehicle. In reality, point A and B • In a dark area, such as at night.
are actually the same distance from the vehi- • When water drops or condensation are on
cle, and point C is farther off than point A
the lens.
and B.
• When sun light or headlights shine directly
into the lens.
A- Actual objects
B- Objects shown on the screen

Multi Around Monitor (if so equipped)
Multi Around Monitor (if so CAUTION CAUTION

 Before using the Multi Around Monitor,  To avoid damaging the camera;
equipped)
make sure that all doors and the liftgate are • Do not rub the cover excessively or polish
N00587200042
closed and the outside mirrors are unfolded. it by using an abrasive compound.
If an outside mirror is folded and/or if a front • Do not disassemble the camera.
The Multi Around Monitor system uses 4
door and/or the liftgate is open, the areas dis- • Do not splash hot water directly on the lens.
cameras, “Front-view camera”, “Side-view played on the Multi Around Monitor will not
cameras (right and left)” and “Rear-view • Do not spray the camera and its surround-
5 camera”, and displays composite views from
be appropriate. ings with high-pressure water.
those cameras on a screen in the inside rear- • Make sure that the liftgate is securely
closed when backing up.
view mirror, the DISPLAY AUDIO, the
Smartphone Link Display Audio or the Mit-
Location of each camera  Do not attach anything on the camera and/or
surrounding areas. Doing so will disturb the
subishi Multi-Communication System. camera.
The Multi Around Monitor system will assist
the driver to park the vehicle in a narrow or
parallel parking space.
WARNING
 Before using the Multi Around Monitor
system, read this entire section to fully
understand the limitations of this system.
Failure to follow instructions could result
in an accident.
 The Multi Around Monitor system is an A- Rear-view camera
aid system to help observe around the B- Front-view camera
vehicle. It is not a substitute for your C- Side-view camera
visual confirmation.
 Never rely solely on the Multi Around
Monitor system. The view on the screen is CAUTION
limited, and objects outside the view can-  If the camera lens gets dirty, a clear image
not be seen on the screen. cannot be obtained. As necessary, rinse the
lens with clean water and gently wipe with a
clean, soft cloth.

Range of view of the Multi Around Monitor

N00587300027
The range of view of the Multi Around Monitor cameras is limited to the area shown in the illustrations. It cannot show around the both sides and
the lower part of the front and rear bumpers, etc. While driving, be sure to visually confirm safety around the vehicle.
Range of view of the Multi Around Monitor cameras

5
A: Front-view camera
B: Side-view camera (Right)
C: Side-view camera (Left)
D: Rear-view camera

Types of views of the Multi Side-view/Rear-view mode Side-view/Front-view mode

Around Monitor Views of the passenger’s side of the vehicle Views of the passenger’s side of the vehicle
N00587400028
and behind the vehicle are displayed. and the front of the vehicle are displayed.
Two different types of views are displayed on
the left side and the right side respectively.
5
Bird’s eye-view/Rear-view mode
Views of the surroundings of the vehicle and
behind the vehicle are displayed.
Bird’s eye-view/Front-view mode CAUTION

 The camera uses a special lens. As a result,
Views of the surroundings of the vehicle and images and distances shown on the screen
the front of the vehicle are displayed. are not exact.
NOTE
 Because the cameras have a special lens, the
lines on the ground between parking spaces
may not look parallel on the screen.
 Under certain circumstances, it may become
difficult to see an image on the screen, even
when the system is functioning correctly.
• In a dark area, such as at night.


tem. When you move the selector lever to any
NOTE Operation with the switch
other position, the display disappears.
• When water drops or condensation are on
the lens. When the camera switch (A) is pressed, the
• When sun light or headlights shine directly NOTE bird’s eye-view/front-view is displayed.
into the lens.  The passenger’s side screen can be switched
• When a fluorescent light shines directly to the side-view by pressing the camera Type 1
into the lens. switch on the steering wheel or the inside
 If the atmospheric temperature is extremely rearview mirror.
5
hot or extremely cold, the camera images
may not be clear.
There is no abnormality.
 If a wireless device is installed near the cam-
era, the camera images may cause electrical
system interference and the system may stop
functioning properly.
How to use the Multi Around Type 2

Monitor
N00587500032
The Multi Around Monitor can only be used

when the operation mode is put in ON.
Operation with the selector lever
When you move the selector lever to the “R”

(REVERSE) position, the bird’s eye-
view/rear-view is displayed on the screen of
the inside rearview mirror, the DISPLAY
AUDIO, the Smartphone Link Display Audio
or the Mitsubishi Multi-communication Sys-

NOTE Switching of the screen (Selector How to read the screen

 If there is no operation for 3 minutes after lever is other than “R” N00587600033
the Multi Around Monitor is displayed by (REVERSE)) In any mode other than the Bird’s eye-view
pressing the switch with the selector lever in
mode, the lines in the screen give the follow-
other than “R” (REVERSE), the display dis-
If the camera switch is pressed, the mode of ing information. Use them only as a guide.
appears.
Multi Around Monitor is switched, Bird’s
5 eye-view/Front-view mode  Side- CAUTION
Switching of the screen (Selector view/Front-view mode  OFF  If the camera and/or its surrounding area
lever is “R” (REVERSE)) have experienced an impact, the Multi
NOTE Around Monitor system may not function
correctly. Have the vehicle inspected by an
If the camera switch is pressed, the mode of  When you move the selector lever to the “R”
(REVERSE) position with the front-view
Multi Around Monitor is switched as follows.
mode displayed on the driver’s side screen,
Screen of the DISPLAY AUDIO, the the driver’s side screen switches to the rear-
view mode. When you shift the selector lever Front-view mode
Smartphone Link Display Audio or the
to any other position, the driver’s side screen
Mitsubishi Multi Communication System
switches to the front-view mode. Reference lines for the distance and the vehi-
Bird’s eye-view/Rear-view mode  Side-  When the camera switch is pressed at the cle width and upper surface of the front bum-
vehicle speed of approximately 6 mph (10 per (A) are displayed on the screen.
view/Rear-view mode
km/h) or higher, only the side-view can be
displayed on the passenger’s side screen.  The Red line (B) indicates approximately
Screen of the inside rearview mirror  The front-view will not be displayed when 20 inches (50 cm) from the front edge of
the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 6
Bird’s eye-view/Rear-view mode  Side- the front bumper.
mph (10 km/h).
view/Rear-view mode  OFF  The Two Green lines (C) indicate the
 The display of the view may be delayed dur-
approximate vehicle width.
ing switching of the screen.
 The Orange lines (D) indicates an
expected course when the vehicle moves
forward with the steering wheel turned. It
disappears when the steering wheel is in
the neutral position.


 The approximate distance from the vehi- 2- Approximately 79 inches (200 cm)
Rear-view mode
cle body is as follows: from the rear edge of the rear bumper
N00587700021
Reference lines for the distance and the vehi-

cle width and upper surface of the rear bum- CAUTION
per (A) are displayed on the screen.  The rear-view camera uses a wide-angle
lens. As a result, images and distances shown
 The Red line (B) indicates approximately on the screen are not exact.
20 inches (50 cm) behind the rear edge of  Never rely solely on the reference lines. The
reference lines indicating distance and vehi-
5
the rear bumper.
cle width are based on a level, flat road sur-
 The Two Green lines (C) indicate the
face.
approximately vehicle width. Actual distance may be different from dis-
 The Orange line (D) indicates an expected tance indicated by the lines on the screen,
course when the vehicle is reserved with depending on the loading condition of the
1- Approximately 39 inches (100 cm) from the steering wheel turned. It disappears vehicle and road surface condition.
the front edge of the front bumper when the steering wheel is in the neutral Also, your vehicle width indicated by the
position. reference lines may be different from the
 The approximate distance from the vehi- actual vehicle width.
NOTE cle body is as follows:
 When the expected course lines are dis- For example;
played in the front-view, the expected course In the following cases, objects shown on the
lines are also displayed in the bird’s eye- screen will appear to be farther off than they
view (Front: solid line, Rear: broken line). actually are.
1- Approximately 39 inches (100 cm)

from the rear edge of the rear bumper

CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION

• When the rear of the vehicle is weighed • When there is a downward slope behind the • When the vehicle is approaching a truck,
down with the weight of passengers and vehicle, objects shown on the screen will the reference lines indicate that your vehi-
luggage in the vehicle. appear to be closer than they actually are. cle will clear the truck. In reality, the truck
is in your path.
A: Actual objects A: Actual objects

B: Objects shown on the screen B: Objects shown on the screen
• When there is an upward slope behind the
vehicle.
A: Actual objects
B: Objects shown on the screen

CAUTION NOTE Side-view mode

• When there is an object behind the vehicle  When the expected course lines are dis- N00587900023
that has upper sections projecting in the played in the rear-view, the expected course Reference lines for the vehicle width and the
direction of the vehicle, the reference lines lines are also displayed in the bird’s eye- front end of the vehicle are displayed on the
on the screen will indicate that point A is view (Front: broken line, Rear: solid line). screen.
the farthest point and point B is the closest
point to the vehicle. In reality, point A and 1- Approximate vehicle width including
B are actually the same distance from the
vehicle, and point C is farther off than point
the door mirror. 5
2- Approximate location of the axle center
A and B.
of the front wheel.
3- Approximate 20 inches (50 cm) from the
front edge of the front bumper.

Bird’s eye-view mode CAUTION NOTE

N00588000021  The bird’s eye-view is a composite image • An object having a height from the road
An overhead view in which the vehicle is from images captured by the “Front-view surface may seem to appear from the joint
looked down is displayed so that you can eas- camera”, “Side-view cameras (right and of the view composition processing
ily identify the location of your vehicle and left)” and “Rear-view camera”. As a result, regions.
the course to enter the parking space. objects may appear to be farther away than  The brightness of the views from each cam-
they actually are. Also, an object may appear era may vary depending on the illuminance
5 to be in a direction and/or location different
from actual. In addition, blind spots exist in
conditions.
 An object above the camera is not displayed.
proximity of the vehicle.  The object displayed in the Front-view mode
Even if the screen indicates that there is a or the Rear-view mode may not be displayed
space between your vehicle and an object, in the Bird’s eye-view mode.
there may actually be less or no space.
 The view in the Bird’s eye-view mode may
Always check visually behind and all around be displaced from its true position when the
your vehicle.
mounting location and angle of each camera
 The view at a section near each corner on the are changed.
Bird's eye-view is combined from the edge
 The lines on the road may appear to be dis-
of the view captured by each camera. As
placed or bent at the joint of the views.
result, an object indicated in the section may
be unclear, and it may disappear/reappear on
the screen.
NOTE
 In the Bird’s eye-view mode, since the views
captured by the four cameras, “Front-view
camera”, “Side-view cameras (right and
left)” and “Rear-view camera” are processed
based on a level flat road surface, an image
may be displayed as follows:
• An object appears to have fallen down and
looks longer or larger.

Instrument cluster
2- Multi Information display (Type
Instrument cluster 1:Color liquid crystal display type)
Type B
N00519001402
 P.5-164
Type 1 Information screen display list (Type 1)
 P.5-192
Multi Information display (Type
2:Mono-color liquid crystal display
type)  P.5-183
3- Speedometer P.5-163
5
4- Rheostat illumination button (Type 1)
 P.5-164
5- Multi information display switch (Type
2)  P.5-184
Tachometer
Type 2 N00519201303
Speedometer The tachometer shows engine revolutions per
N00519101272
minute. This allows the driver to determine
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in the most efficient selector position and engine
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour speed combinations.
(km/h). This gauge also assists in evaluating engine
performance.
Type A
1- Tachometer  P.5-163

Multi Information display - Type 1
CAUTION NOTE Multi Information display -

 The red zone indicates an engine speed
beyond the range of safe operation.
 You can adjust to 8 different levels for when
the front side-marker lights are illuminated
Type 1
N00555001392
and when they are not.
Select the correct selector position to control  If the vehicle is equipped with the automatic The multi information display displays warn-
the engine speed so that the tachometer indi- light control, the light switch is in a position ings, the odometer, trip odometer, service
cator does not enter the red zone. other than the “OFF” position and it is suffi- reminder, engine coolant temperature, fuel
5 ciently dark outside the vehicle, the meter
illumination switches automatically to the
remaining, outside temperature, selector lever
position, average and momentary fuel con-
Meter illumination control adjusted brightness. sumption, driving range, average speed, etc.
 The brightness level of the instruments is
(Vehicle equipped with the stored when the ignition switch is turned to It is also possible to change elements such as
multi information display - the “OFF” or “LOCK” position or the opera- the language and units used on the multi
Type 1) tion mode is put in OFF.
N00554901248
 If you press and hold the button for longer
than about 2 second when the front side- [With ignition switch or operation mode in
Each time you press this button, there is a marker lights are illuminated, the brightness OFF]
sound and the brightness of the instruments level changes to the maximum level. Press-
changes. ing and holding the button for longer than
about 2 second again returns the brightness
level to the previous level.
Communication System, the map screen
color of Mitsubishi Multi-Communication
System may not be switched to nighttime
setting when the meter illumination bright-
ness level is at the maximum.
1- Warning display screen  P.5-171

1- Brightness level 2- Information screen  P.5-167
2- Rheostat illumination button Interrupt display screen  P.5-170


3- Door ajar warning display screen
 P.5-171
4- Odometer  P.5-172
5- “ ” or “ ” mark indicator  P.5-170


[With ignition switch or operation mode in ON]
1- Drive mode indicator display screen (if 6- ECO mode indicator display screen 15- Fuel remaining display screen
so equipped)  P.5-84  P.5-231  P.5-172
2- S-AWC drive mode display screen (if 7- Information screen  P.5-167 16- Outside temperature display screen
so equipped)  P.5-87 8- Selector lever position display  P.5-172
3-  P.5-70, 5-77
Warning display screen  P.5-171
4- Forward Collision Mitigation System
9- Engine coolant temperature display NOTE
 P.5-171  The fuel units, outside temperature units,
(FCM) OFF display screen (if so
10- Odometer  P.5-172 display language, and other settings can be
equipped)  P.5-117
11- Cruise control display screen (if so changed.
Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation
equipped)  P.5-102 Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
System OFF display screen (if so page 5-177.
12- Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)
display screen (if so equipped)
5- Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sys-
 P.5-106
tem display screen (if so equipped)
13- ECO indicator  P.5-176
P.5-139
14- “ ” or “ ” mark indicator  P.5-170


It is also possible to change elements such as
Multi information display the language and units used on the multi
switch information display by operating the multi
N00555101205 information display switch.
Each time the multi information display
switch is operated, the buzzer sounds and the
multi information display changes between
information such as warnings, trip odometer,
average and momentary fuel consumption,
5
distance range, etc.
Information screen (With the ignition switch in “OFF” or “LOCK” position or the operation mode in
OFF)
N00555301177
Each time you lightly press the multi information display switch, the display screen switches in the following order.
*: When there is a warning display


1- Trip odometer  P.5-172
3- ECO score display  P.5-176
4- Service reminder  P.5-173
5- Redisplay of a warning display screen  P.5-171
Information screen (With the ignition switch is turned from the “OFF” or “LOCK” position to the
5 “ON” position or the operation mode is changed from OFF to ON)
N00555801244
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, the display screen switches in the following order.
*: When the inspection time has arrived

1- Screen when the ignition switch or the operation mode is OFF
2- System check screen  P.5-174
3- Screen when the ignition switch or the operation mode is ON

Information screen (With the ignition switch or the operation mode in ON)
N00556201232
Each time you lightly press the multi information display switch, the display screen switches in the following order.
*: When there is a warning display

3- Driving range display  P.5-175
ECO drive assist display  P.5-176
4- Average fuel consumption display
 P.5-175
ECO drive assist display  P.5-176
5- Average speed display  P.5-175
Momentary fuel consumption display  P.5-176
6- ECO score display  P.5-176
7- S-AWC operation display (if so equipped)  P.5-87


9- Function setting screen  P.5-177
10- Redisplay of a warning display screen  P.5-171
NOTE
 While driving, the service reminder are not displayed even if you operate the multi information display switch. Always stop the vehicle in a safe place
before operating.
 While driving, the function setting screen is not displayed even if you operate the multi information display switch.
5 Always park the vehicle in a safe place, firmly apply the parking brake and put the selector lever into the “P” (PARK) position before operating the func-
tion setting screen.
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on page 5-177.
 When there is information to be announced, such as a system fault, the tone sounds and the screen display is switched.
Refer to “Interrupt display screen” on page 5-170.
If you press the multi information display

Interrupt display screen Returning to the display screen from
switch, the display screen switches to the
N00556301233 before the warning display
screen display from before the warning and
Even if the cause of the warning display is the warning (A) is displayed.
Warning display not eliminated, you can return to the screen
that was displayed before the warning dis-
When there is information to be announced, play.
such as a system fault, the tone sounds and
the information screen is switched to the
warning display screen.
Refer to the warning list and take the neces-
sary measures.
Refer to “Warning display list” on page
5-193.
When the cause of the warning display is
eliminated, the warning display goes out
automatically.

If you want to switch the display warning display screen Door ajar warning display
N00555201222
screen
Warning display screens with a “ ” or “ ” This is displayed when you press the multi N00529700030
mark displayed in the upper right of the information display switch and return from
screen can be switched. If you want to switch the warning display screen to the previous
the display, press the multi information dis- screen.
play switch as follows. This mark is also displayed if there is another
“ ”: Press lightly. warning other than the one displayed. 5
“ ”: Press for approximately 2 seconds or When the cause of the warning display is If any of the doors or the liftgate is not com-
more. eliminated, the warning goes out automat- pletely closed, this displays the open door or
ically. liftgate.
If the speed increases to about 5 mph (8
Redisplay of a warning display km/h) or higher with a door ajar, a tone will
screen NOTE sound 4 times to inform you that a door is
N00579600021  When the warning is displayed, the warn- ajar.
ing display screen can be redisplayed on the
When the warning is displayed, if you
information screen.
lightly press the multi information display
Refer to “Information screen (with the igni-
CAUTION
switch a few times, the warning display tion switch in “OFF” or “LOCK” position or  Always make sure that the warning display
screen you switched from is redisplayed. the operation mode in OFF)” on page 5-167. goes out before beginning to drive.
Refer to “Information screen (with the igni-
Other interrupt displays tion switch or the operation mode in ON)” on
N00579700022
page 5-169. Engine coolant temperature
The operation status of each system is dis- display
played on the information screen. N00578200020
For further details, refer to the appropriate Shows the engine coolant temperature.
page in the warning display list. If the coolant becomes hot, “ ” will blink.
Refer to “Other interrupt displays” on page Pay careful attention to the engine coolant
5-210. temperature display while you are driving.

CAUTION NOTE NOTE

 If the engine is overheating, “ ” will blink.  It may take several seconds to stabilize the  On hills or curves, the display may be incor-
display after refilling the tank. rect due to the movement of fuel in the tank.
In this case, the bar graph is on the red zone.
Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place  If fuel is added with the ignition switch or
and take the required measures. Refer to the operation mode in ON, the remaining
“Engine overheating” on page 8-4. fuel display may incorrectly indicate the fuel Outside temperature display
level.
screen
5  The arrow (A) indicates that the fuel tank
filler door is located on the left side of the N00556501118
Fuel remaining display screen vehicle. (Refer to “Filling the fuel tank” on Shows the temperature outside the vehicle.
N00556601180 page 3-3.)
Shows the amount of fuel remaining.
NOTE
 The display setting can be changed to the
Fuel remaining warning display
preferred units (°F or °C).
N00578300050
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
When the fuel level runs low, the information page 5-177.
screen switches to the interrupt display of the  Depending on factors such as the driving
fuel remaining warning display and the mark conditions, the displayed temperature may
(B) on the fuel remaining display flashes. If vary from the actual outside temperature.
the warning display appears, refuel as soon as
possible.
Odometer
N00574901026
F- Full Shows the total distance traveled.

E- Empty
Trip odometer
 Running out of gas could damage the cata- Shows the distance traveled between two
lytic converter. If the warning display points.
appears, refuel as soon as possible.


Usage examples for trip odometer , trip Service reminder NOTE
odometer N00556701237  Shows the distance in units of 100 miles (100
It is possible to measure two currently Displays the approximate time until the next km) and the time in units of 1 month.
traveled distances, from home using recommended periodic inspection. “---” is
trip odometer and from a particular displayed when the inspection time has 2. This informs you that a periodic inspec-
point on the way using trip odometer arrived. tion is due. Contact an authorized Mit-
. subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
NOTE of your choice to have the system 5
checked.
 The service reminder time can be modified
To reset the trip odometer by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer,
to adjust for severe usage, etc. Refer to At that time, when the ignition switch is
“Severe maintenance schedule” in your vehi- switched from the “OFF” or “LOCK”
To return the display to 0, hold down the cle’s Warranty and Maintenance Manual. For position to the “ON” position or the oper-
multi information display switch for about 2 further information, please contact your ation mode is changed from OFF to ON,
seconds or more. Only the currently dis- authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. the warning display is displayed for a few
played value will be reset. seconds on the information screen.
Example
If trip odometer is displayed, only trip
odometer will be reset.
 Both trip odometers and can

count up to 9999.9 miles/kilometers. 3. After your vehicle is inspected at an
When a trip odometer goes past 9999.9 authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it
miles/kilometers, it returns to 0.0 miles/ displays the time until the next periodic
kilometers. inspection.
 When disconnecting the battery terminal,
the memories of trip odometer displays
1. Shows the time until the next periodic To reset
and are cleared, and their displays inspection.
return to “0.0 miles/kilometers”. The “---” display can be reset while the igni-
tion switch or the operation mode is in OFF.


When the display is reset, the time until the 3. With this indicator flashing, if you lightly
next periodic inspection is displayed and the press the multi information display
NOTE
 When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis-
warning display is no longer displayed when switch, the screen switches from “---” to
tance and a certain period of time, the dis-
the ignition switch is switched from the “CLEAR”. After that, the time until the
play is reset and the time until the next
“OFF” or “LOCK” position to the “ON” next periodic inspection is shown. periodic inspection is displayed.
position or the operation mode is changed  If you accidentally reset the display, consult
from OFF to ON. an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for
5 1. When you lightly press the multi informa-
assistance.
tion display switch, the information

screen switches to the service reminder System check screen
display screen. N00578400022
When the ignition switch is turned to the

ON, the system check screen is displayed for
about 4 seconds. If there is no fault, the infor-
mation screen is displayed.
CAUTION If there is a fault, the screen changes to warn-
 The customer is responsible for making sure ing display.
that regular inspections and maintenance and Refer to “Warning display list” on page
periodic inspections and maintenance are 5-193.
performed.
Inspections and maintenance must be per-
formed to prevent accidents and malfunc-
tions.
2. Press and hold the multi information dis-
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more)
to display “ ” and make it flash. (If there NOTE
is no operation for about 10 seconds with  The “---” display cannot be reset while the NOTE
this indicator flashing, the display returns ignition switch or the operation mode is in  The system check screen display varies
to the previous screen.) ON. depending on your equipment.

Driving range display Average fuel consumption dis- NOTE

N00575201026
play  Disconnecting the battery cable will erase
Shows the approximate driving range (how N00575301027
from memory the manual reset mode or auto
reset mode setting for the average fuel con-
many more miles or kilometers you can This displays the average fuel consumption sumption display.
drive). When this driving range falls below from the last reset to the present.  The display setting can be changed to the
30 miles (50 km), “---” is displayed. There are 2 types of mode settings of manual preferred units {mpg (US), mpg (UK),
Refuel as soon as possible. reset and automatic reset.
Refer to “Changing the reset mode for aver-
L/100km or km/L}.
5
NOTE age fuel consumption and average speed” on page 5-177.
 The driving range is determined based on the page 5-178.
fuel consumption data. This may vary For information on how to change the aver- Average speed display
depending on the driving conditions and hab- age fuel consumption display setting, refer to N00578500023
its. Treat the distance displayed as just a “Changing the function settings” on page
rough guideline. 5-177. This displays the average speed from the last
 When you refuel, the driving range display is reset to the present.
updated. There are 2 types of mode setting of manual
However, if you only add a small amount of NOTE reset and automatic reset.
fuel, the correct value will not be displayed.  The average fuel consumption display can be Refer to “Changing the reset mode for aver-
Fill to a full tank whenever possible. reset separately in both auto reset mode and age fuel consumption and average speed” on
 When your vehicle is stopped on an manual reset mode.
page 5-178.
extremely steep hill, the driving range value  “---” is displayed when the average fuel con-
For the method for changing the average
may, change. This is due to the movement of sumption cannot be measured.
speed display setting, refer to “Changing the
fuel in the tank and does not indicate any  The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
function settings” on page 5-177.
breakdown. mode”.
 The display setting can be changed to the  Average fuel consumption may vary depend-
preferred units (miles or km). ing on the driving conditions (road condi- NOTE
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on tions, how you drive, etc.) The actual fuel  The average speed display can be reset sepa-
page 5-177. consumption may differ from the fuel con- rately in both auto reset mode and manual
sumption displayed, so treat the fuel con- reset mode.
sumption displayed as just a rough guideline.  “---” is displayed when the average speed
cannot be measured.
 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
mode”.

NOTE NOTE
 The display setting can be changed to the  The display setting can be changed to the ECO drive level
preferred units (mph or km/h). preferred units {mpg (US), mpg (UK),
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on L/100km or km/L}.
page 5-177. Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
 Disconnecting the battery cable will erase page 5-177.
from memory the manual reset mode or auto  It is possible to cancel the green bar graph.
Low High
5 reset mode setting for the average speed dis-
play.
page 5-177.
Momentary fuel consumption ECO indicator

display N00568701032
NOTE
N00578600024 This indicator will be displayed when fuel-  The ECO drive assist is displayed only when
While driving, the momentary fuel consump- efficient driving is achieved. vehicle is driven with the selector lever in
the “D” (DRIVE) position or when vehicle is
tion is shown with a bar graph.
driven in the sport mode (for vehicles
The “ ” mark in the momentary fuel gauge ECO Drive Assist equipped with sportronic steering wheel pad-
shows the average fuel consumption. N00578700038 dle shifter).
When the momentary fuel consumption sur- This function displays how fuel-efficiently
passes the average fuel consumption, the you are driving under different driving condi-
momentary fuel consumption is displayed tions. ECO Score
with a green bar graph. The ECO drive assist display will change as N00578800026
Be conscious of maintaining the momentary follows if you do fuel-efficient driving using ECO score indicates the points you have
fuel consumption above the average fuel con- the accelerator in a way well matched with scored on fuel-efficient driving by the num-
sumption, it can help you drive with the better the vehicle speed. ber of leaves as follows:
fuel consumption.
[When the ignition switch or the operation
NOTE mode is ON]
 When the momentary fuel consumption can- The display shows the score you achieved in
not be measured, a bar graph is not shown. the last several minutes.


[When the ignition switch is turned to the 2. When you lightly press the multi informa-
“OFF” or “LOCK” position or the operation tion meter switch, the information screen
NOTE
 To return the menu screen to the function set-
mode is put in OFF] switches to the function setting screen.
ting screen, press and hold the multi infor-
The display shows the overall ECO score the Refer to “Information screen” on page
mation display switch (for about 2 seconds
function has counted from the time when the 5-169. or more).
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position  If no operations are made within about 30
to the time when it is turned to the “OFF” or seconds of the menu screen being displayed,
“LOCK” or “ACC” position, or from the time
when the operation mode is set to “ON” to
the display returns to the function setting
screen.
5
the time when it is set to “OFF”.
CAUTION 4. Select the item to change on the menu

 For safety, stop the vehicle before operating. screen and change to the desired setting.
ECO drive level
While driving, even if you operate the multi For further details on the operation meth-
information display switch, the function set- ods, refer to the following sections.
ting screen is not displayed.
Refer to “Changing the reset mode for
3. Press and hold the multi information dis- average fuel consumption and average
Low High play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) speed” on page 5-178.
to switch from the setting mode screen to Refer to “Changing the fuel consumption
the menu screen. display unit” on page 5-179.
Refer to “Changing the temperature unit”
on page 5-180.
Refer to “Changing the display language”
Changing the function settings on page 5-180.
N00556801270 Refer to “Changing the language on other
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place. system to match the multi information
Firmly apply the parking brake and move display” on page 5-181.
the selector lever into the “P” (PARK) Refer to “Operation sound setting” on
position. page 5-181.


Refer to “Changing the time until “REST 1. Press and hold the multi information dis-
REMINDER” is displayed” on page Manual reset mode
5-182. to switch from the setting mode screen to  If you press and hold the multi informa-
Refer to “Changing the turn signal sound” the menu screen. tion meter switch when the average fuel
on page 5-182. Refer to “Changing the function settings” consumption and average speed are dis-
Refer to “Changing the momentary fuel on page 5-177. played, these calculations will be reset to
consumption display” on page 5-182. 2. Lightly press the multi information dis- zero.
Refer to “Tire ID set change” on page play switch to select “AVG” (average fuel
5 5-146. consumption and average speed setting).
 When the following operation is per-
formed, the mode setting changes auto-
Refer to “Returning to the factory set- matically from manual to auto.
tings” on page 5-183.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
NOTE F.A.S.T.-key]
 If the battery is disconnected, these function
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
settings are reset from memory and is auto- tion from the “ACC”, “LOCK” or “OFF”
matically to the factory settings (except the position.
tire ID set).
 You cannot select an item that is displayed [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
dimly on the menu. key]
Change the operation mode to ON from
ACC or OFF.
Changing the reset mode for aver- play switch (for about 2 seconds or more)
age fuel consumption and average to switch in sequence from A or 1 (Auto Auto reset mode
speed reset)  M, 2 or P (Manual reset)  A or
1 (Auto reset).  When the average fuel consumption and
N00557001240
The setting is changed to the selected average speed are being displayed, if you
You can change the mode condition for the hold down the multi information display
reset condition.
average fuel consumption and average speed switch, these calculations will be reset to
display to “Auto reset” or “Manual reset.” zero.


 When the engine switch or the operation 4. Lightly press the multi information dis-
Changing the fuel consumption
mode is in the following conditions, the play switch to switch to select the units.
average fuel consumption display and the display unit 5. Press and hold the multi information dis-
N00557101166
average speed display will automatically play switch (for about 2 seconds or more)
reset. The fuel consumption display unit can be to change the setting to the selected unit.
changed. The distance, speed, and amount
[Except for vehicles equipped with the units are also changed to match the selected
F.A.S.T.-key] fuel consumption unit. NOTE
The ignition switch has been set to the  The display units for the driving range, the 5
“ACC”, “LOCK” or “OFF” position for 1. Press and hold the multi information dis- average fuel consumption, the average speed
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) and the momentary fuel consumption are
about 4 hours or more.
changed, but the units for the indicating nee-
to change from the setting mode screen to
dle (speedometer), the odometer and the trip
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- the menu screen.
odometer will remain unchanged.
key] Refer to “Changing the function settings”
 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
The operation mode has been in ACC or on page 5-177. the unit setting is erased and is automatically
OFF for about 4 hours or more. 2. Lightly press the multi information dis- set to {mpg (US) or L/100 km}.
play switch to select “AVG UNIT” (fuel
NOTE consumption display unit setting).
The distance and speed units are also changed
 The average fuel consumption display and in the following combinations to match the
average speed display can be reset separately
selected fuel consumption unit.
in both auto reset mode and manual reset
mode.
Distance Speed
 Disconnecting the battery cable will erase Fuel
from memory the manual reset mode or auto (driving (average
economy
reset mode setting for the average speed dis- range) speed)
play and average fuel consumption display. mpg (US) mile (s) mph
mode”.
mpg (UK) mile (s) mph
km /L km km /h
3. Press and hold the multi information dis- L /100 km km km /h
to display “AVG UNIT” (fuel consump-
tion display unit setting).
Changing the temperature unit NOTE

N00557201154  On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi-
The temperature display unit can be switched. Communication System, the temperature
value of the air conditioner screen of Mit-
1. Press and hold the multi information dis- subishi Multi-Communication System is
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) switched in conjunction with outside temper-
to switch from the setting mode screen to ature display unit of the multi information
5 the menu screen. display.
However, “°F” or “°C” are not shown to the
Refer to “Changing the function settings”
air conditioner screen.
on page 5-177.
2. Lightly press the multi information dis- the unit setting is erased and is automatically
play switch to select “ ” (temperature set to °F (°C).
unit setting). to display “LANGUAGE” (language set-
3. Press and hold the multi information dis- Changing the display language ting).
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) N00557301184 4. Lightly press the multi information dis-
to switch in from °C to °F, or from °F to
The language of the multi information display play switch to select the desired language.
°C.
can be changed. 5. Press and hold the multi information dis-
The setting is changed to the selected tem-
perature unit. 1. Press and hold the multi information dis- to change the setting to the selected lan-
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) guage.
NOTE to change from the setting mode screen to
 The temperature value on air conditioner the menu screen. NOTE
panel is switched in conjunction with outside Refer to “Changing the function settings”  If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
temperature display unit of the multi infor- on page 5-177. the language setting is erased and is automat-
mation display.
2. Lightly press the multi information dis- ically set to ENGLISH.
However, “°F” or “°C” are not shown to tem-
perature display of an air conditioner.
play switch to select “LANGUAGE” (lan-  If “---” is selected in the language setting, a
guage setting). warning message is not displayed when there
is a warning display or interrupt display.


Changing the language on other NOTE
play switch to switch from A/1 (language
system to match the multi infor- cooperation: enabled) to M/2/P (language  The language on the audio system’s display
mation display does not automatically change when you
cooperation: disabled), or from M/2/P to
select A or 1 (language cooperation:
N00529801328 A/1. The setting is changed to the selected enabled) in the language cooperation control.
The language used in Mitsubishi Multi-Com- condition.
munication System (if so equipped), Blue-
Operation sound setting
tooth® 2.0 interface or Multi Around Monitor NOTE 5
N00557401156
(if so equipped) can be changed automatically  If the battery is disconnected, the language
to the same language as that shown in the You can turn off the operation sounds of the
cooperative control is automatically set to
multi information display. multi information display switch and rheostat
“A or 1” (language cooperation: enabled).
illumination button.
 The language cooperation setting can be
1. Press and hold the multi information dis- switched in the following manner.
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) 1. Press and hold the multi information dis-
• When “A or 1” (language cooperation:
to switch from the setting mode screen to play switch (for about 2 seconds or more)
enabled) has been selected, the language for
the menu screen. Refer to “Changing the Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System
to switch from the setting mode screen to
function settings” on page 5-177. the menu screen.
(if so equipped), Bluetooth® 2.0 interface
2. Lightly press the multi information dis- or Multi Around Monitor (if so equipped) is
automatically changed to the language on page 5-177.
play switch to select “ ” (language 2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
selected for the multi information display.
cooperative control).
However, this changing function may not play switch to select “ ” (operation
work depending on the language selected sound setting).
for the multi information display.
• When “M, 2 or P” (language cooperation:
disabled) has been selected, the language
to switch from ON (operation sound on)
for Mitsubishi Multi-Communication Sys-
to OFF (operation sound off), or from
tem (if so equipped), Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
OFF to ON.
face or Multi Around Monitor (if so
equipped) is not automatically changed to The setting is changed to the selected con-
match the language selected for the multi dition.


4. Lightly press the multi information dis- 3. Press and hold the multi information dis-
NOTE play switch to select the time until the display switch (for about 2 seconds or more)
play appears. to switch from 1 (turn-signal sound 1) to 2
the operation sound setting is erased and is
5. Press and hold the multi information dis- (turn-signal sound 2), or from 2 to 1.
automatically set to “ON” (operation sound
on). play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) The setting changes to the selected turn
 The operation sound setting only deactivates to change the setting to the selected time. signal sound.
the operation sound of the multi information
NOTE
5 display switch and rheostat illumination but-
ton. The warning display and other sounds  If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
Changing the momentary fuel con-
cannot be deactivated. the unit setting is erased and is automatically
sumption display
N00563601049
set to the “OFF”.
 The drive time is reset when the ignition It is possible to change the bar graph setting
Changing the time until “REST switch is in the “LOCK” or “OFF” position of the momentary fuel consumption display.
or the operation mode is in OFF.
REMINDER” is displayed 1. Press and hold the multi information dis-
N00557501160
The time until the display appears can be Changing the turn signal sound to switch from the setting mode screen to
changed. N00563501080 the menu screen.
1. Press and hold the multi information dis- It is possible to change the turn signal sound.
on page 5-177.
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) 2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
to switch from the setting mode screen to
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) play switch to select . (changing
the menu screen.
to switch from the setting mode screen to the momentary fuel consumption display)
the menu screen. 3. Press and hold the multi information dis-
on page 5-177.
Refer to “Changing the function settings” play switch (for about 2 seconds or more)
2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
on page 5-177. to switch from ON (with the green bar
play switch to select “ALARM” (rest time
2. Lightly press the multi information dis- graph) to OFF (without the green bar
setting).
3. Press and hold the multi information display switch to select . (changing the graph), or from OFF to ON.
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) turn signal sound) The setting changes to the selected bar
to display “ALARM” (rest time setting). graph setting.

Returning to the factory settings NOTE

N00557601217 • Operation sounds: ON (Operation sound
Many of the function settings can be returned on)
to their factory settings. • “REST REMINDER” display: OFF
• Turn signal sound: Turn signal sound 1
1. Press and hold the multi information dis- • Momentary fuel consumption with the
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) green bar graph: ON
to switch from the setting mode screen to  The tire ID set cannot be returned to the fac- 5
the menu screen. tory settings.
on page 5-177. 1- Frozen road warning  P.5-186
2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
Multi Information display -
2- Information display  P.5-184
play switch to select “RESET” (return to Type 2 3- Selector lever position display
the factory settings). N00555001291
 P.5-70, 5-77
3. Press and hold the multi information dis- The multi information display displays the 4- Service reminder  P.5-187
play switch (for about 5 seconds or more), odometer, trip odometer, service reminder, 5- Fuel remaining display  P.5-187
the buzzer sounds and all of the function fuel remaining, outside temperature, selector
settings are returned to the factory set- lever position, average fuel consumption,
tings. driving range, etc. NOTE
 When the ignition switch is in the “OFF”
It is also possible to change elements such as position, the selector lever position display,
NOTE the units used on the multi information dis- fuel remaining display and frozen road warn-
 The factory settings are as follows. play. ing are not displayed.
• Average fuel consumption and average
speed reset mode: A (Auto reset)
• Fuel consumption display unit: mpg (US)
or (L/100 km)
• Temperature unit: °F (Fahrenheit) or {°C
(Celsius)}
• Display language: ENGLISH
• Cooperative language setting: A (language
cooperation: enabled)

Information display
N00574801067
Each time you lightly press the multi information display switch (A), the display switches in the following order.
1- Odometer 6- Average fuel consumption display  P.5-186

2- Trip odometer 7- Outside temperature display  P.5-186
3- Trip odometer 8- Service reminder (distance)  P.5-187
4- Meter illumination control  P.5-185 9- Service reminder (month)  P.5-187
5- Driving range display  P.5-185 10- Tire pressure monitoring system display  P.5-146
NOTE
 When the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position, the driving range display, average fuel consumption display, outside temperature display and tire pres-
sure monitoring system display are not displayed.
 While driving, the service reminder is not displayed even if you operate the multi information display switch.

Odometer  Both trip odometers and can NOTE

count up to 9999.9 miles/kilometers.
N00574901039  You can adjust to 8 different levels respec-
When a trip odometer goes past 9999.9 tively for when the front side-marker lights
The odometer indicates the total distance the miles/kilometers, it returns to 0.0 miles/ are illuminated and when they are not.
vehicle has traveled. kilometers. Each time you reduce two brightness levels,
 When disconnecting the battery terminal, the segment display of the brightness level
Trip odometer the memories of trip odometer displays decreases one by one.
N00575001037 and are cleared, and their displays  If the vehicle is equipped with the automatic
light control, when the lamp switch is in a
5
The trip odometer indicates the distance trav- return to “0.0 miles/kilometers”.
position other than the “OFF” position, the
eled between two points. meter illumination switches automatically to
Meter illumination control the adjusted brightness, depending on the
Usage examples for trip odometer , trip N00578900030 brightness outside the vehicle.
odometer Each time you press and hold the multi infor-  The brightness level of the instruments is
It is possible to measure two currently stored when the ignition switch is turned to
mation display switch for about 2 seconds or
traveled distances, from home using the “OFF” position.
more, there is a sound and the brightness of
trip odometer and from a particular the instruments changes.
point on the way using trip odometer
.
Driving range display
N00575201039
This displays the approximate driving range

(how many more miles or kilometers you can
To reset the trip odometer drive). When the driving range falls below
approximately 30 miles (50 km), “---” is dis-
To return the display to 0, hold down the played.
multi information display switch for about 2
seconds or more. Only the currently dis-
played value will be reset.
NOTE
 The driving range is determined based on the
Example 1- Brightness level fuel consumption data. This may vary
2- Multi information display switch depending on the driving conditions and hab-
If trip odometer is displayed, only trip its. Treat the distance displayed as just a
odometer will be reset. rough guideline.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

 When you refuel, the driving range display is  The average fuel consumption display can be  The display setting can be changed to the
updated. reset separately for the auto reset mode and preferred units (°F or °C).
However, if you only add a small amount of for the manual reset mode. Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
fuel, the correct value will not be displayed.  “---” is displayed when the average fuel con- page 5-189.
Fill to a full tank whenever possible. sumption cannot be measured.  Depending on factors such as the driving
 When your vehicle is stopped on an  The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset conditions, the displayed temperature may
5 extremely steep hill, the driving range value
may, change. This is due to the movement of
mode”. vary from the actual outside temperature.
 Average fuel consumption may vary depend
fuel in the tank and does not indicate any on the driving conditions (road conditions,
breakdown. how you drive, etc.). The actual fuel con- Frozen road warning
 The display setting can be changed to the sumption may differ from the fuel consump-
N00579000054
preferred units (miles or km). tion displayed, so treat the fuel consumption
If the outside air temperature drops below
displayed as just a rough guideline.
page 5-189. approx. 37 °F (3 °C), the alarm sounds and
 Disconnecting the battery cable will erase
from memory the manual reset mode or auto
the outside air temperature warning symbol
reset mode setting for the average fuel con- (A) flashes for about 10 seconds.
Average fuel consumption dis- sumption display.
play  The display setting can be changed to the
N00575301030 preferred units {mpg, km/L, L/100 km}.
This displays the average fuel consumption Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
from the last reset to the present. page 5-189.
The reset mode conditions for the average
fuel consumption display can be switched
between “Auto reset” and “Manual reset”. Outside temperature display
For information on how to change the aver- N00556501121
age fuel consumption display setting, refer to Shows the temperature outside the vehicle.
“Changing the function settings” on page
5-189.
CAUTION
 There is a danger the road might be icy, even
when this symbol is not flashing, so please
take care when driving.

Fuel remaining display Fuel remaining warning display NOTE

N00556601193 N00578300034  On hills or curves, the display may be incor-
The fuel remaining display indicates the fuel When the remaining fuel level runs low (one rect due to the movement of fuel in the tank.
level in the fuel tank when the ignition switch segments displayed), the last segment of the
is in the “ON” position. fuel gauge flashes when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position. Service reminder
When the remaining fuel level very runs low N00556701325
(no segments displayed), “ ” and the bar Displays the approximate time until the next 5
graph flash. recommended periodic inspection. “---” is
If the warning display appears, refuel as soon displayed when the inspection time has
as possible. arrived.
NOTE
 The service reminder time can be modified
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer,
to adjust for severe usage, etc. Refer to
1- Full “Severe maintenance schedule” in your vehi-
cle’s Warranty and Maintenance Manual. For
0- Empty
further information, please contact your
NOTE
 It may take several seconds to stabilize the
display after refilling the tank.
 If fuel is added with the ignition switch in
the “ON” position, the remaining fuel dis-
CAUTION
play may incorrectly indicate the fuel level.  Running out of gas could damage the cata-
 The fuel lid mark (A) indicates that the fuel lytic converter.
tank filler door is located on the left side of If the warning display appears, refuel as soon
the vehicle. (Refer to “Filling the fuel tank” as possible.
on page 3-3.)


1. Shows the time until the next periodic 1. When you lightly press the multi informa- 3. With this indicator flashing, if you lightly
inspection. tion display switch a few times, the infor- press the multi information display
mation display switches to the service switch, the screen switches from “---” to
NOTE reminder display. “cLEAr”. After that, the time until the
 Shows the distance in units of 100 miles (100 next periodic inspection is shown.
km) and the time in units of 1 month.
5 2. This informs you that a periodic inspec-

tion is due. Contact an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice to have the system
checked.
3. After your vehicle is inspected at an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it
displays the time until the next periodic
inspection.
play switch for about 2 seconds or more to
make the spanner mark start flashing. (If CAUTION
To reset there is no operation for about 10 seconds  The customer is responsible for making sure
with flashing, the display will revert to its that regular inspections and maintenance and
The “---” display can be reset while the igni- original indication.) periodic inspections and maintenance are
tion switch is in the “OFF” position. performed.
Inspections and maintenance must be per-
formed to prevent accidents and malfunc-
tions.
NOTE
 The “---” display cannot be reset while the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.


1. When you lightly press the multi informa-  When the ignition switch is turned to the
NOTE tion display switch a few times, the infor- “ON” position from the “ACC” or “OFF”
 When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis-
mation display switches to the driving position, the mode setting changes auto-
tance and a certain period of time, the dis-
range display. matically from manual to auto.
play is reset and the time until the next
periodic inspection is displayed. Refer to “Information display” on page
 If you accidentally reset the display, consult 5-184.  Auto reset mode
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for 2. Each time you press the multi information
display switch for 2 seconds or more on  When the average fuel consumption is
assistance.
driving range display, you can switch being displayed, if you hold down the 5
reset mode for average fuel consumption. multi information display switch, these
Changing the function settings (A: Auto reset mode, B: Manual reset calculations will be reset to zero.
N00556801209
mode)  When the ignition switch has been set to
The “Average fuel consumption reset mode”, the “ACC” or “OFF” position for about 4
“Fuel consumption unit” and “Temperature hours or more, the average fuel consump-
unit” setting can be modified as desired, tion display will automatically reset.
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
tion.
NOTE
 The average fuel consumption display can be
CAUTION reset separately for the auto reset mode and
 The driver should not operate the display for the manual reset mode.
while the vehicle is in motion.  Disconnecting the battery cable will erase
 When operating the system, stop the vehicle from memory the manual reset mode or auto
in a safe area. reset mode setting for the average fuel con-
sumption display.
 Manual reset mode mode”.
Changing the reset mode for aver-
age fuel consumption  When the average fuel consumption is
N00575501029
being displayed, if you hold down the
multi information display switch, these
You can change the mode condition for the
calculations will be reset to zero.
average fuel consumption display to “Auto
reset” or “Manual reset”.


2. Each time you press the multi information
Changing the fuel consumption NOTE display switch for 2 seconds or more on
display unit  The display units for the driving range, the
outside temperature display, you can
N00557101179 average fuel consumption are changed, but
switch from °F to °C or from °C to °F unit
the units for the indicating needle (speedom-
The fuel consumption display unit can be of outside temperature display.
eter), the odometer, the trip odometer and the
changed. The distance and amount units are service reminder will remain unchanged.
also switched to match the selected fuel con-
sumption unit.
 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of NOTE
5 the unit setting is erased and it returns auto-
matically to factory setting.
 The temperature value on air conditioner
1. When you lightly press the multi informa- panel is switched in conjunction with outside
tion display switch a few times, the infor- temperature display unit of the multi infor-
The distance units is also changed in the fol- mation display.
mation display switches to the average lowing combinations to match the selected However, “°F” or “°C” are not shown to tem-
fuel consumption display. fuel consumption unit. perature display of an air conditioner.
Refer to “Information display” on page
 On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi-
5-184. Fuel Distance Communication System, the temperature
2. Press and hold the multi information dis- consumption (driving range) value of the air conditioner screen of Mit-
play switch for about 5 seconds or more subishi Multi-Communication System is
until buzzer sound is heard twice. km/L km
switched in conjunction with outside temper-
3. Press and hold the multi information dis- L/100 km km ature display unit of the multi information
play switch to switch in sequence from display.
mpg mile (s)
“km/L”  “L/100 km”  “mpg”  However, “°F” or “°C” are not shown to the
“km/L”. air conditioner screen.
Changing the temperature unit
N00557201167
The temperature display unit can be switched.
1. When you lightly press the multi informa-

tion display switch a few times, the infor-
mation display switches to the outside
temperature display.
Refer to “Information display” on page
5-184.

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list (multi information display - Type 1)
Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list (multi information display -
Type 1)
N00557701074
Indicator and warning light list

N00557801349
1- Position indicator  P.5-215 6- Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator 11- Anti-lock braking system warning light
2- Front fog light indicator (if so light (if so equipped)  P.5-131  P.5-98
equipped)  P.5-215 7- Automatic high beam system indicator 12- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
3- Turn signal indicators/hazard warning (if so equipped)  P.5-224 warning light  P. 4-40
lights  P.5-215 8- LED headlight warning light (if so 13- Engine malfunction indicator (“SER-
4- High beam indicator  P.5-215 equipped)  P.5-223 VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check
5- Charging system warning light 9- Active stability control (ASC) indicator engine light”)  P.5-217
 P.5-217  P.5-101 14- Electric parking brake warning light
10- Active stability control (ASC) OFF (yellow) (if so equipped)  P.5-216
indicator  P.5-101
15- Seat belt reminder/warning light
 P.4-23
16- Tire pressure monitoring system warn-
ing light  P.5-143
17- Brake auto hold indicator (if so
18- Brake warning light (red)  P.5-216
19- Information screen display list
5  P.5-192
Information screen display list

N00557901092
When there is information to be announced, such as light reminder, the tone sounds and the screen switches to the displays shown below. Refer to
the appropriate page and take the necessary measures.
When the cause of the warning display is eliminated, the warning display goes out automatically.
Refer to Warning display list on page 5-193.
Refer to Navigation information display on page 5-209.
Refer to Other interrupt displays on page 5-210.
NOTE
 In the following cases, a warning may be displayed on the information screen and the buzzer may sound for a few seconds, at times.
This is caused by the system picking up interference such as strong electromagnetic waves or noise, and is not a functional problem.
• An extremely strong electromagnetic wave is received from a source such as an illegal radio set, a spark from a wire, or a radar station.
• Abnormal voltage or a static electricity discharge is generated by the operation of your vehicle’s electronics (including after-market parts).
If the warning display has occurred a number of times, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice and
have the system checked.

Warning display list

N00558001289
Screen Cause Do this (Reference)

 You have forgotten to remove the key from the igni-  Remove the key.
tion switch. Refer to “Key reminder system” on page 5-35.
5
 You have forgotten to turn off the lights. Refer to “Light auto-cutout function (headlights and
other lights)” on page 5-222.
 The washer fluid is running low.  Replenish the container with washer fluid.
Refer to “Washer fluid” on page 9-12.
Refer to “Capacity” on page 11-7.
 There is a malfunction in the LED headlights.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice to have the system.
Refer to “LED headlight warning light” on page
5-223.
 Immobilizer is registered. Refer to “Customer key programming (Except for vehi-

cles sold in Canada)” on page 5-6.
Refer to “Customer F.A.S.T.-key programming (Except
for vehicles sold in Canada)” on page 5-29.

 There is a fault in the F. A. S. T. -key. Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
(F.A.S.T.-key)” on page 5-13.
 There is a fault in the electronic immobilizer. (Anti-  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
theft starting system). repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.

 The F. A. S. T. -key is not detected.  Insert the F. A. S. T. -key into the key slot. Refer to
“If the F. A. S. T. -key is not operating properly” on
page 5-27.
 You have forgotten to remove the F. A. S. T. -key  Remove the F. A. S. T. -key from the key slot.
from the key slot. 5
 The steering wheel is locked.  Press the engine switch while turning steering wheel.
Refer to “Steering wheel lock” on page 5-65.
 The engine switch is pressed to stop the engine and  Place the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position
the selector lever is in a position other than the “P” to put the operation mode in OFF.
(PARK) position.
 The driver’s door is opened with the steering wheel  Refer to “Steering wheel lock” on page 5-65.
unlocked.
 There is a fault in the EPS.  Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
Refer to “Electric power steering system (EPS)” on
page 5-99.

 There is a fault in the Anti-lock braking system.  Avoid sudden braking and high-speed driving, park
the vehicle in a safe place, and take corrective mea-
sures. Refer to “Anti-lock braking system warning”
on page 5-98.
 The tire pressure in one of the tires (except spare Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System” on page
5 tire) is low. 5-143.
 There is a fault in the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System” on page
tem. 5-143.
 One of the doors or the liftgate is not completely  Close the door or liftgate.
closed. Refer to “Door ajar warning display screen” on page
The open door is displayed. 5-171.
 The engine hood is open.  Close the engine hood.

Refer to “Engine hood” on page 9-3.
 There is a fault in the electronic immobilizer (Anti-  Put the operation mode in OFF, and then start the
theft starting system). engine again.
If the warning is not cancelled, please contact an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
ity of your choice.

 The driver's door is open when the operation mode is  Put the operation mode in OFF.
in any mode other than OFF. Refer to “Operation mode ON reminder system” on
page 5-36.
 An attempt was made to lock all the doors and the  Put the operation mode in OFF.
liftgate when the operation mode is in any mode Refer to “Operation mode OFF reminder system” on
other than OFF. page 5-20.
5
 There is a fault in the steering wheel lock.  Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible
and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
or a repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
 There is a fault in the electrical system.  Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible
checked.
 The engine is overheated.  Park the vehicle in a safe place and take corrective
measures.
Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4.
 The automatic transaxle or CVT fluid temperature is  Park the vehicle in a safe place and take corrective
increased. measures.
Refer to “Automatic transaxle” on page 5-67.
Refer to “Continuously variable transmission
(CVT)” on page 5-75.

 The seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch  Wear your seat belt properly.
or operation mode is in ON. Refer to “Seat belt warning” on page 4-23.
 There is a fault in the fuel system.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
5 repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
 The vehicle is being driven with the parking brake  Release the parking brake. Refer to “Brake warning
still applied. display” on page 5-219.
 The brake fluid level is low.  Park the vehicle in a safe place and inspect it.
 There is a fault in the brake system.  If the light still illuminates after the inspection, con-
tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
Refer to “Brake warning display” on page 5-219.
 There is a fault in the Electric parking brake.  Immediately have your vehicle inspected at an
Refer to “Electric parking brake” on page 5-54.
 The parking brake cannot be applied temporarily due Refer to “Electric parking brake” on page 5-54.
to repeated operation of the Electric parking brake
switch within a short time.

 You try to release the Electric parking brake switch Refer to “Electric parking brake” on page 5-54.
without depressing the brake pedal.
 The Electric parking brake has been automatically Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 5-93.
applied. 5
 Brake auto hold has been canceled by the operation Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 5-93.
of brake auto hold switch.
 There is a fault in the brake auto hold system. The  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to
brake auto hold does not operate even if you operate have the system checked.
the brake auto hold switch. Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 5-93.
 There is a fault in the Electric parking brake system  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to
or the brake auto hold system. The brake auto hold have the system checked.
cannot be used. Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 5-93.

 The Electric parking brake is not automatically  When the ignition switch is turned off or the opera-
applied because there is a fault in the Electric park- tion mode is put in OFF, place the selector lever in
ing brake system. the “P” (PARK) position and depress the brake pedal
more firmly than usual with the right foot.
Then, operate the ignition switch or the engine
switch.
5  We recommend you to have the brake auto hold sys-
tem inspected by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Autho-
rized Service Point.
Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 5-93.
 The brake auto hold system does not turn on because  Press the brake auto hold switch after fastening the
the driver’s seat belt is not fastened. driver’s seat belt.
 The brake auto hold system does not turn off because  Depress the brake pedal more firmly than usual with
the brake pedal is not pressed. the right foot. Then, press the brake auto hold switch.
 There is a fault in the engine oil circulation system.  Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible
checked.
Refer to “Oil pressure warning display” on page
5-220.

 There is a fault in the charging system.  Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible
or a repair facility of your choice for assistance.
Refer to “Charging system warning display” on page
5-220.
 There is a fault in the SRS airbag or the pre-tensioner  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
system. repair facility of your choice to have the system 5
checked, immediately.
Refer to “SRS airbag/Pre-tensioner system warning”
on page 4-40.
 There is a fault in the Active stability control (ASC).  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)” on page
5-100.
 There is a fault in the Hill start assist.  Have the vehicle checked at an authorized Mitsubi-
shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
Refer to “Hill start assist” on page 5-95.
 There is a fault in the electronically controlled 4WD  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
system. repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to “Electronically controlled 4WD system” on
page 5-82.
 There is a fault in the S-AWC system.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
checked.
Refer to “S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control)” on
page 5-85.

 There is a fault in the automatic transaxle or CVT.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
checked.
Refer to “Automatic transaxle” on page 5-67.
Refer to “Continuously variable transmission
(CVT)” on page 5-75.
5  The electronically controlled 4WD system is hot. Refer to “Electronically controlled 4WD system” on
page 5-82.
 The S-AWC system is hot. Refer to “S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control)” on page
5-85.
 The fuel is running low.  Refuel as soon as possible.

Refer to “Fuel remaining display screen” on page
5-172.
 The outside temperature is 37 °F (3 °C) or less.  Be careful driving on frozen ground.

 The ground may be frozen even when this warning is
not displayed, so drive carefully.
 The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) has  Increase the following distance by depressing the
detected the approach of the vehicles in front. brake pedal or marking other decelerating control.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC):
Approach alarm” on page 5-111.
 The Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM)  Take appropriate action such as depressing the brake
has detected the danger of collision. to avoid collision.
Refer to “Forward collision warning function” on
page 5-119.

 The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)  Depress the brake pedal as soon as your vehicle
detected a stop of the vehicle in front and stopped comes to a stop.
your vehicle, but the brake will be released soon. Refer to “When ACC detects a vehicle in front
within the set distance” on page 5-110.
 The Electric parking brake cannot be applied auto-  Depress the brake pedal as soon as possible.
matically. Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 5-93.
5

 The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) control Refer to “How to use ACC” on page 5-108.
is automatically canceled and the system is placed in
the ‘standby’ state.
 Conditions for the start of control are not met, the

5 Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) cannot start
the control.
 The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) cannot

start the control because the speed is out of speed
range.
 The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) cannot

start the control because not detected the approach of
the vehicles in front.
 The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) is tem-

porarily unavailable due to conditions such as the
adhesion of contaminants to the sensor.
This is not a malfunction.
 There is a fault in the Adaptive Cruise Control Sys-  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
tem (ACC). repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to “When ACC detects a vehicle in front
within the set distance” on page 5-110.

 There is a fault in the Forward Collision Mitigation  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
System (FCM). repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to “FCM and Ultrasonic misacceleration Miti-
gation System ON/OFF switch: When a problem is
detected” on page 5-123.
 FCM braking function of the Forward Collision Mit- Refer to “FCM braking function” on page 5-119. 5
igation System (FCM) has been activated.
 The Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM) is

temporarily unavailable for some reason.
This is not a malfunction.
 The Lane Departure Warning system (LDW) has Refer to “Lane Departure Warning system (LDW)” on
detected that your vehicle is about to leave or has left page 5-139.
the lane.
 There is a fault in the Lane Departure Warning sys-  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
tem (LDW). repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to “Lane Departure Warning system (LDW)”
on page 5-139.

 The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System  When the warning display does not disappear after
sensor is temporarily not available for some reason waiting for a while, contact an authorized Mitsubishi
such as the environmental condition or increase of Motors dealer to have the system checked.
the sensor temperature. Refer to “Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation Sys-
tem: Warning display” on page 5-131.
 The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System  Immediately have your vehicle inspected at an
does not operate normally because there are some authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
malfunctions in the sensor or the system. Refer to “Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation Sys-
tem: Warning display” on page 5-131.

 The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System is Refer to “Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation Sys-
activated. tem” on page 5-127.
 The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) sensor is temporar-  When the warning display does not disappear after
ily not available for some reason such as the environ- waiting for a while, contact an authorized Mitsubishi
mental condition or increase of the sensor Motors dealer.
temperature. Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW): When the sen-
sor is temporarily not available” on page 5-135.
 The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) does not operate  Immediately have your vehicle inspected at an
normally because there are some malfunctions in the authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
sensor or the system. Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW): When there is
a malfunction in the system or the sensor” on page
5-135.
 Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice, adhere to  Remove a foreign object on the bumper surface
the bumper surface around the sensor. around the sensor.
When the warning display does not disappear after
having cleaned the bumper surface around the sen-
sor, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW): When there is
a foreign objects on the sensor” on page 5-135.

 The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) is detected the  Pay special attention to the rear of your vehicle.
vehicle approaching your vehicle. Refer to “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” on page
5-136.
 There is a fault in the sensor.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

5 Refer to “Forward Collision Mitigation System
(FCM): When a problem is detected” on page 5-123.
Refer to “Lane Departure Warning System (LDW):
System problem warning” on page 5-141.
Refer to “Automatic high beam system: System
problem warning” on page 5-227.
 The Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM),  After the temperature of the sensor has been in
Lane Departure Warning system (LDW) and auto- range, the system will automatically return to opera-
matic high beam system is temporarily unavailable tion.
due to the high or low temperature of the sensor. Refer to “Forward Collision Mitigation System
(FCM): When a problem is detected” on page 5-123.
Refer to “Lane Departure Warning System (LDW):
System problem warning” on page 5-141.
Refer to “Automatic high beam system: System
 The sensor is temporarily unavailable due to condi- Refer to “Lane Departure Warning System (LDW): Sys-
tions such as the adhesion of contaminants to the tem problem warning” on page 5-141.
sensor or windshield. Refer to “Automatic high beam system: System problem
This is not a malfunction. warning” on page 5-227.

 There is a fault in the system of automatic high  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
beam. Refer to “Automatic high beam system: System
Navigation information display (if NOTE 5

so equipped)  Please read this section and also the separate
Direction of vehicle travel owner’s manual for Mitsubishi Multi-Com-
N00579100026
(Example) munication System.
Communication System, the following infor-
mation on navigation will be displayed when
Destination
guidance location such as junction and desti-
nation is approached after you set the destina-
tion and started the route guidance.
Ferry terminal
Tollbooth
Intermediate destination
(Example)
1- Guidance display 2- Remaining distance display

Shows the direction of vehicle travel Shows the distance to the location
and the guidance location. where the guidance is displayed.

Other interrupt displays

N00558201324

 When starting the engine, the selector  Place the selector lever in the “P”
lever is in a position other than the “P” (PARK) position, depress and hold the
(PARK) or the “N” (NEUTRAL) posi- brake pedal with the right foot, and then
5 tion, or you pressed the engine switch press the engine switch to start the
without depressing the brake pedal. engine.
Refer to “Starting and stopping the
engine” on page 5-25.
The operation status of each system is displayed on the information screen. For further details, refer to the appropriate page for each system.
Screen System operation status Reference

 When “4WD ECO” drive mode is Refer to “Electronically controlled 4WD
selected with the drive mode selector. system” on page 5-82.
 When “4WD AUTO” mode is selected

with the drive mode selector.
 When “4WD LOCK” mode is selected

with the drive mode selector.

 When “AWC ECO” mode of S-AWC is Refer to “S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Con-
selected. trol)” on page 5-85.
 When “NORMAL” mode of S-AWC is

selected. 5
 When “SNOW” mode of S-AWC is

selected.
 When “LOCK” mode of S-AWC is

selected.
 When the ECO mode is activated. Refer to “ECO mode switch” on page 5-231.
 When the parking sensor detects an Refer to “Parking sensors (Front/Rear)” on

obstacle. page 5-147.

 When the Forward Collision Mitigation Refer to “FCM and Ultrasonic misaccelera-
System (FCM) is activated or the timing tion Mitigation System ON/OFF switch” on
of an alarm is changed. page 5-122.
 When the Forward Collision Mitigation Refer to “FCM and Ultrasonic misaccelera-
System (FCM) is deactivated. tion Mitigation System ON/OFF switch” on
page 5-122.
 When the Ultrasonic misacceleration Refer to “To turn on/off the Ultrasonic
Mitigation System is deactivated. misacceleration Mitigation System” on page
5-131.
 When the operation mode of the Lane Refer to “Lane Departure Warning system
Departure Warning system (LDW) is (LDW): Turning off the LDW” on page
switched. 5-139.

This informs you that a periodic inspection is due.
Screen Do this
Have an inspection made by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. For further details,
refer to “Service reminder” on page 5-173.
The rest time can be set.
Screen Do this
Park the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine, and take a rest.
Use this display as rough guide for taking rests during a long drive.
The interval from the start of your trip until this message is displayed can be set.
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on page 5-177.
The display and buzzer alert the driver when the set time is reached. If you continue to drive
without having a rest, the buzzer sounds about every 5 minutes to encourage you to take a
rest.
 In the following cases, the time driven is reset and the display returns to the previous
display screen. After this, when the set time is reached again, the display and buzzer
encourage you to take a rest.
• The buzzer sounds 3 times.
• The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” or “LOCK” position or the operation mode
is put in OFF.
• The multi information display switch is held (for about 2 seconds or more).

Indicator and warning light package (multi information display - Type 2)
Indicator and warning light package (multi information display - Type 2)

N00519801918
1- Washer fluid level warning light 9- Electric power steering system warning 18- High coolant temperature warning light
 P.5-219 light  P.5-99 (red)  P. 5-218
2- Position indicator  P. 5-215 10- 4WD ECO mode indicator (if so 19- Low coolant temperature indicator
3- Front fog light indicator (if so equipped)  P.5-82 (blue)  P. 5-215
equipped)  P. 5-215 11- 4WD LOCK mode indicator (if so 20- Active stability control (ASC) indicator
4- Turn signal indicators/hazard warning equipped)  P.5-82  P. 5-101
lights  P. 5-215 12- LED headlight warning light (if so 21- Active stability control (ASC) OFF
5- Cruise control indicator  P. 5-102 equipped)  P.5-223 indicator  P. 5-101
6- Door-ajar warning light  P. 5-218 13- High beam indicator  P. 5-215 22- Anti-lock braking system warning light
7- For details, refer to “Steering wheel 14- ECO mode indicator  P.5-231  P. 5-98
lock” on page 5-24. (if so equipped) 15- ECO Drive Assist  P. 5-215 23- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
8- For details, refer to “Warning activa- 16- Oil pressure warning light  P. 5-218 warning light  P. 4-40
tion” on page 5-20. (if so equipped) 17- Charging system warning light
 P. 5-217

Indicators
24- Engine malfunction indicator (“SER-
High beam indicator NOTE
VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check
N00520100086  When the indicator goes out, this should be
engine light”)  P. 5-217
A blue light comes on when the headlights used as a rough indication of when the heat-
25- Seat belt reminder/warning light ing starts working.
 P. 4-23 are on high beam.
26- Tire pressure monitoring system warn-
ing light  P. 5-143 Front fog light indicator (if so
27- Brake warning light (red)  P. 5-216
ECO Drive Assist (Vehicle
28- Multi information display  P. 5-183
equipped) equipped with the multi infor- 5
N00520200175
mation display - Type 2)
Indicators This indicator comes on while the front fog N00579200030
N00519900127
lights are on. This function displays how fuel-efficiently
you are driving under different driving condi-
Position indicator tions.
Turn signal indicators/Hazard
The ECO drive assist display will change as
warning lights N00551301078
follows if you do fuel-efficient driving using
This indicator light illuminates while the
N00520000216
the accelerator in a way well matched with
parking lights are on.
The arrows will flash in time with the corre- the vehicle speed.
sponding exterior turn signals when the turn
signal lever is used. Low coolant temperature indi-
Both arrows will flash when the hazard warn-
cator - blue (Vehicle equipped ECO drive level
ing flasher switch is pressed. with the multi information dis-

play - Type 2)
NOTE N00575601020
 If the indicator flashes faster than usual or if This indicator comes on in blue while the Low High
the indicator stays on without flashing, check coolant temperature is low.
for a malfunctioning turn signal light bulb or
turn signal connection.

Warning lights
When the vehicle is moving at more than 5
NOTE mph (8 km/h) and parking brake applied, a
CAUTION
 The ECO drive assist is displayed only when • Should the brakes fail, use engine braking
buzzer will sound to inform the driver that the
vehicle is driven with the selector lever in to reduce your speed and observe the fol-
parking brake is not properly release.
the “D” (DRIVE) position or when vehicle is lowings.
driven in the sport mode (for vehicles [Vehicles with the parking brake of the
Before driving, be sure that the parking brake
equipped with sportronic steering wheel pad- lever type]
dle shifter).
is fully released and brake warning light is Carefully pull the parking brake lever.
off.
5 [Vehicles with the Electric parking brake]
Keep pulling the Electric parking brake
Warning lights CAUTION switch. (Refer to “Electric parking brake”
 If the brake warning light and the Anti-lock on page 5-54)
N00520300147
braking system warning light are illuminated
Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the
at the same time, the braking force distribu-
Brake warning light (red) and stop lights to alert the vehicles behind you.
tion function will not operate, so the vehicle
buzzer may be destabilized during sudden braking
N00520401552
under the following conditions. Electric parking brake warning
• When the brake warning light does not go
This light comes on when the ignition switch out even when the parking brake is
light (yellow) (if so equipped)
is turned to the “ON” position (engine off) or released. N00591200030
the operation mode is put in ON. • When the brake warning light stays on This warning light will illuminate when there
When the engine is started, the light should while driving.
is a fault in the Electric parking brake system.
go off a few seconds later. A warning is also • If the above occurs, avoid sudden braking
Normally, this warning light illuminates
displayed in the multi information display. and high-speed driving. Park the vehicle in
when the operation mode is put in ON, and
The warning light also illuminates after start- a safe place, and contact an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of goes off in a few seconds.
ing the engine under the following condi-
tions. your choice as soon as possible.
 The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the
 When the parking brake is still applied. following manner when brake performance
 When the brake fluid level is low. is deteriorated.
 When the brake system circuit is not • Confirm that the vehicle slows down when
working properly. you press down on the brake pedal harder
than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal
may go all the way to the floor.

Warning lights
This indicator will come on if the fuel tank
CAUTION filler cap is not properly tightened. If this
CAUTION
 When the warning light remains on or does  If the engine malfunction indicator comes on
indicator comes on and stays on after refuel-
not come on, there is the possibility that the while the engine is running, avoid driving at
ing, stop the engine and check that the cap is
parking brake cannot be operated or high speeds.
released. Immediately contact the nearest properly tightened. (Turn the cap clockwise During vehicle operation with the indicator
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. When until you hear clicking sounds.) on, the vehicle may not accelerate when you
the warning light comes on during driving, If this indicator does not go off after several depress the accelerator pedal.
seconds or lights up while driving, have the
immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place,
and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors system checked as soon as possible at an
When the vehicle is stationary with the indi-
cator on, you must depress the brake pedal
5
dealer. If you inevitably have to park, park authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a more firmly than usual since the engine
the vehicle on level and stable ground, shift repair facility of your choice. idling speed is higher than usual and a vehi-
the selector lever in “P” (PARK) position cle with an automatic transaxle or CVT has a
and place chocks or blocks. stronger tendency to creep forward.
CAUTION
 Driving for a long time with the engine mal-
Engine malfunction indicator function indicator on may cause more dam- NOTE
age to the emission control system. This
 Do not disconnect the battery cable when the
(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” could also affect fuel economy and drivabil-
engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE
or “Check engine light”) ity.
ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) is
N00520501814
 If this indicator does not come on when the on.
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi- The engine electronic control module stores
This indicator is a part of the onboard diag- tion or the operation mode is put in ON, have critical OBD information (especially exhaust
nostic (OBD) system which monitors the the system checked at an authorized Mitsubi- emission data), which may be lost if the bat-
emissions, engine control system or auto- shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your tery cable is disconnected while the engine
matic transaxle control system/continuously choice. malfunction indicator is on. This will make it
variable transmission (CVT) control system. difficult to diagnose the cause of future prob-
If a problem is detected in one of these sys- lems.
tems, this indicator illuminates or flashes.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the operation mode is put in Charging system warning light
ON, this indicator normally comes on and N00520601323
goes off after the engine has started.
This light comes on in the event of a malfunc-
tion in the charging system or when the igni-

Warning lights
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position
(engine off) or the operation mode is put in
CAUTION NOTE
 If this light comes on when the engine oil  The high coolant temperature warning light
ON. On vehicle equipped with the multi
level is not low, have your vehicle checked at may illuminate when the vehicle has been
information display - Type 1, a warning is
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a driven at high speeds or on hilly roads. This
also displayed in the multi information dis- repair facility of your choice. illuminating does not necessarily indicate a
play. When the engine is started, the light  This warning light does not show the amount problem. It should stop if you keep the
should go out. Check to make sure that the of oil in the crankcase. This can only be engine running for a while or continue driv-
light has gone out before driving.
5 determined by checking the oil level with the
dipstick with the engine turned off.
ing the vehicle.
CAUTION
 If the warning light stays on while the engine Door-ajar warning light and
is running, park your vehicle in a safe place High coolant temperature buzzer (Vehicle equipped with
as soon as possible and contact an authorized warning light - red (Vehicle the multi information display -
of your choice to have the system checked. equipped with the multi infor- Type 2)
mation display - Type 2) N00520901339
N00575701021
This light comes on when any door or the lift-
Oil pressure warning light This light comes on in red if the coolant tem- gate is open or not completely closed.
(Vehicle equipped with the perature becomes excessively high. When the vehicle is moving at more than 5
mph (8 km/h) and any door or the liftgate is
multi information display -
CAUTION open or ajar, a tone will sound 4 times to
Type 2) inform the driver that any door or the liftgate
 If the light comes on during vehicle opera-
N00520701278
tion, it indicates that the engine is possibly is not properly shut.
This light comes on when the engine oil pres- overheating. Continued driving could make
sure is below normal. If the light stays on the engine fail. Immediately stop the vehicle CAUTION
while driving, stop the engine as soon as pos- in a safe place and take appropriate action.
 Before driving, make sure that the door-ajar
sible. Do not run the engine until the cause of (Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4.)
warning light is off.
the low oil pressure is corrected.

Information screen display (Vehicle equipped with the multi information display - Type 1)
NOTE Information screen display

 When the interior light auto-cutout function
is been activated, the light goes out automat-
(Vehicle equipped with the
ically after about 30 minutes. multi information display -
Refer to “Interior light auto-cutout function
(dome light and other lights)” on page 5-275.
Type 1)
N00558301064 When the ignition switch is turned to the
Brake warning display ON, if the brake fluid is low, this warning is 5
Washer fluid level warning displayed.
N00558401179
light (Vehicle equipped with the The warning light in the instrument cluster
multi information display - also illuminates.
Type 2)
N00590300034
CAUTION
 If this warning stays on and does not go out
This light comes on when the washer fluid is while driving, there is a danger of ineffective
running low. This warning is displayed if the vehicle is braking. If this happens, park the vehicle in a
If the light comes on, replenish the container being driven with the parking brake still safe place, and contact an authorized Mit-
with washer fluid. applied. The warning light in the instrument subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of
Refer to “Washer fluid” on page 9-12. cluster only comes on when the parking brake your choice.
Refer to “Capacity” on page 11-7. is applied.  If the brake warning display, brake warning
light, and the Anti-lock braking system
warning light are illuminated at the same
CAUTION time, the braking force distribution function
 If a vehicle is driven without releasing the will not operate, so the vehicle may be desta-
parking brake, the brakes will overheat, bilized during sudden braking. Avoid sudden
resulting in ineffective braking and possible braking and high-speed driving. Park the
brake failure. vehicle in a safe place, and contact an autho-
If this warning is displayed, release the park- rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
ing brake. facility of your choice.
 The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the
following manner when brake performance
is deteriorated.

Combination headlights and dimmer switch
CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION

• Confirm that the vehicle slows down when  If warnings are displayed while the engine is  If this warning display comes on when the
you press down on the brake pedal harder running, park your vehicle in a safe place as engine oil level is proper, have your vehicle
than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal soon as possible and contact an authorized checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
may go all the way to the floor. Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking of your choice to have the system checked.
to reduce your speed and observe the fol-
5 lowings. NOTE
[Vehicles with the parking brake of the Oil pressure warning display  The oil pressure warning display does not
lever type] show the amount of oil. The oil level must be
N00558701101
Carefully pull the parking brake lever. checked using the dipstick.
[Vehicles with the Electric parking brake]
Keep pulling the Electric parking brake
switch. (Refer to “Electric parking brake”
on page 5-54) Combination headlights and
Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the
dimmer switch
stop lights to alert the vehicles behind you. If the engine oil pressure drops while the N00522501892
engine is running, the warning display is dis-

Charging system warning displayed on the information screen in the multi Headlights
play
N00558601113
CAUTION NOTE
 Do not leave the headlights and other lights
 If the vehicle is driven while the engine oil is
on for a long period of time when the engine
low, or the oil level is normal but the warn-
is not running. The battery will run down.
ing is displayed, the engine may overheat
and damage may result.
 If the warning is displayed while the engine
is running, park your vehicle in a safe place
If there is a fault in the charging system, the
as soon as possible and check the engine oil
warning display is displayed on the informa-
level.
tion screen in the multi information display.
The warning light in the instrument cluster
also illuminates.

NOTE The daytime running lights illumi- Type 2

OFF
 When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
nated
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes The daytime running lights illumi- Rotate the switch to operate the lights.
becomes foggy. This is the same as when nated
window glass mists up on a humid day, and Tail, front and rear side-marker lights,
does not indicate a problem. When the light license plate, instrument panel lights
is switched on, the heat will dry out the fog.
and downlight on
However, if water collects inside the light,
have it checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Headlights and other lights on
5
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice.
NOTE
Type 1  Once the daytime running light come on,
they do not go out until the ignition switch is
Rotate the switch to operate the lights. turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or
the operation mode is changed to OFF or The combinations of switch operations and
ACC. illuminated lights differ in accordance with
the following conditions.
[When the engine is not running, or when the
[When the engine is started, and the parking
engine is running but the parking brake is not
brake is released]
released]
The engine starts when the lights are off. The daytime running lights illumi-
OFF
nated
OFF All lights off The daytime running lights illumi-
Parking, tail, front and rear side- nated (when it is light outside the
marker lights, license plate, instru- vehicle)
The combinations of switch operations and AUTO
ment panel lights and downlight on Headlights and other lights turn on
illuminated lights differ in accordance with
and off automatically in accor-
the following conditions. Headlights and other lights on dance with outside light level.
[When the engine is started, and the parking
brake is released]


The daytime running lights illumi- NOTE Light auto-cutout function
nated
Tail, front and rear side-marker
 The sensitivity of the automatic on/off con- (headlights and other lights)
trol can be adjusted. N00532601580
lights, license plate, instrument For further information, please contact your
 If the following operation is performed
panel lights and downlight on authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
with the combination headlights and dim-
repair facility of your choice.
Headlights and other lights on mer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position,
the lights automatically turn off.
5 Communication System, screen operations
NOTE can be used to make the adjustment.
 Once the daytime running light come on,
details. F.A.S.T.-key]
they do not go out until the ignition switch is
 Do not cover the sensor (A) for the automatic The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or
the operation mode is changed to OFF or
on/off control by affixing a sticker or label to or “ACC” position or the key is removed
the windshield. from the ignition switch and the driver’s
ACC.
door is opened.
[When the engine is not running, or when the [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
engine is running but the parking brake is not key]
released] The operation mode is changed to OFF or
ACC and the driver’s door is opened.
The engine starts when the lights are off.
 If the following operation is performed
OFF All lights off with the combination headlights and dim-
 If the lights do not turn on or off with the
Headlights and other lights turn on switch in the “AUTO” position, manually mer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position,
AUTO and off automatically in accor- operate the switch. Have the system checked the lights automatically turn off after
dance with outside light level. by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or about 3 minutes.
a repair facility of your choice.
Parking, tail, front and rear side-
marker lights, license plate, instru-
F.A.S.T.-key]
ment panel lights and downlight on
The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
Headlights and other lights on or “ACC” position or the key is removed
from the ignition switch and the driver’s
door is not opened.


[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
key]
LED headlight warning light (if Headlight reminder buzzer
The operation mode is changed to OFF or so equipped) N00549801236
ACC and the driver’s door is not opened. N00584500028 [When using a key to start the engine]
If the driver’s door is opened with the key in
This warning light will illuminate when there the “OFF” or “LOCK” or “ACC” position or
NOTE is a malfunction in the LED headlights. removed from the ignition switch while the
 The light auto-cutout function can be deacti- lights are on, the tone will sound to remind
vated.
Type 1 you to turn off the lights. 5
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for details. [When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start the
For vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi
engine]
Multi-Communication System, adjustments
can be made using screen operations. For
If the driver’s door is opened with the opera-
further details, refer to the separate owner’s tion mode is put in OFF or ACC, or if the
manual. operation mode is changed to OFF while the
Type 2 lights are on, the tone will sound to remind
you to turn off the lights.
When you want to keep the lights
In either case, the lights will turn off automat-
on: ically and so will the tone. Or you can turn
the light switch to the “OFF” position to stop
If the combination headlights and dimmer the tone.
switch is turned to the “ ” or “ ” posi-
tion again after the engine is turned off, the NOTE Dimmer (high/low beam
about 3-minute auto-cutout function  If the warning light illuminates, there may be
described above will not work. The lights (the change)
a malfunction in the unit. Contact an autho-
N00549901178
parking lights, tail lights and license plate rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
lights) will stay on and will not turn off auto- facility of your choice to have the system To change the headlights from high beam to
matically. checked. low beam and vice versa, pull the turn signal
lever to (1). Switch the headlights to low
beam as a courtesy whenever there are
oncoming vehicles, or when there is traffic
moving ahead of you. An illuminated blue


light in the instrument cluster indicates when
the headlights are on high beam.
NOTE WARNING
 If you turn the lights off with the head lights  Do not rely solely on the Automatic High
set to high-beam illumination, the headlights Beam. Always observe surrounding traffic
are automatically returned to their low-beam and light conditions. If necessary, manu-
setting when the light switch is next turned ally turn the high beams on or off.
to the “ ” position. Refer to “Dimmer (high/low beam
change)” on page 5-223.
5 Automatic high beam system (if
so equipped) How to use the automatic high
N00591300028 beam system
The automatic high beam system turns the N00593600038
high beam light on or off automatically 1. Rotate the light switch to “ ” position
according to surrounding light conditions. or “AUTO” position when the engine is
The sensor (A) detects lights, such as the running.
Headlight flasher lights of an oncoming vehicle, a vehicle
N00550001209 ahead or street lights. NOTE
You can flash the high beams by pulling the  If the headlights are on when the light switch
lever gently toward you (2). The lights will is in the “AUTO” position, the automatic
go back to normal when you let go. While the high beam system works.
high beam is on, you will see a blue light on
the instrument panel. 2. Press the automatic high beam system
switch.
NOTE The automatic high beam system is acti-
vated and the indicator is illuminated.
 You can flash the high beams by pulling the
lever toward you, even if the light switch is If the automatic high beam system switch
off. is pressed again, the automatic high beam
system will be deactivated and automatic
high beam system indicator will go off.


2. The automatic high beam system indica-
NOTE tor will go off and the high beam indicator
 You can switch the headlight beams
illuminates.
(high/low) manually by operating the lever
3. The automatic high beam system switch is
even if the automatic high beam system is
working. pressed again, the automatic high beam
Refer to “Dimmer (high/low beam change)” system will be activated.
on page 5-223.
If the lever is operated manually, the auto-
matic high beam system indicator will go off
Automatic switching conditions 5
N00593700039
and the automatic high beam system will be
deactivated. The high beam headlights illuminate when all
Refer to “Manual switching” on page 5-225. of the following conditions are met:
 The automatic high beam system is not deac-
tivated when you pull the lever slightly  Your vehicle speed exceeds approxi-
(operation of the headlight flasher). mately 33 mph (53 km/h).
 It is dark ahead of your vehicle.
 There are no vehicles in front or oncom-
 Manual switching ing vehicles, or none of their exterior
lights are illuminating.
Switching to low beam
The low beam headlights illuminate when
1. Pull the turn signal lever toward you. any of the following conditions occur:
2. The automatic high beam system indica-
 Your vehicle speed does not exceed
tor will go off.
approximately 28 mph (45 km/h).
3. The automatic high beam system switch is
 It is bright ahead of your vehicle.
pressed again, the automatic high beam
 An exterior light of a vehicle in front or
system will be activated.
oncoming vehicle is illuminating.
Switching to high beam

NOTE
1. Pull the turn signal lever toward you.  The headlights may not be switched from
high beam to low beam under the following
circumstances.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

• A vehicle in front or oncoming vehicle is  The system may not detect a light vehicle • Your vehicle is inclined due to a flat tire or
hindered by any object such as continuous such as a bicycle. towing.
bends, elevated median/island, traffic signs,  The system may not detect an ambient • The warning display appears.
roadside trees. brightness precisely. This causes the traffic (Refer to “System problem warning” on
• Your vehicle passes an oncoming vehicle to be dazzled by high beam or the low beam page 5-227.)
suddenly on a bend with poor visibility. to be maintained. In such cases, you should  Observe the precautions below to maintain
5 • Another vehicle crosses ahead of your vehi-
cle.
switch the headlight beams manually.
• In bad weather (heavy rain, fog, snow or
good usage conditions:
• Do not attempt to disassemble the sensor.
 The headlights may remain at low beam (or sandstorm). • Do not affix a sticker or label on the wind-
be switched from high beam to low beam) • The windshield is dirty or fogged up. shield near the sensor.
when a reflective object (e.g. street light, • The windshield is cracked or broken. • Avoid overload.
traffic signal, noticeboard and signboard) • The sensor is deformed or dirty. • Do not modify your vehicle.
reflects light. • A light, which is similar to the headlights or • When the windshield is replaced, use the
 Any of the following factors may influence tail lights, is shining around your vehicle. Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts.
the headlight beam switching timing: • A vehicle in front or oncoming vehicle is
• How brightly the exterior lights of a vehicle driven without lights, the exterior lights are To adjust the sensitivity of the sensor
in front or oncoming vehicle illuminate. dirty or discoloured, or the direction of the
• Movement or direction of a vehicle in front headlight beams is adjusted improperly. The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporar-
or oncoming vehicle. • It becomes dark and bright suddenly and ily lowering in the following ways.
• Only right or left exterior light of a vehicle continuously around your vehicle.
in front or oncoming vehicle is illuminat- • Your vehicle is driven on uneven surfaces. 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and the
ing. • Your vehicle is driven on a winding road. ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” or
• A vehicle in front or oncoming vehicle is a • A reflective object such as a noticeboard or “LOCK” position or the operation mode
motorcycle. a mirror reflects a light ahead of your vehi- is put in OFF.
• Road conditions (gradient, bends and road cle. 2. Press the automatic high beam system
surface). • When lights of the vehicle in front or head- switch more than 15 times within 5 sec-
• The number of occupants and luggage load. lights of an oncoming vehicle blend into the onds after operation mode is turned on.
 The automatic high beam system recognises other lights.
environmental conditions by sensing a light • The rear end of a vehicle in front (such as a
source ahead of your vehicle. Therefore, you container truck) reflect a strong light.
may feel like something is not quite right • Your vehicle's headlight is broken or dirty.
when the headlight beams are switched auto-
matically.


[When the sensor is malfunctioning]
System problem warning  Sensor is too hot or cold
N00593800027
If the system becomes temporarily unavail-
If a problem occurs with the system, the fol- able due to the high or low temperature of the
lowing warning display will appear to the sensor, the following warning display will
type of the problem. appear.
After the temperature of the sensor has been
 The automatic high beam system NOTE in range, the system will automatically return
deactivation due to fault to operation. 5
 If the sensor or its surrounding area becomes
extremely high temperature when parking If the warning display does not disappear
If a failure is detected in the system, the fol- the vehicle under a blazing sun, the “AHB after waiting for a while, there is a possibility
lowing warning display will appear and the SERVICE REQUIRED” warning display that the automatic high beam system has a
automatic high beam system will automati- may appear. malfunction. Contact an authorized Mitsubi-
cally be turned off. If the message remains even after the tem- shi Motors dealer for inspection of the sys-
perature of the sensor or its surrounding area tem.
If the warning display remains even after the
has been in range, please contact an autho-
ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” or
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
“LOCK” position or the operation mode is
put in OFF and then turned back to ON,
please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
[When the automatic high beam system is

malfunctioning]

 Windshield is dirty Welcome light NOTE

N00563201234 For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors
If the automatic high beam system determines This function turns on the front side-marker dealer.
that its performance has been degraded, the On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi-
and parking lights for about 30 seconds after
warning display will appear. Communication System, screen operations
the UNLOCK button on the remote control
can be used to make the adjustment.
This can occur when transmitter is pressed when the combination Refer to the separate owner’s manual for
headlights and dimmer switch is in the “OFF”
5  Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice, or “AUTO” position (vehicles equipped with
details.
adhere to the windshield of the sensor the automatic light control). The welcome
portion. light function will operate only when it is Coming home light
 In adverse weather conditions, such as dark outside the vehicle. N00547301178
rain, snow, sand storms, etc. This function turns on the headlights in the
 A front vehicle or an oncoming vehicle is low beam setting for about 30 seconds after
splashing water, snow or dirt. NOTE
the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” or
 While the welcome light function is operat-
ing, perform one of the following operations “LOCK” position or the operation mode is
When the sensor performance returns, the put in OFF.
automatic high beam system will resume to cancel the function.
operation. • Push the LOCK button on the remote con-
trol transmitter.
1. Turn the combination headlights and dim-
If the warning display does not disappear mer switch to the “OFF” or “AUTO”
• Turn the combination headlights and dim-
after waiting for a while, there is a possibility position (vehicles equipped with the auto-
that the sensor has a malfunction. Contact an mer switch to the “ ” or “ ” position.
matic light control).
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for • Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” or
tion or put the operation mode in ON.
inspection of the sensor. “LOCK” position or put the operation
mode in OFF. Also, if a key was used to
• The headlights can be set to come on in the
low beam setting. start the engine, remove the key from the
• The welcome light function can be deacti- ignition switch.
vated.

Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped)

3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition and/or the load in the vehicle so that the head-
switch to the “OFF” or “LOCK” position
NOTE lights’ glare does not distract the drivers of
 While the coming home light function is
or putting the operation mode in OFF, pull approaching vehicles. First set the light
operating, perform one of the following
the turn signal lever toward you. switch to the “ ” position, then turn the
operations to cancel the function.
• Pull the turn signal lever toward you. headlight leveling switch knob to lower the
• Turn the combination headlights and dim- beam. The greater the number on the head-
mer switch to the “ ” or “ ” position
light leveling switch knob, the lower the
or put the operation mode in ON. beam will point.
Set the switch to the appropriate position so
5
• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
tion or put the operation mode in ON. that the headlight beam is level with the road.
• The time that the headlights remain on can
be changed.
• The coming home light function can be
deactivated.
4. The headlights will come on in the low
For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors
beam setting for about 30 seconds. After dealer.
the headlights go off, the headlights can On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi-
be turned on again in the low beam setting Communication System, screen operations
for about 30 seconds by pulling the turn can be used to make the adjustment.
signal lever toward you within 60 seconds Refer to separate owner’s manual for details.
of turning the ignition switch to the
“OFF” or “LOCK” position or putting the
operation mode in OFF. To turn on the Headlight leveling switch (if WARNING
headlights again after 60 seconds of turn-  To avoid distraction while driving, always
ing the ignition switch to the “OFF” or so equipped) perform headlight adjustments before
“LOCK” position or putting the operation N00537101115 vehicle operation.
mode in OFF, repeat the process from step The direction of the headlight beam (the
1. direction in which the light shines) alters
according to the number of people and the
NOTE
 Start adjusting when the knob is at the “0”
load in the vehicle. Lower the headlight angle
position (when the beam is at its highest).
if it is too high due to the number of people

Turn signal lever
NOTE NOTE
 Keep the knob in the “0” position except See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
when using the knob to lower the headlight dealer for details.
beam angle. For vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi
 Always return the knob to the “0” position Multi-Communication System, adjustments
when the load is removed and the people can be made using screen operations. For
have left the vehicle. further details, refer to the separate owner’s
5 manual.
 It is possible to change the tone of a sound-
Turn signal lever ing buzzer as the turn signal lights flash.
N00522601529 [Vehicle equipped with the multi information
When changing lanes, or to making a gradual display - type 1]
turn, hold the lever in the “lane change” posi- NOTE Refer to “Changing the turn-signal sound”
 A light in the instrument panel flashes to on page 5-182.
tion (1). It will return to the neutral position
show when the front and rear turn signal [Vehicle equipped with the multi information
when you let go. Use the full position (2) display - type 2]
lights are working properly.
when making a normal turn. The lever will See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
If this light flashes faster than usual, check
return to the neutral position when the turn is for a burned out turn signal light bulb or mal- dealer for details.
complete. There may be times when the lever functioning connection in the signal.
does not return to the neutral position. This If the panel light does not come on when the
usually happens when the steering wheel is lever is moved, check for a blown fuse or a
turned only slightly. You can easily return the burned out bulb in the panel.
lever by hand. Have the system inspected by your autho-
Also, when you move the lever to (1) slightly rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
then release it, the turn signal lights and the facility of your choice.
indicator light in the instrument cluster will  It is possible to modify functions as follows:
flash three times. • Deactivate the turn signal light 3-flash
function for lane changes.
• Adjust the time required to operate the
lever for the 3-flash function.

Hazard warning flasher switch
Hazard warning flasher ECO mode switch NOTE

switch N00579300028  Even if the ECO mode is operating, you can
select normal operation of the air condi-
N00522701328 ECO mode is an eco-driving support system
tioner.
which automatically controls the engine, air For further information, please contact your
conditioning system, 4WD system (if so authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
equipped) and S-AWC (if so equipped) to
improve fuel efficiency.
Refer to Electronically controlled 4WD sys- 5
tem” on page 5-82.
Front fog light switch (if so
Refer to “S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Con- equipped)
trol)” on page 5-85. N00522801420
Refer to “Automatic climate control air con-

ditioner” on page 7-5. The front fog lights illuminate only when the
headlights are on low beam.
If you press the flasher switch, the front and The ECO mode starts working by pressing Turning the knob in the direction of the “ON”
rear turn signals will flash intermittently, and the ECO mode switch when the ignition position turns on the front fog lights as well
so will the hazard warning lights. This is an switch or operation mode is in ON. as the indicator in the instrument cluster. To
emergency warning system and should not be Push the switch again and the ECO mode will turn them off, turn the knob in the direction of
used when the vehicle is in motion, except for cancel. the “OFF” position.
emergencies. While the ECO mode is working, an ECO The knob will return to the neutral position
If you need to leave your vehicle, the flashers mode indicator will be turned on. when it is released.
will keep working after the ignition switch is
removed or the operation mode is put in OFF.
NOTE
 If the flashers are used for several hours, the
battery will run down. This could make it
difficult or impossible to restart your vehicle.

Wiper and washer switch
NOTE Windshield wipers Except for vehicle with rain sensor

 If the headlights are switched to high beam,
the front fog lights will go out; they will illu- The windshield wiper and washer can be
minate again when the headlights are NOTE operated with the ignition switch or the oper-
switched back to low beam.  To ensure a clear rearward view, the rear ation mode is in ON or ACC.
 If the light switch is rotated to the “OFF” or window wiper will automatically perform If the blades are frozen to the windshield, do
“ ” position while the front fog lights are several continuous operations if the selector not operate the wipers until the ice has melted
5 illuminated, they will automatically turn off. lever is put in the “R” position while the
windshield wipers are operating.
and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper
They can be turned back on again by rotating motor may be damaged.
the combination headlights and dimmer Refer to “Rear window wiper and washer”
on page 5-236.
switch back to “ ” position, and turning
the knob in the direction of the “ON” posi-
tion.
 Do not use fog lights except in conditions of
fog, otherwise excessive light glare may
temporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers.

N00523001751
MIST- Misting function

CAUTION The wipers will operate once.
 If the washer is used in cold weather, the
OFF- Off
washer fluid sprayed against the glass may
freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm
INT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive)
the glass with the defroster before using the LO- Slow
washer. HI- Fast

To adjust intermittent intervals Misting function Vehicle with rain sensor

With the lever in the “INT” (speed sensitive The misting function can be used when the The windshield wipers can be operated with
intermittent operation) position, the intermit- ignition switch or the operation mode is in the ignition switch or the operation mode is in
tent intervals can be adjusted by turning the ON or ACC. ON or ACC.
knob (A). If the blades are frozen to the windshield or
The wipers will operate once if the wiper rear window, do not operate the wipers until
lever is raised to the “MIST” position and
released. This operation is useful when it is
the ice has melted and the blades are freed, 5
otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
drizzling, etc. The wipers will continue to
operate while the lever is held in the “MIST”
position.
1- Fast
2- Slow
MIST- Misting function

NOTE The wipers will operate once.
 The speed-sensitive-operation function of OFF- Off
the windshield wipers can be deactivated. AUTO- Auto-wiper control
For further information, please contact your Rain sensor
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a The wipers will automatically
repair facility of your choice. On vehicles
operate depending on the degree of
equipped with Mitsubishi Multi-Communi-
cation System, screen operations can be used
wetness on the windshield.
to make the adjustment. LO- Slow
Refer to separate owner’s manual for details. HI- Fast

Rain sensor CAUTION NOTE

• When cleaning the outside surface of the  In the following cases, the rain sensor may
Can only be used when the ignition switch or windshield, if you touch the rain sensor. be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked
the operation mode is in ON. • When cleaning the outside surface of the at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
windshield, if you wipe with a cloth the rain a repair facility of your choice.
If the lever is put in the “AUTO” position, the sensor. • When the wipers operate at a constant inter-
rain sensor (A) will detect the extent of rain • When using an automatic car wash. val despite changes in the extent of rain.
(or snow, other moisture, dust, etc.) and the
5 wipers will operate automatically.
• A physical shock is applied to the wind- • When the wipers do not operate even
though it is raining.
shield.
Keep the lever in the “OFF” position if the • A physical shock is applied to the rain sen-  The wipers may automatically operate when
windshield is dirty and the weather is dry. sor. things such as insects or foreign objects are
Wiper operation under these conditions can affixed to the windshield on top of the rain
scratch the windshield and damage the wip- If your hands get trapped, you could suffer sensor or when the windshield is frozen.
ers. injuries or the wipers could malfunction. Be Objects affixed to the windshield will stop
sure to turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” the wipers when the wipers cannot remove
or “LOCK” position or put the operation them. To operate the wipers again, move the
mode in OFF, or move the lever to the “OFF” lever to the “LO” or “HI” position.
position to deactivate the rain sensor. Also, the wipers may operate automatically
due to strong direct sunlight or electromag-
netic wave. To stop the wipers, move the
NOTE lever to the “OFF” position.
 To protect the rubber parts of the wipers, this  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
operation of the wipers does not take place dealer or a repair facility of your choice
even if the lever is put in the “AUTO” posi- when replacing the windshield glass.
tion when the vehicle is stationary and the
ambient temperature is about 32 °F (0 °C) or
lower.
 Do not cover the sensor by affixing a sticker
CAUTION or label to the windshield. Also, do not put
 With the ignition switch or the operation any water-repellent coating on the wind-
mode in ON and the lever in the “AUTO” shield. The rain sensor would not be able to
position, the wipers may automatically oper- detect the extent of rain, and the wipers
ate in the situations described below. might stop working normally.


The wipers will operate once if the lever is
To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor Misting function
moved to the “AUTO” position and the knob
With the lever in the “AUTO” position, it is Move the lever in the direction of the arrow (C) is turned in the “+” direction when the
possible to adjust the sensitivity of the rain and release, to operate the wipers once. ignition switch or the operation mode is in
sensor by turning the knob (B). ON.
Use this function when you are driving in
mist or drizzle.
The wipers will operate once if the lever is
raised to the “MIST” position and released 5
when the ignition switch or the operation
mode is in ON or ACC. The wipers will con-
tinue to operate while the lever is held in the
“MIST” position.
“+”- Higher sensitivity to rain

“-”- Lower sensitivity to rain
Windshield washer
N00504601354
NOTE The windshield washer can be operated with

 Automatic wiper operation (rain sensitive) the ignition switch or the operation mode in
can be changed to intermittent operation, ON or ACC.
either vehicle speed sensitive or not vehicle The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the
speed sensitive. windshield by pulling the lever toward you.
For further information, please contact your When the wipers are not in operation or in
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a intermittent operation, by pulling the lever
repair facility of your choice. toward you, the wipers will operate several
times while the washer fluid is being sprayed.
can be used to make the adjustment.
details.

Intelligent washer INT- The wiper operates continuously for

several seconds then operates inter-
mittently at intervals of about 8 sec-
By releasing the lever soon after pulling it
onds.
toward you, the washer fluid will be sprayed
- Washer fluid will be sprayed onto the
several times while the wipers are operating
rear window glass while the knob is
several times.
turned fully in either direction.
Intelligent washer will stop operating with
When the washer fluid is sprayed, the
5 any operation of the lever.
wiper will automatically operate 2 or
3 times.
Rear window wiper and washer
NOTE
N00523201418 NOTE
The rear window wiper and washer can be  The rear window wiper will automatically
 It is possible to modify functions as follows: operated when the ignition switch or the perform several continuous operations if the
• Intelligent washer can be activated. operation mode is in ON or ACC. selector lever is put in the “R” position while
Refer to “Intelligent washer” on page the windshield wipers or the rear window
5-236. Turn the knob to operate the rear window wiper is operating.(automatic operation
• The wipers can be set to operate again after wiper. mode)
about 6 seconds. After the automatic operation, the rear win-
These functions are not activated when the dow wiper will stop operating if the knob is
vehicle is shipped from the factory. in the “OFF” position. If the knob is in the
To activate or deactivate these functions, “INT” position, the rear window wiper will
please contact your authorized Mitsubishi return to the intermittent operation.
Motors dealer. It is possible to set the rear window wiper to
On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi- perform the automatic operation only if the
Communication System, screen operations selector lever is put in the “R” position while
can be used to make the adjustment. the rear window wiper is operating with the
Refer to the separate owner’s manual for knob in the “INT” position.
details. See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for details.
OFF- Off

Wiper deicer switch (if so equipped)
NOTE NOTE Wiper deicer switch (if so

 If the knob is in the “OFF” position, turn the  Do not use the wipers when the windshield is
equipped)
knob to the “INT” position twice quickly to dry. This could scratch the glass and wear the
N00584400027
operate the rear window wiper continuously. wiper blades prematurely.
(continuous operation mode)  Before using the wipers in cold weather, The electric rear window defogger switch can
Turn the knob to the “OFF” position to stop check to be sure that the wiper blades are not
the rear window wiper continuous operation.
be operated when the engine is running.
frozen to the windshield or rear window.
When the front wipers have frozen to the
 The wiper intermittent operation time can be
adjusted.
Using the wipers while the blades are frozen
could cause the wiper motor to burn out. windshield at the parked positions, turning on 5
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors  If the moving wipers become blocked part- this switch will heat the windshield to make
dealer for details. way through a sweep by ice or other deposits the wipers operable. Press the electric rear
For vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi on the glass, the wipers may temporarily stop window defogger switch and the deicer will
Multi-Communication System, adjustments operating to prevent the motor from over- operate.
can be made using screen operations. For heating. In this case, park the vehicle in a
further details, refer to the separate owner’s safe place, turn the ignition switch to the
manual. “OFF” position or put the operation mode in
NOTE
 The washer fluid reservoir is located in the OFF, and then remove the ice or other depos-  The wiper deicer is activated/deactivated,
engine compartment. its. depending on the operation of the rear win-
Check the fluid level regularly and refill if Because the wipers will start operating again dow defogger. Refer to “Electric rear win-
necessary. (Refer to “Washer fluid” on page after the wiper motor cools down, check that dow defogger switch” on page 5-237.
9-12.) the wipers operate before using them.
 Avoid using the washer for more than 20 sec-
Precautions to observe when onds at a time. Do not operate the washer Electric rear window defog-
when the washer fluid reservoir is empty or
using wipers and washers the pump may fail. ger switch
N00523501277  During cold weather, add a recommended N00523701468
washer solution that will not freeze in the The rear window defogger can be used when
CAUTION washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise the washer the engine is running.
 If the washer is used in cold weather, the may not work or may be damaged. The indicator light (A) will come on when
washer fluid sprayed onto the glass might  Replace the wiper blades when they are you press the electric rear window defogger
freeze, blocking your view. Heat the glass worn. Use the proper size replacement
switch. Electric current will flow through the
with the defroster before using the washer. blades. For further information, please con-
heating wires on the rear window to help
tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer. clear away moisture or frost.

Electric rear window defogger switch
CAUTION NOTE
 Do not place stickers, tape, or other items  It is possible to change the setting to make
that are attached with adhesive over the grid the rear window defogger operate automati-
wires on the rear window. cally when ambient temperature becomes
 When cleaning the inside rear window, use a low while the engine is running, even if you
soft cloth and wipe lightly over the grid do not push the rear window defogger
wires. switch.
5 It operates automatically only once after
turning the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
NOTE tion or putting the operation mode in ON.
If you choose this setting, the door mirror
 If your vehicle is equipped with door mirror
heater (if so equipped) and wiper deicer (if
After about 15 to 20 minutes of operation, the heater, mist can also be removed from the
so equipped) will also operate automatically
system will shut off automatically. outside rearview mirrors when the rear win-
at the same time.
To switch the defogger OFF before 15 to 20 dow defogger switch is pressed. (Refer to
For further information, please contact your
minutes have passed, press the switch again. “Door mirror heater” on page 5-63.)
The indicator light will go out and the defog-  On vehicles equipped with the wiper deicer,
when the rear window defogger switch is
ger will turn off. Communication System, screen operations
pushed, the windshield becomes warm and
If you need the defogger for more than 15 to can be used to make the adjustment.
the wipers become operable. (Refer to
20 minutes, press the switch again. This will Refer to the separate owner’s manual for
“Wiper deicer switch” on page 5-237.)
add 15 to 20 more minutes. details.
CAUTION
 The rear window defogger is not designed to
melt snow. Remove any snow manually
before using the rear window defogger.
 Use the rear window defogger only after the
engine has started and is running. Be sure to
turn the defogger switch off immediately
after the window is clear to save on battery
power.

Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped)
Heated steering wheel Horn switch

switch (if so equipped) N00523801195
N00589100032 To honk the horn, press around the “ ” mark

The heated steering wheel contains internal on the steering wheel.
heaters in the rim. Heating areas are shown in
the illustration.
5
WARNING
 Persons who are unable to feel tempera-
ture change or skin pain due to age, ill-
ness, injury, medication, fatigue or other
physical conditions or who have sensitive
skin may suffer burns when using the
heated steering wheel. To reduce the risk
: Heating area
of burns, people with such conditions must
use care when using the heated steering
Link System
N00563701154
wheel.
The heated steering wheel can be operated The Link System takes control of the devices
when the ignition switch or operation mode is connected via the USB input terminal or the
in ON. CAUTION Bluetooth® 2.0 interface; the system allows
 If water or any other liquid is spilled on the the connected device to be operated by using
To turn on the heated steering wheel, push the
steering wheel, allow it to dry thoroughly the switches in the vehicle or voice com-
heated steering wheel switch. The heated before attempting to use the heated steering mands.
steering wheel will operate for approximately wheel. Turn the heated steering wheel off See the following section for details on how
30 minutes and then it will automatically turn immediately if it appears to be malfunction-
to operate.
off. ing during use.
The indicator light (A) will illuminate while  Also be aware that using the heated steering
Refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on page
the heated steering wheel is operating. wheel with the engine off may run the bat-
tery down. 5-240.

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface

Refer to “USB input terminal” on page 5-263. phone. It also allows the user to play music,
Refer to “Listen to an iPod” on page 7-32.
WARNING
saved in a Bluetooth® music player, from the
Refer to “Listen to Audio Files on a USB  Although the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface
vehicle’s speakers.
Device” on page 7-34. allows you to make hands-free calls, if you
The system is equipped with a voice recogni-
Refer to “To play iPod/USB memory device choose to use the cellular phone while
tion function, which allows you to make driving, you must not allow yourself to be
tracks via voice operation” on page 7-37. hands-free calls by simple switch operations distracted from the safe operation of your
Refer to “Listen to Bluetooth Audio” on page and voice command operations using a vehicle. Anything, including cellular
7-40.
5 defined voice tree. phone usage, that distracts you from the
safe operation of your vehicle increases
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can be used your risk of an accident.
BLUETOOTH SIG, INC. when the ignition switch or the operation  Refer to and comply with all state and
mode is in ON or ACC. local laws in your area regarding cellular
phone usage while driving.
Link System End User License
Before you can use the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
Agreement
face, you must pair the Bluetooth® device
N00563801070 NOTE
You have acquired a device that includes soft- and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. Refer to “Con-  If the ignition switch or the operation mode
ware licensed to Mitsubishi Motors Corpora- necting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and is left in ACC, the accessory power will
tion from Visteon Corporation, and their Bluetooth® device” on page 5-247. automatically turn off after a certain period
subsequent 3rd party suppliers. For a com- of time and you will no longer be able to use
plete list of these 3rd party products and their Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The accessory
end user license agreements, please go to the BLUETOOTH SIG, INC. power comes on again if the ignition switch
or the engine switch is operated. Refer to
following website.
“ACC power auto-cutout function” on page
http://www.jciblueconnect.com/faq/fulldis-
5-20 and 5-64.
closure.pdf
 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot be used
if the Bluetooth® device has a dead battery
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface or the device power is turned off.
N00563901345  Hands-free calls will not be possible if your
phone does not have service available.
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allows for mak-
ing/receiving hands-free calls in the vehicle
using a Bluetooth® compatible cellular


Useful voice commands  P.5-244
NOTE Speaker enrollment function  P.5-245
Steering control switch and
 If you place the Bluetooth® device in the
Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and microphone
vehicle’s third seat or luggage compartment, N00564001109
you may not be able to use the Bluetooth®

the Bluetooth® device  P.5-247
2.0 interface. Operating a music player connected via Blue-
 Some Bluetooth® devices are not compatible tooth®  P.5-253
with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
How to make or receive hands-free calls
 You can confirm the Link System software
 P.5-253 5
version by pressing the HANG-UP button 3 Phonebook function  P.5-255
times (press and hold 2 times and then press
briefly) within 10 seconds.
 For detail of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,
refer to the following website:
[For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
You can access the Mitsubishi Motors North
America website.
[For vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico]
You can access the Mitsubishi Motors web-
site. 1- Volume up button
Please read and agree to the “Warning about 2- Volume down button
Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies”, 3- SPEECH button
the websites mentioned above may connect 4- PICK-UP button
you to websites other than the Mitsubishi 5- HANG-UP button
Motors website. 6- Microphone
http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
ucts/index.html
 Software updates by cellular phone/digital Volume up button
audio device manufacturers may
change/alter device connectivity.
Press this button to increase the volume.
Steering control switch and microphone
 P.5-241
Voice recognition function  P.5-243


 If this button is pressed in the voice recog-
Volume down button PICK-UP button
nition mode, the voice recognition mode
 Press this button when an incoming call is will be deactivated.
Press this button to decrease the volume.
received to answer the telephone.
NOTE
SPEECH button NOTE  When you press the SPEECH button (except
 When not receiving incoming calls, pressing for vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
 Press this button to change to voice recog-
5 nition mode.
the PICK-UP button on vehicles equipped
with the Mitsubishi Multi-Communication
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Communica-
While the system is in voice recognition System, will activate the voice recognition of tion System) to enter voice recognition mode
mode, “Listening” will appear on the the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. with a cellular phone paired to the system,
audio display. current information on the cellular phone,
such as “remaining battery life,” “signal
 When another call is received during a
NOTE strength” or “roaming,” will be displayed on
call, press this button to put the first caller the audio display.*
 On vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi
on hold and talk to the new caller. *: Some cellular phones will not send this
Multi-Communication System, pressing the
SPEECH button will activate the voice rec- • In such circumstances, you can press the information to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
ognition mode (a beep will sound when suc- button briefly to switch between callers.  Call waiting and three-way calls can be used
cessfully activated). To use the voice You will switch to the first caller and the
by the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, only if it is
recognition of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, other caller will be put on hold. possible to use those services with your cel-
press the PICK-UP button. • To establish a three-way call in such situ- lular phone.
ations, press the SPEECH button to enter
 If you press the button briefly while in voice recognition mode and then say
voice recognition mode, it will interrupt “Join calls.” Microphone
prompting and allow voice command
input. HANG-UP button Your voice will be recognized by a micro-
Pressing the button longer will deactivate phone in the overhead console, allowing you
the voice recognition mode.  Press this button when an incoming call is
to make hands-free calls with voice com-
 Pressing this button briefly during a call received to refuse the call.
mands.
will enable voice recognition and allow  Press this button during a call to end the
voice command input. current call.
When another call is on hold, you will
switch to that call.


5. The voice guide will say “English (Span-
NOTE NOTE ish, French or Japanese) selected. Is this
 If a cellular phone is within close proximity  For best performance and further reduction
correct?” Say “Yes.”
of the microphone, it may distort the sound of ambient noise, the vehicle windows
If you say “No,” the system will return to
quality. In this case, place the cellular phone should be closed, lower the blower speed and
as far as possible from the microphone. refrain from conversation with your passen- Step 4.
gers while engaging the voice recognition
function. NOTE
Voice recognition function  Some voice commands have alternative
commands.
 The voice guide will repeat the same mes-
sage twice. The first message is in the cur-
5
N00564101113
 Depending on the selected language, some rent language, and the second message is in
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped functions may not be available. the selected language.
with a voice recognition function.  Language can be changed by using the audio  If many entries are registered in the vehicle
Simply say voice commands and you can per- control panel besides the following proce- phonebook, changing the language will take
dure. a longer time.
form various operations and make or receive
For details, refer to “System settings” on  Changing the language deletes the mobile
hands-free calls.
page 7-44. For DISPLAY AUDIO and Mit- phonebook imported to the Bluetooth® 2.0
subishi Multi-Communication System, refer interface. If you wish to use it, you will have
With the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, voice rec-
to the separate owner’s manuals. to import it again.
ognition is possible for US English, North
American Spanish, Canadian French and Jap-
anese. The factory setting is “English.” Selecting the language 6. When the voice guide says “English
(Spanish, French or Japanese) selected,”
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
NOTE the language change process will be com-
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
 If the voice command that you say differs
pleted and the system will return to the
from the predefined command or cannot be main menu.
recognised due to ambient noise or some nication System).
other reason, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface 2. Say “Setup.”
will ask you for the voice command again up 3. Say “Language.”
to 3 times.
4. The voice guide will say “Select a lan-
guage: English, Spanish, French or Japa-
nese.” Say the desired language.
(Example: “English”)


With the confirmation function activated, you passcode in order to use all functions of the
Useful voice commands are given more opportunities than normal to
N00564200016
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, except for recep-
confirm a command when making various tion.
settings to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. This
Help function Setting the passcode
allows you to decrease the possibility that a
N00564301027
setting is accidentally changed.
Use the following procedure to turn on the
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped The confirmation function can be turned on
security function by setting a passcode.
5 with a help function.
If you say “Help” when the system is waiting
or off by following the steps below.
for a voice command input, the system will 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
tell you a list of the commands that can be vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
used under the circumstances. nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
nication System).
nication System).
Canceling 2. Say “Setup.”
2. Say “Setup.”
N00564401028 3. Say “Passcode.”
3. Say “Confirmation prompts.”
There are 2 cancel functions. 4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is dis-
4. The voice guide will say “Confirmation
If you are at the main menu, say “Cancel” to abled. Would you like to enable it?”
prompts are <on/off>. Would you like to
Answer “Yes.”
exit from the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. turn confirmation prompts <off/on>.”
Answer “No” to cancel the setting of the
If you are anywhere else within the system, Answer “Yes” to change the setting or
passcode and return to the main menu.
say “Cancel” to return to the main menu. answer “No” to keep the current setting.
5. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4-
5. The voice guide will say “Confirmation
digit passcode. Remember this passcode.
NOTE prompts are <off/on>” and then the sys-
It will be required to use this system.”
tem will return to the main menu.
 You can return to the previous menu by say- Say a 4-digit number which you want to
ing “Go Back.” (if so equipped) set as a passcode.
Security function 6. For confirmation purposes, the voice
N00564601105 guide will say “Passcode <4-digit pass-
Confirmation function setting It is possible to use a passcode as a security code>. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.”
N00564501032
function by setting a passcode of your choice Answer “No” to return to the passcode
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped for the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. input in Step 5.
with a confirmation function. When the security function is turned on, it is
necessary to make a voice input of a 4-digit

7. When the registration of the passcode is passcode. Please try again.” Enter the correct 5. When the disabling of the passcode is
completed, the voice guide will say “Pass- passcode. completed, the voice guide will say “Pass-
code is enabled” and the system will code is disabled” and the system will
return to the main menu. NOTE return to the main menu.
 You can reenter the passcode as many times
NOTE as you want. Speaker enrollment function
 Passcode will be required to access the sys-  If you have forgotten your passcode, say N00564700011
tem after the next ignition cycle. “Cancel” to quit the voice input mode and
then check with an authorized Mitsubishi The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can use the 5
 It is required for a little time after engine
Motors dealer. speaker enrollment function to create a voice
stop that the entered passcode is actually
recorded in the system. model for one person per language.
If the ignition switch or the operation mode Disabling the passcode This makes it easier for the Bluetooth® 2.0
is made to ACC or ON or the engine is interface to recognise voice commands said
started immediately after engine stop, there Use the following procedure to turn off the by you.
is a case when the entered passcode is not security function by disabling the passcode. You can turn a voice model registered with
recorded in the system. At this time, please the speaker enrollment function on and off
try to enter the passcode again.
NOTE whenever you want.
 System must be unlocked to disable the pass-
Entering the passcode code.
Speaker enrollment
If a passcode has been set and the security N00564801181
function is enabled, the voice guide will say 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for It takes about 2 to 3 minutes to complete the
“Hands-free system is locked. State the pass- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- speaker enrollment process.
code to continue” when the SPEECH button nication System) or PICK-UP button (for To ensure the best results, run through the
(except for vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- process while in the driver’s seat, in an envi-
Communication System) or PICK-UP button nication System). ronment that is as quiet as possible (when
(for vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- 2. Say “Setup.” there is no rain or strong winds and the vehi-
nication System) is pressed to enter voice rec- 3. Say “Passcode.” cle windows are closed). Please turn off your
ognition mode. Say the 4-digit passcode 4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is phone while in speaker enrollment to prevent
number to enter the passcode. enabled. Would you like to disable it?” interruption of the process.
Answer “Yes.” Use the following procedure for speaker
If the entered passcode is wrong, the voice Answer “No” to cancel the disabling of enrollment.
guide will say “<4-digit passcode>, Incorrect the passcode and return to the main menu.


1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the
selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position
NOTE NOTE
 If you do not start the speaker enrollment  Completing the speaker enrollment process
and apply the parking brake.
process within 3 minutes after pressing the will turn on the voice model automatically.
SPEECH button, the speaker enrollment  The commands “Help” and “Cancel” will not
NOTE function will time out. work in this mode.
 Speaker enrollment is not possible unless the The voice guide will say “Speaker enroll-
vehicle is parked. Make sure you park the ment has timed out.” The system will then
vehicle in a safe area before attempting
5 speaker enrollment.
beep and the voice recognition mode will be
deactivated.
Enabling and disabling the voice
model and retraining
N00564901078
2. Press the SPEECH button (except for 5. The voice guide will prompt for phrase 1.
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- You can turn a voice model registered with
Repeat the corresponding phrase listed in
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for the speaker enrollment function on and off
table “Enrollment commands” on page
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- whenever you want.
5-263.
nication System). You can also retrain the system.
The system will register your voice and
3. Say “Voice training.” Use the following procedure to perform these
then move on to the registration of the
4. The voice guide will say “This operation actions.
next command. Continue the process until
must be performed in a quiet environment all phrases have been registered. 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
while the vehicle is stopped. See the vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
owner’s manual for the list of required NOTE nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
training phrases. Press and release the  To repeat the most recent voice training com- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
SPEECH button when you are ready to mand, press and release the SPEECH button. nication System).
begin. Press the HANG-UP button to can-  If you press the HANG-UP button anytime 2. Say “Voice training.”
cel at any time.” during the process, the system will beep and 3. If you have completed a speaker enroll-
Press the SPEECH button to start the stop the speaker enrollment process.
ment process once already, the voice
speaker enrollment process. guide will say either “Enrollment is
6. When all enrollment commands have enabled. Would you like to disable or
been read out, the voice guide will say retrain?” or “Enrollment is disabled.
“Speaker enrollment is complete.” The Would you like to enable or retrain?”
system will then end the speaker enroll-
ment process and return to the main
menu.


4. When enrollment is “enabled,” the voice If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are 2. Press the SPEECH button (except for
model is on; when enrollment is “dis- available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
abled,” the voice model is off. Say the music player most recently connected is auto- nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
command that fits your needs. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0
Say “Retrain” to start the speaker enroll- nication System).
interface.
ment process and recreate a new voice 3. Say “Setup.”
model. (Refer to “Speaker enrollment” on 4. Say “Pairing Options.”
You can also change a Bluetooth® device to
page 5-245.) 5. The voice guide will say “Select one of
be connected.
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”
5
Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 To pair
Say “Pair.”
interface and Bluetooth® device NOTE

To pair a Bluetooth® device with the Blue-
N00565001395
 If 7 devices have already been paired, the
Before you can make or receive hands-free voice guide will say “Maximum devices
tooth® 2.0 interface, use either one of the fol-
calls or play music using the Bluetooth® 2.0 paired” and then the system will end the
lowing 2 methods (Type 1 or Type 2). pairing process. To register a new device,
interface function, you must pair the Blue-
delete one device and then repeat the pairing
tooth® device and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.  Pairing procedure- Type 1 (if so process.
equipped) (Refer to “Selecting a device: Deleting a
NOTE device” on page 5-251.)
 Pairing is required only when the device is 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the
used for the first time. Once the device has selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position 6. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4-
been paired with the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- and apply the parking brake. digit pairing code.” Say a 4-digit number.
face, all you need is to bring the device into When the confirmation function is on, the
the vehicle next time and the device will NOTE system will confirm whether the number
connect to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface auto-  You cannot pair any Bluetooth® device with said is acceptable. Answer “Yes.”
matically (if supported by the device). The the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface unless the vehi- Answer “No” to return to pairing code
device must have Bluetooth® turned ON to cle is parked. Before pairing a Bluetooth®
selection.
connect.
device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,
confirm that the vehicle is parked in a safe
location.
Up to 7 Bluetooth® devices can be paired
with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.

NOTE NOTE  Pairing procedure- Type 2 (if so

equipped)
 Some Bluetooth® devices require a specific  If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog-
pairing code. Please refer to the device man- nize the Bluetooth® device, the voice guide 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the
ual for pairing code requirements. will say “Pairing has timed out” and the pair-
selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position
 The pairing code entered here is only used ing process will be cancelled.
and apply the parking brake.
for the Bluetooth® connection certification. Confirm that the device you are pairing sup-
It is any 4-digit number the user would like ports Bluetooth®, and try pairing it again.
5 to select.  If you enter the wrong number, the voice
NOTE
Remember the pairing code as it needs to be guide will say “Pairing failed” and the pair-  You cannot pair any Bluetooth® device with
keyed into the Bluetooth®
device later in the ing process will be cancelled. the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface unless the vehi-
pairing process. Confirm the number is right, and try pairing cle is parked. Before pairing a Bluetooth®
Depending on the connection settings of the it again.
device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,
Bluetooth® device, this code may have to be confirm that the vehicle is parked in a safe
entered each time you connect the Blue- 8. The voice guide will say “Please say the
location.
tooth® device to the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
name of the device after the beep.” You
face. For the default connection settings, can assign a desired name for the Blue-
refer to the instructions for the device. tooth® device and register it as a device 2. Press the SPEECH button (except for
tag. Say the name you want to register vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
after the beep. nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
7. The voice guide will say “Start pairing vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
procedure on the device. See the device nication System).
manual for instructions.” Enter in the
NOTE
 When the confirmation function is on, after 3. Say “Pair Device.”
Bluetooth® device the 4-digit number you repeating the device tag you have said, the
have registered in Step 6. voice guide will ask “Is this correct?”
Answer “Yes.”
NOTE To change the device tag, answer “No” and
 Depending on the Bluetooth® device, it may then say the device tag again.
take a few minutes to pair it with the Blue-
tooth® 2.0 interface. 9. The voice guide will say “Pairing com-
plete,” and the pairing process will end.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

 The following procedure ( to ) can also  The pairing code entered here is only used  If you enter the wrong number, the voice
be used instead of saying “Pair Device.” for the Bluetooth® connection certification. guide will say “Pairing failed” and the pair-
Replace this step 3 with the following proce- Depending on the connection settings of the ing process will be cancelled.
dure if you prefer. Confirm the number is right, and try pairing
Bluetooth® device, this code may have to be
it again.
Say “Setup.” entered each time you connect the Blue-
If your device requires a specific pairing
Say “Pairing Options.” tooth® device to the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
The voice guide will say “Select one of face. For the default connection settings,
code, you need to set the pairing code. Refer
to the device manual for pairing code
5
the following: pair, edit, delete, list or set refer to the instructions for the device. requirements and read the next section “If
code.” your device requires a specific pairing code”
Say “Pair.” 5. Enter in the Bluetooth® device the 4-digit on page 5-250.
 If 7 devices have already been paired, the number that has been read out in Step 4.
voice guide will say “Maximum devices 6. The voice guide will say “Please say the
paired” and then the system will end the NOTE name of the device after the beep.” You
pairing process. To register a new device, can assign a desired name for the Blue-
 Depending on the Bluetooth® device, it may
delete one device and then repeat the pairing
take a few minutes to pair it with the Blue- tooth® device and register it as a device
process.
tooth® 2.0 interface. tag. Say the name you want to register
(Refer to “Selecting a device: Deleting a
device” on page 5-251.)  If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog- after the beep.
nize the Bluetooth® device, the voice guide
will say “Pairing has timed out” and the pair- NOTE
4. The voice guide will say “Start pairing
ing process will be cancelled.  When the confirmation function is on, after
procedure on the device. See the device
Confirm that the device you are pairing sup- repeating the device tag you have said, the
manual for instructions.” and then will voice guide will ask “Is this correct?”
say “The pairing code is <pairing code>.” ports Bluetooth®, and try pairing it again.
Answer “Yes.”
To change the device tag, answer “No” and
NOTE then say the device tag again.
 Some Bluetooth® devices require a specific
pairing code. Please refer to the device man-
ual for pairing code requirements and read
the next section “If your device requires a
specific pairing code” on page 5-250 to set
the pairing code.


7. The voice guide will say “Pairing Com- Answer “No,” the system will return to 4. After the voice guide says “Please say,”
plete. Would you like to import the con- Step 6. the numbers of the cellular phones and
tacts from your mobile device now?” 8. The voice guide will say “Do you want to device tags of corresponding cellular
Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide will pair a device now?” Answer “Yes,” the phones will be read out in order, starting
say “Please wait while the contacts are system will proceed to Step 3 in the pair- with the cellular phone that has been most
imported. This may take several minutes.” ing process. Refer to the “Pairing proce- recently connected.
Answer “No” to end the pairing process. dure- Type 2.” Say the number of the cellular phone that
you want to connect to.
5 When the confirmation function is on, the
If your device requires a specific pairing Selecting a device
code N00565101080
system will ask you again whether the
phone that you want to connect to is cor-
®
If your device requires a specific pairing If multiple paired Bluetooth devices are rect. Answer “Yes” to continue and con-
code, you need to set the pairing code. Follow available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or nect to the cellular phone.
the procedures below. music player most recently connected is auto- Answer “No,” and the voice guide will
matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 say “Please say.” Say the number of the
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for interface. phone that you want to connect to.
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- You can connect to the other paired cellular
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for phone or music player by following setting NOTE
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- change procedures.  You can connect to a phone at any time by
nication System). pressing the SPEECH button and saying the
2. Say “Setup.” number, even before all of the paired num-
 To select a cellular phone
3. Say “Pairing Options.” N00582200034
bers and device tags of corresponding cellu-
4. Say “Set Code.” 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for lar phones are read out by the system.
5. The voice guide will say “Do you want vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
the pairing code to be random or fixed?” nication System) or PICK-UP button (for 5. The selected phone will be connected to
Say “Fixed.” vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The voice
6. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4- nication System). guide will say “<device tag> selected”
digit pairing code.” Say a 4-digit number. 2. Say “Setup.” and then the system will return to the
7. The voice guide will say “Pairing code set 3. Say “Select phone.” main menu.
to <pairing code>.”
When the confirmation function is on, the
system will confirm whether the number
said is acceptable. Answer “Yes.”
 To select a music player 5. The selected music player will be con- If you want to delete all paired phones
N00582300035 nected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. from the system, say “All.”
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for The voice guide will say “<device tag> 6. For confirmation purposes, the voice
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- selected” and then the system will return guide will say “Deleting <device tag>
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for to the main menu. <number>. Is this correct?” or “Deleting
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- all devices. Is this correct?”
nication System). Answer “Yes” to delete the phone(s).
 Deleting a device
Answer “No,” the system will return to
2. Say “Setup.”
3. Say “Select music player.”
N00582400036
Step 4.
5
Use the following procedure to delete a
4. After the voice guide says “Please say,” 7. The voice guide will say “Deleted,” and
the numbers of the music players and paired Bluetooth® device from the Blue- then the system will end the device dele-
device tags of corresponding music play- tooth® 2.0 interface. tion process.
ers will be read out in order, starting with
the music player that has been most 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for NOTE
recently connected. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-  If the device deletion process fails for some
Say the number of the music player that nication System) or PICK-UP button (for reason, the voice guide will say “Delete
you want to connect to. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- failed” and then the system will cancel delet-
When the confirmation function is on, the nication System). ing the device.
system will ask you again whether the 2. Say “Setup.”
music player that you want to connect to 3. Say “Pairing Options.”
is correct. Answer “Yes” to continue and 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of To check a paired Bluetooth®
connect to the music player. the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” device
Answer “No,” and the voice guide will Say “Delete.” N00565201036
say “Please say.” Say the number of the 5. After the voice guide says “Please say,”
the numbers of the devices and device You can check a paired Bluetooth® device by
music player that you want to connect to. following the steps below.
tags of corresponding devices will be read
NOTE out in order, starting with the device that
has been most recently connected. After it
 You can connect to a music player at any vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
time by pressing the SPEECH button and
completes reading all pairs, the voice
saying the number, even before all of the guide will say “or all.”
paired numbers and device tags of corre- Say the number of the device that you
nication System).
sponding music players are read out by the want to delete from the system.
2. Say “Setup.”
system.


3. Say “Pairing Options.” 5. The voice guide will say “Please say,” and
4. The voice guide will say “Select one of
NOTE
 You can change the phone to be connected
read out the numbers of the Bluetooth®
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” devices and device tags of corresponding
by pressing and releasing the SPEECH but-
Say “List.” devices in order, starting with the Blue-
ton and then saying “Select phone” while the
5. The voice guide will read out device tags list is being read. tooth® that has been most recently con-
of corresponding devices in order, starting  You can change the music player to be connected.
with the Bluetooth® device that has been nected by pressing and releasing the After all paired device tags have been
5 most recently connected.
6. After the device tags of all paired Blue-
SPEECH button and then saying “Select
music player” while the list is being read.
read, the voice guide will say “Which
device, please?” Say the number of the
tooth® devices have been read, the system device tag you want to change.
will say “End of list, would you like to Changing a device tag
start from the beginning?” N00565301037 NOTE
To hear the list again from the beginning, You can change the device tag of a paired cel-  You can press and release the SPEECH but-
answer “Yes.” lular phone or music player. ton while the list is being read, and immedi-
When you are done, answer “No” to Follow the steps below to change a device ately say the number of the device tag you
return to the main menu. want to change.
tag.

NOTE vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
6. The voice guide will say “New name,
 If you press and release the SPEECH button please.” Say the name you want to regis-
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for ter as a new device tag.
and say “Continue” or “Previous” while the
list is being read, the system will advance or
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- When the confirmation function is on, the
rewind the list. nication System). voice guide will say “<New device tag>.
Say “Continue” to proceed to the device with 2. Say “Setup.” Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.”
the next highest number or “Previous” to 3. Say “Pairing Options.” Answer “No,” you can say the new device
return to the phone with the previous num- 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of tag you want to register again.
ber. the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” 7. The device tag is changed.
 You can change the device tag by pressing Say “Edit.” When the change is complete, the voice
and releasing the SPEECH button and then
guide will say “New name saved” and
saying “Edit” while the list is being read.
then the system will return to the main
menu.


Mute function P.5-255 2. Say “Dial.”
Operating a music player con- Switching between hands-free mode and pri- 3. After the voice guide says “Number
nected via Bluetooth® vate mode P.5-255 please,” say the telephone number.
N00565401155 4. The voice guide will say “Dialing <num-
For the operation of a music player connected NOTE ber recognized>.”
via Bluetooth®, refer to the following sec-  Hands-free calls may not operate correctly The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will then
tions. when you place or receive the call directly make the call.
[For vehicles equipped with the AM/FM

from your cellular phone, instead of using When the confirmation function is on, the
system will confirm the telephone number
5
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
radio/CD player] again. To continue with that number,
Refer to “Listen to Bluetooth Audio” on page answer “Yes.”
7-40.
[For vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi
To make a call To change the telephone number, answer
N00565601098 “No.” The system will say “Number
Multi-Communication System, the Smart- please” then say the telephone number
phone Link Display Audio or the DISPLAY You can make a call in the following 3 ways
again.
AUDIO] using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface:
Refer to the separate owner’s manual.
 By saying a telephone number NOTE
 By using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface’s  In the case of English, the system will recog-
How to make or receive hands- phonebook nise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the
free calls  By redialing a telephone number number “0.”
N00565501097  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface supports num-
You can make or receive hands-free calls bers (0 to 9) and characters (+, # and *).
Making a call by using the telephone
 The maximum supported telephone number
using a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone number length is as follows:
connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. • International telephone number: + and tele-
You can also use the phonebooks in the Blue- You can make a call by saying the telephone
phone numbers (to 18 digits).
number.
tooth® 2.0 interface to make calls without • Except for international telephone number:
dialing telephone numbers. 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for telephone numbers (to 19 digits).
To make a call P.5-253 nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
Send function P.5-255 vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
Receiving calls P.5-255 nication System).

4. If there is only 1 match, the system will
Making a call using a phonebook
proceed to Step 5.
NOTE
 If the name you selected has matching data
You can make calls using the vehicle phone- If there are 2 or more matches, the voice
in the vehicle phonebook but no telephone
book or mobile phonebook of the Bluetooth® guide will say “More than one match was
number is registered under the selected loca-
2.0 interface. found, would you like to call <returned tion, the voice guide will say
name>.” If that person is the one you want “{home/work/mobile/other} not found for
For details on the phonebooks, refer to to call, answer “Yes.” <name>. Would you like to add location or
Answer “No,” the name of the next
5 “Phonebook function” on page 5-255.
matching person will be uttered by the
try again?”
Say “Try again,” and the system will return
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for voice guide. to Step 3.
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- Say “Add location” and you can register an
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for NOTE additional telephone number under the
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- selected location.
 If you say “No” to all names read by the sys-
nication System).  If the name you selected has matching data
tem, the voice guide will say “Name not
in the mobile phonebook but no telephone
2. Say “Call.” found, returning to main menu” and the sys-
tem will return to the main menu. number is registered under the selected loca-
tion, the voice guide will say
NOTE “{home/work/mobile/other} not found for
 If you say “Call” when the vehicle phone- 5. If only 1 telephone number is registered <name>. Would you like to try again?”
book and the mobile phonebook are empty, under the name you just said, the voice Answer “Yes,” and the system will return to
the voice guide will say “The vehicle phone- guide will proceed to Step 6. Step 3.
book is empty. Would you like to add a new If 2 or more telephone numbers are regis- Answer “No,” and the call will be cancelled.
entry now?” Start over again from Step 1.
tered that match the name you just said,
Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide will say
the voice guide will say “Would you like
“Entering the phonebook - new entry menu.”
You can now create data in the vehicle to call <name> at [home], [work], 6. The voice guide will say “Calling <name>
phonebook. [mobile], or [other]?” Select the location <location>” and then the system will dial
Answer “No,” the system will return to the to call. the telephone number.
main menu.
3. After the voice guide says “Name please,”

say the name you want to call, from those
registered in the phonebook.


response to an automated system, press the Pressing the SPEECH button and then saying
NOTE SPEECH button and speak “1 2 3 4 pound “Mute” during a call will turn ON the mute
 When the confirmation function is on, the
send” and the 1234# will be sent via your cel- function and mute the microphone.
system will check if the name and location of
lular phone. Saying “Mute off” in the same way will turn
the receiver are correct. If the name is cor-
rect, answer “Yes.” off the mute function and cancel the mute on
To change the name or location to call, Receiving calls the microphone.
answer “No.” The system will return to Step N00565801045
3.
If an incoming phone call is received while Switching between hands-free 5
the ignition switch or the operation mode is in mode and private mode
Redialing ON or ACC, the audio system will be auto- N00566600014
matically turned on and switched to the The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can switch
You can redial the last number called, based incoming call, even when the audio system between hands-free mode (hands-free calls)
on the history of dialed calls in the paired cel- was originally off. and private mode (calls using cellular phone).
lular phone. The voice guide announcement for the If you press the SPEECH button and say
incoming call will be output from the front “Transfer call” during a hands-free call, you
Use the following procedure to redial. passenger’s seat speaker. can stop the hands-free mode and talk in pri-
If the CD player or radio was playing when vate mode.
the incoming call was received, the audio sys- To return to hands-free mode, press the
tem will mute the sound from the CD player SPEECH button again and say “Transfer
or radio and output only the incoming call. call.”
To receive the call, press the PICK-UP button
nication System).
on the steering wheel control switch.
2. Say “Redial.” Phonebook function
When the call is over, the audio system will
return to its previous state. N00566000018
Send function
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface has 2 types of
N00565700018
Mute function unique phonebooks that are different from the
During a call, press the SPEECH button to N00565900010 phonebook stored in the cellular phone. They
enter voice recognition mode, then say are the vehicle phonebook and the mobile
At any time during a call, you can mute the
“<numbers> SEND” to generate DTMF phonebook.
vehicle microphone.
tones.
For example, if during a call you need to sim-
ulate the pressing of a phone button as a


These phonebooks are used to register tele-  To register a telephone number in
phone numbers and make calls to desired
NOTE
the vehicle phonebook  If the maximum number of entries are
numbers via voice recognition function. N00580500059
already registered, the voice guide will say
You can register a telephone number in the “The phonebook is full. Would you like to
NOTE vehicle phonebook in the following 2 ways: delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to
 Disconnecting the battery cable will not Reading out a telephone number, and select- delete a registered name.
delete information registered in the phone- ing and transferring 1 phonebook entry from If you say “No,” the system will return to the
5 book. the phonebook of the cellular phone. main menu.
5. When the name has been registered, the

 To register by reading out a tele-
Vehicle phonebook voice guide will say “home, work,
phone number
N00566101120
N00580600063
mobile, or other?” Say the location for
This phonebook is used when making calls 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for which you want to register a telephone
with the voice recognition function. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- number.
Up to 32 names can be registered in the vehi- nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
cle phonebook per language. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- NOTE
Also, each entry has 4 locations associated nication System).  When the confirmation function is on, the
with: home, work, mobile and other. You can 2. Say “Phonebook.” voice guide will say “<Location>. Is this cor-
register one telephone number for each loca- rect?” Answer “Yes.”
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
If a telephone number has been registered for
tion. the following: new entry, edit number,
the selected location, the voice guide will say
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or “The current number is <telephone number>,
You can register a desired name as a name for import contact.” Say “New entry.” number please.”
any phonebook entry registered in the vehicle 4. The voice guide will say “Name please.” If you do not want to change the telephone
phonebook. Say your preferred name to register it. number, say “cancel” or the original number
Names and telephone numbers can be to keep it registered.
changed later on.
The vehicle phonebook can be used with all 6. The voice guide will say “Number
paired cellular phones. please.” Say the telephone number to reg-
ister it.

 To select and transfer one phone- 2. Say “Phonebook.”

NOTE 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
 In the case of English, the system will recog- book entry from the phonebook of
the following: new entry, edit number,
nise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the the cellular phone
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
number “0.” N00580700048
import contact.” Say “Import contact.”
You can select 1 phonebook entry from the
4. The voice guide will say “Would you like
7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone phonebook of the cellular phone and register
to import a single entry or all contacts?”
number you have just read, and then reg- it in the vehicle phonebook.
Say “Single entry.”
ister the number. The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will become
5
When the telephone number has been reg- NOTE ready to receive transferred phonebook
istered, the voice guide will say “Number  Transfer is not permitted unless the vehicle is data.
saved. Would you like to add another parked. Before transferring, make sure that
number for this entry?” the vehicle is parked in a safe location.
NOTE
To add another telephone number for a  All or part of data may not be transferred,
 If the maximum number of entries are
new location for the current entry, answer even when the cellular phone supports Blue-
already registered, the voice guide will say
“Yes.” The system will return to location tooth®, depending on the compatibility of “The phonebook is full. Would you like to
selection in Step 5. the device. delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to
Answer “No” to end the registration pro-  The maximum supported telephone number delete a registered name.
cess and return to the main menu. length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of If you say “No,” the system will return to the
20 digits or more will be truncated to the first main menu.
19 digits.
NOTE  If telephone numbers contain characters
 When the confirmation function is on, after other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters 5. After the voice guide says “Ready to
repeating the telephone number you have are deleted before the transfer. receive a contact from the phone. Only a
read, the voice guide will ask “Is this cor-
 For the connection settings on the cellular home, a work, and a mobile number can
rect?” Answer “Yes.”
phone side, refer to the instructions for the be imported,” the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
Answer “No” to return to telephone number
cellular phone.
registration in step 6. face will receive the phonebook data from
the Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone.
nication System).


6. Operate the Bluetooth® compatible cellu- 8. The voice guide will say “Adding  Editing a telephone number
lar phone to set it up so that the phone- <name>.” N00579900053
book entry you want to register in the When the confirmation function is on, the 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
vehicle phonebook can be transferred to system will ask if the name is correct. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
Answer “Yes.” nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
Answer “No,” the voice guide will say vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
“Name please.” Register a different name. nication System).
NOTE
9. The voice guide will say “Numbers 2. Say “Phonebook.”
5  If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog- saved.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
nise the Bluetooth® compatible cellular 10. The voice guide will say “Would you like the following: new entry, edit number,
phone or the connection takes too much to import another contact?” edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
time, the voice guide will say “Import con-
Answer “Yes” if you want to continue import contact”. Say “Edit number.”
tact has timed out” and then the system will
with the registration. You can continue to 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the
cancel the registration. In such case, start
over again from Step 1.
register a new phonebook entry from Step name of the entry you would like to edit,
 Pressing the HANG-UP button or pressing 5. or say list names.” Say the name of the
and holding the SPEECH button will cancel Answer “No,” the system will return to phonebook entry you want to edit.
the registration. the main menu.
NOTE
7. When the reception is complete, the voice  To change the content registered in  Say “List names,” and the names registered
in the phonebook will be read out in order.
guide will say “<Number of telephone the vehicle phonebook
Refer to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to
numbers that had been registered in the N00579800049
the list of registered names” on page 5-259.
import source> numbers have been You can change or delete a name or telephone
imported. What name would you like to number registered in the vehicle phonebook.
use for these numbers?” You can also listen to the list of names regis- 5. The voice guide will say “Home, work,
Say the name you want to register for this tered in the vehicle phonebook. mobile or other?” Select and say the loca-
phonebook entry. tion where the telephone number you
want to change or add is registered.
NOTE
NOTE  The system must have at least one entry.
When the confirmation function is on, the
 If the entered name is already used for other system will check the target name and
phonebook entry or similar to a name used location again. Answer “Yes” if you want
for other phonebook entry, that name cannot to continue with the editing.
be registered.


Answer “No,” the system will return to  Editing a name 6. The voice guide will say “Name please.”
Step 3. N00580100055 Say the new name you want to register.
6. The voice guide will say “Number, 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for 7. The registered name will be changed.
please.” Say the telephone number you vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- When the change is complete, the system
want to register. nication System) or PICK-UP button (for will return to the main menu.
NOTE nication System).  Listening to the list of registered names
2. Say “Phonebook.”
 If the telephone number is already registered
5
N00580200043
in the selected location, the voice guide will 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
say “The current number is <current num- the following: new entry, edit number, vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
ber>. New number, please.” Say a new tele- edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
phone number to change the current number. import contact.” Say “Edit name.” vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
4. The voice guide will say “Please say the nication System).
7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone name of the entry you would like to edit, 2. Say “Phonebook.”
number. or say list names.” Say the name you want 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
When the confirmation function is on, the to edit. the following: new entry, edit number,
system will ask if the number is correct. edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
Answer “Yes.” NOTE import contact.” Say “List names.”
Answer “No,” the system will return to  Say “List names,” and the names registered 4. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will read out the
the Step 3. in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer entries in the phonebook in order.
8. Once the telephone number is registered, to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to the list 5. When the voice guide is done reading the
of registered names” on page 5-259. list, it will say “End of list, would you like
the voice guide will say “Number saved”
and then the system will return to the to start from the beginning?” When you
main menu. 5. The voice guide will say “Changing want to check the list again from the
<name>.” beginning, answer “Yes.”
NOTE When the confirmation function is on, the When you are done, answer “No” to
 If the location where a telephone number system will check if the name is correct. return to the previous or main menu.
was already registered has been overwritten Answer “Yes” if you want to continue
with a new number, the voice guide will say with the editing based on this information.
“Number changed” and then the system will Answer “No,” the system will return to
return to the main menu.
Step 4.


4. The voice guide will say “Please say the 6. The system will ask if you really want to
NOTE name of the entry you would like to delete the selected telephone number(s) to
 You can call, edit or delete a name that is
delete, or say list names.” Say the name of go ahead with the deletion, answer “Yes.”
being read out.
the phonebook entry in which the tele- Answer “No,” the system will cancel
Press the SPEECH button and say “Call” to
call the name, “Edit name” to edit it, or phone number you want to delete is regis- deleting the telephone number(s) and then
“Delete” to delete it. tered. return to Step 4.
The system will beep and then execute your 7. When the telephone number deletion is
NOTE complete, the voice guide will say
5 command.
 If you press the SPEECH button and say  Say “List names,” and the names registered “<name> <location> deleted” and then
“Continue” or “Previous” while the list is in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer the system will return to the main menu.
being read, the system will advance or to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to the list If all locations are deleted, the system will
rewind the list. Say “Continue” to proceed to of registered names” on page 5-259. say “<name> and all locations deleted”
the next entry or “Previous” to return to the and the name will be removed from the
previous entry.
5. If only one telephone number is registered phonebook. If numbers still remain under
in the selected phonebook entry, the voice the entry, the name will retain the other
guide will say “Deleting <name> <loca- associated numbers.
 Deleting a telephone number
N00580300057 tion>.”
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for If multiple telephone numbers are regis-  Erasing the phonebook
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- tered in the selected phonebook entry, the N00580400045
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for voice guide will say “Would you like to You can delete all registered information
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- delete [home], [work], [mobile], [other], from the vehicle phonebook.
nication System). or all?”
2. Say “Phonebook.” Select the location to delete, and the voice 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of guide will say “Deleting <name> <loca- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
the following: new entry, edit number, tion>.” nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
import contact.” Say “Delete.” NOTE nication System).
 To delete the telephone numbers from all 2. Say “Phonebook.”
locations, say “All.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
the following: new entry, edit number,
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
import contact.” Say “Erase all.”


4. For confirmation purposes, the voice The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface automatically
guide will ask “Are you sure you want to
NOTE
converts from text to voice the names regis-  All or part of data may not be transferred,
erase everything from your hands-free tered in the transferred phonebook entries, even when the cellular phone supports Blue-
system phonebook?” Answer “Yes.” and creates names.
Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all tooth®, depending on the compatibility of
the device.
registered information in the phonebook
and return to the main menu.
NOTE  Only a home, a work, and a mobile number
 Only the mobile phonebook transferred from can be imported.
5. The voice guide will say “You are about
to delete everything from your hands-free
the connected cellular phone can be used  The maximum supported telephone number 5
with that cellular phone. length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of
system phonebook. Do you want to con- 20 digits or more will be truncated to the first
 You cannot change the names and telephone
tinue?” Answer “Yes” to continue. numbers in the phonebook entries registered 19 digits.
Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all in the mobile phonebook. You cannot select  If telephone numbers contain characters
registered information in the phonebook and delete specific phonebook entries, either. other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters
and return to the main menu. To change or delete any of the above, change are deleted before the transfer.
6. The voice guide will say “Please wait, the applicable information in the source  For the connection settings on the cellular
erasing the hands-free system phone- phonebook of the cellular phone and then phone side, refer to the instructions for the
book” and then the system will delete all transfer the phonebook again. cellular phone.
data in the phonebook.
To import a devices phonebook 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
When the deletion is complete, the voice
guide will say “Hands-free system phone-
Follow the steps below to transfer to the nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
book erased” and then the system will
mobile phonebook the phonebook stored in vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
return to the main menu.
the cellular phone. nication System).
2. Say “Phonebook.”
Mobile phonebook 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
NOTE
N00566201059 the following: new entry, edit number,
 Transfer should be completed while the vehi-
All entries in the phonebook stored in the cel- cle is parked. Before transferring, make sure edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
lular phone can be transferred in a batch and that the vehicle is parked in a safe location. import contact.” Say “Import contact.”
registered in the mobile phonebook.  The already stored phonebook in the mobile 4. The voice guide will say “Would you like
Up to 7 mobile phonebooks, each containing phonebook is overwritten by the stored to import a single entry or all contacts?”
up to 1,000 names, can be registered. phonebook in the cellular phone. Say “All contacts.”


5. The voice guide will say “Importing the 6. When the transfer is complete, the voice
contact list from the mobile phonebook. guide will say “Import complete” and
CAUTION
 Changes or modifications made to this
This may take several minutes to com- then the system will return to the main
equipment not expressly approved by the
plete. Would you like to continue?” menu.
manufacturer may void the FCC authoriza-
Answer “Yes,” transferring to the mobile tion to operate this equipment.
phonebook the phonebook stored in the
General information
cellular phone will start.
Answer “No,” the system will return to
N00566301119 The term “IC:” before the radio certification
5 the main menu. Model name: MMC or MDGMY10 number only signifies that Industry Canada
FCC ID: CB2MDGMY10 or technical specifications were met.
NT8MDGMY10 The antenna used for this transmitter must not
NOTE
IC: 279B-MDGMY10 or 3043A-MDGMY10 be co-located or operating in conjunction
 The transfer may take some time to complete
depending on the number of contacts. Your Bluetooth® 2.0 interface operates on a with any other antenna or transmitter. End-
radio frequency subject to Federal Communi- users and installers must be provided with
 If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface could not be
cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi- installation instructions and transmitter oper-
connected to the Bluetooth® compatible cel- ating conditions for satisfying RF exposure
lular phone, the voice guide will say “Unable cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada
Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This compliance.
to transfer contact list from phone” and then
device complies with Part 15 of the FCC FCC Notice: This equipment has been tested
the system will return to the main menu.
Rules and RSS-210 of the Industry Canada and found to comply with the limits for a
 If you press the HANG-UP button or press
and hold the SPEECH button during the data Rules. Operation is subject to the following Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of
transfer, the transfer will be cancelled and two conditions: the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
the system will return to the main menu. provide reasonable protection against harmful
 If an error occurs during the data transfer, all  This device may not cause harmful inter- interference in a residential installation.
transfer will be cancelled and the voice guide ference. This equipment generates, use and can radiate
will say “Unable to complete the phonebook  This device must accept any interference radio frequency energy and, if not installed
import” and then the system will return to received, including interference that may and used in accordance with the instructions,
the main menu. cause undesired operation. may cause harmful interference to radio com-
 If there are no contacts in the phonebook, the munications.
voice guide will say “There are no contacts However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
on the connected phone.”
ence will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interfer-
ence to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment

USB input terminal

off and on, the user is encouraged to try to 2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A) in
correct the interference by one or more of the USB input terminal the floor console box.
following measures: N00566701142
You can connect your USB memory device or Type 1

 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. iPod* to play music files stored in the USB
 Increase the separation between the memory device or iPod.
equipment and receiver. This section explains how to connect and
 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a remove a USB memory device or iPod.
circuit different from that to which the See the following section for details on how
Type 2 5
receiver is connected. to play music files.
 Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help. Refer to “Listen to an iPod” on page 7-32.
Refer to “Listen to Audio Files on a USB
ICES Notice: This Class B digital apparatus Device” on page 7-34. 3. Connect a commercially available USB
complies with Canadian ICES-003. Refer to “To play iPod/USB memory device connector cable (C) to the USB memory
tracks via voice operation” on page 7-37. device (B).
Enrollment commands *: “iPod” is a registered trademark of Apple
N00566401136
Inc. in the United States and other countries.
How to connect a USB memory

device
N00566801156
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn

the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi-
tion or put the operation mode in OFF.

USB input terminal

4. Connect the USB connector cable (C) to 4. Connect the connector cable (B) to
the USB input terminal (D).
How to connect an iPod theUSB input terminal (C).
N00566901199
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn

tion or put the operation mode in OFF.
2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A) in
5 the floor console box.
Type 1
CAUTION Type 2 CAUTION

 Keep the lid of the floor console box closed  Keep the lid of the floor console box closed
while driving the vehicle. A lid or the con- while driving the vehicle. A lid or the con-
tents of the floor console box could other- tents of the floor console box could other-
wise cause injuries. wise cause injuries.
3. Connect the connector cable to the iPod.
NOTE NOTE NOTE

 Do not connect the USB memory device to  Use a genuine connector cable from Apple  When closing the floor console box, be care-
the USB input terminal directly. Inc. ful not to trap the connector cable.
The USB memory device may be damaged.
 When closing the floor console box, be care-
ful not to trap the USB connector cable. 5. To remove the connector cable, turn the
ignition switch to the “LOCK” position or
put the operation mode in OFF first and
5. To remove the USB connector cable, turn perform the installation steps in reverse.
tion or put the operation mode in OFF
first and perform the installation steps in
reverse.
USB input terminal

panies”. The websites mentioned above may
Types of connectable devices connect you to websites other than the Mit-
NOTE
and supported file specifica- subishi Motors website.  Do not connect to the USB input terminal
any device (hard disk, card reader, memory
tions http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
reader, etc.) other than the connectable
N00567001083 ucts/index.html devices specified in the previous section.
The device and/or data may be damaged. If
*: “iPod,” “iPod classic,” “iPod nano,” “iPod
Device types any of these devices was connected by mis-
touch,” and “iPhone” are registered trade-
N00567101130
marks of Apple Inc. in the United States and
take, remove it after turning the ignition
switch to the “LOCK” position or putting the
5
Devices of the following types can be con- other countries. operation mode in OFF.
nected.
Model name Condition

NOTE File specifications
 Depending on the type of the USB memory N00567201056
Storage capac- device or other device connected, the con-
USB memory device ity of 256 You can play music files of the following
nected device may not function properly or
Mbytes or more specifications that are saved in a USB mem-
the available functions may be limited.
ory device or other device supporting mass
Digital audio  It is recommended to use an iPod with firm-
Models other than USB ware updated to the latest version. storage class. When you connect your iPod,
player support- playable file specifications depend on the
memory devices and  You can charge your iPod by connecting it to
ing mass stor- connected iPod.
iPods the USB input terminal when the ignition
age class
switch or the operation mode is in ON or
ACC. Item Condition
For these connectable device types, “iPod*,”  Do not keep your USB memory device or MP3, WMA, AAC,
“iPod classic*,” “iPod nano*,” “iPod touch*” iPod in your vehicle. File format
WAV
and “iPhone*,” refer to the following web-  It is recommended that you back up the files
site: in case of data damage. Maximum number of
[For vehicles sold in U.S.A.] levels Level 8
You can access the Mitsubishi Motors North (including the root)
America website. Number of folders 700
[For vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico] Number of files 65,535
You can access the Mitsubishi Motors web-
site. Please read and agree to the “Warning
about Links to the Web Sites of Other Com-

Sun visors
Sun visors Vanity mirror Card holder

N00524601363
Pull the sun visor downward (1) to reduce A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun Cards can be slipped into the holder (B) on
front glare while driving. To reduce side visor. the sun visor.
glare, turn the visor to the side (2). Operating the lid of the vanity mirror will
automatically turn on the mirror light (A).
CAUTION
 If the lid of vanity mirror with light is kept
open for prolonged periods of time, the vehi-
cle’s battery will be discharged.

12 V power outlets
12 V power outlets Type 1 Type 2

N00525001683
Accessories can be operated when the igni- Accessories can be operated in all ignition
CAUTION tion switch or the operation mode is in ON or switch positions or all operation modes.
 Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory ACC.
operating at 12 V and at 120 W or less. Floor console box
When using more than one socket at the
Floor console
same time, make sure the total power con- 5
sumption of the electrical accessories does
not exceed 120 W at 12 V.
 Also be aware that using electronic equip-
ment with the engine off may run the battery
down.
 When the power outlet is not in use, be sure
to close the power outlet cover or replace the
cap. This will prevent the power outlet from
becoming clogged and short circuiting.
Rear
To use a “plug-in” type accessory, open the
cover or remove the cap, and insert the plug
in the power outlet.
NOTE
 Three 12V power outlets can be used simul-
taneously.

HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped)
HomeLink® Wireless Con- WARNING

trol System (if so equipped)  During programming, your garage door
or gate may open or close. Make sure that
N00554301040
people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate that you are programming.
HomeLink® Wireless Control System is a
registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.
5 HomeLink® provides a convenient way to NOTE
replace up to 3 hand-held radio-frequency  Once HomeLink® is programmed, retain the
(RF) transmitters used to activate devices original transmitter for future programming
such as gate operators, garage door openers, procedures (for example, new vehicle pur- 1- HomeLink® button 1
entry door locks, security systems, even home chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the pro-
2- HomeLink® button 2
lighting. Additional HomeLink® information grammed HomeLink® buttons should be
erased for security purposes. Refer to 3- HomeLink® button 3
can be found at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by “Cleaning the programmed information” on
page 5-272.
calling the toll-free HomeLink®-Hotline at 1-
800-355-3515.
 You can program a maximum of 3 devices. Before programming Home-
To change or replace any of the 3 devices
after it has been initially programmed, you Link®
WARNING must first erase the current settings. N00584600029
See “Cleaning the programmed information”  Some garage door openers manufactured
 Do not use HomeLink® with any garage after 1995 have “rolling code protection”.
on page 5-272 or “Reprogramming a single
door opener that lacks safety stop and
HomeLink® button” on page 5-272. To program a garage door opener
reverse features as required by U.S. Fed-
eral Regulations. A garage door opener
equipped with “rolling code protection”;
which cannot detect an object in the path you will need to access the garage door
of a closing garage door and then auto- opener motor to press the motor’s “Learn”
matically stop and reverse, does not meet or “Smart” buttons. For convenience, use
current U.S. Federal Regulations. Using a a ladder and another person to assist you.
garage door opener without these features  It is recommended that a new battery be
increases the risk of serious injury or placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
death.
device being programmed to HomeLink®
for quicker training and accurate trans-
mission of the radio-frequency signal.

2. Position the end of your hand-held trans-
Programming a new Home- mitter (B) 1 to 3 inches (2 to 8 cm) away
NOTE
Link® from the HomeLink® button while keep-
 Some devices may require you to replace this
N00584700020 “Programming a new HomeLink®” step 3
ing the indicator light in view.
with procedures noted in the “Gate operator /
To program HomeLink® to operate a garage Canadian programming” section. If the indi-
door, gate, or entry door opener, home or cator light does not change to rapidly flash-
office lighting, you need to be at the same ing green or continuously lit green after
location as the device. performing these steps, contact HomeLink® 5
at www.homelink.com
1. Press the HomeLink® button that you
would like to program. The indicator light
4. Press the HomeLink® button that was just
(A) will flash orange slowly.
programmed and observe the indicator
light.
• If the indicator light continuously illumi-
nates green, programming is complete
NOTE and your device should operate when the
 Some hand-held transmitters may actually HomeLink® button is pressed and
train better from a distance of 6 to 12 inches released.
(15 to 20 cm). Keep this in mind if you have • If the indicator light rapidly flashes
difficulty with the programming process. green, firmly press, hold for 2 seconds
and release the programmed HomeLink®
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button. Repeat the “press/hold/release”
button while watching the indicator light sequence a second time, and, depending
NOTE (A). Continue pressing the button until the on the brand of the garage door opener
 You do not need to continue holding the indicator light (A) changes from slowly (or other rolling code equipped device),
HomeLink® button. flashing orange to either rapidly flashing repeat this sequence a third time to com-
 If the indicator light does not flash, refer to green (rolling code) or continuously lit plete the programming process. At this
“Cleaning the programmed information” on green (fixed code). Now you may release point if your device operates, program-
page 5-272. the hand-held transmitter button. ming is complete.


• If the device does not operate, continue
NOTE NOTE
with “Programming a new HomeLink®”  In the event that there are still programming  If programming a garage door opener or gate
steps 5 to 7 to complete the program- difficulties or questions, additional Home- operator, it is advised to unplug the device
ming of a rolling code equipped device. during the “cycling” process to prevent pos-
Link® information and programming videos
5. At the garage door opener receiver can be found online at www.homelink.com, sible overheating.
(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by
“Learn” or “Smart” button. This can usu- calling the HomeLink® Hotline. 3. Press and release - every 2 seconds
5 ally be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the motor-head unit
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the
(see the garage door opener manual to HomeLink® indicator light changes from
identify the “Learn” button.)
Gate operator/Canadian pro- slowly flashing orange to either rapidly flash-
6. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or gramming ing green (rolling code) or continuously lit
“Smart” button. (The name and color of N00584800021 green (fixed code). Now you may release the
the button may vary by manufacturer.) hand-held transmitter button.
Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans-
There are typically 30 seconds to initiate Proceed with “Programming a new Home-
mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after
step 7. several seconds of transmission - which may Link®” step 4 to complete.
7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick
hold for 2 seconds and release the pro- up the signal during programming. Similar to Additional steps for program-
grammed HomeLink® button. Repeat the this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators ming a door system with feed-
“press/hold/release” sequence a second are designed to “time-out” in the same man-
time, and, depending on the brand of the ner.
back
N00584900022
garage door opener (or other rolling code The indicator LED on the hand-held transmit-
equipped device), repeat this sequence a ter will go off when the device times out indi- The HomeLink® has the capability of receiv-
third time to complete the programming cating that it has finished transmitting. ing garage door status from compatible
process. If you live in Canada or you are having diffi- garage door opener systems. Check your
HomeLink® should now activate your culties programming a gate operator or garage door opener manual for the available
rolling code equipped device. garage door opener by using the “Program- feature and HomeLink® compatibility. Also
ming” procedures, replace “Programming a for a listing of compatible systems contact
new HomeLink®” step 3 with the following: HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com


3. Once the door has stopped, press and
release the “Learn” or “Smart” button on
the garage door opener (refer to your
garage door opener owner’s manual for
the location of the “Learn” button). Both
the HomeLink® garage door operation
indicators will flash rapidly green upon
successful synchronization with the door
opener (within 5 seconds).
5
1. Within 5 seconds after successfully pro-

Operating HomeLink® The indicators will illuminate/blink in
N00585000020
gramming the garage door opener (refer response to the following conditions:
To operate, simply press and release the pro-
to “Programming a new HomeLink®”
section), both garage door operation indi- grammed HomeLink® button. Activation will : Blinking : Illuminates
cators (A) will flash rapidly green indicat- now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage
ing that the garage door feedback has door opener, gate operator, security system, Garage door opener closing
entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). (orange)
been enabled.
If the indicators do not flash, perform For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of
the device may also be used at any time. Garage door opener closed
steps 2 and 3 while pressing the Home- (green)
Link® button up to the first 10 times after
successful programming. Garage door feedback Out of range
(red)
2. Press and release the programmed Home- N00585200022
Link® button to activate the door. You The HomeLink® has the capability of receiv- Garage door opener opening
(orange)
now have 1 minute in which to complete ing garage door status from compatible
step 3. garage door opener systems. Refer to “Addi- Garage door opener opened
tional steps for programming a door system (green)
with feedback” on page 5-270.
Garage door status is then displayed with Out of range
(red)
indicators (A).


The HomeLink® has the capability of listen- 1. Press and hold the 2 outer HomeLink® NOTE
ing to these messages at a range up to 820.2 buttons for at least 10 seconds. The indi-  If you do not complete the programming of a
feet (250 m) (open line of sight), but range cator will change from continuous yellow new device to the button, it will revert to the
may be reduced by obstacles such as houses to rapidly flashing green. previously stored programming.
or trees. You may have to slow your vehicle 2. Release both buttons. For questions or comments, visit
speed to receive the CLOSED or OPENED www.homelink.com,
message feedback from the garage door NOTE www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by
5 opener. If the unit is out of range before
receiving either the UP or DOWN message
 Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds. calling the HomeLink® Hotline.
from the door opener, both the UP and

3. HomeLink® is now in the train (or learn-
DOWN indicators will flash red followed by
ing) mode and can be programmed at any General information
a continuous lit orange indicator in the direc-
time beginning with “Programming a new N00585600026
tion the door was last moving.
Recall of the door state after initial feedback HomeLink®” step 1. Your HomeLink® system operates on a radio
is possible by simultaneously pressing either frequency subject to Federal Communica-
tions Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles
HomeLink® buttons 1 and 2 or buttons 2 and Reprogramming a single sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules
3 for 2 seconds. The last recorded message HomeLink® button (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device
will be displayed for 3 seconds, again follow- N00585400024 complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
ing the garage door status indication of the
To reprogram a HomeLink® button, complete RSS- 210 of the Industry Canada Rules.
figure above.
the following. Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions.
Clearing the programmed 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
 This device may not cause harmful inter-
information button. Do not release the button.
ference.
N00585300023 2. The indicator light will begin to slowly
 This device must accept any interference
To erase programming from the 3 buttons flash orange after 20 seconds. The Home-
that may be received, including interfer-
(individual buttons cannot be erased but can Link® button can be released at this point. ence that may cause undesired operation.
be “reprogrammed” as outlined below), fol- Proceed with “Programming a new
low the steps noted: HomeLink®” step 2.

Interior lights
CAUTION Interior lights Dome light (front)/Reading

 The transmitter has been tested and complies N00525301660 lights
with FCC and IC rules. N00525401528
Changes or modifications not expressly NOTE
approved by the party responsible for com-  Be aware that leaving the light illuminated
pliance could void the user’s authority to Dome light (front)
with the engine off may run the battery
operate the device. down.
Never leave the vehicle without checking 5
This equipment complies with FCC radiation that the light is off.
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. End Users must follow the spe-
cific operating instructions for satisfying RF
exposure compliance. This transmitter must
be at least 12 inches (20 cm) from the user
and must not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or trans-
mitter.
The term “IC:” before the certification/regis- 1- (DOOR)
tration number only signifies that Industry When any of the doors or the liftgate is
Canada technical specifications were met. opened, the dome light illuminates; when
any of them are closed, the dome light
1- Cargo room light  P.5-275 goes off after approximately 30 seconds.
2- Dome light (rear)  P.5-274 However, the light goes off immediately
3- Dome light (front)/Reading lights if:
 P.5-273  The doors and the liftgate are closed
4- Downlight  P.5-220 while the ignition switch is in the
5- Front foot lights  P.5-275 “ON” position or the operation mode
is in ON.
 The driver’s door is closed while the
lock knob is in the lock position, after
all the other doors are closed.

Interior lights
 The doors and the liftgate are closed Reading lights 1- (ON)
and the power door lock function is N00537601165 The dome light illuminates regardless of
used to lock the doors.
Regardless of the dome light switch position, any door or the liftgate being opened or
 The keyless entry system remote con-
when you press the lens (A), the light on the closed.
trol transmitter is used to lock the
side that is pressed illuminates; when you 2- ()
doors.
press the lens (A) again, the light goes out. When any of the doors or the liftgate is
 In vehicles equipped with the
opened, the dome light illuminates;
F.A.S.T.-key, the doors and the lift-
5 gate are locked using the F.A.S.T.-
when any of them are closed, the dome
light goes off after approximately 30 sec-
key.
onds. However, the light goes off imme-
diately if:
NOTE  The door and the liftgate are closed
 When the engine is started using the key while the ignition switch is in the
while the doors and liftgate are closed, if you “ON” position or the operation mode
remove the key, the dome light will illumi-
is in ON.
nate for approximately 30 seconds then go
 The driver’s door is closed while the
off.
lock knob is in the lock position,
 When the engine is started using the
F.A.S.T.-key while the doors and liftgate are after all the other doors are closed.
closed, if the operation mode is put in OFF,  The door and the liftgate are closed
the dome light will illuminate for approxi- and the power door lock function is
mately 30 seconds and then go off.
Dome light (rear) used to lock the doors.
N00525801333
 The time until the light goes off can be  The keyless entry system remote
adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi control transmitter is used to lock the
Motors dealer for details. For vehicles doors.
equipped with the Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-  In vehicles equipped with the
nication System, adjustments can be made F.A.S.T.-key, the doors and the lift-
using screen operations. For details, refer to
gate are locked using the F.A.S.T.-
the separate owner’s manual.
key.
2- (OFF)
The dome light stays off regardless of any
door or the liftgate being opened or closed.

Interior lights
NOTE Cargo room light Front foot lights

 When the engine is started using the key N00526101186 N00536901057
while the doors and liftgate are closed, if you The front foot lights (A) come on when the
remove the key, the dome light will illumi- front door is opened and go off when the door
nate for approximately 30 seconds then go is closed.
off.
 When the engine is started using the
F.A.S.T.-key while the doors and liftgate are
closed, if the operation mode is put in OFF,
5
the dome light will illuminate for approxi-
mately 30 seconds and then go off.
 When the dome light switch is in the “ON”
position, the light will not go off, even when
all the doors and the liftgate are closed.
 The time until the light goes off can be 1- (ON)
adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi The cargo room light illuminates regard-
Motors dealer for details. For vehicles less of the liftgate being opened or closed.
equipped with the Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- 2- ()
nication System, adjustments can be made
When the liftgate is opened, the cargo
using screen operations. For details, refer to
room light illuminates; when it is closed, Interior light* auto-cutout
the separate owner’s manual.
it goes out. function
3- (OFF) 3- (OFF) N00526301494
The dome light stays off regardless of any The cargo room light stays out regardless *: Dome light (front)/Reading lights, dome
door or the liftgate being opened or closed. of the liftgate being opened or closed. light (rear) and cargo room light
 If interior lights are left on with the igni-

tion switch in the “LOCK” position or the
operation mode in OFF, the lights go off
automatically after approximately 30 min-
utes.

Storage spaces
 The lights come on again if the ignition
switch or the engine switch is operated, if
CAUTION Glove compartment
 Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while N00551501298
any door or liftgate is opened or closed, or
driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a
if the keyless entry or F.A.S.T.-key is WARNING
storage space could otherwise cause injuries
operated. during a sudden stop.  An open glove compartment door can
cause a serious injury or death to the front
NOTE passenger in an accident, even if the pas-
5  The interior light auto-cutout function can be NOTE senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always
 Do not leave valuables in any storage space keep the glove compartment door closed
deactivated. The time until the lights auto-
matically go off can be adjusted. See your when leaving the vehicle. when driving.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for
details. To open, pull the lever (A).
For vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi
Multi-Communication System, adjustments
can be made using screen operations. For
details, refer to the separate owner’s manual.
Storage spaces
N00526401567
CAUTION
 Never leave lighters, carbonated drink cans, 1- Luggage floor box
or spectacles in the cabin when parking the 2- Floor console box
vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin will 3- Glove compartment
become extremely hot, so lighters and other 4- Sunglasses holder (if so equipped) NOTE
flammable items may catch fire and  When the lights are illuminated with the
unopened drink cans (including beer cans)
light switch in the “ ”, “ ”or “AUTO”
may rupture. The heat may also deform or
position (vehicles with automatic light con-
crack plastic spectacle lenses and other spec-
trol), the glove compartment light illumi-
tacle parts that are made of plastic.
nates.

Storage spaces
Card holder Floor console box NOTE

N00551601286  When the lights are illuminated with the
There is a card holder on the inside of the To open the console box, lift the release lever light switch in the “ ”, “ ”, or “AUTO”
glove compartment. (A) and raise the lid. position (vehicles with automatic light con-
The floor console box can also be used as an trol), the floor console box light illuminates.
arm rest.  The USB input terminal is located in the
floor console box. For details, refer to “USB
input terminal” on page 5-263. 5
Luggage floor box

N00552301075
There is a luggage floor box under the lug-

gage floor board.
To use the box, raise the luggage floor board.
5 persons
B- Tissue holder
C- Pen holder 1- Luggage floor box (front)
D- Tray 2- Luggage floor box (center)
3- Luggage floor box (rear)

Storage spaces
The luggage floor board can be folded at the 2. Insert your hand in the gap (B) and fold  To access the luggage floor box
indicated positions (A). the board as illustrated.
(center)
1. Raise the luggage floor board (rear) by
pulling up on the strap (D).

4- Luggage floor board (front)
5- Luggage floor board (rear)
3. To access the center of the luggage floor
box (front), insert your hand in the gap 2. Insert your hand in the gap (E) and raise
(C) and raise the board as illustrated. the board as illustrated.
 To access the luggage floor box
(front)
1. Fold the second seatback forward.
Refer to “Folding the second row seats”
on page 4-13.

Cup holders
7 persons CAUTION Cup holders

 Do not use for storing objects heavier than N00527301488
typical sunglasses.
The cup holder is designed for holding cups
There is risk that the holder lid will open
accidentally, resulting in an injury due to
or drink-cans securely in its holes.
falling objects.
For the front seat
5
NOTE The cup holder is located in front of the floor
 Some types of sunglasses cannot fit snugly in console.
the holder. To use the cup holder, push the lid.
Before storing, check the shape to make sure
they fit.
Sunglasses holder (if so equipped)

N00502601086
To open, push the lid.

Bottle holders
For the second row seat For the third row seat Bottle holders
N00537001228 N00532401041 N00527301420
This cup holder is located in the second row The cup holder is located at the right side of
seat arm rest. the third row seat. CAUTION
Pull the arm rest down to use the cup holder.  Drink beverages while driving your vehicle
is distracting and can cause an accident.
 Vibration and shaking while driving may
5 cause beverages to spill. Be very careful, as
spilling hot beverages could cause burns.
There are bottle holders located on both sides

of front and rear doors.
NOTE
 Do not store cup or drink can in the bottle
holder.
 Make sure all lids are tightly closed when
storing beverages that are in plastic bottles,
etc.

NOTE To use To change position

 Some beverages may not be stored, depend-
ing on the size and shape of the plastic bot- 1. Pull out the spring-loaded cover and insert There are 2 installation holes (B) for the
tles, etc. it in the mounting grooves (A) on both cargo area cover.
sides.
Cargo area cover (if so
equipped) 5
N00528301179
WARNING
 For vehicles equipped with third row seat,
when the third row seat is in use, always
remove the cargo area cover to avoid seri-
ous injury or death at an accident.
1. Move one of the sliders (C) toward the

inside of the vehicle, and fit the protrud-
ing portion (D) into the installation hole
that is to be used. Move the opposite
2. Remove the cover from the mounting slider in the same fashion.
grooves, and the cover will be rolled back
into the retracted position.
NOTE
 Do not place anything on the cargo area
cover.


2. After changing the position, gently shake
the entire cargo area cover to make sure it
To remove To store (if so equipped)
is securely retained. 1. Roll back the cargo area cover. The cover can be fitted at the indicated posi-
2. Move one of the sliders (C) toward the tion when not in use.
NOTE inside of the vehicle and lift it to remove Raise the luggage floor board and store the
 If the second row seat touches the cargo area the cargo area cover. cover.
cover, move the cargo area cover rearward.
The cargo area cover could be damaged if it
5 supports the seatback of the second row
seats.
To refit NOTE
 On vehicles with premium sound system,
To refit the cargo area cover, follow the you can not use this storing position.
removal steps in reverse. Gently shake the
entire cargo area cover after fitting it to make
sure it is securely retained.

Assist grips
Assist grips Coat hooks Luggage hooks

N00559001084 N00553601163 N00528501269
The assist grips (located above the doors on There is a coat hook on the second row seat There are hooks on the sides of the luggage
the headliner) are not designed to support assist grip. area for use in securing luggage.
body weight. They are intended for use only
while seated in the vehicle.
5
WARNING CAUTION
 Do not put a hanger or any heavy or  Do not load the luggage higher than the top
CAUTION pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur- of the seatback.
 Do not use the assist grips when getting into tain airbag was activated, any such item Be sure that luggage is firmly secured.
or out of the vehicle. The assist grips could could be propelled away with great force Restricted rear vision or flying objects enter-
detach causing you to fall. and could prevent the curtain airbag from ing the passenger compartment during sud-
inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly den braking could result in a serious
on the coat hook (without using a hanger). accident.
Make sure there are no heavy or sharp
objects in the pockets of clothes that you
hang on the coat hook.

Driving safety
Driving precaution ...........................................................................6-2

Fuel economy ...................................................................................6-2
Driving, alcohol and drugs ..............................................................6-2
Floor mat ..........................................................................................6-3
Vehicle preparation before driving ..................................................6-4 6
Safe driving techniques ....................................................................6-4
Driving during cold weather ............................................................6-5
Braking ............................................................................................6-5
Parking .............................................................................................6-6
Loading information ........................................................................6-6
Cargo loads ....................................................................................6-10
Trailer towing ................................................................................6-11
Driving precaution
to perform satisfactorily in off-road condi-  Keep your tires inflated to the recom-
Driving precaution tions. mended pressures.
N00629301092
Always drive safely and steer the vehicle  When driving a 4-wheel drive vehicle on
carefully. Avoid operating the vehicle in a highways or dry improved roads, set the
WARNING manner that might require sharp turns or drive mode to “4WD ECO” or “4WD
 Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of AUTO” (Electronically controlled 4WD),
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
Avoid abrupt maneuvers and excessive
this type, failure to operate this vehicle cor- or “AWC ECO” or “NORMAL” (S-
speed. Always buckle up. rectly can result in loss of control or vehicle AWC).
rollover.  For freeway driving, maintain a speed of
6 Your vehicle has been designed for both nor-
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig- approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when
nificantly more likely to die than a person traffic, roadway and weather conditions
mal and occasional off-road use. However,
wearing a seat belt. Before starting the vehi- safely permit.
avoid driving the vehicle through areas where
cle, always make certain that you and all your  Keep your air filter clean and your vehicle
the tires may get stuck in deep sand or mud as
passengers are properly wearing their seat lubricated according to the recommenda-
your vehicle is designed primarily for use on
belts (with children in the rear seat, in appro- tions in this manual.
pavement, unlike a conventional off-road
priate restraints).  Always keep your vehicle well main-
vehicle.
tained. A poorly maintained engine
Keep in mind that 2-wheel drive vehicles are
wastes fuel and costs money.
less capable than 4-wheel drive vehicles for Fuel economy  Never overload your vehicle.
driving on muddy, slippery, wet or snow-cov- N00628801191
ered roads. Fuel economy is dependent on many factors.

Your personal driving habits can have a sig- Driving, alcohol and drugs
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance
nificant effect on your fuel consumption. N00628900049
and a narrower track, which enables them to
Several recommendations for achieving the Drunk driving is one of the most frequent
perform in a wide variety of off-road situa-
greatest fuel economy are listed below. causes of accidents.
tions. Because of the higher ground clear-
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired
ance, these vehicles have a higher center of  Whenever accelerating from a stop, even with blood alcohol levels far below the
gravity, which makes them handle differently always accelerate slowly and smoothly. legal minimum. If you have been drinking,
than ordinary vehicles when driving on pave-  When parked for even a short period, do don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
ment. They are not designed to maneuver or not idle the engine. Shut it off. drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or use
corner at the same speed on pavement as con-  Plan your trips to avoid unnecessary public transportation. Drinking coffee or tak-
ventional 2-wheel drive passenger cars any stops. ing a cold shower will not make you sober.
more than low-slung sports cars are designed
6-2 Driving safety

Floor mat
Similarly, prescription and nonprescription
drugs affect your alertness, perception and
To install the floor mat WARNING
N00628700050  If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not
reaction time. Consult with your doctor or
1. Place the floor mat to fit the shape of the properly installed, it can interfere with the
pharmacist before driving while under the
floorboard. operation of the pedals. Interference with
influence of any of these medications. the pedals can cause unintended accelera-
2. Align the floor mat with the installation
holes over the retaining clips. tion and/or increased stopping distances
WARNING 3. Secure the floor mat with retaining clips. resulting in a crash and injury. Always
 NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE. make sure the floor mat does not interfere
Your perceptions are less accurate, your with the accelerator or brake pedal.
reflexes are slower and your judgment is  Always use the retaining clip on the
driver’s floorboard to secure the floor
6
impaired.
mat.
 Always install the mat with the correct
side facing down.
Floor mat  Never install a second mat over or under
N00628600033 an existing floor mat.
The original equipment floor mat provided  Do not use a floor mat designed for
with your vehicle was specifically designed another model vehicle even if it is a Mit-
for your vehicle. subishi genuine floor mat.
Always properly position the floor mat and  Before driving, be sure to check the fol-
lowing:
assure it does not interfere with operation of NOTE
the pedals. Always use the retaining clip on • Periodically check that the floor mat is
 The shape of the mat and the number of
properly secured with the retaining clips.
the driver’s floorboard to secure the floor retaining clips may vary depending on the
If you remove the floor mat while clean-
mat. When used, this clip will help prevent vehicle model.
ing the inside of your vehicle or for any
the floor mat from moving forward and possi- other reason, always check the condition
bly interfering with the operation of the ped- of the floor mat after it has been rein-
als. To prevent the floor mat from moving stalled.
forward and possibly interfering with the • While the vehicle is stopped with the
operation of the pedals, Mitsubishi genuine engine off, check that the floor mat is not
floor mats are recommended. interfering with the pedals by depressing
the pedals fully.
Driving safety 6-3

Vehicle preparation before driving

 Move the driver’s seat as far backward as Replace your tires before they are heavily
possible, while keeping good visibility, worn out.
and good control of the steering wheel, As your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres-
brakes, accelerator, and controls. Check sure monitoring system, there is a risk of
the instrument panel indicators and multi- damage to the tire inflation pressure sensors
information display for any possible prob- when the tire is replaced on the rim. Tire
lem. replacement should, only, be performed by an
 Similarly, the front passenger seat should authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
also be moved as far back as possible.
6  Make sure that infants and small children
Lights
are properly restrained in accordance with
all laws and regulations.
Have someone watch while you turn all the
Vehicle preparation before exterior lights on and off. Also check the turn
Defrosters signal indicators and high-beam indicators on
driving
the instrument panel.
N00629001709
Check these by selecting the defroster mode,
For a safer and more enjoyable trip, always and set the blower switch on high. You should
check for the following: Fluid leaks
be able to feel the air blowing against the
windshield.
Check the ground under the vehicle after
Seat belts and seats Refer to “Defrosting or defogging (wind-
shield, door windows)” on page 7-12 parking overnight, for fuel, water, oil, or
 Before starting the vehicle, make certain other leaks. Make sure all the fluid levels are
that you and all passengers are seated and correct. Also, if you can smell fuel, you need
wearing their seat belts properly (with
Tires to find out why immediately and have it
children in the rear seat, in appropriate fixed.
restraints), and that all the doors and the Check all the tires for heavy tread wear or
uneven wear patterns. Look for stones, nails,
liftgate are locked.
glass, or other objects stuck in the tread. Look
Safe driving techniques
N00629201134
for any tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check
the wheel nuts for tightness, and the tires Even this vehicle’s safety equipment, and
(including spare tire) for proper pressure. your safest driving, cannot guarantee that you
can avoid an accident or injury. However, if
6-4 Driving safety

Driving during cold weather

you give extra attention to the following Before driving the vehicle, check to see if

areas, you can better protect yourself and the engine runs at the proper speed and if
WARNING
 Never open the radiator cap when the
your passengers: the headlights are as bright as normally.
radiator is hot. You could be seriously
Charge or replace the battery if necessary.
 Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic, burned.
During extreme cold weather, it is possi-
road and weather conditions. Leave plenty ble that a very low battery could freeze.
of stopping distance between your vehicle
Braking

and the vehicle ahead. WARNING

 Before changing lanes, check your mir-  The battery gives off explosive hydrogen N00629501528
rors, blind spots, and use your turn-signal

light.
gas. Any spark or flame can cause the bat-
tery to explode, which could cause serious
All the parts of the brake system are critical 6
to safety. Have the vehicle serviced by an
 While driving, watch the behavior of injury or death. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
other drivers, bicyclists, and pedestrians. Always wear protective clothes and a face repair facility of your choice at regular inter-
 Always obey applicable laws and regula- mask when working with your battery, or
vals according to the “WARRANTY AND
tions. Be a polite and alert driver. Always let a skilled mechanic do it.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
leave room for unexpected events, such as
sudden braking.  Warm the engine sufficiently. After start-
 If you plan to drive in another country, ing the engine, allow a short warm-up When brakes are wet
obey their vehicle registration laws and time to distribute oil to all cylinders. Then
make sure you will be able to get the right drive your vehicle slowly. Check the brake system while driving at a
fuel. Stay at low speeds at first so that the low speed immediately after starting, espe-
transaxle, transfer case and rear axle oil cially when the brakes are wet, to confirm
have time to spread to all lubrication they work normally.
Driving during cold weather points. A film of water can be formed on the brake
N00629400445
 Check the engine antifreeze. discs and prevent normal braking after driv-
 Check the battery. At the same time, ing in heavy rain or through large puddles, or
If there is not enough coolant because of a
check the terminals and wiring. During after the vehicle is washed. If this occurs, dry
leak or from engine overheating, add Mit-
extremely cold weather, the battery will the brakes out by driving slowly while lightly
subishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life
not be as strong. Also, the battery power depressing the brake pedal.
Coolant Premium or equivalent.
level may drop because more power is
Please read this section in conjunction
used for cold starting and driving.
with the “Engine coolant” on page 9-8.
Driving safety 6-5

Parking
When parking on a hill, it is important to set
When driving in cold weather the parking brake before moving the selector
WARNING
 Do not park your vehicle in areas where
lever to the “P” (PARK) position. This pre-
On snowy roads, ice can form on the braking combustible materials such as dry grass or
vents loading the parking brake against the
leaves can come in contact with a hot
system, making the brakes less effective. transaxle. When this happens, it is difficult to exhaust, since a fire could occur.
While driving in such conditions, pay close move the selector lever out of the “P”
attention to surrounding vehicles and to the (PARK) position.
condition of the road surface. From time to
time, lightly depress the brake pedal and When leaving the vehicle
check how effective the brakes are. Parking with the engine run-
6 ning Always carry the key and lock all doors and
the liftgate when leaving the vehicle unat-
When driving downhill tended.
Never leave the engine running while you
take a short nap or rest. Also, never leave the Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit
It is important to take advantage of the engine area.
engine running in a closed or poorly venti-
braking by downshifting while driving on
lated place.
steep downhill roads in order to prevent the
brakes from overheating. Do not keep the steering wheel
WARNING fully turned for a long time
 Leaving the engine running risks injury or
Parking death from accidentally moving the selec-
Move effort could be required to turn the
N00629601385 tor lever or the accumulation of toxic
exhaust fumes in the passenger compart- steering wheel.
ment. Refer to “Electric power steering system
Parking on a hill (EPS)” on page 5-99.

Where you park Loading information
downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill. N00629901434
If necessary, apply chocks to the wheels. Your front bumper can be damaged if you It is very important to know how much
Be sure that the parking brake is firmly set scrape it over curbs or parking stop blocks. weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is
when parked and that the selector lever is in Be careful when traveling up or down steep called the vehicle capacity weight and
the “P” (PARK) position. slopes where your bumper can scrape the includes the weight of all occupants, cargo
road. (including the roof load), non-factory-
6-6 Driving safety

Loading information
installed options, and the tongue weight of  Curb weight: the weight of a motor vehi- *:150 lbs (68 kg) is the weight of one per-
the trailer, if any, being towed. The tire and cle with standard equipment including the son as defined by U.S.A. and Canadian
loading information placard located on the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and cool- regulations.
driver’s door sill of your vehicle will show ant.
how much weight it may properly carry.  Accessory weight: the combined weight
(in excess of those standard items which
may be replaced) of automatic transaxle, Tire and loading information
WARNING
 Never overload your vehicle. Overloading
power steering, power brakes, power win- placard
can damage your vehicle, adversely affect dows, power seats, radio, and heater, to N00630101407
vehicle performance, including handling the extent that these items are available as The tire and loading information placard is 6
and braking, cause tire failure, and result factory- installed equipment (whether located on the inside sill of the driver’s door.
in an accident. installed or not).
 Vehicle capacity weight: the rated cargo
It is important to familiarize yourself with the and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg)
following terms before loading your vehicle: *times the vehicle’s designated seating
capacity.
 Vehicle maximum load on the tire: load  Production options weight: the combined
on an individual tire that is determined by weight of those installed regular produc-
distributing to each axle its share of the tion options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kg)
maximum loaded vehicle weight and in excess of those standard items which
dividing by two. they replace, not previously considered in
 Vehicle normal load on the tire: load on an curb weight or accessory weight, includ-
individual tire that is determined by dis- ing heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof
tributing to each axle its share of the curb rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim. This placard shows the maximum number of
weight, accessory weight, and normal  Normal occupant weight: 150 lbs (68 kg) occupants permitted to ride in your vehicle as
occupant weight and dividing by two. *times the number of specified occupants well as “the combined weight of occupants
 Maximum loaded vehicle weight: the sum (3 in the case of your vehicle) and cargo” (A), which is called the vehicle
of -  Occupant distribution: Occupant distribu- capacity weight. The weight of any non-fac-
(a) Curb weight; tion within the passenger compartment (In tory installed options, as well as the tongue
(b) Accessory weight; your vehicle the distribution is 2 in front, weight of a trailer being towed and roof load
(c) Vehicle capacity weight; and 1 in second row seat) is included in the definition of “cargo” when
(d) Production options weight. determining the vehicle capacity weight. This
Driving safety 6-7

Loading information
placard also tells you the size and recom- 5. Determine the combined weight
mended inflation pressure for the original
Steps for Determining Correct
of luggage and cargo being loaded
equipment tires on your vehicle. For more Load Limit
on the vehicle. That weight may
information, refer to “Tires” on page 9-15. N00630201222
1. Locate the statement “The com- not safely exceed the available
Type 1 bined weight of occupants and cargo and luggage load capacity
cargo should never exceed XXX calculated in Step 4.
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
placard. trailer, load from your trailer will
6 2. Determine the combined weight be transferred to your vehicle.
of the driver and passengers that Consult this manual to determine
will be riding in your vehicle. how this reduces the available
3. Subtract the combined weight of cargo and luggage load capacity
the driver and passengers from of your vehicle.
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
Type 2
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For exam-
ple, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lbs. passengers in your vehi-
cle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650
lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650
lbs.)
6-8 Driving safety

Loading information
NOTE
 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configura-
tions and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your
vehicle.
 For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
 Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information
on GAWR’s, vehicle loading and trailer towing, see the “Specifications” section of this manual.
Driving safety 6-9

Cargo loads
Cargo loads WARNING WARNING

N00629700435  To reduce the risk of serious injury or  Make sure that the weight of luggage and
death, the combined weights of the driver, the roof carrier do not exceed the maxi-
passengers and cargo and must never mum roof load, 110 lb (50 kg). If the maxi-
Cargo load precautions exceed the vehicle capacity weight. mum roof load is exceeded, this could
N00630301092
 Exceeding the vehicle capacity weight will cause damage to the vehicle or result in an
To determine the cargo load capacity for your adversely affect vehicle performance, accident.
vehicle, subtract the weight of all vehicle including handling and braking, and may  The total weight of all occupants and lug-
occupants from the vehicle capacity weight. cause an accident. gage, including your roof load, must not
6 For additional information, if needed, refer to  Do not load cargo or luggage higher than exceed the vehicle capacity weight. For
more information, refer to “Tire and load-
“Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit” the top of the seatback. Be sure that your
cargo or luggage cannot move when your ing information placard” on page 11-3
on page 6-8.
vehicle is in motion.  Roof load is determined by adding the
DO NOT USE the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
Having either the rear view blocked, or weight of the roof carrier and the weight
ing and Gross Axle Weight Rating numbers your cargo being thrown inside the cabin of the luggage placed on the roof carrier.
listed on the safety certification label located if you suddenly have to brake can cause a  For additional information, refer to
on the inside sill of the driver’s door as the serious accident or injury or death. “Maximum roof load” on page 11-5.
guide for passengers and/or cargo weight.  Put cargo or luggage in the cargo area of
(Except for Vehicles for Mexico) your vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly. CAUTION
 Do not load luggage directly onto the roof.
Use a roof carrier that properly fits your
Loading cargo on the roof vehicle.
N00630401123 For installation, refer to the instruction man-
ual provided with the roof carrier.
WARNING  Place the luggage on the carrier so that its
 Weight placed on the roof of the vehicle weight is distributed evenly with the heaviest
will raise the vehicle’s center of gravity items on the bottom. Do not load items that
and adversely affect its handling charac- are wider than the roof carrier.
teristics. As a result, driving errors or
emergency maneuvers could lead to a loss
of control and result in an accident. Drive
slowly and avoid excessive maneuvers
such as sudden braking or quick turning.
6-10 Driving safety

Trailer towing
CAUTION Trailer towing

 Before driving and after traveling a short dis- N00629801361
tance, always check the load to make sure it
Towing a trailer will adversely affect your
is securely fastened to the roof carrier.
Stop the vehicle periodically and check that
vehicle’s handling, performance, braking,
the load remains secure. If the load is not durability and driving economy (fuel con-
secure, it could fall from the vehicle and sumption, etc.).
damage your vehicle, another vehicle or cre- If you do tow a trailer with this vehicle, be
ate a road hazard. sure to use proper equipment and cautious
steering and braking for safe driving. 6
NOTE Section CAUTION
 To prevent wind noise or reduction in gas
 Do not lose control of your vehicle when
mileage, remove the roof carrier when not in
towing a trailer.
use.
• Always use proper equipment.
 Before using an automatic car wash, check
• Always drive carefully
with the attendant to determine if the roof
carrier should be removed.  Damage to your vehicle caused by improper
equipment or driving is not covered by your
warranty.
Roof carrier mounting bracket *: Front of the vehicle

cover (if so equipped)
N00630601112
To install the covers

When installing the roof carrier, use the pro-
vided brackets.
Install the covers by performing the removal
The brackets are located under each cover.
step in reverse.
To remove the covers

1. Slide each cover (A) toward the front of
the vehicle.
2. Lift the front edge of the cover (A).
Driving safety 6-11
Trailer towing
Weight limits Maximum trailer weight Tongue weight

Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight, The tongue weight of any trailer is important
Recommendations for towing up to this limit
maximum trailer weight (A), maximum because it affects the vehicle capacity weight.
are as follows.
tongue weight (B) and Gross Axle Weight The vehicle capacity weight includes any
Rating (GAWR). cargo you may carry, and the people who will
Models Maximum trailer weight
be riding in the vehicle. If you will tow a
With brake 1,500 lbs. (680 trailer, you must include the tongue weight of
kg) the trailer in your calculation of the vehicle
2.4 liter models
6 Without brake 1,250 lbs. capacity weight. For more information
(567 kg) regarding vehicle capacity weight, refer to
With brake 3,500 lbs. “Tire and loading information placard” on
(1,588 kg) page 6-7.
3.0 liter models Do not exceed the maximum tongue weight
Without brake 1,400 lbs.
(635 kg) for your vehicle.
Models Maximum tongue weight

With brake 150 lbs. (68
kg)
Vehicle capacity weight 2.4 liter models
Without brake 125 lbs. (57
kg)
The vehicle capacity weight is printed on the
With brake 350 lbs. (159
tire and loading information placard as “com-
kg)
bined weight of occupants and cargo”. 3.0 liter models
Without brake 140 lbs. (64
The weight includes the weight of all occu-
kg)
pants and the total weight it can carry.
For more information, refer to “Tire and load-
ing information placard” on page 6-7. After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the
trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see
if the weights are proper.
Keep the trailer tongue load at 10% of the
loaded trailer weight for dead weight hitches.
6-12 Driving safety

Trailer towing
Tongue loads can be adjusted by proper dis-
tribution of the load in the trailer. This can be
NOTE Maintenance when trailer tow-
checked by separately weighing the loaded  Mitsubishi Motors recommends that sway ing
control be used whenever you are towing, to
trailer and then the tongue.
improve towing stability.
For further information, please contact your Your vehicle will need service more often
Gross axle weight rating (GAWR) authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. when you’re towing a trailer. Refer to “WAR-
RANTY AND MAINTENANCE MAN-
UAL”. Especially important in trailer
The GAWRs are printed on the certification
Safety chains operation are automatic transaxle fluid,
label which is riveted on the door sill on the
driver’s side.
engine oil, rear axle oil, belt, cooling system 6
and brake system. Each of these is covered in
Refer to “Vehicle labeling” on page 11-2. A safety chain must always be used between this manual.
the towing vehicle and the trailer. Leave suf- For details, please refer to the “Vehicle care
Trailer hitches ficient slack in the chain for turns. The chain and maintenance” section.
should cross under the trailer tongue to pre- Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts
vent the tongue from dropping to the ground and bolts are tight.
Choose a proper hitch and ball, and make in case it becomes damaged or separated.
sure it is installed at a height that is compati- For correct safety chain procedures, consult
ble with the trailer. your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Trailer brakes
Use a good equalizing hitch which uniformly
distributes the trailer tongue load throughout
the frame. CAUTION Mitsubishi Motors recommends that any
 Never tow a trailer without using a safety trailer having a total weight of 1,250 lbs (567
chain securely attached to both the trailer kg) or more (2400 models), 1,400 lbs (635
WARNING and the vehicle. If the coupling unit or hitch kg) or more (3000 models) be equipped with
 If you make any holes in the body of your ball experiences a problem, the trailer may its own electric or surge-type brakes.
vehicle for installing a trailer hitch, be separate from your vehicle.
sure to seal the holes later when you If you choose electric brakes, be sure they are
remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, electrically actuated. Do not attempt to tap
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your into your vehicle’s hydraulic system. No mat-
exhaust can enter your vehicle. Refer to ter how successful it may seem, any attempt
“Exhaust system” on page 9-24.
to attach trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic system will lower braking effec-
tiveness and create a potential hazard.
Driving safety 6-13

Trailer towing
yourself with the feel of handling and braking
Trailer lights Operating hints with the added weight of the trailer. Always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving
Trailer lights and equipment must comply is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
with federal, state, and local regulations.
WARNING
responsive as your vehicle is without a trailer.
 If you have a rear window open and you
Check with your local recreational vehicle
tow a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
dealer for the requirements in your area, and
use only equipment designed for your vehi-
monoxide gas which you cannot see or Vehicle preparation
smell could come into your vehicle. It can
cle. cause unconsciousness or death. Refer to
Before you start, check the trailer hitch,
6 Since lighting and wiring vary by trailer type
“Exhaust system” on page 9-24.
To maximize your safety when towing a safety chains, tires and mirror adjustment.
and brand, you should have a qualified tech- trailer:
nician install a suitable connector between the  Have your exhaust system inspected for
vehicle and the trailer. Improper equipment or leaks, and make necessary repairs before
Tire
installation can cause damage to your vehi- starting on your trip.
cle’s electrical system and affect your vehicle  Keep the rear windows closed. Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the
warranty.  If exhaust does come into your vehicle cold inflation pressure listed in the manual.
through a window or another opening, You’ll find these numbers on the tire and
drive with your front, main heating or loading information placard at the sill of the
Additional trailer equipment cooling system on and with the blower on driver’s door.
any speed. This will bring fresh, outside Refer to “Tire inflation pressures” on page
Many states and Canadian provinces require air into your vehicle. Do not use recircula- 9-18.
special outside mirrors when towing a trailer. tion because it only recirculates the air
Even if not required, you should install spe- inside your vehicle. Refer to “Air selection
switch” on page 7-9.
cial mirrors if you cannot clearly see behind
you, or if the trailer creates a blind spot.
Following distance
Ask your trailer sales or rental agency if any Driver preparation Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle
other items are recommended or required for ahead as you would when driving your vehi-
your towing situation. Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of cle without a trailer. This can help you avoid
experience. situations that require heavy braking and sud-
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll den turns.
want to get to know your trailer. Acquaint
6-14 Driving safety

Trailer towing
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal  If the engine coolant temperature indica-
Passing well in advance. tor flashes on the information screen in
the multi-information display or the
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead
when you’re towing a trailer. And, because Overheating engine power drops suddenly, refer to
“Engine overheating” on page 8-4.
you’re a good deal longer, you’ll need to go
much farther beyond the passed vehicle Towing a trailer puts additional burden on the  If the warning display or warning
before you can return to your lane. engine and transaxle, which may cause over- display illuminates, refer to “Warning dis-
heating. Following are some suggestions to play” on page 5-70, 5-78.
reduce overheating:
Backing up 6
Cause of overheating Solution
Driving on hills
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with Air conditioning on Turn off
one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, Highway speeds Reduce speed Reduce speed and downshift before you start
just move that hand to the left. To move the Going up hills Select lower gear posi- down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t
trailer to the right, move your hand to the tion downshift, over using the brakes can cause
right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, Stop-and-go city traf- With the vehicle reduced brake efficiency.
have someone guide you. fic stopped, shift to the
You can tow in “D” (DRIVE) position. You
“N” (NEUTRAL)
may want to shift the selector lever to the 3rd
Making turns position and idle the
or a lower position, under heavy loads or hilly
engine at high idle.
conditions.
CAUTION When towing at high altitudes, engine coolant

 Making sharp turns while towing a trailer and automatic transaxle oil will overheat at a Parking
could cause the trailer to come in contact lower temperature than at normal altitudes.
with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be dam- If you turn your engine off immediately after Always place chocks or blocks under both the
aged. Avoid making sharp turns while tow- towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, vehicle and trailer wheels when parking. Be
ing a trailer. your vehicle may show signs similar to over- sure that the parking brake is firmly set and
heating. To avoid this, let the engine run that the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK)
When you’re turning with a trailer, make while parked (preferably on level ground) position. Avoid parking on a hill with a
wider than normal turns to help prevent the with the automatic transaxle in the “P” trailer, but if it cannot be avoided, do so only
trailer from striking shoulders, curbs, road (PARK) position for a few minutes before after performing the following:
signs, trees or other objects. turning the engine off.
Driving safety 6-15
Trailer towing
1. Apply the brakes and keep them applied.
2. Have someone place chocks or blocks
under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the chocks or blocks are in place,
release your brakes slowly until the
chocks or blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the parking brake firmly.
5. Set the selector lever to the “P” (PARK)
position and turn off the engine.
6 When restarting out after parking on a hill:
1. Check that the selector lever is set to the

“P” (PARK) position.
2. Start the engine. Be sure to keep the brake
pedal depressed.
3. Set the selector lever to the “D” (DRIVE)
position or “R” (REVERSE) position.
4. Release the parking brake and brake pedal
and slowly pull or back away from the
chocks or blocks. Stop and apply your
brakes.
5. Have someone retrieve the chocks or
blocks.
6-16 Driving safety

Comfort controls
Vents ................................................................................................7-2
Dual-zone automatic climate control air conditioner ......................7-5
Important air conditioning operating tips ......................................7-13
Air purifier .....................................................................................7-14
AM/FM radio/CD player (if so equipped).....................................7-14
Handling of Discs ..........................................................................7-18
Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC) ....................................................7-19
7
Important Points on Safety for the Customer ................................7-23
Operation Keys ..............................................................................7-24
Listen to Radio ...............................................................................7-26
Listen to Satellite Radio (if so equipped) .......................................7-28
Listen to CDs .................................................................................7-30
Listen to MP3s ...............................................................................7-31
Listen to an iPod ............................................................................7-32
Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device .........................................7-34
To play iPod/USB memory device tracks via voice operation ......7-37
Listen to Bluetooth Audio .............................................................7-40
Display Indicator ...........................................................................7-42
Audio Quality and Volume Balance Adjustment ...........................7-44
System Settings ..............................................................................7-44
Troubleshooting .............................................................................7-47
Clock (if so equipped) ....................................................................7-49
General information about your radio ...........................................7-50
Vents
Vents Air flow and direction adjust- Passenger’s vents

N00729901288 ments
N00730201340 Move the knob (A) to make adjustments.
To close the vent, fully move the knob (A) to
Driver’s vents the left side.
Move the knob (A) to make adjustments.

To close the vent, fully move the knob (A) to
the outer side.
7
1- Driver’s vents
2- Passenger’s vents
1- Close
2- Open
NOTE
1- Close
 On rare occasions, air from the vents of an
2- Open air-conditioned vehicle may be foggy. This is
due to only moist air cooling suddenly and it
does not indicate a problem.
 Do not let drinks or other liquids get into the
vents as they could prevent the air condition-
ing from operating normally.
7-2 Comfort controls

Vents
Changing the mode selection Foot/Face position Foot position

N00736401605
To change the position and amount of air Air flows to the upper part of the passenger Air flows mainly to the leg area.
flowing from the vents, press the MODE compartment, and flows to the leg area.
switch or defogger switch. Refer to “MODE
switch” on page 7-8, “Defogger switch” on
page 7-8.
These symbols are used in the next several
illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air
coming from the vents.
: Small amount of air from the vents 7
: Medium amount of air from the vents
: Large amount of air from the vents
Face position
NOTE
Air flows only to the upper part of the passen-  The foot/face air flow ratio can be adjusted
ger compartment. with the mode selection in the “ ” posi-
tion.
For further information, we recommend you
to consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
Comfort controls 7-3

Vents
Foot/Defroster position Defroster position
Air flows to the leg area, the windshield and Air flows mainly to the windshield and the
the door windows. door windows.
NOTE
 The foot/defroster air flow ratio can be
adjusted with the mode selection in the
“ ” position.
For further information, we recommend you
to consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

Dual-zone automatic climate control air conditioner

N00731501412
The air conditioner can only be used while the engine is running.
CAUTION
 The engine speed may increase when the air conditioner is operating.
With an increased engine speed, an A/T or CVT vehicle will creep to a greater degree than with a lower engine speed. Fully depress the brake pedal to pre-
vent the vehicle from creeping.
Control panel 7
N00711801682
1- Driver’s side temperature control 3- Blower speed selection switch 6- Air selection switch
switch 4- MODE switch 7- Defogger switch
2- Air conditioning switch 5- Passenger’s side temperature control 8- AUTO switch
switch

9- Electric rear window defogger switch Blower speed selection switch
 P.5-237
NOTE
 Since the air conditioning operation is con- N00736901206
10- OFF switch
trolled while the ECO mode is operating, Press of the blower speed selection
11- Driver’s side temperature display you may feel that effectiveness of the air
 P.7-7 switch to increase the blower speed.
conditioner is insufficient.
12- DUAL indicator  ECO mode switch P.5-231 Press of the blower speed selection
13- Mode selection display  Even during ECO mode operation, you can switch to decrease the blower speed.
14- Passenger’s side temperature display select normal operation of the air condi- The selected blower speed will be shown in
 P.7-7 tioner. the display (A).
15- Air conditioning indicator On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi-
16- Blower speed display Communication System, screen operations
7 can be used to change the setting. Refer to
NOTE  In extreme cold, the air conditioning control
 There is an interior air temperature sensor panel screen may operate sluggishly. This
(A) in the illustrated position. does not indicate a problem.
Never place anything over the sensor, since It will disappear when the vehicle interior
doing so will prevent it from functioning temperature rises to a normal temperature.
properly.
1- Increase
2- Decrease


air conditioning switch to match your per-
Temperature control switch NOTE sonal preferences.
N00737001448  When the engine coolant temperature is low,
Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
Press or of the temperature control the air temperature from the heater will be
switch to the desired temperature. cool/cold until the engine warms up, even if
you have selected warm air with the switch. Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioning
The selected temperature will be shown in the
To prevent the windshield and windows from switch (Changing the function setting)” on
display (A).
fogging up, the vent mode will be changed to page7-10.
“ ” and the blower speed will be reduced Refer to “Personalizing the air selection
while the system is operating in the AUTO (Changing the function setting)” on page7-9.
mode.
 When you feel that it is hotter or colder than  Synchronized mode and dual mode
the set temperature, you may adjust it to your 7
preference. The driver’s side and the passenger’s side
For further information, we recommend you temperature can be controlled independently.
to consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors At this time, the “DUAL” indicator will be
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. shown in the display (A).
 When the temperature is set to the highest or
the lowest setting, the air selection and the
air conditioner will be automatically changed
as follows.
NOTE Also, if the air selection is operated manually
 The temperature value of air conditioner is after an automatic changeover, manual oper-
switched in conjunction with outside temper- ation will be selected.
ature display unit of the multi information • Quick Heating (When the temperature is set
display. to the highest setting)
On vehicles equipped with multi information Outside air will be introduced and the air
display - Type 1, refer to “Changing the tem- conditioner will stop.
perature unit” on page 5-180. • Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set
On vehicles equipped with multi information to the lowest setting)
display - Type 2, refer to “Changing the tem- Inside air will be recirculated and the air
perature unit” on page 5-190. conditioner will operate.
The above indicates the factory settings. You

can personalize the air selection switch and


 Synchronized mode
Mode switch Defogger switch
If the driver’s side temperature control
N00737101234 N00703401054
switch is pressed, the passenger’s side To change the amount of air flowing from the When this switch is pressed, the mode
temperature will also be controlled to the vents, press the MODE switch. Each time the changes to the “ ” mode and the blower
same setting temperature as the driver’s MODE switch is pressed, the mode changes speed will be set at the maximum automati-
side. to the next one in the following sequence: cally. The indicator light (A) will come on
 Dual mode
“ ”“ ”“ ”“ ”“ ” and the “ ” mode is shown in the display
If the passenger’s side temperature con-
“ ”. The selected mode is shown in the dis- (B).
trol switch is pressed under synchronized
play (A). Refer to “Changing the mode selec-
mode, the system will switch to dual
tion” on page 7-3.
mode. In dual mode, the driver’s side and
7 the passenger’s side temperature can be
set separately by using each temperature
control switch.
Press the AUTO switch to return to syn-
chronized mode.

NOTE NOTE
 When the defogger switch is pressed, the air  When the engine coolant temperature rises to
conditioning system automatically operates a certain level, the air selection is automati-
and outside air (as opposed to recirculated cally switched to the recirculation position
air) is selected. This automatic switching and the indicator light (A) comes on. At this
control is carried out to prevent misting of time, the system will not switch to the out-
the windows even if “Disable automatic air side position even if the air selection switch
conditioning control” or “Disable automatic is pushed.
air selection control” is set. Refer to “Person-
alizing the air conditioning switch (Changing
 Personalizing the air selection
the function setting)” on page 7-10, “Person-
(Changing the function setting)
alizing the air selection (Changing the func-
tion setting)” on page 7-9.
When the air conditioning turns on, the air N00712300036 7
selection is controlled automatically. When You can change the following functions to
 The indicator light (A) will go off when
adjusting the blower speed. the air conditioning turns off, the air selection match your preference.
automatically goes back to the outside posi-
tion.  Enable automatic air selection control:
Air selection switch If high cooling performance is desired, or if When the AUTO switch is pressed, the air
N00737201378
the outside air is dusty or contaminated in selection switch will also be automatically
some way, use the recirculation position. controlled.
Normally, use the outside air position to keep Switch to the outside position every now and
the windshield and side windows clear and to then to keep the windows from fogging up.  Disable automatic air selection control:
quickly remove fog or frost from the wind- Even when the AUTO switch is pressed,
shield. the air selection switch will not be auto-
CAUTION matically controlled.
To change the air selection, simply press the  Using recirculated air for a long time may
air selection switch. cause the windows to fog up.  Changing the settings
Press the air selection switch for approxi-
 Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF} mately 10 seconds or longer.
Outside air is introduced into the passen- NOTE When the setting has changed, the system
ger compartment.  If the mode selection is set “ ” position, will beep and the indicator light will flash.
 Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON} you cannot turn the air conditioner off or
Air is recirculated inside the passenger select the recirculation position.
compartment. This prevents the windows from fogging up.


• When the setting has changed from  Personalizing the air conditioning
enabled to disabled, the system will beep
switch (Changing the function set-
three times and the indicator light will
ting)
flash three times. N00712200022
• When the setting has changed from dis-
You can change the following functions to
abled to enabled, the system will beep
match your preference.
two times and the indicator light will
flash three times.  Enable automatic air conditioning control:
On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi When the AUTO switch is pressed, or
Multi-Communication System, screen when the temperature control switch has
operations can also be used to change the been set to the minimum temperature, the
7 setting. Refer to the separate owner’s Push the switch again and the air condition- air conditioning switch is automatically
manual for details. ing compressor will stop and the indicator controlled.
goes off.
NOTE  Disable automatic air conditioning con-
trol:
 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air NOTE
selection control”. The air conditioning switch is not auto-
 If a problem is detected in the air condition-
 When the defogger switch is pressed, the air matically controlled, unless the air condi-
ing compressor, the “ ” indicator blinks.
selection will automatically change to the tioning switch is used.
Press the air conditioning switch once to turn
outside air position, even if the system is set it off, then once more to turn it back on. If
to “Disable automatic air selection control”,  Changing the settings
the“ ” indicator does not blink, there is no Press the air conditioning switch for about
in order to prevent windows from fogging
problem. If it does blink, have it checked at 10 seconds or longer.
up.
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
When the setting has changed, the system
will beep and the indicator light will flash.
 For example, sometimes after using a high-
Air conditioning switch pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet,
• When the setting has changed from
N00737301467 enabled to disabled, the system will beep
and the “ ” indicator blinks temporarily.
Push the switch, and the air conditioning three times and the indicator light will
Wait for a while, press the air conditioning
switch once to turn the system off, then once flash three times.
compressor will turn on. The “ ” indicator
more to turn it back on. Once the water evap- • When the setting has changed from dis-
will be shown in the display (A).
orates, the blinking will stop. abled to enabled, the system will beep
two times and the indicator light will
flash three times.

On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi
AUTO switch OFF switch
Multi-Communication System, screen
N00703501042 N00703601027
operations can also be used to change the When the AUTO switch is pressed, the indi- Push the switch to turn off the air condition-
setting. Refer to the separate owner’s cator light (A) comes on and the mode selec- ing system.
manual for details. tion, blower speed adjustment, recirculated/
outside air selection, temperature adjustment,
NOTE and air conditioner ON/OFF status are all
 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air controlled automatically. The selected mode
conditioning control”. and the blower speed are not shown in the
 When the defogger switch is pressed, the air display.
conditioner will run automatically, even if
the system is set to “Disable automatic air 7
conditioning control”, in order to prevent
windows from fogging up.

Operating the air conditioning NOTE Defrosting or defogging (wind-

system (automatic mode)  Set the temperature at about 75 (when the shield, door windows)
N00731701443
outside temperature unit of the multi-infor- N00732401564
mation display shows °F) or 24 (when the
outside temperature unit of the multi-infor- CAUTION
mation display shows °C) under normal con-  For safety, make sure you have a clear view
ditions. through all the windows.
 When the engine coolant temperature is low,
the air temperature from the heater will be
cool/cold until the engine warms up, even if To remove frost or mist from the windshield
you have selected warm air with the temper- and door windows, use the MODE switch or
7 ature switch. To prevent the windshield and defogger switch (“ ” or “ ”).
windows from fogging up, the vent mode
will be changed to “ ” and the blower  For ordinary defrosting
speed will be reduced.
Use this setting to keep the windshield and
In normal conditions, use the system in the
door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
AUTO mode and follow these procedures:
Operating the air conditioning leg area heated (when driving in rain or
1. Push the AUTO switch. snow).
system (manual mode)
2. Set the temperature control switch to the N00731801125
desired temperature. The temperature can
Blower speed and vent mode may be con-
be set within a range of around 61 (LO) to
trolled manually by setting the blower speed
89 (HI) (when the outside temperature
selection switch and the MODE switch to the
unit of the multi-information display
desired positions. To return to automatic
shows °F) or 17 (LO) to 31 (HI) (when the
operation, press the AUTO switch.
outside temperature unit of the multi-
information display shows °C).
The vents, recirculation/outside air, blower

speed, temperature adjustment, and ON/OFF
of air conditioner will be controlled automati- 1. Set the air selection switch to the outside
cally. position.

Important air conditioning operating tips

2. Set the MODE switch to the “ ” posi- 3. When running the air conditioner, make
tion.
NOTE sure the air intake, which is located in
3. Select your desired blower speed by  If the “ ” indicator light is on, you cannot front of the windshield, is free of obstruc-
pressing the blower speed selection turn the air conditioner off or select the recir- tions such as leaves. Leaves collected in
culation position. This prevents the windows the air-intake chamber may reduce air
switch.
from fogging up.
4. Select your desired temperature by press- flow and plug the water drains.
 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
ing the temperature control switch.
side vents toward the door windows.
5. Push the air conditioning switch. Air conditioning system refrig-
 When defrosting, do not set the temperature
to the maximum cool position. This will erant and lubricant recommen-
 For quick defrosting blow cool air on the window glass and fog it
up. dations
7
If the air conditioner seems less effective than
Important air conditioning usual, the cause might be a refrigerant leak.
operating tips Have the system inspected by your authorized
N00733701346 Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
1. Park the vehicle in the shade whenever of your choice.
possible. Parking in the hot sun makes the
vehicle interior extremely hot which then
requires more time to cool. If it is neces-
sary to park in the sun, open the windows
for the first few minutes of air condition-
1. Push the defogger switch. ing to expel the hot air.
2. Set the temperature to the highest posi- 2. Afterwards, keep the windows closed
tion. when the air conditioner is in use. The
entry of outside air through open windows
will reduce cooling efficiency.
NOTE
 While the “ ” indicator light is on, the air
conditioning compressor will run automati-
cally. The outside air position will also be
selected and the blower speed will be set at
the maximum automatically.

Air purifier
The air filter’s ability to collect pollen and
CAUTION dirt is reduced as it becomes dirty, so replace
NOTE
 The air conditioning system in your vehicle  To listen to the audio system while the
it periodically. For the maintenance interval,
must be charged with the refrigerant HFC- engine is not running, turn the ignition
refer to the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-
134a and the lubricant SUN-PAG56. switch to the “ACC” position or put the oper-
Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will NANCE MANUAL”. ation mode in ACC.
cause severe damage and may require replac- If the ignition switch or the operation mode
ing your vehicle’s entire air conditioning NOTE is left in ACC, the accessory power will
system.  Operation in certain conditions such as driv- automatically turn off after a certain period
The release of refrigerant into the atmo- ing on a dusty road and frequent use of the of time and you will no longer be able to use
sphere is not recommended. air conditioner can lead to reduction of ser- the audio system. The accessory power
The new refrigerant HFC-134a in your vehi- vice life of the filter. When you feel that the comes on again if the ignition switch or the
7 cle is designed not to harm the earth’s ozone
layer. However, it may contribute slightly to
air flow is lower than normal or when the engine switch is operated with it in the
“ACC” position. Refer to “ACC power auto-
windshield or windows start to fog up easily,
global warming. replace the air filter. cutout function” on page 5-20 and 5-64.
It is recommended that the old refrigerant be Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a  If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,
saved and recycled for future use. repair facility of your choice for assistance. it may create noise in the audio equipment.
This does not mean that anything is wrong
with your audio equipment. In such a case,
During a long period of disuse use the cellular phone at a place as far away
AM/FM radio/CD player (if as possible from the audio equipment.
so equipped)  If foreign objects or water get into the audio
The air conditioner should be operated for at equipment, or if smoke or a strange odor
N00734302102
least five minutes each week, even in cold comes from it, immediately turn off the
weather. This includes the quick defrosting The audio system can only be used when the audio system and have it checked at an
mode. Operating the air condition system ignition switch or the operation mode is in authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
weekly maintains lubrication of the compres- repair facility of your choice. Never try to
ON or ACC.
sor internal parts to keep the air conditioner repair it yourself. Avoid using the audio sys-
in the best operating condition. tem until it is inspected by a qualified per-
son.
 If the audio system is damaged by foreign
Air purifier objects, water, or fire, have the system
N00733801190 checked by a qualified Mitsubishi Motors
technician.
The air conditioning system is equipped with
an air filter to remove pollen and dust.

AM/FM radio/CD player (if so equipped)

 Furthermore, even if there is no specific
Important Points on Usage denotation of trademarks or registered
NOTE
N00715000021  The types of devices that can be connected
trademarks, these are to be observed in
may vary.
their entirety.
iPod/iPhone Playback Function (if [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
For details, access the Mitsubishi Motors
so equipped)
North America website.
 This product supports audio playback For details, access the Mitsubishi Motors
from iPod/iPhone devices, however dif- “Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone”
website. Please read and agree to the “Warn-
fering versions mean that playback cannot mean that an electronic accessory has ing about Links to the Web Sites of Other
be guaranteed. been designed to connect specifically to Companies”. The websites mentioned above
iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been
 Please be aware that depending on the
certified by the developer to meet Apple
may connect you to websites other than the
Mitsubishi Motors website.
7
iPod/iPhone model or version, operation
may differ. performance standards. http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and ucts/index.html
iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
How to Clean registered in the U.S. and other countries.
N00715200023 Apple is not responsible for the operation
 If the product becomes dirty, wipe with a of this device or its compliance with
soft cloth. safety and regulatory standards.
 If very dirty, use a soft cloth dipped in
neutral detergent diluted in water, and
then wrung out. Do not use benzene, thin- NOTE
ners, or other chemical wipes. This may  iPod and iTunes licensing allows individual
harm the surface. users to privately reproduce and play back
non- copyrighted material as well as material
that may be legally copied and reproduced.
Trademarks Infringement of copyright is prohibited.
N00715300112
 Product names and other proper names

are the trademarks or registered trade-
marks of their respective owners.

5th generation 5th generation 160GB (2009) 160GB (2007) 80GB

(video) (video)
60GB 80GB 30GB
7
6th generation 5th generation 4th generation (video)

8GB 16GB (video camera) 8GB 16GB
8GB 16GB
3rd generation 2nd generation 1st generation

(video) (aluminum) 1GB 2GB 4GB
4GB 8GB 2GB 4GB 8GB

4th generation 3rd generation 2nd generation 1st generation

8GB 32GB 64GB 32GB 64GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
7
16GB 32GB 64GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB

Handling of Discs
Handling of Discs Important Points on Storage Types of Disc That Can Be

N00715400038
 When not using discs, ensure these are Played Back
This explains care that should be taken in the kept in cases, and stored out of direct sun- N00715500026
handling of discs. light. The following marks are printed on the disc
 If discs are not going to be used for a long label, package, or jacket.
Important Points on Handling period of time, remove these from the
product. Maxi-
 Fingerprints or other marks on the read mum Com-
surface of the disc may result in its con- Type Size
playback ments
tent being more difficult to read. When Disc Playback Environment
time
7 holding the disc, grip both edges, or one In cold environments such as in mid-winter CD-DA 5 inches 74 minutes —
edge and the center hole, in order that the when the interior of the vehicle is cold, turn- (12 cm)
read surface is not touched. ing the heater on and immediately trying to
 Do not affix paper or stickers, or other- use the product may cause condensation
wise damage the disc. (water droplets) to form on the disc and inter- CD-TEXT 5 inches 74 minutes —
 Do not forcefully insert a disc if another is nal optical components, and this may prevent (12 cm)
already within the device. This can result the product from operating correctly.
in damage to discs, or malfunction.
In these conditions, remove the disc, and wait CD-R/RW 5 inches — •Disc
Cleaning a short time before use. (12 cm) contain-
ing MP3
 Periodically clean the read surface of the Copyright files
disc. When cleaning, do not wipe in a cir-
Actions such as unauthorized reproduction,
cular motion. Instead, wipe gently out-
broadcast, public performance, or rental of
wards from the center of the disc to the
discs that comprise other than personal use
outer edge.
are prohibited by law.
 New discs may have burring around the Discs That May Not Be Played Back
outer edge or in the hole in the center.
Ensure you check for these. If there are  Playback of discs other than those
burrs, these may lead to faulty operation, described in “Types of Disc That Can Be
therefore ensure these are removed. Played Back” is not guaranteed.

Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)

 3 inches (8 cm) discs may not be used.  Playback of other than standard CDs is Additionally, ensure you read the user manu-
 Do not insert irregularly-shaped discs (for not guaranteed. Even if the audio can be als for your CD-R/RW drive and the writing
example, heart-shaped), as these may played back, the audio quality cannot be software, and ensure these are used correctly.
result in malfunction. Additionally, discs guaranteed. If the MP3/WMA/AAC format audio files
that have transparent portions may not be  When playing back other than standard includes title information or other data, then
played back. CDs, the following may occur. this can be displayed.
 Discs that have not been finalized cannot • There may be noise during playback.
be played back. • There may be jumping in the audio. CAUTION
 Even if recorded using the correct format • The disc may not be recognized.  CD-ROM and CD-R/RW media can only
on a recorder or computer, application • The first track may not be played back. play back MP3 format audio files.
software settings and environments; disc • It may take longer than usual until start  Actions such as copying audio CDs or files
peculiarities, damage, or marking; or dirt of playback of tracks. and either distributing these to others for free 7
or condensation on the lens inside the • Playback may start from within the or for charge, or uploading files via the Inter-
product may render the disc unplayable. track. net or other means to servers is an infringe-
 Depending on the disc, some functions • Some parts may not be played back. ment of the law.
may not be used, or the disc may not play • Tracks may freeze during playback.  Do not append the file extensions “.mp3”,
back. • Tracks may be displayed erroneously. “.wma”, or “.m4a”, to other than
 Do not use discs with cracks or warps. MP3/WMA/AAC format files. Playing back
 If the disc has stickers affixed, remains discs with these types of files recorded upon
from removed stickers, or affixed adhe-
Audio Files them may cause the files to be incorrectly
identified for playback, which may lead to
sive, then do not use the disc. (MP3/WMA/AAC) loud noise, resulting in speaker damage or
 Discs that have decorative labels or stick- N00715600027
accident.
ers may not be used. This product can play back MP3/WMA/AAC
format audio files recorded on CD-ROM,
Nonstandard CDs CD-R/RW, and USB devices. NOTE
 Depending on the condition of the disc
This product will play back audio CDs, how- There are limitations on the files and media recorder or recording software used, correct
ever please be aware of the following points that can be used, therefore read the following playback may not be possible. In these cases,
regarding CD standards. prior to recording MP3/WMA/AAC format refer to the user manual for your product or
audio files on discs or USB devices. software.
 Ensure that you use discs with on the
label surface.

NOTE Speci-
 Depending on your computer’s operating ROOT Name fica- Explanation
Folder
system, version, software, or settings, files tion
Audio file
may not have a file extension appended. In Format ISO96 Level 1 Maximum 8
these cases, append the file extensions specifica- 60 character file
“.mp3”, “.wma”, or “.m4a” when copying tions name, and 3
the files.
character file
 Files larger than 2GB in size cannot be
extension.
played back.
(single-byte
alphanumeric
7 Data Formats That Can Be capital letters,
Played Back 1 level 2 level 3 level 4 level 5 level numerals, “_”
N00715700028 may be used)
Data formats that can be played on discs ISO96 Joliet Files names up
(CD-ROM, CD-R/RW) and USB devices dif- 60 to a maximum
fer. exten- 64 characters
sion can be used.
Data format DISC USB device Multises- Not supported (only first session
MP3 sion supported)
Maxi- 8 levels (if the root is the 1st
WMA X mum level)
AAC X number
of levels
Maxi- 700 folders (including root)
Folder Structure mum
N00715800029 folder
Up to 8 folder levels can be recognized. number
You can create a folder structure as in Genre -
Artist - Album - Track (MP3/WMA/AAC
format audio files) for management of tracks.


Speci- What Is MP3? Item Details
Name fica- Explanation N00715900020 Specification MPEG-1 AUDIO LAYER3
tion
MP3 is an abbreviation of “MPEG-1 Audio MPEG-2 AUDIO LAYER3
Maxi- 65,535 files (total number on Layer 3”. MPEG is an abbreviation of
mum file media. Other than MP3, WMA, Sampling MPEG-1: 32/44.1/48
“Motion Picture Experts Group”, and this is a
num- and AAC files not included) frequency MPEG-2: 16/22.05/24
video compression standard used in video
[kHz]
ber*1 CDs, etc.
MP3 is one of the audio compression meth- Bit rate MPEG-1: 32 to 320
File Maximum 64 bytes (for Uni-
ods contained in the MPEG audio standard, [kbps] MPEG-2: 8 to 160
name and code, 32 characters), files/ fold-
folder ers with file/ folder names and reduces the quality of sounds that are
VBR (vari- Support
name longer than this will not be dis- beyond the auditory resolution of the human
able bit rate) 7
restric- played or played back. ear and that are hidden by louder sounds, thus
creating high-quality data with a lower data Channel Stereo/ Joint stereo/ Dual
tions
size. mode channel/ Monaural
USB sup- The recommended file system is Because this can compress CD audio to File exten- mp3
ported FAT32. approximately 1/10 its original data size with- sion
formats 1 partition only out perceptible loss, approximately 10 CDs
Supported ID3 tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1,
can be written to a single CD-R/RW disc.
1:Do not include other than tag informa- Ver. 2.2, Ver. 2.3, Ver. 2.4
*
MP3/WMA/AAC files. However, if stor- tion (ISO-8859-1, UTF-16 (Uni-
ing many tracks within the same folder, CAUTION code)), Titles, Artist name,
these may not be recognized even if less  MP3 files different to the standards at right Album name
may not play back correctly, or file/folder
than the maximum number of tracks. In Maximum 64 characters
names may not be displayed correctly.
these cases, divide the tracks up into mul- number of
tiple folders. characters
that can be
Standards for MP3 Files That Can
indicated on
NOTE Be Played Back the display
 The order in which folders and audio files
are displayed on this product may be differ- Specifications for MP3 files that can be
ent to how they are displayed on a computer. played are as below.

What Is WMA? Item Details CAUTION

N00716000028 Specification Windows Media Audio  AAC supports digital rights management
WMA is an abbreviation of Windows Media Version7.0/8.0/9.0 (DRM). This product cannot play back AAC
files protected using this system.
Audio, and this is an audio compression for- Sampling fre- 32/44.1/48
 AAC files different to the standards at right
mat from Microsoft. This is a compression quency [kHz]
may not play back correctly, or file/folder
format that has a higher compression ratio
Bit rate [kbps] 48 to 320 names may not be displayed correctly.
than MP3.
VBR Support
(variable bit rate)
NOTE Standards for AAC Files That Can
 Microsoft, Windows Media, and Windows Channel mode Stereo/Monaural
Be Played Back
7 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Cor- File extension wma
poration (USA) and in other countries.
Supported tag WMA tags Specifications for AAC files that can be
information Title name, Artist name, played are as below.
Album name
CAUTION
 WMA supports digital rights management Maximum num- 64 characters Item Details
(DRM). This product cannot play back ber of characters Specification Advanced Audio
WMA files protected using this system. that can be indi- Coding
 WMA files different to the standards at right cated on the dis- MPEG4/AAC-LC
may not play back correctly, or file/folder play MPEG2/AAC-LC
names may not be displayed correctly.
 “Pro”, “Lossless”, and “Voice” are not sup- Sampling MPEG4 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/
ported. What Is AAC? fre- 24/32/44.1/48
N00716100029
quency MPEG2 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/
[kHz] 24/32/44.1/48
AAC is an abbreviation of Advanced Audio
Standards for WMA Files That Coding, and this is an audio compression Bit rate MPEG4 8 to 320
Can Be Played Back standard used in “MPEG-2” and “MPEG-4”. [kbps] MPEG2 8 to 320
This features 1.4x the compression of MP3,
Specifications for WMA files that can be with comparable audio quality. VBR Support
played are as below. (variable bit rate)
Channel mode Stereo/Monaural

Important Points on Safety for the Customer

Item Details WARNING WARNING
File extension m4a  The driver should not perform compli-  During thunderstorms, do not touch the
cated operations while driving. antenna or the front panel.
Supported tag AAC tags or ID3 tags
Performing complicated operations while This may lead to electrical shock from
information Title, Artist name,
driving may prevent the driver looking lightning.
Album name where they are going, and cause an acci-
Maximum number 64 characters dent.
of characters that Therefore stop the vehicle in a safe loca- CAUTION
can be indicated on tion before performing such operations.  Do not block ventilation holes or heat sinks
the display  Do not use during malfunctions, such as on the product.
when no sound is audible. Blocking ventilation holes or heat sinks may
This may lead to accident, fire, or electric prevent heat from escaping from within the 7
Important Points on Safety shock. product, leading to fire or malfunction.
 Ensure water or other foreign objects do
for the Customer not enter the product.
 Do not turn the volume up to the extent that
you cannot hear sounds from outside the
N00716200020 This may lead to smoking, fire, electric vehicle while driving.
This product features a number of pictorial shock, or malfunction. Driving without being able to hear sounds
indications as well as points concerning han-  Do not insert foreign objects into the disc from outside the vehicle may result in an
dling so that you can use the product cor- slot. accident.
rectly and in a safe manner, as well as prevent This may lead to fire, electric shock, or  Do not insert your hand or fingers into the
malfunction. disc slot.
injury or damage to yourself, other users, or
 In the event of abnormalities occurring This may result in injury.
property.
when foreign objects or water enter the
product, resulting in smoke or a strange
WARNING smell, immediately stop using the product,
 The driver should not pay close attention and consult an authorized Mitsubishi
to the display while driving. Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
This may prevent the driver looking choice.
where they are going, and cause an acci- Continuing to use the product may result
dent. in accident, fire, or electric shock.
 Do not disassemble or modify the product.
This may lead to malfunction, fire, or elec-
tric shock.

Operation Keys
Operation Keys Adjust Volume Insert/Eject Discs

N00716300034 N00716500049 N00716600037
1. Turn the PWR/VOL key to adjust the vol- 1. Insert the disc into the disc slot with the
ume. label surface up.
Turn the Power ON/ OFF
N00716400080
1. Press the PWR/VOL key.
Disc slot
7
Disc
*Label side
AFA109413
Turn the PWR/VOL key clockwise to Push the disc in a certain amount, and the
AFA109400 increase, and counterclockwise to product will pull the disc in, and playback
decrease the volume. will start.
Turn the power on, and resume playback
from the previous status. 2. Press the key.
2. Press the PWR/VOL key. NOTE This will eject the disc from the product,
Turn the power OFF.  The maximum value for volume is 45, and so remove the disc.
the minimum is 0.
NOTE  The initial setting for volume is “17”. CAUTION
 Hold down the steering MODE button to  When replacing discs, first ensure that the
also turn the audio function ON/OFF. vehicle is stopped in an area in which stop-
ping is permitted.
 Do not insert your hand, fingers, or foreign
objects into the disc slot. This may lead to
injury, smoking, or fire.
 3 inches (8 cm) CDs are not supported.

Operation Keys
Explanation of Buttons
N00716700113
This explains names and functions of each part.
1- key 5- RADIO key 9- CAT key

Use to eject a disc. Switch the radio and the band. CAT (category content) searches and
6- PWR/VOL key scans can be performed while receiving
2- 3 key/4 key
Adjust the volume, and turn the power radio RBDS broadcasts.
For audio, rewind/fast forward.
ON/OFF. Search channels in the satellite radio*1.
For radio, use as preset keys 3 and 4.
7- MEDIA key 10- SCAN key
3- 2RDM key
Switch between CD and other sources. For audio, play scan playback; for
For audio, play random playback; for
8- INFO key radio, scan for stations.
radio, use as preset key 2.
Switch the content of the display. 11- Disc slot
4- 1RPT key
For audio, play repeat playback; for 12- PAGE key
radio, use as preset key 1. Display indicator page advance.

Listen to Radio
13- 5 key 3- MODE button
Steering wheel audio remote Hold down to turn the audio function
Play/Pause Bluetooth Audio*2, and use control switch
as preset key 5 for radio. ON/OFF. Additionally, each time this is
N00716800114
pressed, this switches the audio source.
14- 6 key
The order of switching is as shown
Return during audio track search, and
below.
stop Bluetooth Audio*2. If devices are not connected, then these
For radio, use as preset key 6. are to be skipped, and the next source
15- key/ key selected.
For audio, select audio track/file; for
radio, perform automatic station selec-
7 tion. CD or MP3
Select channels in the satellite radio*1. 1
iPod* or USB device
16- MENU key
Bluetooth Audio*2
Switch to Menu mode. 1- button, button
AM
17- /SEL key Adjust audio functions and the mobile
Adjust audio quality and select items. phone function volume. FM1, 2
For radio, manually select stations. 2- SIR1, 2, 3, 4*3
button, button
Select channels in the satellite radio*1. Select CD and other audio source tracks
1
* : Requires a satellite tuner connection. and radio stations.
*1: An iPod cable (available separately) is
*2: Requires a separately-purchased Blue- Hold down to skip up and down through required.
tooth-capable audio device in equip- tracks.
*2: Requires a separately-purchased Blue-
ment by type. Hold down to switch the satellite radio tooth-capable audio device.
band during satellite radio reception.
*3: Requires a satellite tuner connection.
Listen to Radio
N00716900069
This explains how to listen to AM and FM

radio broadcasts.

Listen to Radio
Release the button to start A “Beep” sounds, and the preset key is
To Listen to the Radio key
registered.
(hold down) seek station selection, and
when a station is received,
Press the RADIO key to switch the band. key
(hold down)
scanning stops. NOTE
Switch between AM and FM bands.  The preset memory can register a maximum
The selected band is indicated on the display. of 6 stations for each band.
Scan Station Selection  If a preset key that already has a station reg-
istered is selected, then this is overwritten
NOTE with the new preset.
 Bands switch in the order AM, FM1, FM2, Collective search for stations that can be
 Pressing the preset key will select the previ-
SIR1*, SIR2*, SIR3*, and SIR4*. received.
ously registered frequency.
 If no signal is received, bands will not be
Press the SCAN key.
7
switched to SIR2, SIR3, or SIR4.
When a station is received, this is played for 5 CAT Search

*: When a satellite tuner is connected seconds, then the product searches for the
next station. During RBDS broadcast reception, select
Manual/Seek Station Selection CAT (category content), and automatically
NOTE scan for stations.
Turn the /SEL key to the frequency to lis-  Press this button again while receiving the
station to return to normal reception. 1. During FM reception, press the CAT key.
ten to. This switches to the CAT selection mode.
2. Press the CAT key to select CAT.
/SEL key Reduces the frequency
(counter- being received. Preset Memory 3. Press the key or key.
The CAT (category content) indicator will
clockwise) flash, and station selection will automati-
Register the broadcast station in advance, and
/SEL key Increases the frequency cally start.
select this at a later time.
(clockwise) being received. When a station is received, the frequency
1. Tune in to the frequency to register. is displayed.
2. Hold down any of the keys from the 1RPT
key to the 6 key. NOTE
 This receives the station detected first.

Listen to Satellite Radio (if so equipped)

*:If no signal is received, bands will not be
NOTE Listen to Satellite Radio (if so switched.
 10 seconds after reception, CAT search mode
equipped)
will be cancelled.
N00717000096
 To receive a different station, press the
key or key again. This section explains how to listen to satellite Select a Station
radio.
CAT Scan Press the key or key to select the sta-
NOTE tion.
 A subscription is required to listen to satel-
During RBDS broadcast reception, select
lite radio. Satellite radio cannot be received Go down one step from the
CAT (category content) to perform a collec-
7 tive search for stations.
after the free trial period has expired. key channel being received.
 If no subscription has been made when the
Go up one step from the
free trial period expires, the display will key
1. During FM reception, press the CAT key. channel being received.
alternate between “CALL” and “888-539-
This switches to the CAT selection mode. SIRI”. While the key is held down,
2. Press the CAT key to select CAT. key
it will cycle down through
3. Press the SCAN key. (Hold down) the channels being received.
When a broadcast station is received, this
is played for 5 seconds, then the product
To listen to Satellite Radio While the key is held down,
key
searches for the next station. it will cycle up through the
(Hold down) channels being received.
Press the RADIO key to switch the band.
NOTE Switches between SIR1, SIR2, SIR3, and

 Press this key again while receiving the sta- SIR4 bands. NOTE
tion to return to normal reception. The selected band is indicated on the display.  When cycling up/down through channels, the
channel number display in the upper level of
the display changes.
NOTE
 When channel number “000” is selected, the
 Bands switch in the order AM, FM1, FM2,
SIRIUS ID (12 digits) is displayed.
SIR1, SIR2*, SIR3*, and SIR4*.
 Switch satellite radio bands by holding down
the button, button on the steering
wheel audio remote control switch.

Listen to Satellite Radio (if so equipped)
Scan Station Selection NOTE Channel Search

 Press the SCAN key or CAT key again while
Channels are received in order and take 10 receiving the channel to return to normal Other channels can be selected while listen-
reception.
seconds each. ing to a channel.
 Turning the /SET key will cancel.
1. Press the CAT key.
Scan All Channels Switches to the category search mode,
Preset Memory and the category name is indicated on the
Press the SCAN key. display.
All of the channels are scanned. Register the channel in advance, and select 2. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate-
this at a later time. gory. 7
3. Press the /SEL key.
NOTE 1. Tune in to the channel to register. Switches to channel search mode.
 Press this key again while receiving the 2. Hold down any of the keys from the 1RPT
channel to return to normal reception. 4. Turn the /SEL key to select the chan-
key to the 6 key. nel.
 Selecting a channel will cancel this.
A “Beep” sounds, and the preset key is 5. Press the /SEL key.
registered. A “Beep” sounds, and the selected chan-
Scan Category Channels nel is received. (Channel preliminary set-
NOTE ting mode)
1. Press the CAT key.  The preset memory can register a maximum The channel name shown on the display
Switches to the category search mode, of 6 stations per band. flashes.
and the category name is indicated on the  If a preset key that already has a channel reg- Press the /SEL key again to cancel the
display. istered is selected, then this is overwritten search mode and return to normal recep-
2. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate- with the new preset. tion.
gory.  Pressing the preset key will select the previ-
ously registered channel. 6. To continue the search, turn the /SEL
3. Press the SCAN key. key to select the channel.
The preset channels on the display are shown
The channels in the selected category are The selected channel is received.
as “P1” though “P6”.
scanned.
Cancels the search mode and returns to
normal reception.

Listen to CDs
NOTE Listen to CDs Switch Playback Mode

 After making preliminary settings in the N00717100026
channel search mode, this will switch to the Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
This explains how to listen to audio CDs
channel being received.
(CD-DA/CD-TEXT). playback are possible.
 Channel number “000” is for the SIRUS ID
display, so it cannot be searched.
 If the “CAT ALL” category is selected, all Play CDs Repeat Playback (RPT)
channels can be searched in the channel
search mode. Press the 1RPT key.
Insert the disc.
 In the category mode, press the CAT key to
cancel search mode. Repeat playback of the track currently being
Insert a disc to automatically start playback.
7  In the channel search mode, press the 6  “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-24) played.
key to return to the category search mode. If a disc is already within the product, press
 In the channel preliminary setting mode, the MEDIA key to switch to CD as the NOTE
press the 6 key to return to the category source.  Pressing again will cancel.
search mode without returning to the previ-  Selecting a track, ejecting, fast forwarding,
ous channel search mode. or rewinding will cancel.
 If there is no operation for 10 seconds, the Select the Track
search mode will be cancelled.
Press the key or key to select the Random Playback (RDM)
track.
Initialize the CODE (Passcode)
This enables selection of the next or previous Press the 2RDM key.
The CODE required for changing the LOCK track.

Play the tracks on the disc in a random order.
settings in the satellite settings is initialized.
(The factory setting is “1111”.) Fast Forward or Rewind NOTE
When the power is off, press the PWR/VOL  Pressing again will cancel.
Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.  Ejecting will cancel this.
key while holding down the /SEL key.
 “Turn the Power ON/OFF” (P7-24) Fast forward/rewind is possible.

Listen to MP3s
If a disc is already within the product, press
Scan Playback (SCAN) Repeat Playback (RPT)
the MEDIA key to switch to CD as the
source.
Press the SCAN key. Press the 1RPT key.
Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks NOTE Repeat playback of the track currently being
on the whole disc in order.  Depending on the file structure, it may take played.
some time to read the contents of the disc.
NOTE NOTE
 Press this button again during playback if  Pressing again will cancel.
you wish to hear that track, and that track Select the Track (File)  Selecting a file, ejecting, fast forwarding, or
will play normally. rewinding will cancel. 7
Press the key or key to select the
track.
Listen to MP3s Folder Repeat Playback
N00717200027
This enables selection of the next or previous
track. Hold down the 1RPT key.
This explains how to listen to audio files on a
disc.
Fast Forward or Rewind Repeat playback of the tracks within the
folder currently being played.
CAUTION
 CD-ROM and CD-R/RW media can only Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
play back MP3 format audio files.
NOTE
Fast forward/rewind is possible.  Pressing again will cancel.
 Even if the file is selected, folder repeat
playback will not be cancelled.
To Listen to MP3s Switch Playback Mode
Insert the disc. Repeat playback, random playback, and scan Random Playback (RDM)
playback are possible.
Insert a disc to automatically start playback.
 “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-24) Press the 2RDM key.

Listen to an iPod
Play the tracks in the folder in a random
order.
Search Tracks Listen to an iPod
N00717300103
Search folders and files, and select a track. By connecting commercially-available

NOTE
iPod/iPhone devices to this product, you can
 Pressing again will cancel.
1. Turn the /SEL key to select the folder. play back tracks on these through the product.
Folder Random Playback Files within the selected folder are dis-
CAUTION
 Do not leave the iPod/iPhone unattended in
played.
the vehicle.
Hold down the 2RDM key. 3. Turn the /SEL key to select the file.  Never hold these devices in your hand to
7 Play all tracks in folders on the disc in a ran- 4. Press the /SEL key. operate while driving, as this is dangerous.
dom order.  No indemnification for data loss resulting
This plays the selected file (track). when the iPod/iPhone is connected to the
product will be possible.
NOTE  Depending on how the devices are handled,
 Pressing again will cancel.
NOTE audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
 While the folder is selected, press the 6 it is recommended that data be backed up.
key to cancel track search mode.
Scan Playback (SCAN)  If there is no operation for 10 seconds after
selecting the folder, then track search mode NOTE
will be cancelled.
Press the SCAN key.  Depending on the generation, model, or soft-
 Select the folder, and hold down the /SEL ware version of the iPod/iPhone, playback
Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks key to start playback from the first track in on this product may not be possible.
that folder. (P.7-15) Additionally, playback as
in the folder currently being played in order.
 While the file is selected, press the 6 key explained in this document may not be possi-
to return to the previous operation. ble.
NOTE  While the file is selected, hold down the
 Press this button again during playback if
6 key to cancel track search mode.
you wish to hear that track, and that track
will play normally.  If there is no operation for five seconds after
selecting the file, that file is played back.
 Disc operations such as selecting a track will
cancel track search mode.

Listen to an iPod
NOTE NOTE Select the Track (File)

 The types of devices that can be connected  iPod/iPhone specifications and settings may
may vary. mean that connection is not possible, or
[For vehicles sold in U.S.A.] result in differences in operation or display.
For details, access the Mitsubishi Motors
track.
 Depending on audio data in the iPod/iPhone,
North America website. track information may not be displayed cor-
rectly.
For details, access the Mitsubishi Motors track.
 Depending on the status of the vehicle and
website. Please read and agree to the “Warn- device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back
ing about Links to the Web Sites of Other after starting the engine. Fast Forward or Rewind
Companies”. The websites mentioned above  Data containing copyright information may
may connect you to websites other than the
Mitsubishi Motors website.
not play back.
Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
7
 It is recommended that the iPod/iPhone
http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod- equalizer settings be set to flat.
ucts/index.html Fast forward/rewind is possible.
 Operate the iPod/iPhone while connected to
 Regarding how to connect the iPod/iPhone, this product.
refer to “How to connect an iPod” on page
5-264.
 If the iPod/iPhone is connected via Bluetooth Switch Playback Mode
as a Bluetooth-capable audio device, then do
 When connecting the iPod/iPhone, use a
not connect the iPod/iPhone using an iPod
commercially-available iPod connection
cable. Connection using both methods will
Repeat playback and shuffle playback are
cable. result in erroneous operation. possible.
 Set up the device in order that no unsafe
 If an iPod/iPhone does not operate correctly,
actions, such as plugging in the connection
cable are taken while driving.
then remove the iPod/iPhone from the prod- Repeat Playback (RPT)
uct, reset, then reconnect.
 When inserting and removing the
iPod/iPhone, for safety’s sake first stop the Press the 1RPT key.
vehicle. Play iPod
 Depending on the status of the iPod/iPhone, Repeat playback of the track currently being
it may take some time until the device is rec- played.
Press the MEDIA key to set the iPod as the
ognized, or playback starts.
source.
 Buttons on the product will not operate while NOTE
iPod/iPhone is connected. The selected source is indicated on the dis-  Pressing again will cancel.
play.

Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device
Shuffle Playback (RDM) 2. Press the /SEL key. Categories or

tracks within the selected category are
Listen to Audio Files on a
displayed. USB Device
Press the 2RDM key. N00717400117
3. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate-
Play tracks in the category currently being gory or track. By connecting commercially-available USB
played in a random order. 4. Press the /SEL key. devices such as USB memory to this product,
Repeat steps 1 to 4, and search for tracks. you can play back audio files on these
through the product.
NOTE Select the track, and press the /SEL
 Pressing again will cancel. key to play.
CAUTION
7 NOTE
 Do not leave the USB device unattended in
the vehicle.
Album Shuffle Playback
 While the category (1st level) is selected,  Never hold these devices in your hand to
press the 6 key to cancel track search operate while driving, as this is dangerous.
Hold down the 2RDM key. mode.  Do not use hard discs, card readers, or mem-
 If there is no operation for 10 seconds after ory readers, as damage may occur to these or
Play back the album in a random order
selecting the category, then track search to the data contained therein. If these are
(tracks in any order on the album). mode will be cancelled. erroneously connected, then turn the ignition
 Select the category, and hold down the switch to the “OFF” or “LOCK” position or
NOTE /SEL key to start playback from the first put the operation mode in OFF, then remove.
 Pressing again will cancel. track in that category.  Because of the risk of data loss, it is recom-
mended that files be backed up.
 While the track is selected, press the 6
 No guarantee is made as regards damage to
key to return to the previous operation.
the USB device, nor regarding loss or dam-
Search Tracks  While the track is selected, hold down the
age to data contained therein.
6 key to cancel track search mode.  Depending on how the devices are handled,
Search categories or track names, and select a  If there is no operation for five seconds after audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
track. selecting the track, that file is played back. it is recommended that data be backed up.
 iPod operations such as selecting a track will
1. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate- cancel track search mode.
gory.

NOTE NOTE Select the Track (File)

 Digital audio players that support the mass  Depending on audio data in the USB device,
storage class specifications can be con- track information may not be displayed cor-
nected. rectly.
track.
 For details regarding the types of USB  Depending on the status of the vehicle and
devices that can be connected and the types device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back
of files that can be played back, refer to after starting the engine.
“Types of connectable devices and supported
track.
 Data containing copyright information may
file specifications” on page 5-265. not play back.
 Regarding how to connect USB devices,  This product can play back MP3, WMA, and Fast Forward or Rewind
refer to “How to connect a USB memory AAC format audio files.
device” on page 5-263.  Depending on the type of USB device, usage
7
 When connecting a USB device, use a con- may not be possible, or functions that can be
nection cable. Failure to use a connection used may be restricted.
cable when connecting may place undue load Fast forward/rewind is possible.
 The recommended file system for USB
on, or damage the USB connector. memory is FAT32.
 Set up the device in order that no unsafe  The maximum supported capacity for USB Switch Playback Mode
actions, such as plugging in the connection memory is 32GB.
cable are taken while driving.  Operate the USB device containing recorded
 When inserting and removing the USB Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
audio files while connected to this product.
device, for safety’s sake first stop the vehi- playback are possible.
cle.
 Do not insert other than audio devices into Play Back of Audio Files on a Repeat Playback (RPT)
the USB port. Damage to the device or USB Device
equipment may result.
 Depending on the status of the USB device, Press the 1RPT key.
it may take some time until the device is rec-
Press the MEDIA key to set USB as the
ognized, or playback starts. source. Repeat playback of the track currently being
 Depending on USB devices, buttons on the
played.
The selected source is indicated on the dis-
product will not operate while the USB
play.
device is connected. NOTE
 USB device specifications and settings may  Pressing again will cancel.
mean that connection is not possible, or
result in differences in operation or display.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

 Selecting a file will cancel this.  Cycling up/down through files will cancel  Press this button again during playback if
However, it will not be cancelled in vehicles this. you wish to hear that track, and that track
with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.  Even if the file is selected, folder random will play normally.
playback will not be cancelled.
Folder Repeat Playback

All Folder Random Playback Folder Scan Playback
Hold down the 1RPT key.
Hold down the 2RDM key. Hold down the SCAN key.
Repeat playback of the tracks within the
Play the first 10 seconds of the first track in
7 folder currently being played. Play the tracks in all folders in a random
each folder on the USB device in order.
order.
NOTE NOTE
 Pressing again will cancel. NOTE
 Pressing again will cancel.  Press this button again during playback if
 Selecting a folder will cancel this.
you wish to hear that track, and that track
 Cycling up/down through files will cancel  Selecting a folder will cancel this.
will play normally.
this.  Cycling up/down through files will cancel
 Even if the file is selected, folder repeat this.
playback will not be cancelled.  Even if the file is selected, all folder random
playback will not be cancelled. Search Tracks
Folder Random Playback (RDM) Search folders and files, and select a track.
Scan Playback (SCAN)
Press the 2RDM key. 1. Turn the /SEL key to select the folder.
Press the SCAN key. 2. Press the /SEL key.
Play tracks in the folder currently being
played in a random order. Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks Files within the selected folder are dis-
on the whole USB device in order. played.
NOTE 3. Turn the /SEL key to select the file.
 Pressing again will cancel. 4. Press the /SEL key.
 Selecting a folder will cancel this.

To play iPod/USB memory device tracks via voice operation

This plays the selected file (track). tion, refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on NOTE
page 5-240.
 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-
NOTE The following explains how to prepare for
ing the connected device.
voice operation and play the tracks.
 While the folder is selected, press the 6 If the connected device cannot be recognized
key to cancel track search mode. or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth®
 If there is no operation for 10 seconds after Preparation for voice operation 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice
selecting the folder, then track search mode N00772101039 guide. Follow the voice guide.
will be cancelled.
To use the voice operation, press the
 Select the folder, and hold down the /SEL SPEECH button (except for vehicles with 2. After the voice guide says “Would you
key to start playback from the first track in Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System) or like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
that folder.
PICK-UP button (for vehicles with Mitsubi- Genre?,” say “Artist”. 7
 While the file is selected, press the 6 key shi Multi-Communication System) first.
to return to the previous operation.
NOTE
 While the file is selected, hold down the
 If you say “Artist <name>,” you can skip
6 key to cancel track search mode. step 3.
 If there is no operation for five seconds after
selecting the file, that file is played back.
 Operations such as selecting a track will can- 3. After the voice guide says “What Artist
cel track search mode. would you like to play?,” say the artist
name.
4. If there is only one match, the system pro-
To play iPod/USB memory ceeds to step 6.
5. If there are two or more matches, the
device tracks via voice oper- voice guide will say “More than one
ation 1- SPEECH button match was found, would you like to play
N00772001070
2- PICK-UP button <artist name>?” If you say “Yes,” the sys-
When connected to the USB input terminal tem proceeds to step 6.
desired tracks on the iPod/USB memory If you say “No,” the next matching artist
device can be selected and played via voice
To search by artist name is uttered by the system.
N00772200017
operation.
1. Say “Play” on the main menu.
For information concerning the voice recog-
nition function or speaker registration func-
NOTE NOTE NOTE

 If you say “No” to three or all artist names  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-  If you say “No” to three or all album titles
uttered by the system, the voice guide will ing the connected device. uttered by the system, the voice guide will
say “Artist not found, please try again” and If the connected device cannot be recognized say “Album not found, please try again” and
the system returns to step 2. the system returns to step 2.
or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth®
 Search time depends on the number of songs 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice
on your connected device. Devices contain- guide. Follow the voice guide.
ing a large number of songs may take longer 6. After the voice guide says “Playing
to return search results. <album title>,” the system creates a playl-
2. After the voice guide says “Would you ist index for the album title.
like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
6. After the voice guide says “Playing <artist
7 name>,” the system creates a playlist
Genre?,” say “Album”. NOTE
 If the confirmation function is active, the
index for the artist.
NOTE voice guide confirms if the album title is cor-
rect. If the album title is correct, say “Yes”.
 If you say “Album <title>,” you can skip
NOTE step 3.
If not, say “No”. After the voice guide says
 If the confirmation function is active, the “Album not found, please try again,” the sys-
voice guide confirms if the artist name is tem returns to step 2.
correct. If the artist name is correct, say 3. After the voice guide says “What Album
“Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice guide would you like to play?” say the album
says “Artist not found, please try again,” the 7. The system exits the voice recognition
title.
system returns to step 2. mode and starts playback.
4. If there is only one match, the system pro-
ceeds to step 6.
7. The system exits the voice recognition 5. If there are two or more matches, the To search by playlist
mode and starts playback. voice guide will say “More than one N00772400019
match was found, would you like to play 1. Say “Play” on the main menu.
<album title>?” If you say “Yes,” the sys-
To search by album title tem proceeds to step 6.
N00772300018
If you say “No,” the name of the next
1. Say “Play” on the main menu. matching album is uttered by the system.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-  If you say “No” to three or all playlist names  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-
ing the connected device. uttered by the system, the voice guide will ing the connected device.
If the connected device cannot be recognized say “Playlist not found, please try again” and If the connected device cannot be recognized
the system returns to step 2.
or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth® or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth®
2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice
guide. Follow the voice guide. 6. After the voice guide says “Playing guide. Follow the voice guide.
<playlist>,” the system creates an index
2. After the voice guide says “Would you for the playlist. 2. After the voice guide says “Would you
like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
Genre?,” say “Playlist”. NOTE Genre?,” say “Genre”. 7
 If the confirmation function is active, the
NOTE voice guide confirms if the playlist name is NOTE
correct. If the playlist name is correct, say
 If you say “Playlist <playlist>,” you can skip  If you say “Genre <type>,” you can skip step
“Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice guide
step 3. 3.
says “Playlist not found, please try again,”
If the device has no playlist, the voice guide
the system returns to step 2. Refer to “Con-
will say “There are no playlists stored on
firmation function setting” on page 5-244. 3. After the voice guide says “What Genre
device” and the system returns to step 2.
would you like to play?,” say the music
7. The system exits the voice recognition type.
3. After the voice guide says “What Playlist 4. If there is only one match, the system pro-
would you like to play?,” say the playlist mode and starts playback.
ceeds to step 6.
name. 5. If there are two or more matches, the
4. If there is only one match, the system pro- To search by genre voice guide will say “More than one
ceeds to step 6. N00772500010 match was found, would you like to play
5. If there are two or more matches, the 1. Say “Play” on the main menu. <genre>?” If you say “Yes,” the system
voice guide will say “More than one proceeds to step 6.
match was found, would you like to play If you say “No,” the next matching genre
<playlist>?” If you say “Yes,” the system is uttered by the system.
proceeds to step 6.
If you say “No,” the next matching playl-
ist name is uttered by the system.

Listen to Bluetooth Audio
NOTE CAUTION NOTE

 If you say “No” to three or all genres uttered  Never hold these devices in your hand to  Depending on the status of the vehicle and
by the system, the voice guide will say operate while driving, as this is dangerous. device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back
“Genre not found, please try again” and the  Do not leave the Bluetooth audio device after starting the engine.
system returns to step 2. unattended in the vehicle.
 Depending on how the devices are handled,
audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
Connect a Bluetooth-capable
6. After the voice guide says “Playing
<genre>,” the system creates an index for it is recommended that data be backed up. Audio Device
the genre.
Regarding how to connect your Bluetooth
NOTE NOTE device, refer to “Connecting the Bluetooth®
7  If the confirmation function is active, the
 Depending on the type of Bluetooth-capable 2.0 interface and Bluetooth device” on page
audio devices, usage may not be possible, or
voice guide confirms if the genre is correct. 5-247.
functions that can be used may be restricted.
If the genre is correct, say “Yes”. If not, say Operation methods below describe situations
“No”. After the voice guide says “Genre not  Confirm together with the user manuals for
once connection has been completed.
found, please try again,” the system returns the commercially-available Bluetooth-capa-
to step 2. Refer to “Confirmation function ble audio devices.
setting” on page 5-244.  Depending on the type of Bluetooth-capable NOTE
audio devices, volume levels may differ.  If the iPod/iPhone is connected via Bluetooth
There is the danger of loud volumes, so prior as a Bluetooth-capable audio device, then do
7. The system exits the voice recognition to use, it is recommended that you turn the not connect the iPod/iPhone using an iPod
mode and starts playback. volume down. cable. Connection using both methods will
 “Adjust Volume” (P.7-24) result in erroneous operation.
 Depending on the status of the Bluetooth
Listen to Bluetooth Audio audio device, it may take some time until the
N00717500062 device is recognized, or playback starts.
 Bluetooth audio device specifications and
Play Bluetooth Audio
This product can play back tracks on com-
mercially-available Bluetooth-capable audio settings may mean that connection is not
1. Press the MEDIA key to set Bluetooth
devices. possible, or result in differences in operation
or display.
Audio as the source.
 Depending on audio data in the Bluetooth
The selected source is indicated on the
audio device, track information may not be
display.
displayed correctly.

Listen to Bluetooth Audio

2. Press the 5 key. Bluetooth Audio play- Repeat Playback (RPT) NOTE
back starts.
 Press this button again during playback if
Press the 1RPT key. you wish to hear that track, and that track
NOTE will play normally.
Repeat playback of the track currently being
 Hold down the 5 key to pause.
played.
 Press the 6 key to stop.
NOTE
 Each time the 1RPT key is pressed, this
Select the Track (File) switches in the order Repeat OFF, 1 track
repeat, All track repeat, and Repeat OFF.
7
track.
Random Playback (RDM)
track.
Press the 2RDM key.
Fast Forward or Rewind Play the tracks in the Bluetooth Audio device
in a random order.

NOTE
Fast forward/rewind is possible.  Pressing again will cancel.
Switch Playback Mode Scan Playback (SCAN)

Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
Press the SCAN key.
playback are possible.
Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks
on the whole Bluetooth Audio device in
order.

Display Indicator
Display Indicator
N00717700022
This explains content of the display indicator.
Change the Display Mode CAUTION During FM Reception

N00717800094  The operation of changing display contents
You can change the content of the display may impede safe driving, therefore check This switches in the order “Frequency”, “Sta-
safety before operation. tion name”, and “Radio text”.
indicator.
Press the INFO key to switch the display con-
tent.
NOTE NOTE
 Radio text has a maximum display of 64
Each time the INFO key is pressed, the dis-  Up to 11 characters may be displayed at one
characters.
play content changes. time. To display 12 or more characters, press
the PAGE key, and subsequent characters  If there is no text information to display, then
will be displayed. “NO MESSAGE” is displayed.

Display Indicator
During Satellite Radio Reception NOTE NOTE

(if so equipped)  If there is no text information to display, then  If there is no text information to display, then
“NO TITLE” is displayed. “NO TITLE” is displayed.
 Displayed genre name in equipment by type.
This switches in the order “Channel name”,
 The genre name display may not be possible.
“Category name”, “Artist name”, “Track
name”, and “Composer name”.
Display the ID3tag
Hold down the INFO key. During Bluetooth® 2.0 Audio Play-
NOTE back
 The channel and category have a maximum This switches the ID3tag display. N00718300054
display of 8 characters. The other items have
a maximum display of 36 characters.
Each time INFO key is pressed, this switches
in the order “Album name”, “Track name”,
Operating details are the same as in “During 7
iPod Playback” (P.7-43).
“Artist name”, “Genre name”*, and “Operat-
ing status”.
During CD-DA playback
*:Displayed when playing back audio
This switches in the order “Disc title”, “Track files on a USB device.
title”, and “Operating status”.
NOTE NOTE
 If there is no text information to display, then  During display of the ID3tag, hold down the
“NO TITLE” is displayed. INFO key to switch to the folder title display.
 The genre name display may not be possible.
During MP3/WMA/AAC Play-

During iPod Playback
back N00718200037
This switches in the order “Albums”, “Track

This switches in the order “Folder title”, “File
name”, “Artist name”, “Genre name”, and
title”, and “Operating status”.
“Operating status”.

Audio Quality and Volume Balance Adjustment
Audio Quality and Volume Adjust- System Settings

Turn counter-
ment Turn clockwise
Balance Adjustment items
clockwise N00718500144
N00718400084 Change system settings such as product time.

FADER CENTER to FRONT 11 to
Change audio quality settings. REAR 11 CENTER 1. Press the MENU key.
(emphasize (emphasize 2. Press the /SEL key to select settings
Adjust Audio Quality and Vol- REAR) FRONT) items.
ume Balance BAL- LEFT 11 to CENTER to
ANCE CENTER RIGHT 11 Each time the /SEL key is pressed, this
1. Press the /SEL key to select settings (emphasize (emphasize switches in the order Satellite radio set-
7 items. LEFT) RIGHT) tings*1, Gracenote DB*2, PHONE set-
SCV OFF, LOW MID, HIGH tings, Adjust time, and Cancel.
Each time the /SEL key is pressed, this (SCV effect is (SCV effect is 3. Turn the /SEL key to set.
switches in the order BASS, TREBLE, OFF/low) middle/high) 4. Press the /SEL key to determine.
FADER, BALANCE, SCV (speed com-
pensated volume), and Cancel. This completes settings, and displays the
2. Turn the /SEL key to adjust. next settings item.
Adjust-
Turn counter- *1: Displayed when a satellite tuner is con-
ment Turn clockwise nected.
clockwise
items * :Displayed when playing back audio files.
2
BASS -6 to 0 0 to +6
(low low-pass (high low-pass
volume) volume)
TRE- -6 to 0 0 to +6
BLE (Low high-pass (High high-pass
volume) volume)

System Settings
Satellite Radio Settings (if so equipped)
Change each satellite radio setting.
Settings
Settings name Settings item Settings content
value
SIRIUS ID — — This displays the SIRIUS ID.
SKIP SETTING SKIP SETTING ON SKIP can be set for each channel. Channels for which SKIP is set are excluded
SELECT CH*1 OFF from the search during up/down channel selecting and scanning.
They can be received when selecting channels using the preset keys or searching
for a station.
7
SKIP SETTING — When “YES” is selected, the SKIP settings for all channels are turned off.
ALL RESET
LOCK SETTING LOCK SETTING ON LOCK can be set for each channel. Channels for which LOCK is set are
SELECT CH*2 OFF excluded from the search during up/down channel selecting and scanning.
If a channel for which LOCK is set is selected when selecting channels using the
preset keys or searching for a station, “CH LCKED” is displayed within about 2
seconds after the channel text is displayed. The sound is muted.
LOCK SETTING — When “YES” is selected and the CODE for settings is input, the LOCK settings
ALL RESET for all channels are turned off.
LOCK SETTING — The CODE required for the LOCK settings is changed. (The factory setting is
EDIT CODE “1111”.)
If the input code is incorrect, “LOCK SETTING WRG LC” is displayed.
*1:Each time the /SET key is pressed, this switches in the order Settings channel select, Change SKIP settings, and Complete settings.
To return to “each channel SKIP setting”, press the 6 key.

System Settings
*2:Once the CODE (passcode) of your choice is entered, each time the /SET key is pressed, this switches in the order Settings channel select,
Change LOCK settings, and Complete settings.
To return to “each channel LOCK setting”, press the 6 key. Input the CODE from the 1 RPT key to the 6 key.
Time Setting NOTE NOTE

 In order to finish adjusting the time, hold  Depending on the distance between the prod-
Set the time manually. uct and the mobile phone, the conditions
down the /SEL key until the seconds are
reset to “00”. within the vehicle, and types of screening,
 The time can also be set using another proce- connection may not be possible. In these
dure. cases, situate the mobile phone as close as
possible to the product.
7 H M
Refer to “CLOCK” on page 7-49.
 Even though a Bluetooth-capable mobile
phone, characteristics and specifications may
/SEL mean that correct operation may not be pos-
PHONE Settings sible.
 For safety’s sake, do not operate the mobile
Change the mobile phone voice cut- in set- phone while driving. When operating the
mobile phone, first stop the vehicle in a safe
tings and the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface lan-
location.
guage.
1. Select “YES” at the “Adjust time” screen,  Even though a Bluetooth-capable mobile
Depending on the vehicle, PHONE settings phone, phone specifications and settings may
and press the /SEL key. may not be possible. result in differences in display, or prevent
2. Press the various keys to adjust. correct operation.
H - “Hour” setting NOTE  Some models may not be confirmed as con-
 Cancel functions such as the mobile phone nected, or may not connect.
Press this key to fast-forward the
“hours”. “dial lock”, and connect while on the Supported profiles
M - “Minutes” setting standby screen.
 While connected, mobile phone (receiving Hands-free HFP(v1.5)
“minutes”. calls, etc.) operations may not function cor- Phonebook
rectly. OPP(v1.1), PBAP(v1.0)
transfer
This completes the adjustment.

Troubleshooting
(“Set value” bold typeface indicates factory
default settings.)
Gracenote DB
Settings Settings The version number can be confirmed.

Settings content
name value
1. Select “Gracenote DB” and press the
HFM ENG- Change the hands
/SEL key.
voice lan- LISH free module voice
guage set- FRENCH language. 2. Turn the /SEL key and select “DB Ver-
tings sion”.
SPANISH 3. Press the /SEL key.
JAPA- The DB Version is displayed.
NESE 7
Troubleshooting
N00718600044
Please check these items if a message appears on the display, or if you think something is not working properly.
If This Message Appears...
A message is displayed on this product according to the situation.

Troubleshooting
Mode Message Cause Response
CD CHECK DISC The disc is inserted upside down. Insert with the label side up.
The disc has condensation on it. Wait a while before inserting again.
DISC ERROR The disc is damaged. Clean the read surface of the disc.
The disc is dirty.
INTERNAL E The drive has malfunctioned for some reason. Check that there is no problem with the disc, and
insert the disc again. If the problem persists, con-
sult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
7 HEAT ERROR The temperature inside the product is high. Remove the disc, and wait for the internal tempera-
ture to return to normal.
USB FILE ERROR Files that cannot be played are selected. Select files that can be played.
 “Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)” (P.7-19)
USB BUS PWR There is high or low electrical current or voltage. Turn the power OFF and wait a short while. If the
LSI ERROR There is an internal malfunction for some reason. problem persists, consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
UNSUPPORTED Unsupported audio files have been played. Confirm audio files that can be played.
FORMAT  “Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)” (P.7-19)
UNSUPPORTED An unsupported USB device has been connected. Please connect a USB memory device.
DEVICE
iPod NO SONG An iPod/iPhone not containing any tracks has been Connect an iPod/iPhone containing tracks.
connected.
VER ERROR This iPod/iPhone software version is not supported. Please change to a supported software version.
Other ERROR DC An abnormal direct voltage has been sent to the Turn the power OFF and wait a short while. If the
speakers. problem persists, consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Clock (if so equipped)
If You Think Something Is Not Working Properly...
Here is a list of symptoms, causes and responses if you think something is not working properly.
Symptoms Cause Response

There is no sound or quiet The volume is turned to its minimum. Adjust the volume.
sound.  “Adjust Volume” (P.7-24)
The balance or fader is turned to one side. Adjust the balance or fader.
 “Adjust Audio Quality and Volume Balance” (P.7-44)
The disc cannot be A disc is already in the product. Eject the disc. 7
inserted.  “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-24)
There is no disc in the product, but the prod- Press the eject button once.
uct says it is loading.  “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-24)
The disc cannot be played. The disc is inserted upside down. Insert with the label side up.
The disc has condensation on it. Wait a while before inserting.
The disc is dirty. Clean the read surface of the disc.
The sound skips in the The disc is damaged or dirty. Check the disc.
same place.
There is no sound, even if Damage to or dirt on the disc means that its Check the disc. Additionally, if using CD-R/RW discs, their charac-
the disc is inserted. data cannot be read. teristics may render them unable to be played.
Clock (if so equipped) NOTE

N00755001150  Reset the time after the battery terminals are
disconnected and reconnected.
The time is displayed when the ignition
switch or the operation mode is in ON or
ACC.

General information about your radio
Time Setting NOTE Signal transmission

 The time can also be set using another proce-
dure. FM signals do not follow the earth surface
Refer to “System Settings” on page 7-44. nor are they reflected by the upper atmo-
sphere. For this reason, FM broadcasts cannot
H M PAGE be received over long distances. AM signals
General information about follow the earth’s surface and are reflected by
/SEL your radio the upper atmosphere. For this reason, AM
N00733901540 broadcasts can be received over longer dis-
Your vehicle’s radio receives both AM and tances.
7 FM stations.
The quality of your reception is affected by FM AM
distance, obstacles, and signal interference.
1. Press and hold the PAGE key until the
clock display flashes. This radio complies with Part 15 of Federal
2. Press the various keys to adjust. Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
(for vehicles sold in U.S.A.). Operation is
H - “Hour” setting subject to the following conditions:
25 to 40 mile radius 100 mile radius
“hours”.  The device may not cause harmful inter-
(40 to 64 km) (160 km)
M - “Minutes” setting ference.
Press this key to fast-forward the  This device must accept any interference
“minutes”. recieved, including interference that may
cause undesirable operation. Weak reception (fading)
3. Press the PAGE key to finish adjusting the
time. When the adjustment is complete,
the clock display stops flashing.
CAUTION Because of the limited range of FM signals
 Changes or modifications not expressly and the way FM waves transmit, you may
approved by the party meeting the above experience weak or fading FM reception.
NOTE conditions could void the user’s authority to When the broadcast is blocked by mountains
 If the PAGE key is pressed and held when operate the equipment. or similar obstructions, reception can be dis-
the time adjustment is finished, the seconds turbed.
will be reset to “00”.

General information about your radio
Reflection Cross modulation Causes of disturbances

The reason why one can hear FM but not AM If one listens to a weak station and is in the FM reception is affected by the electrical sys-
in parking garages, under bridges etc., is that vicinity of another strong station, both sta- tems of vehicles in the vicinity, especially
FM signals, unlike AM signals, are reflected tions might be received simultaneously. those without an electronic noise suppression
by solid objects such as buildings, etc. device. The disturbance is even greater if the
Because FM signals are easily reflected by station is weak or poorly tuned.
buildings, this can also cause reception dis- FM reception is not as sensitive to electrical
turbances. disturbances as AM. AM reception is sensi-
The direct signal from the broadcast station tive to electrical disturbances such as power
reaches the antenna slightly before the lines, lightning and other types of similar
reflected signal. This time difference may electrical phenomena. 7
cause some reception disturbance or flutter.
This problem occurs primarily in urban areas.
FM stereo reception
Stereo reception requires a high quality

broadcast signal. This means that types of
disturbances mentioned previously become
more marked and the reception range is
somewhat diminished during stereo recep-
tion.

For emergencies
If the vehicle breaks down ...............................................................8-2

Jump-starting the engine ..................................................................8-2
Engine overheating ..........................................................................8-4
Jack and tools ...................................................................................8-5
How to change a tire ........................................................................8-6
Towing ...........................................................................................8-14
Operation under adverse driving conditions ..................................8-15
Fuel Pump Shut-off System ...........................................................8-16 8
If the vehicle breaks down
If the vehicle breaks down Jump-starting the engine CAUTION

N00836301230 N00836401778  Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-
volt battery. If the other system isn’t 12-volt,
If your vehicle breaks down on the road, If the engine cannot be started because the
both systems can be damaged.
move to the shoulder and turn on the hazard battery is weak or dead, you can start it with
warning flashers. If there is no shoulder, or the battery from another vehicle using jumper
the shoulder is not safe, drive in the right lane cables. 3. Set the parking brake firmly on your vehi-
slowly with the hazard lights flashing, until cle and move the selector lever into the
you come to a safe stopping place. Keep the “P” (PARK) position.
WARNING 4. Set the parking brake firmly on the other
flashers flashing.  To reduce the risk of igniting flammable vehicle. Put the automatic transaxle in “P”
gas that may be emitted from the battery,
(PARK) or the manual transaxle in “N”
If the engine stops/fails carefully read this section before jump-
(Neutral).
starting the vehicle.
8  Do not try to start your vehicle by pushing
5. Turn the ignition switch (the engine
If the engine stops, there will be no power or towing. This can cause an accident switch) on each vehicle to the “LOCK” or
assist to the steering and brakes, making these resulting in serious injury or death and “OFF” position.
difficult to use. can damage the vehicle.
NOTE
 The brake booster will not work, so the  Turn off all lights, heater, and other electrical
brakes will not grip well. The brake pedal NOTE loads. This will avoid sparks and help save
will be harder to press than usual.  Do not use jumper cables if they have dam- both batteries.
 Since there is no power steering assist, the age or corrosion.
steering wheel will be hard to turn. 6. Make sure your battery electrolyte is at
1. Take off any metal jewelry such as watch the proper level. (Refer to “Battery” on
When the engine fails at the bands or bracelets that might create an page 9-13.)
intersection accidental electrical contact.
2. Position the vehicles close enough
together so that the jumper cables can
Get help from your passengers, bystanders,
reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t
etc. to push the vehicle and move it to a safe
touching each other.
area.
8-2 For emergencies

Jump-starting the engine

3.0 liter models 8. Connect one end of the other jumper cable
WARNING
to the negative (-) terminal of the
 If the electrolyte fluid is not visible, or
looks frozen, DO NOT ATTEMPT JUMP booster battery (B), and then connect the
STARTING!! other end to the designated ground
The battery might split open or explode if location of the vehicle with the discharged
the temperature is below the freezing battery (A) at the point farthest from the
point or if it is not filled to the proper battery.
level.
WARNING
7. Connect one end of one jumper cable  Be sure to follow the proper order when
to the positive (+) terminal of the disconnecting the batteries, of:
charged battery (A), and then connect the   
other end to the positive (+) terminal WARNING  Make sure that the connection is made 8
of the booster battery (B).  Make sure that the jumper cables and to the correct designated location (as
your clothing are clear of the cooling fans shown in the illustration) properly. If the
2.4 liter models connection is directly made to the negative
and drive belts. Entanglement with the
fans or belts can cause serious personal (-) terminal of the battery, the flammable
injury. gases from inside the battery might catch
fire and explode, causing personal injury.
 When connecting the jumper cable, do not
connect the positive (+) cable to the nega-
NOTE tive (-) terminal. Sparks can make the bat-
 Open the terminal cover before connecting tery explode.
the jumper cable to the positive terminal of
the battery.
(Refer to “Battery” on page 9-13.) 9. Start the engine in the vehicle providing
 Use the proper cables suitable for the battery the boost. Let the engine idle a few min-
size. utes, then start the engine in the vehicle
Otherwise heat damage to the cables could with the discharged battery.
result. 10. After the engine is started, disconnect the
cables in the reverse order from the way
you connected them.
For emergencies 8-3

Engine overheating
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn on
Charging the battery by using As your vehicle has anti-lock the hazard warning flashers.
an external battery charger brakes 2. With the engine still running, carefully
raise the engine hood to vent the engine
If you drive your vehicle with a low battery compartment.
WARNING charge after the engine has been started by 3. Check that the cooling fan is running. If
 Always remove the battery from your the fan is not turning, stop the engine
using jumper cables, the engine may misfire.
vehicle when the battery is charged by an
This can cause the anti-lock braking system immediately and contact an authorized
external battery charger.
warning light to blink on and off. This is only Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
 Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away
due to the low battery voltage. It is not a ity of your choice for assistance.
from the battery because the battery could
explode. problem with the brake system. If this hap-
 Keep your work area well vented when pens, fully charge the battery and ensure the WARNING
charging system is operating properly.  To avoid personal injury, keep hands, hair,
8 charging or using the battery in an
enclosed space. jewelry and clothes away from the cooling
 Remove all the caps before charging the fan. The cooling fan can start at any time.
battery.
Engine overheating
N00836501375
 Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro- 4. If you see steam or spray coming from
sive diluted sulfuric acid. If electrolyte When the engine is overheating, the warning under the hood, turn off the engine.
comes in contact with your hands, eyes, will be displayed in the instrument cluster as 5. If you do not see steam or spray coming
clothes, or the painted surface of your follows. from under the hood, leave the engine on
vehicle, thoroughly flush with water. If
until the high coolant temperature warn-
electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them  The information screen in the multi infor-
immediately and thoroughly with water,
ing goes off. After the high coolant tem-
mation display will be interrupted and the
and get prompt medical attention. perature warning has gone off, you can
engine coolant temperature warning dis-
 Always wear protective clothing and gog- start driving again. If the high coolant
gles when working near the battery. play will appear. Also “ ” will blink. temperature warning stays on, turn off the
 Keep the battery out of the reach of chil- (Color liquid crystal display type) engine.
dren.  The high coolant temperature warning
lamp will illuminate. (Mono-color liquid
If these warnings are displayed:
8-4 For emergencies

Jack and tools
WARNING WARNING Jack and tools

 Before raising the engine hood, check to  Removing the radiator cap could scald N00836601389
see if there is steam or spray coming from you with escaping hot water or steam.
under the hood. Steam or spray coming When checking the radiator level, cover
from an overheated engine could seriously the cap with a cloth before trying to
Storage
scald you. remove it. Turn it slowly counterclock-
Do not open the hood until there is no wise, without pressing down, to the first The jack and tools are stowed on the right
steam or spray. notch. The pressure in the system will then side of the luggage compartment.
be let out. When the pressure is COM-
PLETELY LET OUT, press down and
6. When you do not see any more steam or
keep turning the cap counterclockwise
spray, open the hood. Look for obvious until it comes off.
leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Be
careful as components will be hot. Any
leak source must be repaired. 9. Start the engine, and slowly add coolant, 8
7. If there is no obvious leak source, check up to the bottom of the filler neck. Use
the coolant level in the engine coolant plain water if you have to (and replace it
reserve tank. If there is none, or if it is too with the right coolant as soon as possible).
low, slowly add coolant. 10. Replace the radiator cap and tighten it
8. If the engine coolant reserve tank needs fully. Check the engine coolant tempera-
ture display on the multi information dis- 1- Tools
coolant, you will probably also need to
play (Color liquid crystal display type) or 2- Jack
add coolant to the radiator. Do not loosen
or remove the radiator cap until the engine the high coolant temperature warning
has cooled down. light (Mono-color liquid crystal display
type). You can start driving again when
the high coolant temperature warning
does not come on.
11. Have the system inspected by your autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
facility of your choice.
For emergencies 8-5

How to change a tire
Tools How to change a tire

N00836901829
Before changing a tire, first stop your vehicle

in a safe, flat location.
To retract
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable
ground.
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
3. Move the selector lever to the “P”
(PARK) position and turn the ignition
switch (the engine switch) to the “LOCK”
or “OFF” position.
8 1- Bar To store 4. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
2- Wheel nut wrench set up a warning sign, such as a warning
1. Retract the jack, then return it to its origi- triangle or flashing signal lamp, at an ade-
nal position. quate distance from the vehicle, and have
2. Extend the jack and firmly set it in its all your passengers leave the vehicle.
Removing and storing the jack storage area, then attach the lid. 5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
it is raised on the jack, place chocks or
blocks (A) at the tire that is diagonally
To remove
opposite from the tire (B) you are chang-
1. Remove the lid. ing.
To retract
2. Retract the jack to remove it from the
attaching hardware (A).
To extend
8-6 For emergencies

Spare tire information CAUTION

N00849600315  Driving with an improperly inflated tire can
cause an accident. If you have no choice but
Compact spare tire to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep
your speed down and avoid sudden steering
or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the
The compact spare tire is stowed below the correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to
luggage compartment floor. It is designed to “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-18.
save space in the luggage compartment. Its  The compact spare tire should be used only
lighter weight makes it easier to use if a flat temporarily. While the compact spare tire is
tire occurs. being used, the tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem will not function properly. Have the tire
WARNING WARNING
replaced or repaired at an authorized Mit-
 Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the
 Tires, including spare tire, degrade over
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of 8
correct tire when jacking up the vehicle. If your choice as soon as possible.
time with age even when they are not  Do not go over 50 mph (80 km/h) when driv-
the vehicle moves while jacked up, the
being used. It is recommended that tires ing with the compact spare tire.
jack could slip out of position, leading to
over 6 years generally be replaced even if  Avoid sudden starting and braking when
an accident.
damage is not obvious.
driving with the compact spare tire.
 Do not drive through automatic car washes
NOTE CAUTION
and over obstacles that could possibly dam-
 The chocks shown in the illustration do not age the underside of your vehicle. Because
 While the compact spare tire is stowed, the the compact spare tire is smaller than the
come with your vehicle. It is recommended
inflation pressure should be checked at least original tire, there is less clearance between
that you purchase chocks or blocks and keep
once a month to assure that it remains at the the ground and your vehicle.
them in the vehicle for use if needed.
recommended inflation pressure. See the tire  Because the compact spare tire is designed
 If chocks or blocks are not available, use
and loading information placard attached to only for your vehicle, do not use it on any
stones or any other objects that are large
the driver’s door sill. Refer to “Tire and load- other vehicle.
enough to hold the wheel in position.
ing information placard” on page 11-3.  Do not put the compact spare tire on a differ-
ent wheel, and do not put standard tires,
6. Get the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings on the
ready. compact spare wheel. Otherwise, you could
(Refer to “Jack and tools” on page 8-5.) damage these parts or other parts on your
vehicle.
For emergencies 8-7

CAUTION CAUTION
 Do not use tire chains with your compact  When hooking or unhooking the tire hanger,
spare tire. Using a chain could cause damage be sure to hold the tire hanger firmly to pre-
to your vehicle and loss of the chains. vent it from dropping on your foot.
To remove the spare tire

N00849701296
To change a tire
1. Open the liftgate and use the bar to N00849801457
remove the cover (A) over the tire hanger 1. On vehicles with wheel covers, first
mounting bolt. remove the covers (refer to “Wheel cov-
ers” on page 8-13). Then, loosen the
CAUTION wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench. Do
8  While checking the tire hanger, carefully not remove the wheel nuts yet.
loosen the tire hanger mounting bolt. Loos-
ening it too much could pull out the hook and
cause the compact spare tire to drop.
3. Lift up the section of the tire hanger (B)

that is marked with the arrow in the illus-
tration and remove it from the hook (C).
Then lower it and remove the tire.
2. With the wheel nut wrench, loosen the tire
hanger mounting bolt by turning it coun-
terclockwise.
2. Place the jack under one of the jacking
points (A) shown in the illustration. Use
the jacking point closest to the tire you
wish to change.
8-8 For emergencies

3. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange

WARNING portion (B) fits in the groove (C) at the top WARNING
 Set the jack only at the positions shown of the jack.  Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the 8
here. If the jack is set at a wrong position, tire is raised off the ground. It is danger-
it could dent your vehicle or the jack ous to raise the vehicle any higher.
might fall over and cause personal injury.  Do not get under your vehicle while using
 Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur- the jack.
face.  Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it
Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause sitting on the jack for a long time. Both
personal injury. Always use the jack on a are very dangerous.
flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack,  Do not use a jack except the one that came
make sure there are no sand or pebbles with your vehicle.
under the jack base.  The jack should not be used for any pur-
pose other than to change a tire.
 No one should be in your vehicle when
NOTE 4. Insert the bar (D) into the wheel nut using the jack.
 Put the spare wheel under the vehicle body wrench (E). Then put the end of the bar  Do not start or run the engine while your
near the jack. This makes it safer if the jack vehicle is on the jack.
into the shaft’s jack end, as shown in the
slips out of position.  Do not turn the raised wheel. The tires
illustration.
that are still on the ground could turn and
Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench until
make your vehicle fall off the jack.
the tire is raised slightly off the ground
surface.
For emergencies 8-9


5. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut
wrench, then take the wheel off.
Type 1
CAUTION
 Handle the wheel carefully when changing
the tire, to avoid scratching the wheel sur- Type 2
face.
6. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub sur-

face (F), hub bolts (G) or in the installa-
tion holes (H) in the wheel, and then
mount the spare tire. 7. Turn the wheel nut clockwise by hand to
initially tighten them.
NOTE
8 [Type 1: On vehicles with steel wheels]  Flange nuts can be temporarily used on the
compact spare wheel as shown in the illustra-
Temporarily tighten the wheel nuts by
tion, but return to the original wheel and tire
hand until the tapered parts of the wheel as soon as possible.
nuts make light contact with the seats of
the wheel holes and the wheel is not
loose.
[Type 2: On vehicles with aluminium
wheels]
Temporarily tighten the wheel nuts by
hand until the flange parts of the wheel
nuts make light contact with the wheel
WARNING and the wheel is not loose.
 Mount the spare wheel with the valve stem
(I) facing outward. If you cannot see the
valve stem (I), you have installed the
wheel backwards.
Operating the vehicle with the spare wheel
installed backwards can cause vehicle CAUTION
damage and result in an accident.  Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or
the nuts or they will tighten too much.
8-10 For emergencies

NOTE
 If all 4 aluminum wheels are changed to steel
wheels, use tapered nuts.
8. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground, by rotating the wheel
nut wrench counterclockwise.
CAUTION CAUTION
 Never use your foot or a pipe extension to  Driving with an improperly inflated tire can 8
apply added force to the wheel nut wrench cause an accident. If you have no choice but
when tightening the wheel nuts. If you do so, to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep
you can over-tighten the wheel nuts and your speed down and avoid sudden steering
damage the wheel, wheel nuts and hub bolts. or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the
correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to
“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-18.
9. Tighten the nuts in the order shown in the 10. Lower the jack all the way and remove it.
 After changing the tire and driving the vehi-
illustration until each nut has been tight- 11. Check the tire inflation pressure. The rec-
cle about 620 miles (1,000 km), retighten the
ened to the torque listed here. ommended tire pressure for your vehicle wheel nuts to make sure that they have not
65 to 80 ft-lb (88 to 108 N•m) is listed on the tire and loading informa- come loose.
tion placard attached to the driver’s door  If the steering wheel vibrates when driving
sill as shown in the illustration. Refer to after changing the tire, have the tire checked
“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-18. for balance at an authorized Mitsubishi
choice.
 Do not mix one type of tire with another or
use a different size from the one listed. This
would cause early wear and poor handling.
For emergencies 8-11


4. Install the cover over the tire hanger
To store the spare tire CAUTION mounting bolt.
N00832300020  Make sure you hook the tire hanger in the
1. Place the tire on the center of the tire proper position. If the tire hanger is not
hanger, with the wheel surface facing hooked properly, the hook could damage the To store the flat tire, jack, bar
vehicle body or the tire could fall off the
upwards.
vehicle while driving, causing an accident.
and wheel nut wrench
N00850001172
CAUTION Store the flat tire in the luggage compartment.
 Storing the tire with the wheel surface facing 3. With the wheel nut wrench, firmly tighten
Reverse the removing procedure when stor-
down may damage the wheel or tire hanger. the tire hanger mounting bolt by turning it
ing the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench.
If you find any damage on a spare tire, do not clockwise.
use the tire and contact an authorized Mit- Refer to “Jack and tools” on page 8-5.
your choice.
8
2. Lift up the tire hanger (A) and hook it on
the hook (B).
CAUTION
 Confirm that the tire hanger is firmly secured
after storing the spare tire. If the tire hanger
is not secured, it could drop out while driv-
ing, causing an accident.
 When hooking or unhooking the tire hanger,
be sure to hold the tire hanger firmly to pre-
vent it from dropping on your foot.

Wheel cover (if so equipped) CAUTION

N00849401235  Trying to remove the wheel cover with only
your bare hands can seriously injure your
To remove fingers.
Wrap the tip of the bar with a cloth, insert it

into the notch provided in the wheel cover, To install
and pry the cover away from the wheel.
Using the same procedure at the other wheel
cover notches, work the wheel cover away CAUTION
from the wheel to remove it completely.  Before installing the wheel cover to the
wheel, make sure that the tabs (A) on the
back of the wheel cover correctly engage the
NOTE
ring (B) to prevent the wheel cover from  The back of the cover has a symbol (E) that 8
coming off. Do not install a wheel cover that shows the position of the notch.
has broken tabs.
2. Push the bottom (F) of the wheel cover
into the wheel.
3. Gently push in both sides (G) of the wheel
cover and hold them in place with both
knees.
4. Gently tap the top (H) of the wheel cover
around its outer circumference to push it
in.
NOTE
 The wheel cover is made of plastic. Be care-
ful when prying it off.
1. Align the tire air valve (C) and the wheel

cover notch (D).

Towing
NOTE Towing the vehicle by a tow

 Your vehicle cannot tow any other vehicle. truck
There may be local regulations concerning

towing in your area.
CAUTION
 This vehicle must not be towed by a tow
Obey the regulations of the area where you
truck using sling lift type equipment (Type
are driving your vehicle.
A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will dam-
age the bumper and front end.
 This vehicle must not be towed with the driv-
ing wheels on the ground (Type B) as illus-
trated.
This could result in the driving system dam-
8 Towing age.
N00837001898
 Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with the
rear wheels on the ground (Type C) as illus-
If your vehicle needs to be trated. This could result in the driving system
damage or vehicle may jump at the carriage.
towed If you tow all-wheel drive vehicles, use only
Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with Type D or E equipment.
this style.
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to
have it done by a commercial tow truck ser-
vice.
When towing is required, transport the vehi-
cle using a tow truck.
Incorect towing equipment could damage
your vehicle.
CAUTION
 Do not attempt to be towed by another vehi-
cle with a rope.

Operation under adverse driving conditions
CAUTION Operation under adverse On wet roads

 [For front-wheel drive vehicle equipped with
the active stability control (ASC)]
driving conditions
If the vehicle is towed with the ignition
N00837201760
CAUTION
switch in the “ON” position or the operation  Avoid flooded roads. Water is often deeper
mode in ON and only the front wheels raised If your vehicle becomes stuck in than it looks, and you could be seriously hurt
off the ground (Type C), the ASC may oper-
ate, resulting in an accident. When towing
sand, mud or snow by driving into flood water.
 When driving in rain, on water-covered
the vehicle with the front wheels raised, keep roads, or through a car wash, water could get
the ignition switch or the operation mode as If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, into the brake discs and make them fail tem-
follows. or mud, it can often be moved by a rocking porarily. In such cases, lightly press the
[Except for vehicles equipped with the motion. Rock your vehicle back and forth to brake pedal to see if they are working prop-
F.A.S.T.-key] free it. erly. If they are not, press the pedal lightly
The ignition switch is in “LOCK”, “OFF” or Do not rev the engine or spin the wheels. several times while driving to dry the brake 8
“ACC” position. pads or linings, then check them again.
Constant efforts to free a stuck vehicle can
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]  When driving in rain, a layer of water may
The operation mode is in OFF or ACC.
cause overheating and transaxle failure. Let
the engine idle for a few minutes to cool the form between the tires and the road surface
(hydroplaning). This loosens your tires’ grip
transaxle before trying again.
Towing a front-wheel drive vehi- If your vehicle is still stuck after several rock-
on the road, making it difficult to steer or
brake properly. When driving on a wet road:
cle with front wheels off the ing attempts, call for a commercial tow truck • Drive your vehicle at a safe speed.
ground (Type C) service. • Do not drive on worn tires.
• Always keep the tires at the correct infla-
Release the parking brake. WARNING tion pressures.
Set the selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL)  When trying to rock your vehicle out of a
position. stuck position, make sure that there are no
people nearby. The rocking motion can
make your vehicle suddenly lurch forward
or backward, and injure any bystanders.

Fuel Pump Shut-off System

In the event of a collision causing frontal air-
On snowy or icy roads CAUTION bag deployment, the fuel pump shut-off sys-
 Do not depress the accelerator pedal rapidly.
 When driving on a road covered with tem will activate to stop fuel supply to the
The vehicle could start moving when it
snow or ice, use snow tires. Tire chains engine.
breaks free from the ice, possibly resulting in
cannot be used on your vehicle. There an accident.
may be state or local regulations about
using snow tires. Always check the regu-
lations in your local area before using On a bumpy or rutted road
them. Refer to “Snow tires” on page 9-21
and “Tire chains” on page 9-21.  Drive as slow as possible when driving on
 Drive slowly. Do not make sudden starts bumpy, rutted roads or over potholes.
or stops, sharp turns, or slam on the
8 brakes.
 Allow extra distance between your vehi-
CAUTION
 Driving on bumpy, rutted roads or over pot-
cle and the vehicle in front of you, and holes can damage the tires and wheels.
avoid sudden braking. Wheels with low-profiles tires or under-
 If a skid occurs when the accelerator inflated tires are especially at risk for dam-
pedal is depressed, take your foot off the age.
pedal. Steer gently in the direction of the
skid.
 Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock Fuel Pump Shut-off System
braking system (ABS). Hold the brake
N00860600031
pedal down firmly and keep it depressed.
Do not pump the brake pedal which will WARNING
result in reduced braking performance.  Before attempting to restart the engine
 After parking on snowy or icy roads, it after a collision, always inspect the ground
may be difficult to move your vehicle due under the vehicle for leaking fuel. If a fuel
to the brake being frozen. Depress the leak is found or a fuel odor is detected, do
accelerator pedal little by little to move not restart the engine.
the vehicle when safe to do so.  Mitsubishi Motors recommends that your
vehicle be inspected by an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer after any collision.

Vehicle care and maintenance
Service precautions ..........................................................................9-2

Catalytic converter ...........................................................................9-2
Engine hood .....................................................................................9-3
View of the engine compartment .....................................................9-5
Engine oil and oil filter ....................................................................9-6
Engine coolant .................................................................................9-8
Air cleaner filter ...............................................................................9-9
Automatic transaxle fluid (if so equipped) .....................................9-11
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid (if so equipped) .9-11
Transfer oil (All-wheel drive models) ...........................................9-12 9
Rear axle oil (All-wheel drive models) .........................................9-12
Washer fluid ...................................................................................9-12
Brake fluid .....................................................................................9-12
Battery ............................................................................................9-13
Tires ...............................................................................................9-15
Brake pedal free play .....................................................................9-21
Parking brake lever stroke (if so equipped) ....................................9-22
Wiper blades ..................................................................................9-22
Emission-control system maintenance ..........................................9-22
General maintenance .....................................................................9-23
For cold and snowy weather ..........................................................9-25
Fusible links ...................................................................................9-25
Fuses ..............................................................................................9-25
Replacement of light bulbs ............................................................9-31
Vehicle care precautions ................................................................9-39
Cleaning the inside of your vehicle ...............................................9-40
Cleaning the outside of your vehicle .............................................9-41
Service precautions
Service precautions WARNING WARNING

N00937301498  When checking or servicing the inside of  Handling your vehicle’s parts and materi-
Taking regular care of your vehicle will pre- the engine compartment, be sure the als in the wrong way can injure you. Ask
serve its value and appearance as long as pos- engine is stopped and has had a chance to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
sible. cool down. or a repair facility of your choice if you
 If you need to work in the engine compart- have questions.
You can do some of the maintenance work ment with the engine running, be espe-
yourself, and the rest should only be per- cially careful that your clothing, hair, etc.
does not get caught in the cooling fans,
formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
drive belts, or other moving parts.
 After performing the maintenance work,
If you discover a malfunction or other prob-
make sure that no tools or cloths are left
lem, have it corrected by an authorized Mit- behind in the engine compartment.
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of If they are left behind, a fire or damage to
your choice. the vehicle may occur.
9 This section describes the maintenance  The cooling fans can turn on automati-
inspections that you can do yourself, if you so cally even if the engine is not running.
desire. Follow the instructions and precau- Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
tions for each procedure. position to be safe while you work in the
engine compartment. Have you purchased the Mitsubishi Motors
 Do not smoke or allow open flames around Diamond Care Protection Plan? The Plan
fuel or the battery. The fumes are flamma- supplements your new vehicle warranties.
ble.
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
 Be extremely careful when working
for details.
around the battery. It contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.
 Do not get under your vehicle while it is on Catalytic converter
a jack. N00937401473
Always use properly rated automotive
jack stands. The catalytic converter requires you to use
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
A- Cooling fans destroy the emission-control effectiveness of
B- Caution label the converter.
9-2 Vehicle care and maintenance
Engine hood
Normally, the catalytic converter does not  Do not try to start the engine by pushing
require maintenance. However, it is important or towing the vehicle. If the battery is Engine hood
to keep the engine properly tuned for the con- weak or run down, use jumper cables to N00937501588
verter to continue to work properly. properly start the engine.

 Do not idle the engine with any spark plug To open
CAUTION wires disconnected or removed, such as
 Damage to the catalytic converter can result
when performing diagnostic tests. Use the engine hood release lever (located
if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating  Do not idle the engine for a long time if it under the instrument panel near the driver’s
condition. If the engine malfunctions or mis- is idling roughly or otherwise obviously door) to unlock the engine hood.
fires, or if your vehicle performance suffers, malfunctioning.
have it serviced promptly. Running your  To prevent the catalytic converter from Pull the lever toward you to release the
vehicle when it is overheated may result in being damaged from unburned gas, do not engine hood latch.
damage to the converter and vehicle. race the engine when turning off the igni-
tion switch.
 Stop driving the vehicle if you think the
WARNING performance is noticeably low, or the
9
 Do not park or run your vehicle in areas engine has a malfunction such as with the
where combustible materials such as dry ignition, etc. If you are not able to stop
grass or leaves can come in contact with a driving immediately, slow down and drive
hot exhaust, since a fire could occur. for only a short time. Have your vehicle
 Do not put undercoat paint on the cata-
checked at an authorized Mitsubishi
lytic converter.
To reduce the possibility of catalytic con-  In unusual situations involving major
verter damage: engine problems, a burning odor may
indicate severe and abnormal catalytic
WARNING
 Use UNLEADED GASOLINE ONLY of  Never use the release lever to unlatch the
converter overheating. If this occurs, stop
the type of recommended in the “Fuel engine hood while the vehicle is in motion.
in a safe place, shut the engine off and let
selection”.  Do not drive your vehicle unless the
the vehicle cool. Once the engine is cool,
 Do not drive with an extremely low fuel engine hood is locked.
immediately take your vehicle to an
level. Running out of gas could damage
the catalytic converter.
repair facility of your choice for service.
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-3

Engine hood
Release the lever and lift the engine hood.
CAUTION CAUTION
 Always insert the support prop into the hole  Make sure the engine hood is firmly closed
specially made for it. Propping the engine before driving.
hood at any other place could cause the prop If you drive without the engine hood com-
to slip out and lead to an accident. pletely closed, it could open up while driv-
 The hood prop can fall out if the hood is ing.
lifted by a strong wind.
NOTE
To close  If this does not close the engine hood prop-
erly, drop it again from a slightly higher
Unlatch the prop from the engine hood and position.
put it back in its retainer.  Do not push down strongly on the engine
hood. Depending on how strongly or where
NOTE you push down, you could create a dent in
9  To prevent damage to the engine hood and the vehicle body.
wipers, make sure the wipers are at resting  If you drive with the engine hood left open, a
position when you open the engine hood. warning display is displayed on the informa-
tion screen in the multi-information display.
Support the engine hood with the hood prop.
Insert the hood prop securely in the opening
under the hood marked with an arrow.
Slowly lower the engine hood about 8 inches

(20 cm), then let it drop from its own weight.
CAUTION
 Be careful not to trap your hands or fingers
when closing the engine hood.

View of the engine compartment
View of the engine compartment

N00937601749
2.4 L models 3.0 L models
1- Engine oil level dipstick

2- Engine oil cap
3- Air cleaner filter
4- Brake fluid reservoir
5- Washer fluid reservoir
6- Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick
7- Engine coolant reservoir
8- Battery

Engine oil and oil filter

To check the oil level, remove the dipstick,
Engine oil and oil filter wipe it off, and gently reinsert it all the way. 3.0 L models
N00937702024
Slowly pull the dipstick straight out and
check the oil level by checking the upper sur-
To check and refill engine oil face of the dipstick. The oil level must not go
above the line on the dipstick.
It is normal for an engine to use oil. You may
need to add oil between the recommended oil NOTE
change intervals. Before starting the engine,  If it is difficult to verify the oil level, wipe
check the engine oil level. Refill if necessary. off the dipstick and reinsert it. Wait a
moment and then recheck the oil level by
checking the upper surface of the dipstick.
CAUTION
 Overfilling will cause oil aeration and loss of
If the level does not reach the line which oil pressure, which could damage the engine.
9 shows the minimum amount of oil required,
remove the oil filler cap on the engine valve
cover, and fill to within the “Good” range. WARNING
 Used engine oil is poisonous, and can dam-
2.4 L models age your skin. Prolonged and repeated
contact may cause serious skin disorders,
including dermatitis and cancer. Do not let
used oil touch your skin and wash thor-
oughly after working with it.
 Keep used oil out of the reach of children.
NOTE
 Engine oil consumption is greatly influenced
by payload, engine speed, etc.

Engine oil and oil filter

This mark appears on the top of the oil con-
NOTE tainer and tells you two important things
 The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the
about the oil.
vehicle is subjected to severe conditions (for
example, repeated operation on rough roads, API service symbol
in mountainous regions, on roads with many
uphill and downhill gradients, or over short
distances). Consequently, the oil will require
earlier replacement in accordance with the
schedule in the “WARRANTY AND MAIN-
TENANCE MANUAL”.
Engine oil identification mark Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic

Engine Oil is recommended for optimum fuel
Mitsubishi Motors recommends using only economy and cold weather starting.
1- The upper part indicates the quality of
engine oils with the ILSAC certification sym-
bol on the front of the container.
the oil. If Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Syn- 9
2- The center part indicates the SAE grade thetic Engine Oil is not available, 5W-20
of the oil viscosity. grade oils displaying the ILSAC certification
ILSAC certification symbol can be used.
However, Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20
Synthetic Engine Oil should be used at the
Recommended engine oil vis-
next oil change to maintain optimum fuel
cosity economy and cold weather starting.
Use engine oil with the proper thickness for

To replace the oil filter
the outdoor temperatures where you will be
driving.
The oil filter should be replaced at the time or
mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND
If you cannot find oils with the ILSAC certi-
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
fication symbol, use an API classification SN
Only use high quality replacement filters on
oil with the following label.
this vehicle. The manufacturer’s specifica-
tions for Mitsubishi Motors Genuine oil fil-

Engine coolant
ters require that the filter can withstand a *: Front of the vehicle
pressure of 256 psi (1.8 MPa). A Mitsubishi Engine coolant
Motors Genuine oil filter is the best replace- N00937801594
ment filter. To add coolant

Follow the installation instructions printed on To check the coolant level
the filter.
The engine coolant reserve tank (A) lets you Use “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long
quickly see when you need to add coolant. Life Coolant Premium” or equivalent*.
When the engine is cold, the level of the cool- *: similar high quality ethylene glycol based
ant in the reserve tank should be between the non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and
FULL and LOW marks. The radiator usually non-borate coolant with long life hybrid
stays full so there is no reason to remove the organic acid technology
radiator cap (B) except when you check the
coolant freeze point or replace the antifreeze
coolant. Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Coolant provides
9 excellent protection against corrosion and
rust formation on all metals, including alumi-
num, and prevents clogs in some parts of
engine.
If you need to add coolant often, or if the
level in the reserve tank does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should
be pressure-tested for leaks. Take your vehi-
cle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
or a repair facility of your choice for testing.
CAUTION
 Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or
any engine coolants that contain them. Using
the wrong antifreeze can corrode aluminum
parts.

Air cleaner filter
CAUTION WARNING Air cleaner filter

 The required concentration of anti-freeze dif-  Wait for the engine to cool down before N00937901494
fers depending on the expected ambient tem- opening the radiator cap. Otherwise hot
The air cleaner filter will get dirty and dusty
perature. steam or boiling coolant could spray up
Above -31 °F (-35 °C): 50 % concentration from the radiator and scald you.
from use and not filter properly. Replace it
of anti-freeze with a new filter using the schedule in the
Below -31 °F (-35 °C): 60 % concentration “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
of anti-freeze MANUAL”.
You can check the concentration level with a
Points to remember
gauge from an automotive supply store, or 1. For 2.4 L models, remove the two clips
 Do not overfill the reserve tank. (A), then remove the Air duct (B).
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
service station can check it for you.
 Your vehicle uses a special radiator cap
 Do not use water to adjust the concentration
that stays sealed and lets the coolant flow
of coolant. from the reserve tank back to the radiator
 Do not top off the tank with plain water only. when the engine cools down. If you need
Water by itself boils at a lower temperature to change the cap, use the exact same 9
and does not stop rust or freezing. If the kind.
water freezes, it will damage your cooling  Check the coolant freeze point in the radi-
system. Do not use tapwater. It can cause ator with the proper gauge, and only when
corrosion and rust. it is safe. If you add antifreeze, the con-
tents of the reserve tank must be protected
Radiator cap against freezing.
 Keep the front of the radiator and con-
denser clean. 2. For 2.4 L models, while holding down the
The radiator cap must be sealed tight to pre- tab (C), pull out the connector (D).
 If the engine coolant temperature does not
vent losing coolant, which may result in
rise after the engine is warmed-up, take
engine damage. Only use a Mitsubishi
your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors Genuine Parts radiator cap, or an
approved equivalent.
choice to have the thermostat checked,
and replaced if necessary.

Air cleaner filter
3.0 L models 2.4 L models
3. Unclamp the cover. Open up the top of the 4. Replace the air cleaner filter and put the
3.0 L models
cover and take out the air cleaner filter. cover back on in its original position.
2.4 L models
9 NOTE
 Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are recom-
mended when replacing the air cleaner filter.
 For 2.4 L models, make sure that the connec-
tor is properly reconnected.
 After replacing the air cleaner filter, make
sure that the hinges at the bottom of cover
are firmly set.
CAUTION
 Take care not to scratch the engine air flow
sensor when removing the air cleaner cover.
5. For 2.4 L models, put the duct back on in

its original position.

Automatic transaxle fluid (if so equipped)

2. The fluid level should be at the HOT
Automatic transaxle fluid (if mark, but never above the HOT mark
CAUTION
 Using the improper transaxle fluid may dam-
so equipped) when the engine is warmed up. Add or
age the transaxle.
N00938000570 drain fluid to get to the correct level.
3. Make certain that the dipstick cap is
The automatic transaxle should be maintained installed properly to keep dirt and water
and serviced by an authorized Mitsubishi out of the transaxle. Special additives
choice to obtain the best performance and Mitsubishi Motors Corporation does not rec-
longest life. It is important that the transaxle Good (Hot)
ommend the addition of any fluid additives to
fluid is kept at the correct level. the transaxle.
To check the fluid level Continuously variable

transmission (CVT) fluid (if
The fluid level should be checked when the 9
bar graph for the engine coolant temperature so equipped)
display on the multi-information display N00938101103
shows the engine is warmed up and the fluid

The continuously variable transmission
in the transaxle is heated to its normal work- WARNING (CVT) should be maintained and serviced by
ing temperature. Driving with the wrong fluid  Transaxle fluid is extremely flammable an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
level will rapidly wear out the transaxle and and poisonous. Do not spill fluid when repair facility of your choice to obtain the
destroy the fluid. adding or draining. best performance and longest life. It is impor-
tant that the transmission fluid is kept at the
Procedure for checking the correct level.
fluid level Fluid type
Fluid type
1. With the brake pedal fully depressed and Use only “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine ATF-
the engine idling, select each gear J3” transaxle fluid to ensure optimum trans-
momentarily, ending with the selector axle performance. Use only “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine
lever in the “P” (PARK) position. CVTF-J4” transmission fluid to ensure opti-
mum transmission performance.

Transfer oil (All-wheel drive models)

Check the washer fluid level at regular inter-
CAUTION Rear axle oil (All-wheel vals and add washer fluid to reservoir if nec-
 Using the improper transaxle fluid may dam-
age the transaxle.
drive models) essary.
N00915201279 Open the reservoir cap and check the fluid
Whenever the oil level is checked, add oil as level with the dipstick.
Special additives necessary to maintain the proper level.

Fill with the oil according to the table below.
Do not use any fluid additives to the trans-

mission. Fluid type
EMPTY
Transfer oil (All-wheel drive Mitsubishi Motors Genuine FULL
Lubricant Super Hypoid Gear Oil API
models) classification GL-5
9 N00938401281
Viscosity
SAE 80
Whenever the transfer oil level is checked,
range
add oil as necessary to maintain the proper When freezing weather is anticipated, flush
level. Fill with the oil according to the table out the water in the reservoir by operating the
below. Washer fluid pump. Fill the reservoir with windshield anti-
N00938601342 freeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate
Fluid type The windshield and rear window washer fluid the system for a few seconds to flush out the
reservoir is in the engine compartment. residual water.
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine

Lubricant Super Hypoid Gear Oil API Brake fluid
classification GL-5 N00938701271
Viscosity
SAE 80 To check the fluid level
range
Check the fluid level in the reservoir.

The fluid level must be between the “MAX”
and “MIN” marks on the reservoir.

Battery
CAUTION NOTE
 Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch,  After replacing the battery, the electronic
mix with, or get into the brake fluid. This control system data for the automatic trans-
will damage the seals. axle, etc., will be erased.
 Be careful when handling brake fluid. It can As a result, shifting may be rough.
damage painted surfaces. Shifting will become smoother after several
 Use only the listed brake fluid. Different changes in speed.
brands of brake fluid have different addi-
tives, and these can cause a chemical reac-
tion. Do not mix brands of brake fluid. Checking battery electrolyte
 Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to keep
the brake fluid from evaporating.
level
The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the
brake pads, but this does not indicate any
abnormality. The electrolyte level must be between the
Battery limits shown on the outside of the battery. Fill
If the fluid level falls sealed tight in a short
it with distilled water as needed. The inside of 9
length of time, it indicates leaks from the N00939101940
brake system. the battery is divided into several compart-
The condition of the battery is very important ments. Take the cap off of each compartment
If this occurs, have the vehicle checked by an for quick starting and to keep the vehicle’s
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a and fill to the mark.
electrical system working properly. Check the Do not fill above the top line because a spill
repair facility of your choice. battery regularly. during driving could cause damage.
Fluid type If battery performance is suspect, have the

battery and charging system tested by an During cold weather
Use the recommended brake fluid conform- repair facility of your choice.
ing to DOT 3 or DOT 4. The reservoir cap The battery is weaker in cold temperatures.
must be tightly sealed to keep dirt and water This has to do with its chemical and physical
out. properties and is why a very cold battery,
especially one with a low charge, will have a
hard time starting your vehicle.
It is recommended that you have your battery
and charging system checked by an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair

Battery
facility of your choice before the start of cold
weather. If necessary, have it charged. This
WARNING WARNING
 Never disconnect the battery while the  If you are quick-charging your battery,
will provide more reliable starting, and longer
engine is running, or you could damage first disconnect the battery cables.
battery life.
the vehicle’s electrical parts.  In order to prevent a short-circuit, be sure
 Never short-circuit the battery. This could to disconnect the negative (-) terminal
Disconnection and connection cause it to overheat and be damaged. first, and reconnect it last.
 Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away  If the electrolyte level is very low, have the
from the battery because the battery could battery checked at an authorized Mitsubi-
To disconnect the battery cable, stop the
explode. shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of
engine. Disconnect the negative (-) terminal your choice.
 Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro-
first, then the positive (+) terminal. To recon- sive diluted sulfuric acid. If it spills on  Battery posts, terminals and related acces-
nect the battery, first connect the positive (+) nearby parts, it can crack, stain, or dis- sories contain lead and lead compounds.
terminal and then the negative (-) terminal, color them. And if it gets on your skin or Wash hands after handling.
before starting the vehicle. in your eyes, it can cause burns or blind-
ness. Please observe the following han-
9 NOTE dling instructions: NOTE
• If electrolyte gets on plastic parts or  Check each battery terminal for corrosion.
 Open the terminal cover (A) before discon-
other nearby parts, wipe it off with a soft You can prevent further corrosion by wash-
necting or connecting the positive (+) termi-
cloth or chamois soaked in a solution of ing with a solution of baking soda and water.
nal of the battery.
water and neutral detergent then imme- Grease the posts and clamps after cleaning or
 Loosen the nut (B) and then disconnect the diately rinse the affected parts with
battery cable from the positive (+) terminal. tightening them.
plenty of water.  Ensure the battery is securely installed and
• If electrolyte gets on your hands or cannot be moved. Also check each terminal
clothes, rinse thoroughly with water. If for tightness.
electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them  If you will not be driving your vehicle for a
with water immediately and get immedi- long period of time, remove the battery and
ate medical attention. store it in a place where the battery fluid will
 Open doors and windows in any closed not freeze. The battery only should be stored
space where you may be charging or with a full charge.
working with the battery.  Before cleaning the battery, tighten all the
 Always wear protective clothing and gog- filler port caps to keep dirt and moisture out.
gles when working with the battery, or
have a skilled automobile technician do it.

Tires
 Recommended inflation pressure: the  Sidewall: portion of a tire between the
Tires inflation pressure for optimum tire perfor- tread and bead.
N00939201648
mance.  Section width: the linear distance between
 Intended outboard sidewall: the exteriors of the sidewalls of an
WARNING • The sidewall that contains a whitewall, inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
 Driving with tires that are worn, damaged
bears white lettering or bears manufac- labeling, decoration, or protective bands.
or improperly inflated is dangerous.
These type tire conditions will adversely
turer, brand, and/or model name molding  Bead: the part of the tire that is made of
affect vehicle performance. that is higher or deeper than the same steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply
These type tire conditions can also cause a molding on the other sidewall of the tire, cords and that is shaped to fit the rim.
tread separation or blowout which may or  Ply: a layer of rubber-coated parallel
result in an accident causing serious • The outward facing sidewall of an asym- cords.
injury or death. metrical tire that has a particular side  Cord: the strands forming the plies in the
 Tires, including spare tire, degrade over that must always face outward when tire.
time with age even when they are not mounted on a vehicle.  Rim: a metal support for a tire or a tire
being used.  Passenger car tire: a tire intended for use and tube assembly upon which the tire
It is recommended that tires over 6 years on passenger cars, multipurpose passen- beads are seated.
9
generally be replaced even if damage is
ger vehicles, and trucks that have a gross  Rim diameter: nominal diameter of the
not obvious.
vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 bead seat.
pounds or less.  Groove: the space between two adjacent
It is important to familiarize yourself with the  Light truck (LT) tire: a tire designated by tread ribs.
following terms: its manufacturer as primarily intended for
use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose
 Cold tire pressure:
passenger vehicles.
• The measured pressure after the vehicle
 Tread: portion of a tire that comes into
has been parked for at least three hours,
contact with the road.
or
 Tread rib: a tread section running circum-
• The measured pressure when the vehicle
ferentially around a tire.
is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after
 Tread separation: pulling away of the
having been parked for three hours.
tread from the tire carcass.
 Maximum pressure: the maximum per-
 Carcass: the tire structure, except tread
missible cold tire inflation pressure for
and sidewall rubber which, when inflated,
this tire.
bears the load.

Tires
Tire Markings Aspect ratio in percent (%) NOTE

65 Ratio of section height to sec-  LT (Light Truck) -metric tire
tion width of tire. sizing is based on U.S.A. design
Construction code standards. The size designation
•“R” means radial construc- for LT-metric tires is the same as
R tion. for P-metric tires except for the
•“D” means diagonal or bias letters “LT” that are molded into
construction. the sidewall preceding the size
15 Rim diameter in inches (in) designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
 Temporary spare tires are high
1- Size Designation NOTE
2- Service Description pressure compact spares
9 3- Maximum Load
 European/Japanese metric tire
designed for temporary emer-
sizing is based on European/Jap-
4- Maximum Pressure gency use only. Tires designed
5- U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code anese design standards. Tires
to this standard have the letter
(TIN) designed to these standards have
“T” molded into the sidewall
6- Treadwear, Traction and Temperature the tire size molded into the
Grades preceding the size designation.
sidewall beginning with the sec-
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
tion width. The letter “P” is
Size Designation absent from this tire size desig-
Service Description
nation.
EXAMPLE: P215/65R15 Example: 215/65R15 96H.
EXAMPLE: 95H
Passenger car tire size based Load index
P
on U.S.A. design standards A numerical code associated
95
Section width in millimeters with the maximum load a tire
215
(mm) can carry.

Tires
Speed symbol EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD

WARNING 1504
A symbol indicating the  Overloading of your tire is
range of speeds at which a Department of Transporta-
dangerous. Overloading can
tire can carry a load corre- tion
cause tire failure, affect vehi-
sponding to its load index This symbol certifies that the
cle handling, and increase
under certain operating con- tire is in compliance with the
your stopping distance. Use DOT
ditions. U.S. Department of Trans-
H tires of the recommended load
The maximum speed corre- portation tire safety stan-
capacity for your vehicle.
sponding to the speed symbol dards, and is approved for
Never overload them.
should only be achieved highway use.
under specified operating Code representing the tire
conditions. (i.e. tire pressure, Maximum Pressure MA manufacturing location. (2
vehicle loading, road condi- digits) 9
tions and posted speed limits) Maximum Pressure indicates the Code representing the tire
maximum permissible cold tire infla- L9
size. (2 digits)
Maximum Load tion pressure for this tire. ABC
Code used by tire manufac-
D
turer. (1 to 4 digits)
Maximum load indicates the maxi- Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Number representing the
mum load this tire is designed to
The TIN may be found on one or 15 week in which the tire was
carry.
both sides of the tire but the date manufactured. (2 digits)
code may only be on one side. Look Number representing the
for the TIN on the outboard side of 04 year in which the tire was
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the manufactured. (2 digits)
TIN is not found on the outboard side
then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.

Tires
 Economy
Treadwear, Traction and Temper- Temperature
The wrong tire pressure can cause uneven
ature Grades wear patterns in the tire tread. These
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the abnormal wear patterns will reduce the
Treadwear generation of heat and its ability to dissipate tread life, and the tire will have to be
heat when tested under controlled conditions replaced sooner.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Too little pressure also makes it harder for
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested Sustained high temperature can cause the the tire to roll, and this uses up more fuel.
under controlled conditions on a specified material of the tire to degenerate and reduce  Ride comfort and vehicle stability
government test course. For example, a tire tire life, and excessive temperature can lead The superior riding experience built into
graded 150 would wear one and one-half to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre- your vehicle partly depends on the correct
(11/2) times as well on the government course sponds to a level of performance which all tire pressure. Too much pressure gives an
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance passenger car tires must meet under the Fed- uncomfortable and jarring ride. Too little
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. pressure feels as if your vehicle is slow to
respond.
9 their use, however, and may depart signifi- Grades B and A represent higher levels of
Unequal tire pressures can make steering
cantly from the norm due to variations in performance on the laboratory test wheel than
driving habits, service practices and differ- the minimum required by law. your vehicle uneven and unpredictable.
ences in road characteristics and climate.
The tire pressure for your vehicle under nor-
Tire inflation pressures mal driving conditions is listed on the placard
Traction N00939301997
attached to the driver’s door sill.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, Proper tire inflation pressure is essential for (Refer to “Tire and loading information plac-
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the safe and satisfactory operation of your ard” on page 11-3.)
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as vehicle. The wrong tire pressure will cause The recommended inflation pressures under
measured under controlled conditions on problems in three major areas: normal driving conditions should be used for
specified government test surfaces of asphalt the tires listed below.
 Safety
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
Too little pressure increases flexing in the Item Tire size Front Rear
traction performance.
tire and can cause tire failure. Too much
240 240
pressure can cause a tire to lose its ability P215/70R16
Normal tire KPA, KPA,
to cushion shock. Objects on the road and P225/55R18
35 PSI 35 PSI
potholes could then cause tire damage that
may result in tire failure.
Tires
Item Tire size Front Rear  Keep your tires inflated to the recom-
mended pressures. (See the tire and load-
CAUTION
Compact T155/90D16 420 KPA, 60 ing information placard attached to the  Only Mitsubishi Motors Authorized wheels
spare wheel T155/80D17 PSI should be used, because your vehicle is
driver’s door sill.)
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-
 Stay within the recommended load limits. tem.
Tire pressures should be checked, and
 Make sure that the weight of any load in Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks
adjusted if necessary, at least once a month.
your vehicle is evenly distributed. and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
Pressures should be checked more often
 Drive at safe speeds. to install the tire pressure sensor properly.
whenever weather temperatures change
 After filling your tires to the correct pres-
severely, because tire pressures change with
sure, check them for damage and air
outdoor temperatures. The pressures listed NOTE
leaks. Be sure to reinstall the caps on the
are always “cold inflation pressure”.
valve stems.  On vehicles with Electric parking brake, 16
Cold inflation pressure is measured after the inches steel wheel cannot be used on your
vehicle has been parked for at least three vehicle because it interferes with brake parts.
hours or is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) Replacing tires and wheels Additionally, 16 inches aluminum wheel
after having been parked for three hours. N00939601479 may not be used on your vehicle depending 9
Cold inflation pressure must not go above the on its type, even if a Mitsubishi Motors Gen-
maximum values molded into the tire side- CAUTION uine wheels.
wall. After driving several miles, your tire  Avoid using different size tires from the one Consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
inflation pressure may increase 2 to 6 psi (14 listed and the combined use of different dealer before using wheels that you have.
types of tires, as this can affect driving
to 41 kPa) from the cold inflation pressure.
safety.
Do not let air out of the tires to get back to the
Refer to “Tires and wheels” on page 11-7.
specified cold pressure, or your tires will be
 On all-wheel drive vehicles, always use tires
Tire maintenance
too low. of the same size, same type, and same brand,
N00939700141
Check your tires each time you refuel. If one and which have no wear differences. Using The following maintenance steps are recom-
tire looks lower than the others, check the tires that differ in size, type, brand or the mended:
pressure for all of them. degree of wear, will increase the differential
You should also take the following safety pre- oil temperature, resulting in possible damage  Check tire pressures regularly.
cautions: to the driving system. Further, the drive train  Have regular maintenance done on the
will be subjected to excessive loading, possi- wheel balance and front and rear suspen-
bly leading to oil leakage, component sei- sion alignment.
zure, or other serious problems.  Rotate your tires regularly as described in
the “Tire rotation” section on page 9-20.

Tires
Tread wear indicator Tire rotation Tires that do not have arrows showing rotation direction
N00939800184 N00939901528
Front
To even out the wear on your tires and make
them last longer, Mitsubishi Motors Corpora-
tion recommends that you rotate your tires at
the mileage listed in the “WARRANTY AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. Tires that have arrows showing rotation direction
However, the timing for tire rotation may
vary according to your vehicle condition,
Front
road surface conditions, and your own per-
sonal driving habits. Any time you notice
unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as pos-
1- Location of the tread wear indicator sible.
9 2- Tread wear indicator

When rotating tires, check for uneven wear,
damage, and wheel alignment. Abnormal CAUTION
Tread wear indicators are built into the origi- wear is usually caused by a wrong tire pres-  A compact spare tire can be installed tempo-
nal equipment tires on your vehicle to help sure, wheels that are not aligned properly, rarily in place of a tire that has been removed
you know when your tires should be replaced. wheels that are out-of-balance, or severe during the tire rotation. However, it must not
Many states have laws requiring that you be included in the regular tire rotation
braking.
sequence.
replace your tires at this point. Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
 If the tires have arrows (A) indicating the
These indicators are molded into the bottom dealer or a repair facility of your choice to correct direction of rotation, swap the front
of the tread grooves and will appear when the find out the reason for uneven tread wear. and rear tires on the left-hand side of the
tire tread is worn down to 1/16 inch (1.6 vehicle and the front and rear tires on the
mm). The first tire rotation is the most important right-hand side of the vehicle separately.
When the bands appear next to one another in one. It will allow all your tires to wear evenly. Keep each tire on its original side of the
two or more places, replace your tires. vehicle. When installing the tires, make sure
the arrows point in the direction in which the
wheels will turn when the vehicle moves for-
NOTE ward. Any tire whose arrow points in the
 Tire wear indicators can have different marks wrong direction will not perform to its full
and locations depending on the tire manufac- potential.
turer.

Brake pedal free play
CAUTION Brake pedal free play

Front
 Only Mitsubishi Motors Authorized wheels N00940300293
should be used, because your vehicle is To check the brake pedal free play (A), turn
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys- off the engine and press the brake pedal sev-
tem. eral times with your foot. Then press the
Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks
pedal down with your fingers until you first
and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
to install the tire pressure sensor properly.
feel resistance.
Brake pedal free play:

.1 to .3 inch (3 to 8 mm)
Tire chains
 Avoid the combined use of different types of CAUTION

tires. Using different types of tires can affect
vehicle performance and safety.
 Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle.
The clearance between the chains and the
9
body is not sufficient to allow proper clear-
ance, and the vehicle body might be dam-
Snow tires aged.
N00940000320
In some areas of the country, snow tires are

required for winter driving. If snow tires are
required in your area, you must choose snow If the free play is not within these limits, take
tires of the same size and type as the original your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi
tires provided with your vehicle. Snow tires Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
should also be installed on all four wheels. choice for adjustment.
Otherwise your safety and vehicle handling
can be reduced.
Even where laws may permit it, snow tires
should not be operated at sustained speeds
over 75 mph (120 km/h).

Parking brake lever stroke (if so equipped)

and Environment Canada. The emission-con-
Parking brake lever stroke Wiper blades trol system is made of:
(if so equipped) N00940700138
N00940401275 Check the wiper blades occasionally. Clean  a positive crankcase ventilation system
them regularly to remove deposits of salt and  an evaporative emission-control system
Check the parking brake lever travel occa-
road film. Use a sponge or cloth and a mild  an exhaust emission-control system
sionally. To check this, pull the lever up
slowly and count the number of clicks of the detergent or non-abrasive cleaner to clean the
blades and glass areas. To be sure the emission-control system works
ratchet. Parking brake lever stroke: properly, have your vehicle inspected and
5 to 7 notches (clicks) Replace the blades if they continue to streak
or smear. maintained by an authorized Mitsubishi
(Parking brake adjustment when pulled with Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
the force of 200 N) choice. This should be done at the time or
Also check to see if the lever stays gripped by NOTE mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND
the ratchet after pulling.  Do not run the wipers on dry glass for a long MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
time. This wears out the rubber and can
These, and all the other “general” mainte-
9 scratch the glass.
nance services listed in this manual, need to
be performed to keep your vehicle running
properly and reliably.
During cold weather You should also have an inspection and ser-
vice any time you suspect a malfunction.
If the blades are frozen to the windshield or
rear window, do not operate the wipers until
the ice has melted and the blades are freed,
otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
Emission-control system
WARNING
 Continued operation of the vehicle with
maintenance
N00940800328
the parking brake lever out of adjustment
may result in the vehicle moving when Your vehicle is equipped with an emission-
unattended. control system that meets all the requirements
of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

General maintenance
high heat sources such as the exhaust mani-
NOTE Fuel hoses fold.
 To meet government regulations and pro- N00941000040
mote cleaner air, your vehicle is equipped Check the hose surfaces for any heat and
with an onboard diagnostic system (OBD).
mechanical damage, hard and brittle rubber,
WARNING
The engine electronic control module that  If you see a fuel leak or if you smell fuel,
cracking, tears, cuts and abrasions. Pay spe-
controls OBD functions stores various data do not run the engine. Any spark (includ-
(especially about the exhaust emissions). cial attention to the hoses closest to high heat ing from the ignition), flame or smoking
This data will be erased if the battery cable is sources such as the exhaust manifold. Check material could cause an explosion or fire.
disconnected, which could make a rapid all the hose connections, such as clamps and Call an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
diagnosis difficult. Do not disconnect the couplings, to make sure they are secure and dealer or a repair facility of your choice
battery cable when the engine malfunction that there are no leaks. If you see any wear or for assistance.
indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or damage, replace the hoses immediately.
“Check engine light”) is ON.
Intake valve clearance Evaporative emission control

Spark plugs N00950100050 system (except evaporative 9
N00940900231
Have the valve clearance checked at an emission canister)
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the N00941400187
Spark plugs must fire properly to ensure
mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND If the fuel-vapor vent line is clogged or dam-
proper engine performance and emission-
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. aged, the fuel-vapor mixture will escape, pol-
control.
If the engine sounds abnormally loud, have luting the air.
Do not reuse spark plugs by cleaning or
adjustments made by an authorized Have the system checked at an authorized
regapping. Spark plugs should be replaced at
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the mileage spec-
the mileage specified in the “WARRANTY
AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. ified in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-
Fuel system (tank, pipe line and NANCE MANUAL”.
NOTE connection, and fuel tank filler
 Use the recommended or equivalent spark cap) General maintenance
plugs listed under “Engine specifications” on N00941300173 N00941501299
page 11-6. Use of other plugs could cause
Check these regularly for damage or leaks in The next pages list the maintenance service
engine damage, loss of performance or radio
noise. the fuel lines and connections. Check the fuel recommended by Mitsubishi Motors Corpo-
tank filler cap for damage or looseness. Pay ration. In addition to the general maintenance
special attention to the fuel lines closest to that needs to be performed at the times listed,
General maintenance
there are other parts which do not usually  The underside or rear of the vehicle is
need regular maintenance.
Ball joint, steering linkage damaged
But, if any of these parts stops working prop- seals, drive shaft boots
erly, your vehicle performance could suffer. N00941800093 Also check the exhaust system each time the
Have these items checked if you notice a Check the following parts for damage and vehicle is raised for lubrication, oil changes,
problem with them. grease leaks: or required service. Any open seams or loose
connections could let dangerous exhaust
If you have any questions, see your autho-  Ball joint boots of the suspension and fumes seep into the luggage and passenger
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for assistance. steering linkage compartments.
 Bellows on both ends of the drive shaft
Disc brake pads Check for any of the following
N00941600059 Exhaust system conditions:
Good brakes are essential for safe driving. N00942201118
Check the brake pads for wear. For good  Check for holes or exhaust gas leaks
9 braking performance, replace the brake pads WARNING caused by corrosion or damage.
with the same type pads as the originals.  Carbon monoxide gas from your vehicle’s  Check the joints and connections for
exhaust is poisonous. Breathing these looseness or exhaust gas leaks.
fumes can cause unconsciousness or death.  Check the rubber hangers and brackets for
Brake hoses damage.
N00941700076
The best way to keep carbon monoxide gas
Brake hoses and tubing should be checked from entering inside your vehicle is to have Timing belt
for: the engine exhaust system properly serviced.
N00942300079
Have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
 Severe surface cracking, scuffing or worn plete exhaust system and nearby body areas The timing belt should be replaced with a
spots. If the fabric casing of the hose is for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispo- new one at the mileage listed in the “WAR-
showing through any cracks or worn spots sitioned parts if you notice any of the follow- RANTY AND MAINTENANCE MAN-
in the rubber hose cover, the hose should ing: UAL”.
be replaced. The brakes can fail if the
hose wears through.  A change in the sound of the exhaust sys-
 Improper installation may cause twisting, tem
or wheel, tire or chassis interference.  The smell of exhaust fumes inside the
vehicle

For cold and snowy weather
Hood lock release mechanism Weatherstripping WARNING

and safety catch  Fusible links must not be replaced by any
N00942501124 To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping other device. Failing to fit the correct fus-
ible link may result in fire in the vehicle,
The hood lock release mechanism and hood on the doors, engine hood, etc., they should
property destruction and serious or fatal
safety catch should be checked, cleaned, and be treated with silicone grease.
injuries at any time.
oiled when needed for easy movement and to
prevent rust and wear. Use Multipurpose Additional equipment (For
Grease NLGI Grade 2 sparingly for all sliding
parts of the hood latch and release lever.
regions where snow is encoun- Fuses
Work the grease into the hood lock mecha- tered) N00942801954
nism until all the movable surfaces are cov-

ered. It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short- Fuse block location
Also, put a light coat of the same grease on handled spade in the vehicle during the win-
the safety catch wherever moving parts touch. ter so that you can clear away snow if you get
stranded. A small hand-brush for sweeping
To prevent damage to the electrical system
from short-circuiting or overloading, each
9
snow off the vehicle and a plastic scraper for individual circuit is equipped with a fuse. The
For cold and snowy weather the windshield, side and rear window are also fuse blocks are located in the passenger com-
N00942600102
useful. partment and in the engine compartment.
Ventilation slots
Fusible links
N00942700291
The ventilation slots in front of the wind-
shield should be brushed clear after a heavy The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if
snowfall so that the operation of the heating a large current attempts to flow through cer-
and ventilation systems will not be impaired. tain electrical systems.
In case of a melted fusible link, see your
repair facility of your choice for inspection
and replacement.
For the fusible links, please refer to “Fuse
load capacities” on page 9-27.

Fuses
Passenger compartment Engine compartment

The fuse blocks in the passenger compart- In the engine compartment, the fuse blocks
ment are located behind the fuse lid in front are located as shown in the illustration. While
of the driver’s seat at the position shown in pressing the tab (C), pull up the cover.
the illustration.
Pull the fuse lid to remove it.
A- Main fuse block

B- Sub fuse block
A- Main fuse block
B- Sub fuse block

Fuses
Fuse load capacities

N00954801427
This fuse list shows the names of the electrical systems and their fuse capacities.
There are spare fuses in the fuse block cover in the engine compartment. Always replace a blown fuse with one of the same capacity as the origi-
nal.
Passenger compartment fuse location table
Main fuse block
9
Sub fuse block
Sym- Capac Sym- Capac Sym- Capac

No. Electrical system No. Electrical system No. Electrical system
bol ity bol ity bol ity
Power window con- 3 Heater 30 A 5 Door locks 20 A
1 30 A*
trol
4 Windshield wipers 30 A 6 Rear fog light 10 A
2 Defogger 30 A*

Fuses
Sym- Capac Sym- Capac Engine compartment fuse location
No. Electrical system No. Electrical system
bol ity bol ity table
7 12 V power outlet 15 A Cigarette lighter/
23 15 A
12 V power outlet
8 Rear window wiper 15 A Main fuse block
Charge 7.5 A
9 Sunroof 20 A
24 Heated steering
10 Ignition switch 10 A 15 A
wheel
11 Option 10 A Power seat
25 30 A*
Hazard warning (Driver seat)
12 15 A
flasher 26 Heated seats 30 A
13 4-wheel drive system 10 A Power seat
27 30 A*
(Passenger seat)
9 14
Stop lights
(Brake lights)
15 A
*: Fusible link
Behind the fuse block cover
15 Gauges 10 A
 Some fuses may not be installed on your
16 SRS airbag 7.5 A vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
17 Radio 15 A or specifications.
 The table above shows the main equip-
18 Control unit relay 7.5 A ment corresponding to each fuse.
Interior lights
19 15 A
(Room lights)
Sym- Electrical sys- Capaci
20 Back-up lights 7.5 A No.
bol tem ty
Heated outside Air condition-
21 7.5 A
rearview mirrors ing condenser 30 A*
Outside rearview SBF1 fan motor
22 10 A
mirrors
VLC 40 A*

Fuses
Sym- Electrical sys- Capaci Sym- Electrical sys- Capaci Sym- Electrical sys- Capaci
No. No. No.
bol tem ty bol tem ty bol tem ty
SBF2 Starter 30 A* F5 Front fog lights 15 A Head-
light
Air condition- F6 Air conditioner 10 A F19 (low LED 20 A
SBF3 ing condenser 30 A*
Headlight beam)
fan motor F7 20 A
washer (left)
Radiator fan
SBF4 40 A* F8 Security horn 20 A Head-
motor
light
Anti-lock brak- F9 Horn 10 A F20 (low LED 20 A
SBF5 40 A*
ing system F10 ETV 15 A beam)
Electric parking (right)
SBF6 50 A* F11 Alternator 7.5 A
brake Head-
SBF7
Anti-lock brak-
30 A*
F12 Engine 7.5 A light
Halo- 9
ing system ENG/POWER 20 A F21 (low 10 A
gen
F13 beam)
BF1 Power liftgate 30 A Fuel line heater 25 A (left)
Audio system Head-
BF2 30 A F14 Fuel pump 15 A
amplifier light
F15 Ignition coil 10 A Halo-
BF3 IOD IOD 30 A F22 (low 10 A
gen
F16 ENG/POWER 10 A beam)
BF4 Diesel 30 A
(right)
Automatic Headlight (high
F1 20 A F17 10 A Battery current
transaxle beam) (left) F23 7.5 A
sensor
F2 Wiper de-icer 15A Headlight (high
F18 10 A #1 — Spare fuse 10 A
beam) (right)
Electric parking #2 — Spare fuse 15 A
F3 7.5 A
brake
#3 — Spare fuse 20 A
Daytime run-
F4 10 A
ning lights *: Fusible link

Fuses
 Some fuses may not be installed on your The fuse block does not contain spare 7.5 A,
vehicle, depending on the vehicle model 25 A or 30 A fuses. If one of these fuses
Fuse replacement
N00954901141
or specifications. burns out, substitute with the following fuse.
1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off
 The table above shows the main equip- 7.5 A: 10 A spare fuse
the electrical item connected to the fuse
ment corresponding to each fuse. 25 A: 20 A spare fuse
and turn the ignition switch to the
30 A: 30 A audio system amplifier fuse
“LOCK” or “OFF” position or put the
When using a substitute fuse, replace with a
Sub fuse block operation mode in OFF.
fuse of the correct capacity as soon as possi-
2. There is a fuse remover (A) in the engine
ble.
compartment fuse block.
Identification of fuse
Capacity Color
9 7.5 A Brown
10 A Red
15 A Blue
Sym- Electrical sys- Capaci
No. 20 A Yellow
bol tem ty
Electric parking 25 A Natural (white)
SBF1 30 A*
brake Green (fuse type) / 3. Clamp it on the fuse you wish to remove,
30 A and pull the fuse straight out from the fuse
Electric parking Pink (fusible link type)
SBF2 30 A* block.
brake 40 A Green (fusible link type)
50 A Red (fusible link type)
*: Fusible link
 Some fuses may not be installed on your

vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
or specifications.
 The table above shows the main equip-
ment corresponding to each fuse.

Replacement of light bulbs

5. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity
securely into the appropriate slot.
CAUTION
 Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas
inside a halogen light bulb is highly pressur-
CAUTION ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a
 Never use a fuse with a capacity greater than halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.
the one listed or any substitute, such as wire,  Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare
foil etc. This would cause the circuit wiring hand, dirty glove, etc.
to heat up and could cause a fire. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb
 If the replacement fuse blows again after a to break the next time the headlights are
short time, have the electrical system used.
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with
dealer or a repair facility of your choice to alcohol and let it dry completely before
4. Use the fuse location diagrams and the
find and correct the cause. installing the bulb.
matching tables, to check the fuse that is
related to the problem. If the fuse is not
blown, something else must be causing
9
the problem. Have the system inspected
by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors N00942901391
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Before replacing the bulb, be sure the light is
off. Do not touch the glass part of the new
bulb with your bare fingers; the oil from your
skin will stay on the glass and dim or destroy
the bulb when it gets hot.
CAUTION
 Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after CAUTION
being turned off.  Do not install commercially available LED-
When replacing the bulb, wait for it to cool type bulbs. Commercially available LED-
sufficiently before touching it. You could type bulbs could adversely affect the opera-
B- Fuse is OK otherwise be burned. tion of the vehicle, such as by preventing the
C- Blown fuse lights and other vehicle equipment from
operating properly.

NOTE Outside ANSI

 If you are unsure of how to carry out the
Trade
N00950302072
Watt-
work as required, it is recommended that Item No. or
Front age
these procedures be carried out by an autho- Bulb
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair type
facility of your choice. 1 - Front turn signal light 21 W PY21W
 Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body
when removing a light and lens. 9005
2 - Headlight, high beam 60 W
 When it rains, or when the vehicle has been HB3
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes 3 - Head- Halogen
becomes temporarily foggy. This is the same 55 W H7
light, low bulb
phenomenon as when window glass mists up
on a humid day, and does not indicate a func-
beam LED — —
tional problem. Type A
4 - Parking light/
When the light is switched on, the heat will Daytime running — —
9 remove the fog. However, if water gathers
light
inside the light, please have it checked by an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a 5 - Front side-marker
5W W5W
repair facility of your choice. Type B light
6- Front fog Halogen
19 W H16
light (if so bulb
Bulb capacity equipped) LED — —
N00943000132
7 - Side turn signal light
The bulb should only be replaced with a new — —
(if so equipped)
bulb with the same rating and type. The type Type A: Halogen headlights type
and rating are listed on the base of the bulb. Type B: LED headlights type
NOTE
 The following lights use an LED instead of
the bulb.
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice
when either light needs to be repaired or
replaced.

NOTE ANSI Inside

• Headlight, low beam (LED type)
trade No.
Item Wattage N00950401731
• Parking light
or Bulb
• Daytime running light
type
• Front fog light (LED type) 6 - Rear turn sig- 21 W WY21W
• Side turn signal light nal light
7 - Stop light — —
Rear
NOTE
 The following lights use an LED instead of
the bulb. Check with an authorized Mitsubi-
shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice when either light needs to be repaired
Item Wattage
or replaced.
9
• Rear side-marker light 1 - Cargo room light 8W
• High-mounted stop light
2 - Dome light (rear) 8W
• Tail light
• Stop light Dome light (front)/Read-
ANSI 3- 8W
ing light
trade No.
Item Wattage 4 - Downlight –
or Bulb
type 5 - Vanity mirror lights 2W
1 - High-mounted — — 6 - Glove compartment light 1.4 W
stop light
2 - Tail light — —
NOTE
3 - Rear side- — —  The following lights use an LED instead of
marker light the bulb. Check with an authorized Mitsubi-
4 - License plate 5W W5W shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice when the light needs to be repaired or
light
replaced.
5 - Back-up light 16 W W16W • Downlight


2. Turn the cap (B) counterclockwise to 4. To install the bulb, perform the removal
NOTE remove it. steps in reverse.
• Front foot lights
• Floor console box light
NOTE
 When installing the bulb, align the tab (D)
Headlights (low beam, halogen with the notch (E) of the socket.
bulb type)
N00901801216
1. When replacing the bulb on the left side

of the vehicle, remove the bolts (A) hold-
ing down the relay box and the sub fuse
block, and then move them toward the
rear of the vehicle. (if so equipped) *- Front of the vehicle
9 3. Turn the socket (C) counterclockwise to

remove it, and then pull the bulb out of Headlights (low beam, LED
the socket.
type)
N00900301171
NOTE
 The headlights use an LED instead of the
bulb.
*- Front of the vehicle dealer or a repair facility of your choice
when the light needs to be repaired or
replaced.


3. Turn the bulb (C) counterclockwise to 2. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to
Headlights (high beam) remove it and then while holding down remove it, and then pull the bulb out of
N00901901132
the tab (D), pull out the bulb (E). the socket.
1. When replacing the bulb on the right side
of the vehicle, remove the clip (A) hold-
ing down the washer tank spout and move
the spout toward the rear of the vehicle.
4. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse. 9
2. Turn the cap (B) counterclockwise to Headlight aim adjustment

remove it. N00943201359
The alignment of the headlights should be

checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
Front side-marker lights *- Front of the vehicle

N00915501214
1. When replacing the bulb on the left side

of the vehicle, move the relay box toward 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal
the rear of the vehicle. (if so equipped) steps in reverse.
(Refer to “Headlight (low beam, halogen
*- Front of the vehicle bulb type): Step 1” on page 9-34.


2. Turn the socket (D) counterclockwise to
Parking lights/Daytime running remove it, then remove the bulb from the
Side turn signal lights (if so
lights socket by turning it counterclockwise equipped)
N00917301724 while pressing in. N00943501189
NOTE NOTE
 The parking lights and daytime running
 The side turn signal lights use an LED
lights use an LED instead of the bulb.
instead of the bulb.
replaced.
replaced.
Front turn signal lights Front fog lights (Halogen bulb

9 N00943401423
type)
1. Remove the 12 clips (A, B), and then
remove the cover (C). N00943601920
1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw-

*: Front of the vehicle driver with a cloth over its tip at the points
indicated by arrows and pry gently to
3. To install the bulb, perform the removal remove the cover (A).
steps in reverse.


2. Remove the 3 screws (B) and remove the 3. While holding down the tab (D), pull out
light unit. the socket (E).
Front fog lights (LED type)
N00943601933
NOTE
 The fog lights use an LED instead of the
bulb.
replaced.
Rear combination lights

4. Turn the bulb (F) counterclockwise to
N00943701598
NOTE remove it.
 When unfastening the screws or the fog
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the screws (A), and then move
9
light, be careful not to move the beam posi-
the light unit toward the rear of the vehi-
tion adjustment screw (C).
cle to unfix the notch (B) and pins (C).

steps in reverse.


3. Turn the socket counterclockwise and 2. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to
remove it, and then pull the bulb out of
NOTE remove it, and then pull the bulb out of
 When mounting the light unit, align the
the socket. the socket.
notch (F) and pin (G) on the light unit with
the clip (H) and hole (I) in the body.
D- Rear turn signal light 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal
9 E- Tail light and stop light (LED) - cannot Back-up lights steps in reverse.
be replaced N00929101080
1. Push the light unit upward to remove it.

NOTE
NOTE  When installing the light unit, first insert the
notch (B) into the hole on the body, and then
 The rear side-marker light, tail light and stop
light use an LED instead of the bulb. push on the light unit to fit it into place.
replaced.

steps in reverse.
NOTE
 Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screw-
driver to keep from scratching the lens.

Vehicle care precautions

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
License plate lights High-mounted stop light
N00944000360 N00943900102
1. When removing the light unit (A), push it

toward the left side of the vehicle body. NOTE
 The high-mounted stop light uses an LED
instead of the bulb. Check with an authorized
of your choice when the light needs to be
repaired or replaced.
Vehicle care precautions

4. To install the bulb, perform the removal N00945100166
steps in reverse.
In order to maintain the value of your vehicle,
perform regular maintenance using the proper 9
2. Use a screw driver to gently pry up the tab
NOTE materials and procedures. Be sure to use only
 When mounting the light unit, insert tab (C) those materials and procedures that meet your
(B) and remove the lens.
first then align tab (D) with its hole.
local environmental pollution control regula-
tions. Choose the materials you will use care-
fully, to be sure that they do not contain
corrosives. If you are not sure, contact an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for help
in choosing these materials.
NOTE
 Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screw-
driver to keep from scratching the lens.

Cleaning the inside of your vehicle
CAUTION CAUTION NOTE

 Cleaning products can be dangerous. Some  Do not use organic substances (solvents,  Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and pro-
are poisonous and others are highly flamma- benzine, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or tectants containing silicones or wax.
ble. Some are dangerous if you breathe their alkaline or acidic solutions. Such products, when applied to the instru-
fumes in a closed space. When you use any- These chemicals can cause discoloring, ment panels or other parts, may cause reflec-
thing in a container to clean your vehicle, be staining or cracking of the surface. tions on the windshield and obscure vision.
sure to follow the instructions. Always open If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make Also, if such products get on the switches of
your vehicle doors or windows when you’re sure their ingredients do not include the sub- the electrical accessories, it may lead to fail-
cleaning the inside. Never use the following stances mentioned above. ure of these accessories.
chemicals to clean your vehicle:
• Gasoline
• Carbon Tetrachloride NOTE Upholstery
• Benzine  Always read the instructions on the cleaner N00945500128
• Kerosene label. 1. To maintain the value of your new vehi-
• Naphtha
9 • Acetone
cle, maintain the upholstery carefully and
keep the interior clean.
• Turpentine Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean
• Paint Thinner
• Lacquer Thinner
flocked parts the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic
N00945300155
leather should be cleaned with an appro-
• Nail Polish Remover priate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be
1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth
soaked in a 3% solution of gentle soap cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a
These can all be dangerous, and they all can and water. 3% solution of gentle soap in lukewarm
damage your vehicle. 2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water, water.
wring it out well, and wipe off all the 2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum
soap. cleaner and remove any stains with carpet
Cleaning the inside of your cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by
vehicle lightly dabbing with a clean white cloth
N00945200095 and spot remover.
After washing the inside of your vehicle with
any cleaner, wipe it dry in a shady, well venti-
lated area.

Cleaning the outside of your vehicle
NOTE NOTE Washing

 If fuzzing is difficult to remove from the seat  The genuine leather surface may harden and N00945901679
upholstery, draw a suitable defuzzing brush shrink if it is exposed to the direct sunlight Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust
over the surface in one direction. for long hours. When your vehicle is parked,
picked up from air, rain, snow, or road sur-
place it in the shade as much as possible.
faces can damage the paint and body of your
 When the temperature of the vehicle interior
vehicle if left on.
Genuine leather (if so equipped) rises in summer, vinyl products left on the
genuine leather seat may deteriorate and Frequent washing and waxing is the best way
N00945600187
stick to the seat. to protect your vehicle from this damage.
1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
soft cloth soaked in a 5% solution of gen- Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it with
tle soap and water. Cleaning the outside of your water to remove dust. Next, using plenty of
2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water, vehicle clean water and a car washing mitt or sponge,
wring it out well, and wipe off all the N00945700058 wash the vehicle from top to bottom.
soap. Use a mild car washing soap if necessary.
3. To preserve and protect, use a leather pro-
To protect your vehicle’s finish, wash it often
Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a cham- 9
and thoroughly. If desired, you may wax your
tecting agent on the genuine leather sur- ois or soft cloth. After washing the vehicle,
vehicle using a nonabrasive automobile wax.
face. carefully clean the joints and flanges of the
doors, hood, etc., where dirt is likely to
Foreign material remain.
NOTE N00945800033
 If genuine leather is wet with water, wipe it
with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mildew Industrial pollution, road tar, bird droppings, CAUTION
may grow. tree sap, insect remains, sea water and other  When washing the underside of your vehicle
 The genuine leather surface can be damaged foreign matters can damage the finish on your or the wheels, wear a pair of gloves to pro-
if brushed with a nylon or synthetic fiber vehicle. tect your hands.
brush. Generally, the longer any foreign material  If your vehicle is equipped with the rain sen-
 Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene, stays on the finish, the worse the damage. sor, place the wiper switch lever in the
alcohol, gasoline, or acid or alkaline solvents Wash your vehicle as soon as possible when- “OFF” position to deactivate the rain sensor
can discolor the genuine leather surface and ever the finish gets soiled. before washing the vehicle. Otherwise, the
should not be used. wipers will operate in the presence of water
 Genuine leather can mildew if not kept spray on the windshield and may get dam-
clean. Clean up any oil stains immediately. aged as a result.

CAUTION CAUTION NOTE

 Never spray or splash water on the electrical • If your vehicle is equipped with the rain  When the door is frozen, opening it by force
parts in the engine compartment. This may sensor, place the wiper switch lever in the may tear off or crack the rubber gasket
damage them. Be careful also when washing “OFF” position to deactivate the rain sen- installed around the door. Pour warm water
the underbody to ensure that water does not sor. to melt the ice. Be sure to thoroughly wipe
enter the engine compartment. • If your vehicle is equipped with the Ultra- off the water after opening the door. To pre-
 Avoid automatic car washers that use rotat- sonic misacceleration Mitigation System, vent freezing of the weatherstripping on the
ing brushes. These brushes may scratch the turn off the system. doors, hood, etc., treat with silicone lubri-
paint surface and make it dull. Refer to “FCM and Ultrasonic misaccelera- cant.
Scratches are more noticeable on darker col- tion Mitigation System ON/OFF switch” on
ored vehicles. page 5-122.
 Some hot water washing equipment uses Waxing
high pressure and heat to clean your vehicle.
During cold weather N00946000205
Because hot water can damage plastics parts
and seep inside your vehicle, make sure you Wax your vehicle once or twice a year, or
9 do the following when using such equip- Salt and other chemicals used on winter roads when water does not bead up on the paint.
ment: in some geographical areas can have a detri- Use a soft cloth to put a small amount of wax
• Keep the washing nozzle at least 28 inches mental effect on the vehicle underbody. You on the painted surfaces. After the wax has
(70 cm) away from the vehicle body. should flush the underbody with a high pres- dried, polish with a dry soft cloth.
• When washing around the door glass, hold sure hose every time you wash the outside of Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight.
the nozzle at a distance of more than 28 your vehicle. You should wax when the painted surfaces
inches (70 cm) and at a right angle to the Take special care to remove mud or other are cool.
glass surface.
debris which could trap and hold salt and
 Make sure to do the following when using an
moisture. CAUTION
automatic car wash, with help from either
After washing your vehicle, wipe off all  Waxes containing high abrasive compounds
this manual or the car wash operator, to
avoid damaging your vehicle: waterdrops from the rubber parts around the should not be used. These waxes remove rust
• Fold the outside rearview mirrors. doors to prevent the doors from freezing. and stain effectively from the paintwork, but
• Tape or remove the rear wiper arm assem- are harmful to the finish of the paint, because
bly. they also remove paint/clearcoat.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a roof rails, They are also harmful to other glossy sur-
check with the car wash operator before faces such as the grille, trim, moldings, etc.
using the car wash.

CAUTION Damaged paint CAUTION

 Do not use gasoline, benzine, kerosene or N00946201099  Do not let plastic parts get soiled with gaso-
paint thinners to remove road tar or other dirt Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat line, oil, brake fluids, engine oils, greases,
from the vehicle surface. paint thinner, and sulfuric acid (battery elec-
should be touched up as soon as possible with
 Do not put wax on the areas having black trolyte), as such substances will cause stains,
touch-up paint to prevent corrosion.
matte coating because it can cause uneven cracks, or discoloration.
Check body areas facing the road or the tires If any of these get on a plastic part, wipe
discoloration, patches, blurs, etc. If these get
wax on them, wipe the wax off right away carefully for damage to the paint caused by them up with a soft cloth or chamois and a
with a soft cloth and warm water. flying stones, etc. The paint code number for mild solution of soap and water. Then rinse
 On vehicles with sunroof, be careful not to your vehicle can be found on the vehicle them immediately with water.
apply any wax on the weatherstrip (black information code plate located on the front
rubber) when waxing the area around the passenger door sill.
sunroof opening.
Chrome parts
N00946400052
If stained with wax, the weatherstrip cannot
maintain a weatherproof seal with the sun- Cleaning plastic parts To prevent spots and corrosion of chrome
roof. N00946301221
parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and 9
Use a sponge or chamois to clean these parts. apply a nonabrasive automotive wax. If the
If the vehicle wax sticks to a gray or black chrome is severely damaged or pitted, use a
Polishing
rough surface of the bumper, molding or commercially available chrome polish.
N00946100046
lights, the surface may appear white in color.
If painted surfaces have been severely dam- In this case, wipe it off using lukewarm water
aged and lost their original luster and color and a soft cloth or chamois.
Aluminum wheels (if so equipped)
tone, polish the surface lightly with a fine N00946500183
polishing compound. Avoid limiting your 1. Remove dirt using a wet sponge.
polishing to the damaged surface only; polish CAUTION 2. Use a mild detergent on any dirt that can-
a somewhat wider area, moving the polishing  Do not use a scrubbing brush or other rough
not be removed easily with water.
scrubber as these may damage the plastic
cloth in one direction. After polishing, flush Rinse off the detergent after washing the
surface.
the compound from the surface and apply a wheel.
 Do not use wax containing compounds (pol-
coat of wax to regain a beautiful luster. 3. Dry the wheel thoroughly using a chamois
ishing powder) which may damage the plas-
tic surface. leather or a soft cloth.

CAUTION Cleaning the sunroof (if so

 Do not use a brush or other hard implement equipped)
on the wheels. N00946800069
 Do not use any cleaner that contains an abra-
sive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing Clean the inside of the sunroof with a soft
so could cause the coating on the wheels to cloth. Hard deposits should be wiped away
peel or become discolored or stained. with a cloth dipped in warm, neutral deter-
 Do not directly apply hot water using a steam gent solution. Wipe away the solution with a
cleaner or by any other means. sponge dipped in fresh water.
 Contact with seawater or road salt used for
de-icing can cause corrosion. Rinse off such NOTE
substances as soon as possible.
 The surface treatment on the inside of the
glass may be removed if a hard cloth or
organic solvent is used.
9 Window glass N00946600054
The window glass can usually be cleaned Engine compartment

using only a sponge and water. Glass cleaner N00947000071
can be used to remove wax, oil, grease, dead Never spray or splash water on the electrical
insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe it accessories in the engine compartment. This
dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth. puts the engine at risk of being damaged.
Do not bring the circumferential parts, the
Wiper blades plastic parts and so on into contact with sulfu-
N00946700068 ric acid (battery electrolyte) which may
Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove crack, stain or discolor them.
grease, dead insects, etc., from the wiper If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth,
blades. chamois or the like and an aqueous solution
Replace the wiper blades when they no longer of neutral detergent then immediately rinse
clean the windshield and rear window prop- the affected parts with plenty of water.
erly.

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) ....................10-2

Reporting Safety Defects ...............................................................10-2
Important facts to know in case of an accident ..............................10-4
10
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

their use, however, and may depart signifi- material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
Consumer information (For cantly from the norm due to variations in tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
vehicles sold in U.S.A.) driving habits, service practices and differ- to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-
N01047100171 ences in road characteristics and climate. sponds to a level of performance which all
This information is provided in compliance passenger car tires must meet under the Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
with the requirements of the National High- Traction AA, A, B, C
way Traffic Safety Administration, Depart- Grades B and A represent higher levels of
ment of Transportation. It provides the performance on the laboratory test wheel than
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, the minimum required by law.
purchasers and/or prospective purchasers are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent
with information on reporting safety defects. the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on WARNING
 The temperature grade for this tire is
Uniform tire quality grading specified government test surfaces of asphalt
established for a tire that is properly
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
DOT quality grades - All passenger vehicle traction performance. speed, underinflation, or excessive load-
tires must conform to Federal Safety Require- ing, either separately or in combination,
10 ments in addition to these grades. The spe- WARNING can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
cific grade rating in each grade category is  The traction grade assigned to this tire is
shown on the side wall of the tires on your based on straight-ahead braking traction
vehicle. tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction Reporting Safety Defects
characteristics.
Treadwear N01047201498
If you believe that your vehicle has a

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating Temperature A, B, C defect which could cause a crash or
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested could cause injury or death, you
under controlled conditions on a specified should immediately inform the
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B
government test course. For example, a tire
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the National Highway Traffic Safety
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
(11/2) times as well on the government course heat when tested under controlled conditions
tion to notifying Mitsubishi Motors
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of Sustained high temperature can cause the Corporation.
10-2 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects

If NHTSA receives similar com- For vehicles sold in U.S.A. To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
plaints, it may open an investigation, Canada, Inc. call 1-888-576-4878 or
and if it finds that a safety defect To contact Mitsubishi Motors North write to:
exists in a group of vehicles, it may America, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 or
order a recall and remedy campaign. Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Can-
write to: ada, Inc.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems Mitsubishi Motors North Amer- Customer Relations Department
between you, your dealer, or Mit- ica, Inc. P.O. Box 41009
subishi Motors Corporation. Customer Relations Department 4141 Dixie Road
P.O. Box 6400 Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Cypress, CA 90630-0064
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico
9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of 10
If you live in Canada, and you Caribbean, Inc.
NHTSA Headquarters
believe that your vehicle has a safety call 1-787-251-8715 or write to:
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE
West Building defect, you should immediately Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Carib-
Washington, DC 20590 notify Transport Canada, in addition bean, Inc.
to notifying Mitsubishi Motor Sales Customer Service Department
of Canada, Inc. You may write to: P.O. Box 192216
You can also obtain other informa-
tion about motor vehicle safety from Transport Canada SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
http://www.safercar.gov. 330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5 For vehicles sold in Guam
To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc.

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-3
Important facts to know in case of an accident

call (671)649-3673 or write to:  Ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts.
Important facts to know in Many times, to save money, your insur-
Triple J Enterprises, Inc. case of an accident ance company will recommend imitation
P.O. Box 6066 N01047300098 parts that do not meet the original specifi-
We hope you will never be involved in an cations of fit, finish, corrosion resistance
TAMUNING or workmanship.
GUAM 96931 accident, but there is always that potential
danger. So, please be sure to buckle up and
drive safely. Mitsubishi Motors built-in pro-
tection
For vehicles sold in Saipan In the event of an accident
The strength and integrity built into your
To contact Triple J Motors  Remain calm.
Mitsubishi vehicle is the result of a specific
call (670)234-7133 or write to:  Check for injuries. Report all injuries to
design referred to as “Energy Management”.
the police, and, if necessary, call for an
Individual body parts are designed to act as
Triple J Motors ambulance.
one unit in the event of an accident. Shock
 Record all the details of the accident. This
10 P.O. Box 500487 will provide you with accurate records of
waves are absorbed by protective panels or
SAIPAN, MP96950-0487 are channeled around the passenger compart-
the accident for discussions with your
ment. This important feature is possible
insurance company and other persons
because high tensile steel is used in
who may be acting on your behalf.
Mitsubishi panels and structural parts, some-
For vehicles sold in American thing that cannot be guaranteed by the manu-
Samoa Key information to discuss with facturers of imitation parts. All Genuine
your insurance company Mitsubishi body panels and support brackets
are designed and constructed as important
To contact Pacific Marketing Inc. protection features in the event of an acci-
 Understand your repair estimate before
call 684(699)9140 or write to: approving repairs. dent. By replacing body parts with imitations,
 Choosing the repair shop and the brands your vehicle may no longer meet original
Pacific Marketing, Inc. of parts that they use on your vehicle is equipment specifications.
P.O. Box 698 your decision.
PAGO PAGO,
AMERICAN SAMOA AS, 96799
10-4 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Remember to ask for genuine Mitsubishi
Consumer rights (For vehicles Motors parts.
sold in U.S.A.)
As a consumer requesting repair on your

vehicle, you have consumer rights. Across the
country, State Insurance Commissioners have
begun considering rules on the use of non-
OEM parts. This could mean that repair shops
will have to disclose to the consumer, when
they intend to use non-OEM parts. Since reg-
ulations are not consistent on this point,
remember you have a choice. So, if you want
genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts, you may
have to specifically request them. Make cer-
tain your insurance company understands
imitations are not to be used in the repair of 10
your vehicle. You deserve the best genuine
Mitsubishi Motors parts.
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors

parts
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts are built

with the high quality and durability standards
you expect. Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
replacements parts are your guarantee that
your vehicle will have all the technological
advantages and maintain the style and protec-
tion of a brand new Mitsubishi Motors.
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-5

Specifications
Vehicle labeling .............................................................................11-2

Vehicle dimensions ........................................................................11-4
Vehicle weights ..............................................................................11-5
Engine specifications .....................................................................11-6
Battery ............................................................................................11-6
Tires and wheels ............................................................................11-7
Capacity .........................................................................................11-7
11
Vehicle labeling
The air conditioning label is affixed on the
Vehicle labeling inside panel of the engine hood.
Chassis number
N01147401866
The chassis number is stamped on the bulk-
Keep a record of the chassis number and
head as shown in the illustration.
vehicle identification number. Such informa-
tion will assist police if your vehicle is stolen.
4 - Vehicle information code plate

The vehicle information code plate is located
on the front passenger door sill.
11
1 - Vehicle emission control information
label
The vehicle emission control information
label is affixed on the underside of the engine
hood.
2 - Vehicle identification number plate

The vehicle identification number is stamped
on the plate riveted to the left front corner of
the dashboard. It is visible from outside of the
vehicle through the windshield.
3 - Air conditioning label
11-2 Specifications
Vehicle labeling
Type 2
Engine model/serial number Tire and loading information
placard
The engine model and serial number are
N01148101613
stamped on the cylinder block as shown in
the illustrations. The tire and loading information placard is
located on the driver’s door sill.
2.4 liter models
Certification label
N01148201249
The certification label is located on the

driver’s door sill.
3.0 liter models
Type 1
11
*- Front of the vehicle
Specifications 11-3
Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle dimensions
N01147501678
Overall length 184.8 in (4,695 mm)

Overall width 71.3 in (1,810 mm)
Overall height 67.3 in (1,710 mm)
Wheel base 105.1 in (2,670 mm)
11
11-4 Specifications
Vehicle weights
Vehicle weights
N01147601998
2.4 liter models 3.0 liter models

Item
Seating capacity 5 persons 7 persons 7 persons
4,795 lb (2,175 kg),
Gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) 4,795 lb (2,175 kg) 5,005 lb (2,270 kg)
4,828 lb (2,190 kg)*1
Gross axle weight rating Front 2,535 lb (1,150 kg)
(GAWR) Rear 2,756 lb (1,250 kg)
With brake 1,500 lb (680 kg) 3,500 lb (1,588 kg)
Total trailer weight
Without brake 1,250 lb (567 kg) 1,400 lb (635 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight 827 lb (375 kg) 1,157 lb (525 kg)
Maximum roof load 110 lb (50 kg)
*1: GF8WXTXPZL2M/GF8WXTXPZL7M/GF8WXTMPZL3M
11
NOTE
 Roof load is important because it affects the vehicle capacity weight. Refer to “Loading cargo on the roof” on page 6-10.
GVWR: maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle
GAWR: maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle
Seating capacity: the maximum number of occupants
Specifications 11-5
Engine specifications
Engine specifications
N01147701511
Item 2.4 liter models 3.0 liter models

Engine model 4J12 6B31
Engine displacement 144.0 CID (2,360 cm³) 182.9 CID (2,998 cm³)
No. of cylinders and cylinder arrangement Inline-4 60° V-6
Bore 3.46 in (88.0 mm) 3.45 in (87.6 mm)
Stroke 3.82 in (97.0 mm) 3.26 in (82.9 mm)
Compression ratio 10.5
Thermostat valve opening temperature 188.6 °F (87.0 °C) 179.6 °F (82.0 °C)
Spark plugs NGK DILKR6D11G DILKR7C11
Spark plug gap .040 to .043 in (1.0 to 1.1 mm) .040 to .043 in (1.0 to 1.1 mm)
Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-2-3-4-5-6
11
Battery
N01147801310
2.4 liter models 75D23L

3.0 liter models 80D26L
Battery is a 12 volt type.
11-6 Specifications
Tires and wheels
Tires and wheels

N01147901744
Tire P215/70R16 99H P225/55R18 97H

Size 16 x 6 1/2JJ 16 x 6 1/2J 18 x 7J
Wheel PCD 4.5 in (114.3 mm)
Offset 1.5 in (38 mm)
PCD: Pitch Circle Diameter (installation holes)
NOTE
 Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details on the combination used on your vehicle.
 These tires satisfy vehicle loading conditions described in this owner’s manual.
Capacity
N01148002169 11
Item Capacity Lubricants
Fuel Front-wheel drive vehicles 16.6 gal (63 L)
Refer to “Fuel selection” on page 3-2
(approximate) All-wheel drive vehicles 15.8 gal (60 L)
2.4 liter Oil pan 4.5 qt (4.3 L)
Engine oils displaying the ILSAC certification mark (“star-
models Oil filter .32 qt (0.3 L) burst” symbol) on the container.
Engine oil
3.0 liter Oil pan 4.2 qt (4.0 L) If these oils are not available, and API classification SN can be
models used.
Oil filter .32 qt (0.3 L)
Automatic transaxle 8.7 qt (8.2 L) Refer to “Automatic transaxle fluid” on page 9-11.
Refer to “Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid” on
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) 7.2 qt (6.9 L)
page 9-11.
Specifications 11-7
Capacity
Item Capacity Lubricants
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Hypoid Gear Oil API classi-
Transfer oil .50 qt (0.47 L)
fication GL-5 SAE 80
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Hypoid Gear Oil API classi-
Differential Rear axle .42 qt (0.4 L)
fication GL-5 SAE 80
Brake As required Conforming to Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4
Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch As required Multipurpose type grease NLGI Grade 2
Engine coolant 2.4 liter models 6.3 qt (6.0 L)
{Includes .69 qt Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant
(0.65 L) in 3.0 liter models 9.5 qt (9.0 L) Premium or equivalent*
reserve tank}
Washer fluid 4.8 qt (4.5 L) —
Refer to the “Air con-
Refrigerant (air conditioning) ditioning label” on HFC-134a
page 11-2.
11
*:similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid tech-
nology
11-8 Specifications
Alphabetical index
Troubleshooting ............................. 7-47 Hose .............................................. 9-24
Numerics Automatic high beam system.............. 5-224 Pad wear alarm ............................... 5-93
12 V power outlets............................ 5-267 Parking brake ................................. 5-53
Automatic transaxle............................ 5-67
Pedal ............................................. 5-92
4-wheel drive operation ....................... 5-88 Fluid ..................................... 9-11, 11-7
Pedal free play................................ 9-21
Selector lever operation .................. 5-68
Power brakes.................................. 5-92
Selector lever positions ................... 5-71
A Sports mode................................... 5-72
Service brake.................................. 5-92
Accessory (installation) ......................... 3-6 Warning lights and buzzer ............. 5-216
Active stability control (ASC) ............ 5-100 Break-in recommendations .................... 5-3
B Bulb capacity...................................... 9-32
Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC).......
Back-up light
5-106
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-32
Air cleaner filter ................................... 9-9 Replacement .................................. 9-38 C
Air conditioner Ball joint, steering linkage seals, drive shaft California Perchlorate Materials
Dual-zone automatic climate control air boots ............................................... 9-24 Requirements ..................................... 3-7
conditioner..................................... 7-5 Capacities .......................................... 11-7
Battery .............................................. 9-13
Important air conditioning operating tips..
Charging system warning light ....... 5-217 Card holder ............................ 5-266, 5-277
7-13
Checking battery electrolyte level .... 9-13 Cargo area cover............................... 5-281
Air purifier ......................................... 7-14 Disconnection and connection ......... 9-14
Airbag ............................................... 4-34 During cold weather ....................... 9-13
Cargo loads ........................................ 6-10 12
Specification.................................. 11-6 Cargo room light............................... 5-275
All-wheel drive operation .................... 5-88
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-33
Aluminum wheels ............................... 9-43 Blind Spot Warning (BSW)................ 5-131
Catalytic converter ................................ 9-2
AM/FM radio ..................................... 7-14 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface .................... 5-240
Cautions on the handling of all-wheel drive
Anti-lock braking system..................... 5-97 Bottle holders.................................... 5-280
vehicles............................................ 5-91
Arm rest............................................. 4-10 Brake
CD player........................................... 7-14
Fluid ..................................... 9-12, 11-7
Assist grip ........................................ 5-283 Certification label ............................... 11-3
Brake assist........................................ 5-96
Audio Charging system warning light ........... 5-217
AM/FM radio ................................. 7-14 Braking
Anti-lock braking system ................ 5-97 Child restraint systems ........................ 4-27
CD player ...................................... 7-14
Braking ........................................... 6-5 Child safety locks for rear door ............ 5-37
12-1
Alphabetical index
Cleaning Dome light (front)/Reading lights ....... 5-273 Oil and oil filter....................... 9-6, 11-7
Inside of your vehicle...................... 9-40 Bulb capacity.................................. 9-33 Overheating ..................................... 8-4
Outside of your vehicle ................... 9-41 Dome light (rear)............................... 5-274 Serial number................................. 11-2
Clock................................................. 7-49 Bulb capacity.................................. 9-33 Specification .................................. 11-6
Coat hook ........................................ 5-283 Doors Engine hood ......................................... 9-3
Consumer information ........................ 10-2 Lock .............................................. 5-34 Engine switch..................................... 5-18
Power door locks ............................ 5-36 Exhaust system................................... 9-24
Continuously variable transmission (CVT)....
5-75 Driving during cold weather.................. 6-5
Fluid .................................... 9-11, 11-7 Driving precaution ............................... 6-2 F
Selector lever operation................... 5-75 Driving, alcohol and drugs .................... 6-2 Floor console box ............................. 5-277
Selector lever positions ................... 5-79
Dual-zone automatic climate control air Floor mat ............................................. 6-3
Sports mode ................................... 5-80
conditioner ........................................ 7-5
Coolant (engine) .......................... 9-8, 11-7 Fluid
Automatic transaxle fluid ....... 9-11, 11-7
Cruise control................................... 5-102
E Brake fluid............................ 9-12, 11-7
Cup holder ....................................... 5-279 Continuously variable transmission (CVT)
ECO mode switch ............................. 5-231
fluid ................................... 9-11, 11-7
Electric parking brake.......................... 5-54
D Engine coolant ........................ 9-8, 11-7
Electric power steering system (EPS) .... 5-99 Engine oil ............................... 9-6, 11-7
12 Daytime running lights
Electric rear window defogger switch.. 5-237 Rear axle oil.......................... 9-12, 11-7
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-32
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting Transfer oil ........................... 9-12, 11-7
Replacement .................................. 9-36
system) ..................................... 5-4, 5-28 Washer fluid ......................... 9-12, 11-7
Defogger (rear window) .................... 5-237
Electronically controlled 4WD system .. 5-82 Fluid capacities and lubricants ............. 11-7
Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door
Emission-control system maintenance ... 9-22 Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM)
windows) .................................. 7-8, 7-12
5-117
Digital clock Engine
Compartment................................... 9-5 Free-hand advanced security transmitter
Time setting ................................... 7-46
Coolant ................................... 9-8, 11-7 (F.A.S.T.-key) .................................. 5-13
Dimensions ........................................ 11-4
Hood............................................... 9-3 Front fog lights
Dimmer (high/low beam change) ....... 5-223 Malfunction indicator light............. 5-217 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-32
Disc brake pads .................................. 9-24 MIVEC ................................. 5-26, 5-67 Indicators..................................... 5-215
12-2
Alphabetical index
Replacement .................................. 9-36 Hazard warning lights ........................ 5-215 Inspection and maintenance following rough
Switch ......................................... 5-231 Head restraints ................................... 4-11 road operation .................................. 5-91
Front side-marker lights Headlight leveling switch ................... 5-229 Instrument cluster ............................. 5-163
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-32 Interior lights.................................... 5-273
Headlights
Replacement .................................. 9-35
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-32
Front turn signal light
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-32
Dimmer........................................ 5-223 J
Headlight flasher ........................... 5-224
Replacement .................................. 9-36 Jack ..................................................... 8-5
Replacement .......................... 9-34, 9-35
Storage ............................................ 8-5
Fuel Switch.......................................... 5-220
Filling the fuel tank........................... 3-3 Jump-starting the engine........................ 8-2
Heated steering wheel switch.............. 5-239
Fuel economy................................... 6-2
High beam indicator .......................... 5-215
Fuel hoses ...................................... 9-23
High-mounted stop light
K
Fuel selection ................................... 3-2
Tank capacity ................................. 11-7 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-32 Keyless entry system.................... 5-7, 5-30
Fuel Pump Shut-off System ................. 8-16 Hill start assist ................................... 5-95 Keys .................................................... 5-3
Fuses ................................................. 9-25 HomeLink® Wireless Control System. 5-268
Fusible links....................................... 9-25 Hood lock release mechanism and safety L
catch ............................................... 9-25 Labeling............................................. 11-2
G Horn switch ...................................... 5-239 Lane Departure Warning System (LDW) ..... 12
5-139
General maintenance........................... 9-23
General vehicle data............................ 11-4
I License plate light
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-32
If the vehicle breaks down..................... 8-2
Genuine parts ....................................... 3-7 Replacement................................... 9-39
Ignition switch ................................... 5-63
Glove compartment........................... 5-276 Liftgate .............................................. 5-38
Glove compartment light Link System ..................................... 5-239
10-4
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-33 Loading information.............................. 6-6
Indicators .................... 5-191, 5-214, 5-215
Lubricants .......................................... 11-7
H Information screen display ................. 5-192
Luggage floor box............................. 5-277
Inside rearview mirror......................... 5-57
Hazard warning flasher switch ........... 5-231 Luggage hooks ................................. 5-283
12-3
Alphabetical index
Polishing ............................................ 9-43 Replacement of light bulbs .................. 9-31
M Power brakes ...................................... 5-92 Replacing tires and wheels................... 9-19
MIVEC engine .......................... 5-26, 5-67 Power liftgate ..................................... 5-39 Reporting Safety Defects..................... 10-2
Modification of your vehicle.................. 3-5 Power outlet ..................................... 5-267
Multi Around Monitor....................... 5-154 Power windows................................... 5-49 S
Multi information display - Type 1 ..... 5-164 Puncture (Tire changing)....................... 8-6 Safe driving techniques ......................... 6-4
Multi information display - Type 2 ..... 5-183 S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control) ...... 5-85
R Seat belt............................................. 4-18
O Radiator cap ........................................ 9-9 Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor. 4-24
Octane number ..................................... 3-2 Child restraint systems .................... 4-27
Radio ................................................. 7-14
Front passenger seat belt warning light .....
Oil General information about your radio 7-50
4-23
Engine oil ...................................... 11-7 Reading lights Maintenance and inspection............. 4-34
Rear axle oil................................... 11-7 Bulb capacity.................................. 9-33 Seat belt extender ........................... 4-25
Transfer oil .................................... 11-7
Rear axle oil .............................. 9-12, 11-7 Seat belt force limitter..................... 4-27
Operation under adverse driving conditions... Seat belt pre-tensioners ................... 4-25
Rear combination lights
8-15 Seat belt use during pregnancy......... 4-25
Bulb capacity.................................. 9-32
Outside rearview mirrors ..................... 5-60 Seats.................................................... 4-2
12 Overheating ......................................... 8-4
Replacement................................... 9-37
Arm rest ........................................ 4-10
Rear Cross Traffic Alert..................... 5-136
Front seats ....................................... 4-4
Rear side-marker lights Head restraints ............................... 4-11
P Bulb capacity.................................. 9-32 Heated seat ...................................... 4-8
Parking ................................................ 6-6 Rear turn signal light Making a cargo area........................ 4-13
Parking brake ................................. 5-53 Bulb capacity.................................. 9-32 Making a flat seat ........................... 4-16
Parking brake lever stroke ................... 9-22 Replacement................................... 9-37 Seat arrangement .............................. 4-3
Rear-view camera ............................. 5-151 Seats and restraint systems ................ 4-4
Parking lights
Second row seats .............................. 4-8
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-32 Rearview mirror
Third row seats............................... 4-10
Replacement .................................. 9-36 Inside rearview mirror ..................... 5-57
Outside rearview mirrors ................. 5-60 Service brake...................................... 5-92
Parking sensors ................................ 5-147
Service precautions ............................... 9-2
12-4
Alphabetical index
Side turn-signal light Theft-alarm system............................. 5-46 How to connect a USB memory device ....
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-32 Time Setting ...................................... 7-46 5-263
Snow tires .......................................... 9-21 How to connect an iPod................. 5-264
Timing belt ........................................ 9-24
Spark plugs ........................................ 9-23 Tire ................................................... 9-15
Starting the engine ..................... 5-25, 5-66 Inflation pressure............................ 9-18 V
Steering Maintenance .................................. 9-19 Vanity mirror.................................... 5-266
Steering wheel height and reach adjustment Quality grading .............................. 10-2 Vanity mirror lights
5-57 Replacing tires and wheels .............. 9-19 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-33
Wheel lock............................ 5-24, 5-65 Rotation ........................................ 9-20
Vehicle care precautions...................... 9-39
Size (tire and wheel) ....................... 11-7
Stop lights Vehicle dimensions ............................. 11-4
Snow tires ..................................... 9-21
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-32
Tire and loading information placard 11-3 Vehicle labeling.................................. 11-2
Storage spaces .................................. 5-276 Tire chains..................................... 9-21 Vehicle preparation before driving.......... 6-4
Sun visors ........................................ 5-266 To change a tire................................ 8-6
Tread wear indicator....................... 9-20 Vehicle weights .................................. 11-5
Sunglasses holder ............................. 5-279
Tire pressure monitoring system ......... 5-142 Vents ................................................... 7-2
Sunroof.............................................. 5-51
Super-all wheel control (S-AWC) Tools................................................... 8-6
S-AWC drive mode display ............. 5-87 Storage............................................ 8-5 W
S-AWC drive mode-selector ............ 5-86 Towing.............................................. 8-14 Warning lights .................................. 5-216 12
S-AWC operation display ................ 5-87 Trailer towing .................................... 6-11 Washer
Supplemental Restraint System ............ 4-34 Transfer oil ................................ 9-12, 11-7 Fluid..................................... 9-12, 11-7
How the Supplemental Restraint System Rear window washer ..................... 5-236
Turn signal light Switch ......................................... 5-235
works .......................................... 4-37
Indicators ..................................... 5-215
Maintenance service........................ 4-49 Washing............................................. 9-41
Lever ........................................... 5-230
Waxing .............................................. 9-42
T U Weights ............................................. 11-5
Tail light Wheel
Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-32 Covers ........................................... 8-13
5-127
Tank capacity ..................................... 11-7 Specification .................................. 11-7
USB input terminal............................ 5-263
12-5
Alphabetical index
Wiper
Rear window wiper....................... 5-236
Switch ......................................... 5-232
Wiper blades .................................. 9-22
Wiper deicer switch .......................... 5-237
12
12-6
How to calculate your gasoline mileage

Mitsubishi-Outlander 2017 EN US 886ecff30d PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Mitsubishi-Outlander 2017 EN US 886ecff30d PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mitsubishi-Outlander 2017 EN US 886ecff30d PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OWNER’S MANUAL

Instruments and controls

1 Instruments and controls

Combination headlights and dimmer switch P.5-220

Instruments and controls

Audio (if so equipped) P.7-14 Hazard warning flasher switch 1

Front passenger seat belt warning light

Camera switch (if so equipped)

12 V power outlet P.5-267

Fuel tank filler door release lever Cup holder P.5-279

Instruments and controls

1 Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag

Glove compartment P.5-276

Parking brake lever type Electric parking brake type

Selector lever Selector lever

Electric remote-controlled outside rearview mirrors switch P.5-61

Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor P.4-24 Power window switch

Dome light (rear) P.5-274

Inside rearview mirror P.5-57

Sunglasses holder (if so equipped)

Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - side airbag

Second row seat P.4-8

1 Dome light (front)/Reading Downlight

Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - curtain

Assist grips P.5-283

Cargo area cover (if so equipped)

Head restraints P.4-11

Arm rest P.4-10

Luggage floor box P.5-277

Sensor (if so equipped) [for Forward Collision Mitigation System

Outside rearview mirrors P.5-60

Halogen headlights type LED headlights type

Front side-marker lights Front side-marker lights

Keyless entry system (if so equipped) P.5-7, 5-30

Rear-view camera (if so equipped)

Stop lights P.5-220, 9-32, 9-37

Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

Warning lights Do this Ref. Page

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Quick index 2-1

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

 Park your vehicle in a safe place.

2-2 Quick index

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

SRS warning light

Quick index 2-3

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

2-4 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

If this problem occurs...

Problem Do this Ref. Page

Will not turn from “ACC” to “OFF” or “LOCK”.

The engine does not start when

The F.A.S.T.-key does not oper-

Quick index 2-5

If this problem occurs...